B&R AUTOMATION - ACOPOS Inverter - P74 PDF

ACOPOSinverter P74
User's Manual
Version: 1.29 (August 2014)
Model no.: MAACPIP74-GER
All information contained in this manual is current as of its creation/publication. We reserve the right to change the
contents of this manual without warning. The information contained herein is believed to be accurate as of the date
of publication; however, Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. makes no warranty, expressed or
implied, with regard to the products or documentation contained within this manual. In addition, Bernecker + Rainer
Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. shall not be liable for incidental or consequential damages in connection with or
arising from the furnishing, performance or use of the product(s) in this document. Software names, hardware
names and trademarks are registered by their respective companies.
Table of contents
Chapter 1 Installation Manual..................................................................................... 7
1 Safety Information.............................................................................................................................................. 7
1.1 Important Information................................................................................................................................... 7
2 Introduction.........................................................................................................................................................8
2.1 Equipment overview..................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.1 Product line............................................................................................................................................. 8
2.1.2 Four sizes................................................................................................................................................8
3 Before you begin................................................................................................................................................9
3.1 Safety instructions........................................................................................................................................ 9
4 Steps for setting up......................................................................................................................................... 11
5 Technical data..................................................................................................................................................12
5.1 Mechanical Data......................................................................................................................................... 12
5.1.1 Size A - Dimensions and weights........................................................................................................ 12
5.1.2 Size B - Dimensions and weights........................................................................................................ 13
5.1.3 Size C - Dimensions and weights........................................................................................................ 14
5.1.4 Size C with EMC plate - Dimensions and weights...............................................................................15
5.1.5 Size D - Dimensions and weights........................................................................................................ 16
5.1.6 Size D with EMC plate - Dimensions and weights...............................................................................17
5.2 Electrical data............................................................................................................................................. 17
5.2.1 8I74S200018.01P-1, 8I74S200037.01P-1, 8I74S200055.01P-1.......................................................... 18
5.2.2 8I74S200075.01P-1, 8I74S200110.01P-1, 8I74S200150.01P-1, 8I74S200220.01P-1.........................21
5.2.3 8I74T400037.01P-1, 8I74T400055.01P-1, 8I74T400075.01P-1, 8I74T400110.01P-1......................... 24
5.2.4 8I74T400150.01P-1, 8I74T400220.01P-1, 8I74T400300.01P-1, 8I74T400400.01P-1......................... 27
5.2.5 8I74T400550.01P-1, 8I74T400750.01P-1, 8I74T401100.01P-1, 8I74T401500.01P-1......................... 30
5.3 Connection diagrams..................................................................................................................................33
5.3.1 Single or three-phase power supply Connection diagram with input contactor................................. 33
5.3.2 Single or three-phase power supply Connection diagram with switch disconnecter......................... 33
5.3.3 Connection diagram with safety relay.................................................................................................. 34
5.3.4 Connection diagram without safety relay............................................................................................. 35
6 Installation........................................................................................................................................................ 36
6.1 Drive installation......................................................................................................................................... 36
6.1.1 Mounting and temperature conditions.................................................................................................. 36
6.1.2 Mounting procedure.............................................................................................................................. 36
6.1.3 Derating curves..................................................................................................................................... 36
6.2 Wiring recommendations............................................................................................................................ 37
6.3 Input installation..........................................................................................................................................39
6.3.1 Access to the power terminals Sizes A and B.................................................................................. 39
6.3.2 Access to the power terminals Sizes C and D................................................................................. 40
6.3.3 Access to the braking resistance terminals All sizes........................................................................ 40
6.4 Output installation....................................................................................................................................... 41
6.4.1 Installation of the output plug-and-socket connection and EMC plate................................................. 41
6.4.2 Functions of the power terminals......................................................................................................... 42
6.4.3 Arrangement and characteristics of the power terminals..................................................................... 43
6.4.4 EMC plate cable topology.....................................................................................................................45
6.5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)......................................................................................................... 46
6.5.1 Principles and precautions....................................................................................................................46
6.5.2 Operation on an IT system...................................................................................................................47
6.6 Installation of the control components....................................................................................................... 48
6.6.1 Access to the control terminals............................................................................................................ 48
6.6.2 Connection diagram of the control system in sink mode..................................................................... 48
6.6.3 Arrangement of the control terminals................................................................................................... 49
6.6.4 Characteristics and functions of the control terminals..........................................................................49
6.6.5 RJ45 communication port..................................................................................................................... 50
6.6.6 Configuration as sink/ source (SW1)....................................................................................................50
6.7 POWERLINK interface (8I0IF108.400-1)................................................................................................... 52
6.7.1 Status LEDs.......................................................................................................................................... 54
6.7.2 POWERLINK station number................................................................................................................55
ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29
6.7.3 POWERLINK interface (X1 and X2).....................................................................................................55

6.7.4 Firmware................................................................................................................................................55
6.8 Maintenance............................................................................................................................................... 56
6.8.1 Warranty limitation................................................................................................................................ 56
6.8.2 Fan replacement................................................................................................................................... 57
6.9 Power grid short-circuit capacity at the drive supply point and short-circuit protection of the power feeder....................................................................................................................................................................... 58
6.9.1 Recommended fuse ratings for UL and CSA requirements................................................................. 58
Chapter 2 Programming Manual...............................................................................59
1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................................59
1.1 Commissioning........................................................................................................................................... 59
1.1.1 Steps for setting up.............................................................................................................................. 59
1.1.2 Preliminary recommendations...............................................................................................................60
1.2 Overview..................................................................................................................................................... 61
1.2.1 Factory configuration.............................................................................................................................61
1.2.2 Application functions............................................................................................................................. 62
1.2.3 Basic functions...................................................................................................................................... 64
1.2.4 Optional graphic display terminal......................................................................................................... 64
1.2.5 First power-up of the drive................................................................................................................... 67
1.2.6 Structure of parameter tables............................................................................................................... 70
1.2.7 Search for a parameter in this document.............................................................................................71
1.2.8 Description of the HMI.......................................................................................................................... 72
1.2.9 Menu structure...................................................................................................................................... 73
1.3 Operation with SDC....................................................................................................................................74
1.3.1 Timing behavior.....................................................................................................................................74
1.3.2 PLC - Open components...................................................................................................................... 74
1.3.3 Quick stop/ Emergency stop.................................................................................................................74
1.3.4 Acceleration and deceleration ramps................................................................................................... 74
1.3.5 Total delay (t_total) and Predict time (t_predict).................................................................................. 74
1.3.6 Operation of the ACOPOSinverter P74 in rpm or Hertz.......................................................................75
1.3.7 TUN parameter..................................................................................................................................... 77
2 Programming.................................................................................................................................................... 78
2.1 Reference Mode (rEF)................................................................................................................................78
2.1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................78
2.1.2 Organization tree...................................................................................................................................78
2.1.3 Menu......................................................................................................................................................79
2.2 Monitoring mode (MOn)............................................................................................................................. 80
2.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................80
2.2.3 Menu......................................................................................................................................................82
2.3 Configuration Mode (ConF)........................................................................................................................98
2.3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................98
2.3.3 Menu....................................................................................................................................................100
2.4 Interface (ItF)............................................................................................................................................ 259
2.4.1 Access level (LAC)............................................................................................................................. 259
2.4.2 Menu overview.................................................................................................................................... 260
2.4.3 Language (LnG).................................................................................................................................. 261
2.4.4 Monitor configuration (MCF)............................................................................................................... 262
2.4.5 Display config. (dCF).......................................................................................................................... 266
2.5 Load/ Save as (trA).................................................................................................................................. 272
2.6 Access code (Cod-)..................................................................................................................................274
3 Maintenance and diagnostics........................................................................................................................ 276
3.1 Maintenance............................................................................................................................................. 276
3.2 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 277
Table of contents
Table of contents
Table of contents
Chapter 3 Common DC bus.................................................................................... 284
1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................284
2 Before you begin - Safety information...........................................................................................................285
2.1 Basic information...................................................................................................................................... 285
2.2 Voltage measurement at the DC bus...................................................................................................... 286
2.3 Standards and terminology...................................................................................................................... 286
3 Technical data................................................................................................................................................287
3.1 Drive amplifier data.................................................................................................................................. 287
3.1.1 Permissible device types for a shared/common DC bus....................................................................287
3.1.2 ACOPOSinverter P74 Data DC Bus...................................................................................................288
3.2 Fuses........................................................................................................................................................ 292
3.2.1 Mains fuse...........................................................................................................................................292
3.2.2 Fuse for DC Bus.................................................................................................................................292
3.3 Cable for DC bus..................................................................................................................................... 293
3.4 Braking resistors....................................................................................................................................... 294
3.4.1 External brake resistors (Acces.)........................................................................................................294
3.5 Line filter................................................................................................................................................... 294
3.6 Mains choke............................................................................................................................................. 294
4 Project development...................................................................................................................................... 295
4.1 Special notes: EMC - Electromagnetic Compatibility...............................................................................295
4.2 Mounting spacing..................................................................................................................................... 295
4.3 Energy equation:...................................................................................................................................... 295
4.3.1 Energy acceptance............................................................................................................................. 296
4.4 Prerequisites for the common DC-Bus.................................................................................................... 297
4.5 Structure of a common DC-Bus...............................................................................................................298
4.5.1 Common network securities................................................................................................................298
4.5.2 Separate mains fuse...........................................................................................................................300
4.5.3 DC-supply via one drive amplifier.......................................................................................................302
4.5.4 DC-supply via DC power supply unit..................................................................................................304
4.6 Accessories for common DC bus............................................................................................................ 305
4.6.1 Braking resistors................................................................................................................................. 305
4.6.2 Line choke...........................................................................................................................................309
4.6.3 Cable for DC bus................................................................................................................................310
5 Installation...................................................................................................................................................... 311
5.1 Cable for DC bus..................................................................................................................................... 312
5.2 Wire the DC bus.......................................................................................................................................313
5.2.1 Connect DC bus................................................................................................................................. 315
5.3 Check installation..................................................................................................................................... 315
6 Commissioning............................................................................................................................................... 316
6.1 Steps for the commissioning.................................................................................................................... 316
7 Accessories and spare parts......................................................................................................................... 317
7.1 DC bus accessories................................................................................................................................. 317
7.2 DC fuses...................................................................................................................................................317
7.3 External braking resistors.........................................................................................................................317
8 Units and conversion tables.......................................................................................................................... 318
8.1 Length....................................................................................................................................................... 318
8.2 Mass......................................................................................................................................................... 318
8.3 Force.........................................................................................................................................................318
8.4 Power........................................................................................................................................................318
8.5 Rotation.....................................................................................................................................................318
8.6 Torque....................................................................................................................................................... 318
8.7 Moment of inertia......................................................................................................................................318
8.8 Temperature............................................................................................................................................. 319
8.9 Conductor cross section...........................................................................................................................319
Chapter 4 Integrated safety functions................................................................... 320
1 Preparation..................................................................................................................................................... 320
1.1 Safety instructions.................................................................................................................................... 320

1.2 Personnel qualifications and usage......................................................................................................... 322
2 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................323
2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 323
2.2 Standards and terminology...................................................................................................................... 324
2.3 General information.................................................................................................................................. 325
3 Description......................................................................................................................................................327
3.1 STO: Safe Torque Off...............................................................................................................................327
3.2 SS1: Safe Stop 1..................................................................................................................................... 329
3.3 SLS: Safely Limited Speed...................................................................................................................... 331
4 Formulas for calculating safety parameters...................................................................................................335
4.1 SLS type 1................................................................................................................................................335
4.2 SLS type 2 and type 3............................................................................................................................. 337
4.3 SS1........................................................................................................................................................... 340
5 Incompatibility with the safety functions........................................................................................................ 342
5.1 Limitations.................................................................................................................................................342
6 Safety monitoring........................................................................................................................................... 346
6.1 Status of the safety functions...................................................................................................................346
6.2 Specific HMI............................................................................................................................................. 346
6.3 Inverter response when fault detected.....................................................................................................347
7 Technical data................................................................................................................................................348
7.1 Logic input for safety function.................................................................................................................. 348
7.2 Safety function options............................................................................................................................. 349
7.2.1 Recommended circuit breaker for IEC applications........................................................................... 352
7.3 Debounce and response time.................................................................................................................. 353
7.4 Multiple certified architectures..................................................................................................................354
7.4.1 Multi-drive with safety relay - Scenario 1........................................................................................... 355
7.4.2 Multi-drive with safety relay - Scenario 2........................................................................................... 356
7.4.3 Multi-drive without safety relay........................................................................................................... 357
7.4.4 Process control system - Scenario 1..................................................................................................358
7.4.5 Process control system - Scenario 2..................................................................................................360
7.4.6 Safety in accordance with IEC 61508 and IEC 60204-1 - Scenario 1................................................362
7.4.7 Safety in accordance with IEC 61508 and IEC 60204-1 - Scenario 2................................................363
8 Installation...................................................................................................................................................... 364
8.1 ACPi Parameter Tool................................................................................................................................364
8.1.1 Installation........................................................................................................................................... 364
8.1.2 Configuring the ACPi Parameter Tool................................................................................................ 364
8.1.3 Creating a project............................................................................................................................... 365
8.1.4 Establishing drive communication.......................................................................................................369
8.2 "Configure safety" window........................................................................................................................374
8.3 Safety reset.............................................................................................................................................. 379
8.4 Password management............................................................................................................................ 380
8.5 Safety function monitoring and status......................................................................................................381
9 Device signature............................................................................................................................................ 382
9.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 382
9.2 Acceptance testing procedure..................................................................................................................383
9.3 Acceptance report.................................................................................................................................... 388
10 Service and maintenance............................................................................................................................ 389
10.1 Maintenance........................................................................................................................................... 389
Chapter 5 Accessories............................................................................................ 390

1 ACOPOSinverter P74 - additional EMC filter................................................................................................ 392
1.1 Dimensions of EMC filter......................................................................................................................... 393
2 ACOPOSinverter P74 - Smoothing coils dimensions....................................................................................397
2.1 Smoothing coils....................................................................................................................................... 398
3 ACOPOSinverter P74 Brake resistors........................................................................................................... 400
3.1 Dimensions of brake resistors..................................................................................................................401
Table of contents
Table of contents
Table of contents
3.2 Recommendations for installation............................................................................................................ 402
Chapter 6 Register description...............................................................................403
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
Installation Manual Safety Information
Chapter 1 Installation Manual

1 Safety Information
1.1 Important Information
Note:
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before
trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following warning messages may appear throughout this
documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
When this symbol appears in a safety label for danger or warning, it indicates an electrical hazard that could result
in injury if the directions are not followed. This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
Danger!
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious bodily injury.
Warning!
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death,
serious bodily injury and/ or material damage.
Caution!
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in bodily injury
and/ or material damage.
Note:
The word "drive" as used in this manual refers to the controller portion of the adjustable speed drive
as defined by NEC.
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by B&R for any consequences arising out of the use of this product.
Installation Manual Introduction
2 Introduction
2.1 Equipment overview
2.1.1 Product line
The ACOPOSinverter P74 family of products encompasses four drive sizes (A, B, C and D) and is ideally suited
for integration in compact, powerful drive solutions with high performance requirements.
2.1.2 Four sizes
Size A
8I74S200018.01P-1, 8I74S200037.01P-1, 8I74S200055.01P-1,
8I74S200075.01P-1, 8I74T400037.01P-1, 8I74T400055.01P-1,
8I74T400075.01P-1, 8I74T400110.01P-1, 8I74T400150.01P-1
240 V single phase

from 0.18 kW to 0.75 kW
(1/4 HP to 1 HP)
400 V three-phase
0.37 to 1.5 kW
(1/2 to 2 HP)
Size C
8I74T400550.01P-1, 8I74T400750.01P-1
400 V three-phase
5.5 and 7.5 kW
(71/2 and 10 HP)
Size B
8I74S200110.01P-1, 8I74S200150.01P-1, 8I74S200220.01P-1,
8I74T400220.01P-1, 8I74T400300.01P-1, 8I74T400400.01P-1
240 V single phase

1.1 to 2.2 kW
(11/2 to 5 HP)
400 V three-phase
2.2 to 4 kW
(3 to 5 HP)
Size D
8I74T401100.01P-1, 8I74T401500.01P-1
400 V three-phase
11 to 15 kW
(15 and 20 HP)
Installation Manual Before you begin

Chapter 1
Installation Manual
3 Before you begin

3.1 Safety instructions
Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure on this drive.
Danger!
Hazard of electric shock, explosion, or arc flash
Read and understand this manual before installing and operating the P74 drive. Installation,
adjustment, repair, and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.
The user is responsible for compliance with all international and national electrical code requirements with respect to grounding of all equipment.
Many parts of this variable speed drive, including the printed circuit boards, operate at the line
voltage. DO NOT TOUCH. Use only electrically insulated tools.
DO NOT touch unshielded components or bolted connections on terminal blocks while connected to the power supply.
DO NOT short across terminals PA/+ and PC/- or across the DC bus capacitors.
Before servicing the drive:
Disconnect all power supplies, including the power supply to the control section if applicable.
Place a DO NOT TURN ON label on all power disconnects.
Lock all power disconnects in the open position.
WAIT 15 MINUTES to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge.
Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA/+ and PC/ terminals to ensure that
the voltage is less than 42 V.
If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely, contact your local Bernecker and
Rainer representative. Do not repair or operate the drive.
Mount and close all covers before reconnecting the power supply or starting and stopping the
drive.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.
Danger!
Unintentional operation of devices
Read and understand this manual before installing and operating the P74 drive.
Any changes made to the parameter settings must be performed by qualified personnel.
Warning!
Damaged equipment
Do not operate or install any drive or drive accessory that appears damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Installation Manual Before you begin
Warning!
Control failure
The designer of any wiring scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control channels and, for certain critical functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a channel failure. Examples for critical control functions: Emergency stop and stop due to
excessive overrun.
Separate or redundant control channels must be provided for critical control functions.
System control channels may include communication links. The consequences of unexpected
transfer delays or failures must be taken into consideration.1)
Caution!
IIncompatible line voltage
Before turning on and configuring the drive, ensure that the line voltage is compatible with the supply
voltage shown on the drive nameplate. The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Caution!
Risk of power loss due to capacitor wear
Lengthy storage periods (over 2 years) can result in capacitor power loss.
Before using the product, proceed as follows:
Use a variable AC power supply that is connected between L1 and L2 (also for model numbers
8I74T40xxxx.01P-1).
Increase AC supply voltage to have:
25% of design voltage for 30 min

Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.
1)
For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control
and to NEMA ICS 7.1 (latest edition), Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems.
10
Installation Manual Steps for setting up

Chapter 1
Installation Manual
4 Steps for setting up
INSTALLATION
1. Delivery contents check
Check that the part number printed on the label is the same as that on your purchase
order.
Remove the ACOPOSinverter P74 from its packaging and check that it has not been
damaged in transit.
Steps 1 through 4
must be carried out
in a non-energized
state.
2. Line voltage compatibility check
Check that the supply voltage is compatible with the voltage range of the
drive (see "Electrical data" on page 17)
3. Vertical installation of the drive
Mount the drive in accordance with the instructions in this document (see "Drive installation" on page 36).
4. Wiring the drive

(see "Wiring recommendations" on page 37)
After making sure that the power is off, connect the line
supply and the ground wire.
Connect the motor, ensuring that its connections correspond to the voltage.
Connect the control part.
11
Installation Manual Technical data
5 Technical data
5.1 Mechanical Data
5.1.1 Size A - Dimensions and weights
224
mm
8.82
in.
152
5.98
86
3.39
45
1.77
245
9.65
232
9.13
14
0.55
7
0.28
4x 5.5
4x 0.22
8
29
0.31 1.14
8
0.31
(2x 10)
(2x 0.4 )
68
2.67
255
10.04
215
8.46
258 270
10.16 10.63
325
12.80
137
5.39
96
3.78
129
5.09
317
12.48
5
0.20
Weights
Reference
8I74S00018.01P-1
8I74S00037.01P-1, 8I74S0055.01P-1,
8I74S0075.01P-1
8I74T400037.01P-1
8I74T400055.01P-1, 8I74T400075.01P-1
8I74T400110.01P-1, 8I74T400150.01P-1
12
Weight (kg) (lb)

1.590 (3.50)
1.646 (3.63)
1.618 (3.57)
1.715 (3.78)
1.705 (3.76)

Chapter 1
Installation Manual
5.1.2 Size B - Dimensions and weights

224
8.82
mm
in.
152
6
101
4
60
2.36
15
0.6
9
0.35
245
9.64
234
9.21
14
0.59
42
1.65
9
0.35
4x 5.5
4x 0.22
7
0.28
(2x 10)
(2x 0.4 )
68
2.6
255
10.04
215
8.46
258
10.16
137
5.39
5
0.2
270
10.63
317
12.48
96
3.78
129.3
5.1
325
12.80
9
0.35
Weights
Reference
8I74S200110.01P-1, 8I74S200150.01P-1
8I74S200220.01P-1
8I74T400220.01P-1
8I74T400300.01P-1
8I74T400400.01P-1
Weight (kg) (lb)

1.952 (4.30)
2.066 (4.55)
2.320 (5.11)
2.122 (4.68)
2.176 (4.80)
13

5.1.3 Size C - Dimensions and weights
mm
in.
206
8.1
150
5.9
10
5 0.4
0.2
10
0.4
130
5.12
25
1
53
2.1
190
7.48
210
8.27
10
0.4
10
0.4
130
5.12
3
0.12
232
9.23
87
3.4
181
7.12
192
7.56
220
8.66
87
3.4
232
9.13
Weights
Reference
8I74T400550.01P-1, 8I74T400750.01P-1
14
Weight (kg) (lb)

4.20 (9.26)

Chapter 1
Installation Manual
5.1.4 Size C with EMC plate - Dimensions and weights
150
5.91
308
12.13
87
3.43
115
4.53
Weights
Reference
8I74T400550.01P-1, 8I74T400750.01P-1
Weight (kg) (lb)

4.41 (9.72)
15

5.1.5 Size D - Dimensions and weights
mm
in.
180
7.08
7
0.27
10
0.4
10
0.4
160
6.29
80
3.15
180
7.09
142
5.59
295
11.61
160
6.3
10
0.4
10
0.4
206
8.1
181
7.12
53
2.08
245
9.65
330
13
192
7.56
310
12.2
106
4.17
232
9.13
Weights
Reference
8I74T401100.01P-1, 8I74T401500.01P-1
16
Weight (kg) (lb)

6.750 (14.88)

Chapter 1
Installation Manual
5.1.6 Size D with EMC plate - Dimensions and weights
178
7.01
404
15.91
106
4.17
112
4.41
123
4.84
Weights
Reference
8I74T401100.01P-1, 8I84T401500.01P-1
Weight (kg) (lb)

7.00 (15.40)
5.2 Electrical data
17

5.2.1 8I74S200018.01P-1, 8I74S200037.01P-1, 8I74S200055.01P-1
Product ID
Motor power
Listed on nameplate
Power mains connection
Mains input voltage
Frequency
Apparent power (at 240 VAC)
Max. assumed short circuit current (lsc)
(short circuit current at connection point)
Mains current
At 200 VAC
At 240 VAC
Power loss at nominal load and nominal clock frequency
Integrated EMC filter
Line-conducted and radiated emissions
With integrated filter
Motor cable length in accordance with IEC/EN
61800-3
Cat. C1 environment 1 (public mains)
61800-3
61800-3
Cat. C3 environment 2 (industrial mains)
With add-on filter
With add-on filter
61800-3
61800-3
61800-3
Cat. C3 environment 2 (industrial mains)
Motor connection
Nominal output current
Derating of the continuous output current depending on the ambient temperature
At the nominal clock frequency (4 kHz)
Other clock frequencies
Derating of the continuous output current depending on the installation altitude
Starting at 1000 m above sea level
Max. transient current for 60 s
Output frequency range
Nominal clock frequency
Clock frequency
Min.
Max.
Braking torque
With braking resistor
Without braking resistor (typical value)
Max. motor cable length
Shielded cable
Non-shielded cable
Motor closed loop control profiles
Induction motor
Synchronous motor
Main protective functions on the inverter
Brake chopper
Integrated dynamic brake transistors
Operating ratio for dynamic brake transistors
Min. resistance value (external)
24 VDC supply
Input voltage
8I74S200018.01P-1
8I74S200037.01P-1
8I74S200055.01P-1
0.18 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.7 kVA
3.4 A 1)
2.8 A 1)
25 W
1x 200 VAC -15% to 240 VAC +10%

50 to 60 Hz 5%
1.2 kVA
1 kA
6 A 1)
5 A 1)
38 W
1.6 kVA
7.9 A 1)
6.7 A 1)
42 W
Yes 2)
10 m 3)
10 m 3)
8I0FS009.200-1
20 m 3)
50 m 3)
50 m 3)
1.5 A 4)
3.3 A 4)
3.7 A 4)
No derating (up to 50C)

The derating curves are included in the installation instructions, which
can be downloaded from the homepage (www.br-automation.com).
2.3 A
2.5 A
1%, per 100 m

5.0A
5.5 A
0.1 to 599 Hz
4 kHz
5.6 A
6.1 A
2 kHz
16 kHz
Up to 170% of the rated motor torque
TBD
50 m
100 m
Flux vector control without an encoder,
Voltage/frequency ratio - U/f characteristic curve (2 or 5 points),
Pump/fan profile (quadratic characteristic curve Kn2),
Energy saving profile (especially for ventilation)
Vector control without speed feedback
Thermal protection against the power stage overheating
Protection against: Short circuits between motor phases, overcurrent between output phases
and ground, overvoltages on the DC bus, exceeding the limit for rotary speed. Safety function
for: Overvoltage and undervoltage on the mains supply, mains phase failure on a 3-phase supply
Yes
TBD
40
24 VDC (-15% / +20%)
Table 1: 8I74S200018.01P-1, 8I74S200037.01P-1, 8I74S200055.01P-1 - Technical data

18

8I74S200018.01P-1
8I74S200037.01P-1
Max. 1.1 A
8I74S200055.01P-1
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
Product ID
Current
Available internal power supplies
Output voltage 24 VDC
Max. output current at 24 VDC
Digital inputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Input circuit
Electrical isolation
Input - ACOPOSinverter
Input - Input
Sampling time
Input impedance
Digital input 5
Max. input frequency
Safety input - STO (Safe Torque Off)
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Input impedance
Switching threshold
Low
High
Input - Input
Input circuit
Sampling time
Analog inputs
Quantity
Input - Input
Input
Voltage
Current
Resolution
Sampling time
Input impedance
Voltage
Current
Digital outputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Output circuit
Sampling time
Max. current
Max. voltage
Relay outputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Design
Relay 1
Relay 2
Output - ACOPOSinverter
Output - Output
Response time (max.)
Analog outputs
Quantity
Output
Output - Output
Max. load impedance
Voltage
Current
Update time
Resolution
Interfaces
Type
24 VDC (-15% / +20%)

100 mA
10 VDC (-0% / +10%)
10 mA
6 5)
24 VDC (max. 30 V)
Sink or source
Yes
No
8 ms 0.7 ms
3.5 k
20 kHz
1
24 VDC
1.5 k
<2 V
>17 V
Yes
No
Sink
4 ms
3
No
Yes
0 to 10 V, 10 V
0 to 20 mA (or 4 to 20 mA)
10-bit
2 ms
30 k
250
1
24 VDC
Sink or source
2 ms
100 mA
30 VDC
2
30 VDC / 250 VAC
1 change-over contact
1 normally open contact
Yes
No
2 ms
1
0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
Yes
No
470
800
2 ms
10-bit
POWERLINK and CANopen

19

Product ID
Operating conditions
EN 60529 protection
Relative humidity in accordance with IEC
60068-2-3
Maximum installation altitude
Max. degree of pollution in accordance with IEC/EN
61800-5-1
Environmental conditions in accordance with IEC
60721-3-3
Operating position
Environmental conditions
Temperature
Operation
Storage
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions 6)
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
8I74S200018.01P-1
8I74S200037.01P-1
8I74S200055.01P-1
IP20
5 to 95%, non-condensing
No dripping water
Up to 2000 m
2 (non-conductive pollution)
Class 3C3 and 3S3
Vertical installation +/10%
-10 to 50C without derating

50 to 60C with derating
-25 to 70C
45 mm
317 mm
245 mm
1.59 kg
1.646 kg

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
20
Typical value for 4-pin motor and a max. clock frequency of 4 kHz, without line choke for the max. assumed short circuit current (lsc).
Inverter supplied with an integrated Category C2 EMC filter. This filter cannot be turned off.
The selection table for the filters specifies the maximum length of the shielded cables between motors and variable frequency drives. These maximum cable
lengths only serve as a reference point since they depend on the capacity of the motors and the cables being used. The total length should be taken into
consideration when motors are connected in parallel. These values apply at a rated clock frequency of 4 kHz.
These values are valid for a rated clock frequency of 4 kHz, for use during continuous operation. The clock frequency can be set from 2 to 16 kHz. Above
4 kHz, reduce the rated drive current. The motor current is not permitted to exceed this value.
1 logic input can be programmed as a 20 kbps pulse input. 1 logic input can be configured as an input for a PTC sensor using a switch (SW2). Trigger
resistance 3 k, reset value 1.8 k, short circuit protection <50 .
With shield plate

Chapter 1
Installation Manual
5.2.2 8I74S200075.01P-1, 8I74S200110.01P-1, 8I74S200150.01P-1, 8I74S200220.01P-1

Product ID
8I74S200075.01P-1
8I74S200110.01P-1
8I74S200150.01P-1
8I74S200220.01P-1
Motor power
Listed on nameplate
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
Mains input voltage
1x 200 VAC -15% to 240 VAC +10%
Frequency
50 to 60 Hz 5%
2.0 kVA
2.8 kVA
3.6 kVA
4.8 kVA
Max. assumed short circuit current
1 kA
(lsc)
(short circuit current at connection
point)
Mains current
At 200 VAC
10.1 A 1)
13.6 A 1)
17.6 A 1)
23.9 A 1)
At 240 VAC
8.5 A 1)
11.5 A 1)
14.8 A 1)
20.1 A 1)
Power loss at nominal load and nomi51 W
64 W
81 W
102 W
nal clock frequency
Yes 2)
Motor cable length in accordance
with IEC/EN 61800-3
Cat. C1 environment 1 (public
mains)
10 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
10 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
Cat. C3 environment 2 (industrial
mains)
With add-on filter
8I0FS009.200-1
8I0FS016.200-1
8I0FS022.200-1
With add-on filter
20 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
50 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
50 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
Motor connection
4.8 A 4)
6.9 A 4)
8.0 A 4)
11 A 4)
At the nominal clock frequency (4
kHz)
1%, per 100 m
7.2 A
10.4 A
12 A
16.5 A
7.9 A
11.4 A
13.2 A
18.2 A
0.1 to 599 Hz
4 kHz
Clock frequency
Min.
2 kHz
Max.
16 kHz
Braking torque
Without braking resistor (typical valTBD
ue)
Shielded cable
50 m
Non-shielded cable
100 m
Table 2: 8I74S200075.01P-1, 8I74S200110.01P-1, 8I74S200150.01P-1, 8I74S200220.01P-1 - Technical data
21

Product ID
Induction motor
Synchronous motor
Brake chopper
24 VDC supply
Input voltage
Current
Digital inputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Input circuit
Input - Input
Sampling time
Input impedance
Digital input 5
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Input impedance
Switching threshold
Low
High
Input - Input
Input circuit
Sampling time
Analog inputs
Quantity
Input - Input
Input
Voltage
Current
Resolution
Sampling time
Input impedance
Voltage
Current
Digital outputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Output circuit
Sampling time
Max. current
Max. voltage
Relay outputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Design
Relay 1
Relay 2
8I74S200075.01P-1
8I74S200110.01P-1
8I74S200150.01P-1
8I74S200220.01P-1

Protection against: Short circuits between motor phases, overcurrent between output phases and ground, overvoltages on the DC bus, exceeding the limit for rotary speed. Safety function
Yes
TBD
40
27
25
24 VDC (-15% / +20%)

Max. 1.1 A
24 VDC (-15% / +20%)
100 mA
10 VDC (-0% / +10%)
10 mA
6 5)
24 VDC (max. 30 V)
Sink or source
Yes
No
8 ms 0.7 ms
3.5 k
20 kHz
1
24 VDC
1.5 k
<2 V
>17 V
Yes
No
Sink
4 ms
3
No
Yes
0 to 10 V, 10 V
0 to 20 mA (or 4 to 20 mA)
10-bit
2 ms
30 k
250
1
24 VDC
Sink or source
2 ms
100 mA
30 VDC
2
30 VDC / 250 VAC

22

8I74S200075.01P-1
Storage
Dimensions 6)
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
8I74S200110.01P-1
8I74S200150.01P-1
8I74S200220.01P-1
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
Product ID
Output - Output
Analog outputs
Quantity
Output
Output - Output
Max. load impedance
Voltage
Current
Update time
Resolution
Interfaces
Type
EN 60529 protection
Relative humidity in accordance with
IEC 60068-2-3
Max. degree of pollution in accordance
with IEC/EN 61800-5-1
Environmental conditions in accordance with IEC 60721-3-3
Operating position
Temperature
Operation
Yes
No
2 ms
1
0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
Yes
No
470
800
2 ms
10-bit
IP20
No dripping water
Up to 2000 m
Class 3C3 and 3S3

-25 to 70C
45 mm
1.646 kg
60 mm
317 mm
245 mm
1.952 kg
2.066 kg

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
With shield plate
23

5.2.3 8I74T400037.01P-1, 8I74T400055.01P-1, 8I74T400075.01P-1, 8I74T400110.01P-1
Product ID
8I74T400037.01P-1
8I74T400055.01P-1
8I74T400075.01P-1
8I74T400110.01P-1
Motor power
Listed on nameplate
0.37 kW
5.5 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
Mains input voltage
3x 380 VAC -15% to 500 VAC +10%
Frequency
50 to 60 Hz 5%
1.4 kVA
1.9 kVA
2.3 kVA
3.3 kVA
5 kA
(lsc)
point)
Mains current
At 380 VAC
2.1 A 1)
2.8 A 1)
3.6 A 1)
5.0A 1)
At 500 VAC
1.6 A 1)
2.2 A 1)
2.7 A 1)
3.8 A 1)
31 W
37 W
50 W
nal clock frequency
Yes 2)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
5 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
5 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
With add-on filter
8I0FT015.200-1
With add-on filter
20 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
50 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
50 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
Motor connection
1.5 A 4)
1.9 A 4)
2.3 A 4)
3.0 A 4)
kHz)
1%, per 100 m
2.3 A
2.9 A
3.5 A
4.5 A
2.5 A
3.1 A
3.8 A
5.0A
0.1 to 599 Hz
4 kHz
Clock frequency
Min.
2 kHz
Max.
16 kHz
Braking torque
ue)
Shielded cable
50 m
Non-shielded cable
100 m
Table 3: 8I74T400037.01P-1, 8I74T400055.01P-1, 8I74T400075.01P-1, 8I74T400110.01P-1 - Technical data
24

8I74T400037.01P-1
Synchronous motor
Brake chopper
24 VDC supply
Input voltage
Current
Digital inputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Input circuit
Input - Input
Sampling time
Input impedance
Digital input 5
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Input impedance
Switching threshold
Low
High
Input - Input
Input circuit
Sampling time
Analog inputs
Quantity
Input - Input
Input
Voltage
Current
Resolution
Sampling time
Input impedance
Voltage
Current
Digital outputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Output circuit
Sampling time
Max. current
Max. voltage
Relay outputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Design
Relay 1
Relay 2
8I74T400055.01P-1
8I74T400075.01P-1
8I74T400110.01P-1
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
Product ID
Induction motor

Yes
TBD
80
54
24 VDC (-15% / +20%)
Max. 1.1 A
24 VDC (-15% / +20%)
100 mA
10 VDC (-0% / +10%)
10 mA
6 5)
24 VDC (max. 30 V)
Sink or source
Yes
No
8 ms 0.7 ms
3.5 k
20 kHz
1
24 VDC
1.5 k
<2 V
>17 V
Yes
No
Sink
4 ms
3
No
Yes
0 to 10 V, 10 V
0 to 20 mA (or 4 to 20 mA)
10-bit
2 ms
30 k
250
1
24 VDC
Sink or source
2 ms
100 mA
30 VDC
2
30 VDC / 250 VAC

25

Product ID
Output - Output
Analog outputs
Quantity
Output
Output - Output
Max. load impedance
Voltage
Current
Update time
Resolution
Interfaces
Type
EN 60529 protection
IEC 60068-2-3
Operating position
Temperature
Operation
Storage
Dimensions 6)
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
8I74T400037.01P-1
8I74T400055.01P-1
8I74T400075.01P-1
8I74T400110.01P-1
Yes
No
2 ms
1
0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
Yes
No
470
800
2 ms
10-bit
IP20
No dripping water
Up to 2000 m
Class 3C3 and 3S3

-25 to 70C
1.618 kg
45 mm
317 mm
245 mm
1.715 kg
1.705 kg

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
26
With shield plate

Chapter 1
Installation Manual
5.2.4 8I74T400150.01P-1, 8I74T400220.01P-1, 8I74T400300.01P-1, 8I74T400400.01P-1

Product ID
8I74T400150.01P-1
8I74T400220.01P-1
8I74T400300.01P-1
8I74T400400.01P-1
Motor power
Listed on nameplate
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3 kW
4 kW
Mains input voltage
3x 380 VAC -15% to 500 VAC +10%
Frequency
50 to 60 Hz 5%
4.2 kVA
5.7 kVA
7.3 kVA
9.1 kVA
5 kA
(lsc)
point)
Mains current
At 380 VAC
6.5 A 1)
8.7 A 1)
11.1 A 1)
13.7 A 1)
At 500 VAC
4.9 A 1)
6.6 A 1)
8.4 A 1)
10.5 A 1)
78 W
100 W
125 W
nal clock frequency
Yes 2)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
5 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
5 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
With add-on filter
8I0FT015.200-1
8I0FT025.200-1
With add-on filter
20 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
50 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
50 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
Motor connection
4.1 A 4)
5.5 A 4)
7.1 A 4)
9.5 A 4)
kHz)
1%, per 100 m
6.2 A
8.3 A
10.7 A
14.3 A
6.8 A
9.0 A
11.7 A
15.7 A
0.1 to 599 Hz
4 kHz
Clock frequency
Min.
2 kHz
Max.
16 kHz
Braking torque
ue)
Shielded cable
50 m
Non-shielded cable
100 m
27

Product ID
Induction motor
Synchronous motor
Brake chopper
24 VDC supply
Input voltage
Current
Digital inputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Input circuit
Input - Input
Sampling time
Input impedance
Digital input 5
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Input impedance
Switching threshold
Low
High
Input - Input
Input circuit
Sampling time
Analog inputs
Quantity
Input - Input
Input
Voltage
Current
Resolution
Sampling time
Input impedance
Voltage
Current
Digital outputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Output circuit
Sampling time
Max. current
Max. voltage
Relay outputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Design
Relay 1
Relay 2
8I74T400150.01P-1
8I74T400220.01P-1
8I74T400300.01P-1
8I74T400400.01P-1

Yes
TBD
54
36
24 VDC (-15% / +20%)
Max. 1.1 A
24 VDC (-15% / +20%)
100 mA
10 VDC (-0% / +10%)
10 mA
6 5)
24 VDC (max. 30 V)
Sink or source
Yes
No
8 ms 0.7 ms
3.5 k
20 kHz
1
24 VDC
1.5 k
<2 V
>17 V
Yes
No
Sink
4 ms
3
No
Yes
0 to 10 V, 10 V
0 to 20 mA (or 4 to 20 mA)
10-bit
2 ms
30 k
250
1
24 VDC
Sink or source
2 ms
100 mA
30 VDC
2
30 VDC / 250 VAC

28

8I74T400150.01P-1
Storage
Dimensions 6)
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
8I74T400220.01P-1
8I74T400300.01P-1
8I74T400400.01P-1
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
Product ID
Output - Output
Analog outputs
Quantity
Output
Output - Output
Max. load impedance
Voltage
Current
Update time
Resolution
Interfaces
Type
EN 60529 protection
IEC 60068-2-3
Operating position
Temperature
Operation
Yes
No
2 ms
1
0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
Yes
No
470
800
2 ms
10-bit
IP20
No dripping water
Up to 2000 m
Class 3C3 and 3S3

-25 to 70C
45 mm
60 mm
317 mm
245 mm
1.705 kg
2.320 kg
2.122 kg
2.176 kg

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
With shield plate
29

5.2.5 8I74T400550.01P-1, 8I74T400750.01P-1, 8I74T401100.01P-1, 8I74T401500.01P-1
Product ID
8I74T400550.01P-1
8I74T400750.01P-1
8I74T401100.01P-1
8I74T401500.01P-1
Motor power
Listed on nameplate
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
Mains input voltage
3x 380 VAC -15% to 500 VAC +10%
Frequency
50 to 60 Hz 5%
12.6 kVA
16.2 kVA
22.2 kVA
28.8 kVA
22 kA
(lsc)
point)
Mains current
At 380 VAC
20.7 A 1)
26.5 A 1)
36.6 A 1)
47.3 A 1)
At 500 VAC
14.5 A 1)
18.7 A 1)
25.6 A 1)
33.3 A 1)
263 W
403 W
480 W
nal clock frequency
Yes 2)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
5 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
5 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
With add-on filter
8I0FT047.200-1
8I0FT049.200-1
With add-on filter
20 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
50 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
50 m 3)
with IEC/EN 61800-3
mains)
Motor connection
14.3 A 4)
17.0 A 4)
27.7 A 4)
33.0 A 4)
kHz)
1%, per 100 m
21.5 A
25.5 A
41.6 A
49.5 A
23.6 A
28 A
45.7 A
54.5 A
0.1 to 599 Hz
4 kHz
Clock frequency
Min.
2 kHz
Max.
16 kHz
Braking torque
ue)
Shielded cable
50 m
Non-shielded cable
100 m
30

8I74T400550.01P-1
Synchronous motor
Brake chopper
24 VDC supply
Input voltage
Current
Digital inputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Input circuit
Input - Input
Sampling time
Input impedance
Digital input 5
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Input impedance
Switching threshold
Low
High
Input - Input
Input circuit
Sampling time
Analog inputs
Quantity
Input - Input
Input
Voltage
Current
Resolution
Sampling time
Input impedance
Voltage
Current
Digital outputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Output circuit
Sampling time
Max. current
Max. voltage
Relay outputs
Quantity
Nominal voltage
Design
Relay 1
Relay 2
8I74T400750.01P-1
8I74T401100.01P-1
8I74T401500.01P-1
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
Product ID
Induction motor

Yes
TBD
27
16
24 VDC (-15% / +20%)
Max. 1.1 A
24 VDC (-15% / +20%)
100 mA
10 VDC (-0% / +10%)
10 mA
6 5)
24 VDC (max. 30 V)
Sink or source
Yes
No
8 ms 0.7 ms
3.5 k
20 kHz
1
24 VDC
1.5 k
<2 V
>17 V
Yes
No
Sink
4 ms
3
No
Yes
0 to 10 V, 10 V
0 to 20 mA (or 4 to 20 mA)
10-bit
2 ms
30 k
250
1
24 VDC
Sink or source
2 ms
100 mA
30 VDC
2
30 VDC / 250 VAC

31

Product ID
Output - Output
Analog outputs
Quantity
Output
Output - Output
Max. load impedance
Voltage
Current
Update time
Resolution
Interfaces
Type
EN 60529 protection
IEC 60068-2-3
Operating position
Temperature
Operation
Storage
Dimensions 6)
Width
Height
Height without shield plate
Depth
Weight
8I74T400550.01P-1
8I74T400750.01P-1
8I74T401100.01P-1
8I74T401500.01P-1
Yes
No
2 ms
1
0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
Yes
No
470
800
2 ms
10-bit
IP20
No dripping water
Up to 2000 m
Class 3C3 and 3S3

-25 to 70C
150 mm
308 mm
232 mm
180 mm
404 mm
330 mm
232 mm
4.20 kg
6.750 kg

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
32
With shield plate
5.3 Connection diagrams

5.3.1 Single or three-phase power supply Connection diagram with input contactor
Connection diagrams conforming to standards EN 954-1 category 1 and IEC/EN 61508 capacity SIL1, stopping
category 0 in accordance with standard IEC/EN 60204-1.
- Q2
- S2
- Q3
- T1
- S1
- KM1
A2
A1
- Q2
- KM1
R1A
R1C
- KM1
(1)
P24
STO
R2A
R2C
PA/+
R1B
PB
PC/-
R1A
R1C
T / L3
W / T3
PBe
S / L2
W1
R / L1
U / T1
V1
U1
V / T2
(2)
A1
M
3~
5.3.2 Single or three-phase power supply Connection diagram with switch disconnecter
(1)
P24
STO
R2C
R2A
PA/+
R1B
PC/-
R1C
PB
PBe
R1A
T / L3
W / T3
V / T2
U / T1
R / L1
S / L2
(2)
A1
W1
V1
U1
Q1
M
3~
(1)
(2)
Line choke (if used)

Fault relay contacts, for remote signaling of drive status
33
Chapter 1
Installation Manual

5.3.3 Connection diagram with safety relay
The following connection diagram is suitable for use with machines with a short freewheel stop time (machines
with low inertia or high resistive torque).
When the emergency stop is activated, the drive power supply is cut immediately and the motor stops in freewheel,
according to category 0 of standard IEC/EN 60204-1.
A contact on the Preventa XPS AC module must be inserted in the brake control circuit to engage the module
safely when the STO (safe torque off) safety function is activated.
F1
L1(+)
N(-)
S2
S1
ESC
A2
A1
Y1
Y2
Logic
13
23
33
Y43
14
24
34
Y44
K1
K2
48 V, 115 V, 230 V
A2
K1
PE
K2
(1)
P24
LI2
LI1
PA/+
R1B
PC/-
PB
R1A
R1C
W1
PBe
W / T3
T / L3
S / L2
R / L1
V / T2
V1
U1
U / T1
A1
STO
(2)
(3)
3~
(1)
(2)
(3)

The shielding must be grounded!
The STO safety function integrated into the product can be used to implement an emergency stop (IEC 60204-1)
for category 0 stops. With an approved emergency stop module, it is also possible to implement category 1 stops.
STO function
The STO safety function is activated via two redundant inputs (A1 and A2 of the safety relay). The circuits of
the two inputs must be separate so that two channels are always available. The switching process must occur
simultaneously for both inputs (offset < 1 s).
The power stage is disabled and an error message is generated. The motor can no longer generate torque and
coasts down without braking. The error message must be reset with a "Fault reset" before restarting.
The power stage is disabled and an error message is generated if only one of the two inputs is switched off or if
the time offset is too great. This error message can only be reset by switching off the product.
34
5.3.4 Connection diagram without safety relay

The following connection diagram is suitable for use with machines with a short freewheel stop time (machines
with low inertia or high resistive torque).
When the emergency stop is activated, the drive power supply is cut immediately and the motor stops in freewheel,
according to category 0 of standard IEC/EN 60204-1.
(1)
P24
R2C
R2A
P A /+
R1B
PC/-
R1C
PB
R1A
PBe
T / L3
W / T3
S / L2
V / T2
W1
R / L1
U / T1
U1
V1
A1
ST O
(2)
(3)
M
3
(1)
(2)
(3)

The shielding must be grounded!
The STO safety function integrated into the product can be used to implement an emergency stop (IEC 60204-1)
for category 0 stops.
35
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
Installation Manual Installation
6 Installation
6.1 Drive installation
Caution!
Risk of damage to drive
Follow the installation instructions in this document carefully.
6.1.1 Mounting and temperature conditions
Minimum value corresponding to heat conditions. For sizes A and B, a clearance of 150 mm (5.9 in.) is recommended to relieve strain on the grounding connection.
Install the drive vertically at 10.
Do not install the drive near heat sources.
Leave sufficient clearance so that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to
the top of the drive.
Leave at least 10 mm (0.39 in.) clearance in front of the drive.
Washers should be used with all mounting fasteners.
6.1.2 Mounting procedure
This drive is designed for operation at an ambient air temperature of 50 C (122 F), and for continuous operation
at a switching frequency of 4 kHz.
When operating in higher temperatures (up to 60 C (140 F)) or operating continuously at a switching frequency
higher than 4 kHz, then the nominal drive current should be reduced according to the derating curves.
If the temperature rises dramatically while the drive is operating at a switching frequency higher than 4 kHz, the
drive will automatically reduce the rate.
Size A and B drives can also be equipped with an optional GV2 circuit breaker.
6.1.3 Derating curves
Derating curves for the drive current (In) as a function of temperature and switching frequency.
8I74S200xxx.01P-1
In = 100 %
40C (104F)
50C (122F)
90 %
60C (140F)
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
2 kHz
36
4 kHz
8 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
Switching frequency
In = 100 %
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
8I74T40xxxx.01P-1
40C (104F)
50C (122F)
90 %
60C (140F)
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
2 kHz
4 kHz
8 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
Switching frequency
6.2 Wiring recommendations
Danger!
Risk of electric shock
To avoid overheating and contact interruptions, use the cable sizes and starting torques specified in this document when making connections.
The network connection must not be made with a multi-conductor cable with no terminal.
The output cables and braking resistance cables for sizes A and B must not have more than
10 mm (0.39 in.) of insulation stripped.
Perform a tensile test to ensure that the terminal screws are properly tightened.
Power and circuit protection
The drive must be grounded to conform with the regulations concerning high leakage currents (over 3.5 mA).
Where local and national codes require upstream protection by means of a residual current device, you must use a
"type A" device for single-phase drives and a "type B" device for three-phase drives as defined in the IEC Standard
60755.
Choose a suitable model incorporating:
High frequency current filtering
A time delay which prevents tripping caused by the load from stray capacitance on power-up. The time delay
is not possible for 30 mA devices. In this case, choose devices with immunity against nuisance tripping.
If the installation includes several drives, provide one "residual current device" per drive.
Keep the power cables separate from low-voltage signal cables in the installation (proximity switches, PLCs, measuring apparatus, video, telephone).
If you are using cables longer than 50 m (164 ft) between the drive and the motor, add output filters (see catalog
for more information).
Control
Keep control circuits and power circuits separate. For control and reference conductors, we recommend using
shielded twisted cables with a pitch of between 25 and 50 mm (1 and 2 in.) at each end.
Equipment grounding
Ground the drive according to local and national code requirements. A minimum wire size of 10 mm (6 AWG) may
be required to meet standards limiting leakage current.
37
Danger!
The drive panel must be properly grounded before power is applied.
Use the provided ground connecting point as shown in the figure.
Warning!
Protection against over current
Over current protective devices must be properly coordinated.
The Canadian Electrical Code and the National Electrical Code (USA) require branch circuit
protection. Use the fuses recommended in this manual.
Do not connect the drive to a power supply whose short-circuit capacity exceeds the maximum
assumed line supply lk listed in this manual.
Caution!
The drive will be damaged if input line voltage is applied to the output terminals (U/T1,V/T2,W/
T3).
Check the power connections before energizing the drive.
If replacing one drive with another, verify that the new drive's electrical requirements comply
with the wiring instructions in this manual.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage!
NO
YES
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
38
Ensure that the resistance of the ground is 1 ohm or

less.
If several drives are being grounded, each drive must
be linked directly to the grounding connection (as
shown alongside).
Do not loop ground cables in, and do not connect them
in series.

Chapter 1
Installation Manual
6.3 Input installation

6.3.1 Access to the power terminals Sizes A and B
Danger!
Before switching on the power supply, reattach all wire terminals.
The power terminals are located on the top of the unit.
The terminals for the motor and braking resistance are located on the bottom of the unit. Power terminal arrangement and parameters can be found "Arrangement and characteristics of the power terminals" on page 43 .
To access the input terminals (1), pull out the wire terminals by hand and fold them up. (2) Insert the wires into the
terminals, and connect the ground wire with the grounding screw. (3) Tighten the terminal screws. (4) Reattach the
wire terminals. The terminals for output and braking resistance are directly accessible at the plug-in connection.
See detailed connector installation and cable layout under installation of output plug-in connection and EMC plate.
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
1
3
39

6.3.2 Access to the power terminals Sizes C and D
The power terminals and terminals for the motor and braking resistance are located on the bottom of the unit.
Remove the cover (1) to access the terminals. Push in the safety tab with a screwdriver (see below). Now remove
the terminal cover (3).
6.3.3 Access to the braking resistance terminals All sizes

Access to the braking resistance terminals is guarded by breakable plastic components. Remove these safety
components with a screwdriver.
40
6.4 Output installation

6.4.1 Installation of the output plug-and-socket connection and EMC plate
Size A and B drives
The EMC plate, the pluggable output connection terminal, and the braking resistance terminal are inseparably
linked to one another.
The input terminals are located on the top of the unit. see "Access to the power terminals Sizes A and B" on page
39. Arrangement and characteristics of the power terminals see "Arrangement and characteristics of the power
terminals" on page 43.
(1) Plug in the output power terminal. (2) Insert the retaining and grounding screws (Shape: Plus or minus HS
screwdriver type 2). (3) Tighten the screws to a torque of between 1 and 1.5 Nm (8.9 to 13.3 lb.in). For cabling
purposes, it is immaterial whether the connection is mounted to the drive or not.
The cabling process is simplest when done in the following order: Brakes (1), motor and ground (2). Finally, mount
the bridge for installing the control wires (3). Detailed cable topology see "EMC plate cable topology" on page 45.
3
2
1
Size C drives
Attach the EMC plate included in your delivery packet to the underside of the drive using three M5 HS type 2 screws.
Mounting screws
41
Chapter 1
Installation Manual

Size D drives
Attach the EMC plate included in your delivery packet to the underside of the drive using two M5 HS type 2 screws.
Mounting screws
t
t
6.4.2 Functions of the power terminals

Terminal
R/L1 - S/L2/N
Function
Ground terminal
Supply voltage
R/L1 - S/L2 - T/L3
Supply voltage
PB
PBe
PA/+
PC/U/T1 - V/T2 - W/T3
Output to braking resistor (1)

Output to braking resistor (+ polarity) (1)
DC bus (+) polarity
DC bus (-) polarity
Motor feeder
(1)
42
For Acopos Inverter P74

All ratings
8I74S200018.01P-1,
8I74S200037.01P-1,
8I74S200055.01P-1,
8I74S200075.01P-1,
8I74S200110.01P-1,
8I74S200150.01P-1,
8I74S200220.01P-1
8I74T400037.01P-1,
8I74T400055.01P-1,
8I74T400075.01P-1,
8I74T400110.01P-1,
8I74T400150.01P-1,
8I74T400220.01P-1,
8I74T400300.01P-1,
8I74T400400.01P-1,
8I74T400550.01P-1,
8I74T400750.01P-1,
8I74T401100.01P-1,
8I74T401500.01P-1
All ratings
All ratings
Sizes C and D
Sizes C and D
All ratings
You can find additional information about braking resistor options at www.br-automation.com

Chapter 1
Installation Manual
6.4.3 Arrangement and characteristics of the power terminals

Size A
R/ L1
S / L2
T / L3
PBe PB
U/ T1 V/ T2 W/ T 3
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Size A
8I74S200018.01P-1,
8I74S200037.01P-1,
8I74S200055.01P-1,
8I74S200075.01P-1,
8I74T400037.01P-1,
8I74T400055.01P-1,
8I74T400075.01P-1,
8I74T400110.01P-1,
8I74T400150.01P-1
Input power
Wire cross-section/gauge
Min.
Max.
mm (AWG)
mm (AWG)
1.5
4
(14)
(10)
Fastening torque
Rating
Nm (lb, in)
0.6
(5.3)
Output power and braking resistance

Min.
Max.
mm (AWG)
mm (AWG)
1.5
2.5
(14)
(12)
Fastening torque
Min. to Max.
Nm (lb, in)
0.7 to 0.8
(6.2 to 7.1)
Size B
R/ L1
S / L2
T / L3
PBe
PB
U/ T 1 V / T 2 W / T 3
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Size B
8I74T400220.01P-1,
8I74T400300.01P-1
8I74S200110.01P-1,
8I74T400400.01P-1
8I74S200150.01P-1
8I74S200220.01P-1
Input power
Min.
Max.
mm (AWG)
mm (AWG)
1.5
4
(14)
(10)
2.5
4
(12)
(10)
2.5
4
(10)
(10)
4
4
(10v
(10)
Fastening torque
Rating
Nm (lb, in)
0.6
(5.3)
0.6
(5.3)
0.6
(5.3)
0.6
(5.3)

Min.
Max.
mm (AWG)
mm (AWG)
1.5
2.5
(14)
(12)
1.5
2.5
(14)
(12)
1.5
2.5
(14)
(12)
1.5
2.5
(14)
(12)
Fastening torque
Min. to Max.
Nm (lb, in)
0.7 to 0.8
(6.2 to 7.1)
0.7 to 0.8
(6.2 to 7.1)
0.7 to 0.8
(6.2 to 7.1)
0.7 to 0.8
(6.2 to 7.1)
43

Size C
R/ L1 S / L2 T / L3
PB
Size C
8I74T400550.01P-1
8I74T400750.01P-1
Input power
Min.
Max
mm (AWG)
mm (AWG)
4
16
(10)
(6)
6
16
(8)
(6)
PBe PA/+ PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Fastening torque
Min. to Max.
Nm (lb,in)
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)

Min.
Max.
mm (AWG)
mm (AWG)
2.5
16
(12)
(6)
2.5
16
(10)
(6)
Fastening torque
Min. to Max.
Nm (lb,in)
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)

Min.
Max.
mm (AWG)
mm (AWG)
6
16
(8)
(6)
6
16
(8)
(6)
Fastening torque
Min. to Max.
Nm (lb,in)
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
Size D
R / L1 S / L 2 T / L 3
PB PBe PA/+ PC/- U/T 1 V/T2 W/T3
Size D
8I74T401100.01P-1
8I74T401500.01P-1
44
Input power
Min.
Max.
mm (AWG)
mm (AWG)
10
16
(8)
(6)
16
16
(6)
(6)
Fastening torque
Min. to Max.
Nm (lb,in)
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
Sizes A and B
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
6.4.4 EMC plate cable topology

Size C
Size D
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
ACOPOSinverter P74.
Grounded steel EMC plate.
Shielded cable for connecting the braking resistor (if used). This shielding must be continuous.
EMC plate for the control system
Shielded control conductors and conductors to the input-side STO safety function.
Holes for mounting the EMC plate for the control system.
Shielded cable for motor connection, with shielding connected to ground at both ends. This shielding must be continuous, and intermediate terminals must
be located on the EMC plate.
Non-shielded wires for relay contact output.
Protective ground connection.
Unshielded drive power supply cable.
45
6.5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Note:
Despite the equipotent bonding between the drive, motor, and cable shielding, each product must still
be individually grounded.
6.5.1 Principles and precautions
Grounds between the drive, motor, and cable shielding must have high frequency equipotentiality.
When a shielded cable is used for the motor, it must be a four-wire cable so that one of the wires can be
used for the ground between the motor and the actuator. The size/gauge of the ground conductor must
be chosen in compliance with local and national code requirements. The shield can then be grounded at
both ends. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part or all of the shielding length, provided there is
no break in continuity.
When a shielded cable is used for the motor, it must be a four-wire cable so that one of the wires can be
used for the ground between the motor and the actuator. The size/gauge of the ground conductor must
be chosen in compliance with local and national code requirements. The shield can then be grounded at
both ends. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part or all of the shielding length, provided there is
no break in continuity.
When using shielded cable for control signals, both ends of the shielding can be grounded, so long as the
cable is connecting drives that are close together and have equal ground potential. If the cable is connected
to equipment that may have a different ground potential, then ground the shielding at one end only to
prevent large equalizing currents from flowing in the shield. The shielding on the ungrounded end may
be tied to ground with a capacitor (for example: 10 nF, 100 V or higher) in order to provide a path for the
higher frequency noise. The control circuits must be kept separate from the power circuits. For control and
reference conductors, we recommend using shielded twisted cables with a pitch of between 25 and 50 mm
(1 and 2 in.) at each end. Install the control circuits at a distance from the power circuits.
Ensure maximum separation between the power cable (line supply) and the motor cable.
The motor cables must be at least 0.5 m (20 in.) long.
Do not use overvoltage protectors or compensation capacitors on the drive output.
If using an additional input filter, it should be mounted as close as possible to the drive and connected
directly to the line supply via an unshielded cable. Connection to the drive is via the filter output cable.
To find tips for installing the EMC plate and for complying with the IEC 61800-3 standard, refer to the section
entitled Installing the EMC plates.
Danger!
Do not expose cable shielding except where connected to ground at the metal cable glands and
underneath the grounding clamps.
Ensure that there is no risk of the shielding coming into contact with live components.
46
Mains impedance
Caution!
Risk of reduced service life and degraded EMC performance
Do not connect the drive to a low-impedance mains supply.
The maximum assumed input short-circuit current must not exceed the value see "Recommended fuse ratings for UL and CSA requirements" on page 58 in the table.
An installation with a supply above this value requires additional inductance.
6.5.2 Operation on an IT system
IT network: Isolated or high-impedance grounded neutral conductor. Use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non-linear loads (e.g., type XM200 or equivalent).
Danger!
Read the safety notes in the chapter entitled "Before you begin" completely and carefully before performing the procedure explained in this section.
ACOPOSinverter P74 units have a built-in EMC filter. As a result they exhibit leakage current to ground. If the
leakage current creates compatibility problems with your installation (residual current device or the like), then you
can reduce the leakage current by opening the IT jumper as shown below. In this configuration EMC compliance
is not guaranteed.
For sizes A and B, the IT jumper is located on the top of the product.
For sizes C and D, the jumper is located on the front side behind the protective cover that guards the power
terminals (on the left, next to the input power terminals).
Normal (filter connected)
IT system (filter disconnected)
Sizes A and B
IT system (filter disconnected)
Normal (filter connected)
Sizes C and D
47
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
6.6 Installation of the control components

6.6.1 Access to the control terminals
Access to the control terminals is identical for all products. Simply open the cover as shown in the following example.
All screws are M3 slotted screws with a diameter of 3.8 mm (0.15 in).
R2A
Sink
Source ext.
Source int.
SW1
R2C
STO
LI6
SW2
P24
PTC
LO+
LOLI6
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
R1A
R1B
R1C
COM
AO1
COM
AI3
AI2
10V
AI1
COM
+24
Danger!
6.6.2 Connection diagram of the control system in sink mode
x-y mA
-10V..10Vdc
(1)
COM
AI1
10V
AI2
+24
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
COM
A01
AI3
L0-
P24
L0+
COM
R1C
STO
R1A
R2C
R2A
A1
R1B
(1) Reference potentiometer SZ1RV1202 (2.2 k) or comparable (10 k max.)

48
P 74 control terminals
R1A, R1B, R1C, R2A, R2C

All other terminals
(1)
Minimum (1)
Maximum
mm (AWG)
mm (AWG)
0.75 (18)
1.5 (16)
0.5 (20)
1.5 (16)
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
6.6.3 Arrangement of the control terminals

Fastening torque
Nm (lb,in)
0.5 (4.4)
0.5 (4.4)
The value in bold corresponds to the minimum wire gauge to permit secureness
6.6.4 Characteristics and functions of the control terminals

Terminal
R1A
R1B
R1C
Functionality
NO contact of the relay
NC contact of the relay
Common point contact of programmable relay R1
Type
I/O
I/O
I/O
COM
AO1
Analog I/O common

Voltage or current analog output (collector)
I/O
A
Electrical characteristics
Min. switching capacity: 5 mA for 24 VDC
Maximum switching power with a resistive load: (cos = 1) 3 A
for 250 V AC and 4 A for 30 V DC
Maximum switching power with an inductive load: (cos = 0.4
and L/R = 7 ms): 2 A for 250 V AC and 30 V DC
Refresh time: 2 ms
Operating life: 100,000 operations at maximum switching power
0V
Analog output 0 to 10 V, minimum load impedance 470 or analog output 0 to 20 mA, maximum load impedance 800
COM
AI3
Analog I/O common

Analog input as current
I/O
E
0V
Analog input 0-20 mA (or 4-20 mA, X-20 mA, 20-Y mA). X and Y can be
programmed to values from 0 to 20 mA. Impedance 250
AI2
Analog input as voltage
AI1
COM
+24
R2A
R2C
Power supply for the reference potentiometer
Analog input as voltage
Analog I/O common

Logic input power supply
Normally-open (NO) contact of programmable relay R2
I/O
A
I/O
Impedance 250
Resolution: 10 bits
Precision 0.5% at 50/60 Hz and 25 C 10 C, 0.2% at 50/60
Hz and -10 to 60 C with = 60 C
Linearity 0.2% (max. 0.5%), of the maximum value
Sampling time 2 ms
Bipolar analog input 0 10 V (maximum voltage 30 V) The polarity

(+ or -) of the voltage at AI2 influences the reference direction and
thereby the direction of rotation.
10 V
Resolution: 10 bits
Precision 1% at 50/60Hz and 25 C 10 C, 2% at 50/60Hz
and -10 to +60 C
Linearity 0.3%
Sampling time 2 ms
Impedance 30
Resolution: 10 bits
Precision: 0.5% at 50/60 Hz and 25 C 10 C, 0.2% at 50/60
Scan time: 2 ms
Tolerance: 0..+10%
Current: 10 mA max.
Impedance: 30 k
Resolution: 10-bit converter
Precision: 0.5% at 50/60 Hz and 25 C 10 C, 0.2% at 50/60
Scan time: 2 ms
Tolerance: -15..+20%
Current: 100 mA
+10 VDC
Analog input: 0 + 10 V
0V
+24 VDC
Min. switching capacity: 5 mA for 24 VDC

Maximum switching power with a resistive load: (cos = 1) 5 A
for 250 V AC and 30 V DC
Maximum switching power with an inductive load: (cos = 0.4
and L/R = 7 ms): 2 A for 250 V AC and 30 V DC
Refresh time: 2 ms
Operating life:
STO
STO (safe torque off) safety function input
24 VDC
100,000 operations at maximum switching power

1,000,000 operations with a current of 500 mA and
an inductive load of 58 VAC or 30 VDC
Impedance 1.5 k
State 0 if < 2 V, state 1 if > 17 V (sink mode)
Response time 4 ms
49

Terminal
P24
Functionality
Type
External power supply for control circuit / Internal power supply I/O
for STO
Electrical characteristics
+24 VDC
LO+
LO-
Logic output
Output with open collector, configurable via SW1 as sink or source
LI6
LI5
Logic inputs
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
Logic inputs
Tolerance: -15..+20%
Current: Max. 1.1 A
Refresh time: 2 ms
Maximum current: 100 mA
Maximum voltage: 30 V
LI5 can be programmed as an impulse input with a rate of 20

kbps (impulses per second)
LI6 can be used as a PTC via SW2
Trigger threshold 3 k, reset threshold 1.8 k
Short-circuit detection threshold < 50
+ 24 V power supply (max. 30 V)

Impedance 3.5 k
State 0 if < 5 V, state 1 if > 11 V (sink mode)
State 0 if > 19 V, state 1 if < 13 V (source mode)
Response time 8 ms with stop
When programming as logic inputs, the characteristics are identical to

those of LI1 to LI4
Four programmable logic inputs, configurable via SW1 as sink or source
6.6.5 RJ45 communication port

Connection options are as follows:
PC with configuration software for expanded safety functions
Graphic display terminal
Note:
Check the RJ45 cable for damage before connecting to the product. Connecting a damaged cable can
result in a control system power failure.
6.6.6 Configuration as sink/ source (SW1)
Danger!
When SW1 is set to Source Int or Source Ext, the COM terminal must not be connected to a
ground or protective ground. Otherwise, there is the risk of unintentional operation of the device
due to an insulation fault.
Prevent accidental grounding of logic inputs configured for source logic. Accidental grounding
can result in unintentional activation of drive functions.
Protect the signal conductors against damage that could result in unintentional conductor
grounding.
Follow NFPA 79 and EN 60204 guidelines for proper control circuit grounding practices.
Caution!
Danger of injury!
Change the switch setting with a screwdriver.
The logic input switch (SW1) is used to adapt the operation of the logic inputs to the technology of the programmable
controller outputs. Open the control terminal panel to access SW1. SW1 is located left of the control terminals, see
"Access to the control terminals" on page 48.
When using SPS outputs with PNP transistors, set the switch to "Sink" (factory setting).
When using SPS outputs with NPN transistors, set the switch to Source Int or Source Ext.
50
SW1 in Source position and use of an external power supply for the
logic inputs
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
SW1 in Source Ext position
A1
Ext
Source
Int
+24
COM
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
+24
A1
Sink
SW1
Ext
Int
LI4
0V
SW1 in Source Int position
Source
LI4
+24 V
0V
Sink
LI5
24 V _ _ _ Source
+24 V
SW1
A1
Ext
Source
Int
LI5
SW1
+24
COM
LI2
LI1
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
Ext
Source
Int
+24
SW1
Sink
LI6
A1
Sink
LI6
SW1 in Sink position
24 V _ _ _ Source
+24 V
0V
51
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
6.7 POWERLINK interface (8I0IF108.400-1)
Caution!
Only install communication modules designed for the drive.
Only install one communication module.
The ACOPOSinverter P74 is delivered with a POWERLINK interface. This interface is inserted directly into the
control block (see figure alongside).
Integrate the POWERLINK interface into the ACOPOSinverter P74 as follows:
Step
1
52
Measures taken
Determine the position of the module on the ACOPOSinverter P74.
Note
Remove the cover.
Measures taken
Insert the optional module.
Note
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
Step
3
Verify that the module is completely inserted and locked mechanically in the drive.
Remove the communication module as follows:

Step
1
Measures taken
Make sure that the power supply is shut off.
Depress the bar.
Note
Remove the module, keeping the bar depressed.
53

6.7.1 Status LEDs
LED
S/E
Color
Green/red
Status
Red
Red
L/A1, L/A2
Green
Green
Blinking
Description
Status/Error LED. The LED statuses are in the "LED S/E" section
- see "S/E LED" on page 54.
A critical module fault (RAM, Flash, hardware, or an internal
communication fault) is present
A link to the remote station has been established.
A link to the remote station has been established. The LED
blinks when Ethernet activity is present on the bus.
6.7.1.1 S/E LED

The status/error LED is a green/red dual LED. The status LEDs can have different meanings depending on operating mode.
Red - error
On
Description
The POWERLINK interface has encountered an error (failed Ethernet frames, increased number of collisions on
the network, invalid POWERLINK station number, etc.).
If an error occurs in the following states, then the green LED blinks over the red LED:
BASIC_ETHERNET
PRE_OPERATIONAL_1
PRE_OPERATIONAL_2
READY_TO_OPERATE
Status
Green
t
Error
Red
t
S/E LED
t
Green - status
Off
NOT_ACTIVE
Green flickering (approx. 10 Hz)
BASIC_ETHERNET
Single flash (approx. 1 Hz)
PRE_OPERATIONAL_1
Double flash (approx. 1 Hz)
PRE_OPERATIONAL_2
Triple flash (approx. 1 Hz)
READY_TO_OPERATE
On
OPERATIONAL
Blinking (approx. 2.5 Hz)
STOPPED
54
Description
The bus is monitored for POWERLINK frames. If a frame is not received within the configured time window (timeout), the interface goes directly into BASIC_ETHERNET status (flickering). If, however, POWERLINK communication is detected during this time, the interface goes directly into the PRE_OPERATIONAL_1 status (single flash).
The interface is in BASIC_ETHERNET status, and is operated purely as an Ethernet TCP/IP interface.
If POWERLINK communication is detected while in this status, the interface goes into the PRE_OPERATIONAL_1
state (single flash). A lit red LED in this state indicates manager failure.
The interface status is PRE_OPERATIONAL_1.
The CN waits until it receives an SoC frame and then switches to PRE_OPERATIONAL_2 status (double flash).
A lit red LED in this state indicates manager failure.
The interface status is PRE_OPERATIONAL_2.
In this status, the interface is normally configured by the manager. After this, a command changes the status to
READY_TO_OPERATE (triple flash). A lit red LED in this state indicates manager failure.
The interface status is READY_TO_OPERATE.
The configuration of the interface is complete. Normal cyclic and asynchronous communication. The PDO data
sent corresponds to the PDO mapping used. However, cyclic data is not yet evaluated. A lit red LED in this state
indicates manager failure.
The interface status is OPERATIONAL.
The interface status is STOPPED.
No output data is produced and no input data is received. Only the appropriate command from the manager can
enter or leave this state.

Chapter 1
Installation Manual
6.7.2 POWERLINK station number

Station numbers are permitted between $01 and $F0.
The POWERLINK station number is parameterized via the integrated display terminal or the jog dial.
The parameter is called up as follows:
[DRIVE
MENU]
CARD](Cbd-):
Code
(ADRC)
(DRI),[CONF](CONF-),[FULL](FULL-),[COMMUNICATION](COM-),[COMMUNICATION
Name / Description
[Address]
Adjustment Range
0 to 239
Factory setting
0
6.7.3 POWERLINK interface (X1 and X2)
X2
X1
Interface
Pinout
Application interface
POWERLINK
1
Shielded RJ45 port
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ethernet
RxD
RxD\
TxD
Termination
Termination
TxD\
Termination
Termination
Receive data
Receive data\
Transmit data
Transmit data\
6.7.4 Firmware
The 8I0IF108.400-1 module comes with pre-installed firmware. The firmware is also part of the B&R Automation
Runtime operating system for the PLC. If the two versions are different, the Automation Runtime firmware is loaded
to the module. The latest 8I0IF108.400-1 firmware is available automatically when updating B&R Automation Runtime.
Note:
ACOPOSinverter P74 devices of Revision A0 require a restart (switch power supply off then on) after
performing a firmware update on module 8I0IF108.400-1.
55
6.8 Maintenance
Danger!
6.8.1 Warranty limitation
The warranty is voided if anyone other than a Bernecker and Rainer service employee opens the product.
56
6.8.2 Fan replacement.

A new fan can be ordered for purposes of maintaining the P74. See trade reference numbers on www.brautomation.com.
(1) Press the safety tab in. (2) Disconnect the plug and remove the fan.
Size C
Sizes A and B
1
2
Size D
57
Chapter 1
Installation Manual
6.9 Power grid short-circuit capacity at the drive supply point and short-circuit protection of the
power feeder.
6.9.1 Recommended fuse ratings for UL and CSA requirements
Reference
Voltage
(Y)
8I74S200018.01P-1
V
200-240
Short-circuit capacity at the drive supply point (1)

kA
1
Short-circuit capacity
at the drive output
(X)(2)
kA
5
8I74S200037.01P-1
200-240
8I74S200055.01P-1
200-240
8I74S200075.01P-1
200-240
8I74S200110.01P-1
200-240
8I74S200150.01P-1
200-240
8I74S200220.01P-1
200-240
8I74T400037.01P-1
380-500
8I74T400055.01P-1
380-500
8I74T400075.01P-1
380-500
8I74T400110.01P-1
380-500
8I74T400150.01P-1
380-500
8I74T400220.01P-1
380-500
8I74T400300.01P-1
380-500
8I74T400400.01P-1
380-500
8I74T400550.01P-1
380-500
22
22
8I74T400750.01P-1
380-500
22
22
8I74T401100.01P-1
380-500
22
22
8I74T401500.01P-1
380-500
22
22
Power feeder
(Z1)
Fast Acting Class

DC Ferraz ATDR
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
DC Ferraz ATDR
Fast Acting Class
DC Ferraz ATDR
Fast Acting Class
DC Ferraz ATDR
Fast Acting Class
DC Ferraz ATDR
Fast Acting Class
DC Ferraz ATDR
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Fast Acting Class
J Ferraz HSJ
Power range
(Z2)
A
7
15
25
25
25
40
45
6
6
6
12
12
15
17.5
25
40
40
60
70
Recommended fuse rating to meet UL and CSA requirements Components for use in conformance with the UL508
standard
Suitable for use on a power supply grid with a short-circuit capacity of no more than ___X____ A rms, symmetrical,
no more than ___Y____ Volts, when protected by __Z 1____ with a maximum rating of__Z 2___.
(1) The power grid short-circuit capacity at the drive supply point corresponds to the thermal rating of the drive.
Additional inductance is required in installations with a higher short-circuit capacity.
(2) Output interrupt rating relies on Integral solid state short circuit protection. This does not provide power feeder
protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code (USA) and
any additional local codes. This is dependent on the type of installation.
58
Programming Manual Overview
Chapter 2 Programming Manual

Chapter 2
Programming Manual
1 Overview
1.1 Commissioning
1.1.1 Steps for setting up
INSTALLATION
1. See installation manual.
PROGRAMMING
2. Apply input power to the drive but do not give a run command.
3. Define the following settings:
Tips:
With the parameter [Factory settings] (FCS) (see "Factory setting
(FCS-)" on page 100, you can
restore the factory settings at any
time.
Before configuring a function, read
the "Function compatibility" section
see "Compatibility table" on page
163 carefully.
Set the motor's rated frequency

[Standard mot. freq] (bFr), see "Simply start menu
(SIM-)" on page 104if the frequency is not 50 Hz.
Enter the motor parameters in the
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-), see "Motor control (drC-)"
on page 117menu only if the factory configuration of
the drive is unsuitable.
Enter the application functions in the
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu,
see "Inputs/ outputs (I_O-)" on page 132the
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu, see "Control parameters" on
page 158and the
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-), see "Ref. switch
(rEF-)" on page 166menu only if the factory configuration of the drive is unsuitable.
4. In the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, enter the following parameters:
Note:
The following steps are required for optimal
drive precision and response time:
Enter the values from the motor nameplate into
the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117.
Use the [Auto tuning] (tUn), 2.3.3.4.1 "Simply
start menu (SIM-)" on page 104parameter to
perform a cold-state auto-tuning of the attached
motor.
[Acceleration] (ACC)and [Deceleration] (dEC), see

"Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104.
[Low speed] (LSP)and [High speed] (HSP), see "Simply
start menu (SIM-)" on page 104.
[Mot. therm. current] (ItH), see "Simply start menu
(SIM-)" on page 104.
5. Start the drive.
59

1.1.2 Preliminary recommendations
Prior to switching on the drive
Danger!
Read and understand this installation manual before installing and operating the ACOPOSinverter P74.
Ensure that all logic inputs are inactive to help prevent an accidental startup.
Power-up
Note:
In the course of a normal power-up/manual reset or after a stop command, the motor, when factory
settings are active, can only be switched on if the "Run forward", "Run reverse", and "Stop DC injection" commands are reset. So long as these commands are not reset, the drive will display [Freewheel]
(nSt) , but will not start. If the automatic restart function has been configured (parameter [Automatic
Restart] (Atr) in the [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu), see "Fault management" on page 233these
commands will be taken care of, and a reset (to zero) is not required.
Input contactor
Caution!
Frequent actuation of the input contactor results in premature wear of the filter capacitor charging
circuit.
Do not turn the drive on for intervals of less than 60 seconds.
Installing a motor with lower design values or using no motor at all
Motor phase detection is active in the factory settings ([Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [Yes] (YES), see "Motor phase
loss (OPL-)" on page 241). To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment, without having to use a
motor with the same rating as the drive, deactivate motor phase loss detection ([Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [No]
(nO)). This is especially useful when testing a large drive with a small motor.
Set [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117, to [Standard] (Std), in the [Motor control]
(drC-)menu.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the motor
There is no thermal protection of the motor by the drive when the motor rating is 20% lower than the
drive rating.
An alternative means of thermal protection must be provided in this case.
Danger!
If [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) is set to [No] (nO), a cable fault will not be detected.
Ensure that this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.
60
1.2 Overview
1.2.1 Factory configuration
Factory Setting
Display: Drive ready [Ready] (rdY), when the motor is ready for service, and motor speed when the motor
is running.
Logic inputs LI3 to LI6, analog inputs AI2 and AI3, logic output LO1, analog output AO1, and relay R2 are
not assigned.
Stop mode after fault detection: freewheel stop.
Code
bFr
tCC
Ctt
ACC
dEC
LSP
HSP
ItH
SdCI
SFr
Frd
rrS
Fr1
rI
brA
Atr
Description
[Standard mot. freq]
[2/3 wire control]
[Motor control type]
[Acceleration]
[Deceleration]
[Low speed]
[High speed]
[Mot. therm. current]
[Auto DC inj. level 1]
[Switching freq.]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[Ref.1 channel]
[R1 Assignment]
[Dec ramp adapt]
[Automatic Restart]
Factory setting
[50Hz IEC]
[2 wire] (2C): 2 wire control
[Standard] (Std): U/F 2 points (Volts/Hz) without internal speed loop
3.0 seconds
3.0 seconds
0 Hz
50 Hz
Motor rating (value depends on drive size)
0.7 x nominal drive current, for 0.5 seconds
4 kHz
[LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
[AI1] (AI1): Analog input AI1
[No fault] (FLt): The contact opens when a fault is detected or when the drive is switched off.
[Yes] (YES): Function active (automatic adaptation of the deceleration ramp)
[No] (nO): Function inactive
Stt
CFG
[Type of stop]
[Macro configuration]
[Ramp stop] (rMP): One ramp

[Start/Stop] (StS)
Chapter
Quick start menu
Motor control
Quick start menu
Configuration parameters
Inputs/ outputs
Control parameters
R1 configuration
Ramp type
[AUTOMATIC RESTART]
Stop configuration
Macro configuration
Note:
If you would like to work with as few drive presets as possible, choose macro configuration.
[Macro configuration] (CFG) = [Start/Stop] (StS), followed by [Factory settings] (FCS) = [Config.
CFG] (InI). For further information see "Macro configuration (CFG)" on page 101.
Verify that the values specified above are compatible with the application.
When using the ACOPOSinverter P74 with POWERLINK and the B&R Automation Studio, the
following parameters are automatically changed:
Code
Fr1
Cd1
Cd2
Description
[Ref.1 channel]
[Cmd channel 1]
[Cmd channel 2]
Factory setting
[COMMUNICATION CARD] (net): Communication card (POWERLINK)
[COMMUNICATION CARD] (net): Communication card (POWERLINK)
[Terminals] (tEr): Terminals
61
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
The ACOPOSinverter P74 is factory-set for common operating conditions:

1.2.2 Application functions
The tables on the following pages show function assignments for various applications, in order to guide your selection.
The applications in these tables relate to the following machines in particular:
Hoisting: cranes, overhead cranes, gantries (vertical hoisting, translation, slewing), lifting platforms
Transport: palletizers/depalletizers, conveyors, roller tables
Packing: carton packers, labeling machines
Textiles weaving looms, carding frames, washing machines, spinners, drawing frames
Wood: automatic lathes, saws, milling
Process
Each machine has its own special features, and the combinations listed here are neither mandatory nor exhaustive.
Some functions are designed specifically for a particular application. In this case, the application is identified by a
tab in the margin on the relevant programming pages.
Motor control functions
Functions
V/f ratio
Sensorless flux vector control
2-point vector control
Open-loop synchronous motor
Motor speed up to 599 Hz
Motor overvoltage limiting
DC bus connection
Motor fluxing using a logic input
Switching frequency up to 16 kHz
Auto-tuning
Applications
Hoisting
Transport
x
x
x
x
Packing
Textiles
x
x
x
x
x
x
Woodworking
x
x
Process handling
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Textiles
Woodworking
Process
Functions on speed references

Functions
Differential bipolar reference
Reference delinearization (magnifying glass effect)
Frequency control input
Reference switching
Reference summing
Reference subtraction
Reference multiplication
Ramp with configurable profile
Jog frequency
Preset speeds
+ / - speed using single action pushbuttons (1
step)
+ / - speed using double action pushbuttons (2
steps)
+/- speed around a reference
Save reference
62
Applications
Hoisting
Transport
x
x
x
x
Packing
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

Application-specific functions
Applications
Hoisting
Transport
Fast stop.
Braking control
Load measurement
High-speed hoisting
Rope slack
PID controller
Motor/generator torque limit
Load distribution
Input contactor control
Output contactor control
Positioning by limit switches or sensors
Calculated stop distance after
slowdown limit switch.
Parameter switching
Motor or configuration switching
Traverse control
Stop configuration
x
x
x
x
Packing
Textiles
Woodworking
x
Process
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Functions
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Safety functions/ fault management

Functions
Safe Torque Off (STO) (safety function)

Deferred stop on thermal alarm
Alarm handling
Fault management
IGBT tests
Catch a spinning load
Motor protection with PTC probes
Managing undervoltages
4-20mA loss
Uncontrolled output cut (output phase loss)
Automatic restart
Measurement of motor speed via the impulse input
(Pulse Input)
Load variation detection
Underload detection
Overload detection
Integrated safety functions
Applications
Hoisting
Transport
Packing
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Textiles
x
Woodworking
Process
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
63

1.2.3 Basic functions
Drive ventilation
The fan starts automatically when the thermal state of the drive reaches 70% of the maximum value and [Fan
Mode] (FFM) is set to [Standard] (Std) .
1.2.4 Optional graphic display terminal
Description of the graphic display terminal
The graphic display terminal works with Flash V1.1IE26 or higher and displays more detailed information than the
integrated display terminal.
1 Graphic display
2 function keys
F1, F2, F3, F4,
7 ESC key: Abort a
value, parameter, or menu
and return to previous
Choice
3 button
STOP/ RESET
4 RUN button
6 button for switching

Rotational direction of the motor
5 - Jog dial:
Press (ENT):
- To save the current value
- To call up the selected menu or parameter
Turn +/-:
- To increase or reduce a value
- To go to the next or previous line
- To increase or reduce the reference upon activation
- To exercise control via the terminal
Note:
Buttons 3, 4, 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive directly, if control via the terminal is activated.
To activate the buttons on the external display terminal, you must first set [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) to [HMI] (LCC) .
For further information see "Control parameters" on page 158.
64

Example configuration windows:
Single selection
Your desired language must be selected when you first switch on the graphic display terminal.
selected.
Language
English
Franais
German
Italiano
Espaol
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
When only one selection is possible, the selected item is indicated by the
sign.
Example: Only one language can be chosen.
Chinese
Trke
Multiple selection
SELECTED PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
English
Ramp increment
Acceleration time--------Deceleration--------Acceleration 2--------Deceleration 2
When multiple selection is possible, the selected items are indicated by

Sign
.
Example: In order[MY
to display
MENU]
to configure, various parameters can
selected.
Edit
Example configuration window for one value:
RDY
0.0 A
+0.0 Hz
Term
Startup
English
RDY
Term
0.0 A
Startup
ENT English
9 51 s
99 5 1 s
Min = 0.00
Max = 99.99
>>
<<
+0.0 Hz
Min = 0.00
Quick
Max = 99.99
<<
>>
Quick
The << and >> arrows (keys F2 and F3) allow you to select the figure to be changed. The jog dial can then be turned to increase or reduce this figure.
Example for displaying the state of function blocks:
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
Startup
English
9 51 s
Min = 0.00
Max = 99.99
<<
>>
Quick
OUT display: A valid function block program runs in stop mode.

on the ACOPOSinverter P74.
IN display: A valid function block program runs in operation mode.
on the ACOPOSinverter P74. It results from a drive operation.
Status and configuration parameters cannot be changed.
65

First power-up of the drive with the graphic display terminal
Your desired language must be selected when you first switch on the graphic display terminal.
Language
English
Franais
German
Italiano
Espaol
Display after first power-up of the graphic display terminal.

Select the language and press ENT.
Chinese
Trke
ENT
Now the drive design data are displayed.
8I74
0.75 kW 200M
Config 0
3 seconds
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
ACCESS LEVEL
English
Standard
Standard
Advanced
Expert
ENT
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 FREQUENCY REFERENCE
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 CONFIGURATION
Code
66
<<
>>
Quick

1.2.5 First power-up of the drive
When first powering up the drive with the integrated display terminal, the [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) (see "Simply
start menu (SIM-)" on page 104option is immediately called up in the (CONF > ALL PARAMETERS > SIM) menu.
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Display after first power-up of the drive
8I74
0.75 kW 220M
Config 0
3 seconds
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
ACCESS LEVEL
English
Standard
Standard
Advanced
Expert
The display screen appears automatically

[Access level]
ENT
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
1 DRIVE MENU
Automatic switch to the menu

Select the menu and press ENT.
[1 DRIVE MENU]
after three seconds.
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 CONFIGURATION
Code
<<
>>
Quick
ESC
MAIN MENU
English
1 DRIVE MENU
2 IDENTIFICATION
3 INTERFACE
4 OPEN / SAVE AS
5 PASSWORD
By pressing the ESC button on the graphic display terminal, the MAIN MENU
displayed.
67

Subsequent power ups
On all subsequent power-ups with the integrated display terminal, the Drive Status menu (identical list as in [Drive
Status] (HS1), see "Fault History (pFH-)" on page 93) will be called up immediately. Example: Dr. Ready (rdY).
Display after switching on
8I74
0.75 kW 220M
Config 0
3 seconds
RDY
Term
0.0 A
0.0 Hz
1 DRIVE MENU
Automatic switch to the menu

Select the menu and press ENT.
[1 DRIVE MENU]
after three seconds.
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 CONFIGURATION
Code
>>
<<
Quick
10 seconds
RDY
Term
0.0 A
0.0 Hz
Frequency reference
Automatic switch to the monitoring display screen after 10 seconds.
+1.3 Hz
Min = 0.00
Max = + 599.0
Quick
68

IDENTIFICATION menu
Access to the menu [IDENTIFICATION] (OId-) is only possible via the graphic display terminal.
This is a read-only menu that cannot be configured. The following information can be displayed:
Reference, power rating, and voltage rating of the drive
Software version of the Drive
Serial number of the Drive
Status and checksum of the safety function
Function block program version and catalog version
Available optional types, with software version
Type and version of the graphic display terminal
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
2 IDENTIFICATION
START
Term
+50.0 Hz
0.0 A
MAIN MENU
English
1 DRIVE MENU
2 IDENTIFICATION
3 INTERFACE
4 OPEN / SAVE AS
5 PASSWORD
START
Term
+ 50.0 Hz
0.0 A
2 IDENTIFICATION
8I74S200220.01P-1
2.2 kW
220 V 1ph
Appl. software V 1.1 IE 01
MC software V1.1 IE 02
<<
>>
Quick
FFFFFFFFF
Product V1.1 IE 01
SAFETY FUNCTION
[Safe drive Status] Standard
Safe param. CRC 8529
FUNCTION BLOCKS
Supply Prog Format 1
Catalog Version 1
OPTION 1
no opt
GRAPH. DISPLAY TERMINAL
GRAPHIC S
V1.2IE07
00000000000000000
69

1.2.6 Structure of parameter tables
The parameter tables in the descriptions of the various menus are structured as follows.
Example:
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > ALL PARAMETERS > FUN5
Code
Name / Description
PId-
[PID REGULATOR]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain
other functions are utilized.
Follow the instructions on page ...
[PID feedback ass.]
PIF
nO
A11
A12
A13
PI
AIU2
Adjustment RangeFactory setting
[No]
(nO)
[No] (nO): Not mapped

[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[RP] (PI): Motor voltage
[AI virtual 2] (AIU2): Virtual analog input 2
1. Access to the parameters described on this page

2. Submenu code on 4-digit 7-segment display.
3. Parameter code on 4-digit 7-segment display.
4. Parameter value on 4-digit 7-segment display.
5. Name of submenu on the graphic display terminal

6. Name of parameter on graphic display terminal
7. Value of parameter on graphic display terminal
Note:
Text in square brackets [ ] corresponds to the graphic terminal display.
Sometimes a menu will be displayed followed by a(continued)* notice. This is how you can determine your position
in the table structure.
Example:
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
[PID REGULATOR]
FUnPId-
Note:
This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions 2.3.3.4.6 "Application funct. (FUn-)" on page
161.
In this case the(continued)* notice is displayed, to indicate that the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] submenu is located
in the structure under the [PID REGULATOR] submenu.
A parameter can contain certain pictographs. A legend at the end of the table explains each pictograph.
Main pictographs
*
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function,
their description is detailed in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
2s
70
To change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for two seconds.

1.2.7 Search for a parameter in this document
Searching for parameter descriptions has been simplified:
With the graphic display terminal: Select the desired parameter and press the F1 key: [Code]. As long as
the key is pressed, the parameter code will be shown in stead of the name.
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
RDY
SETTINGS
<<
:
:
:
:
>>
0.1
9.51 s
9.67 s
0.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
Quick
Code
English
Ramp increment
ACC:
Deceleration
Low speed
High speed
Code
<<
:
:
Code
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
SETTINGS
English
Ramp increment
Acceleration time:
Deceleration
Low speed
High speed
Term
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Example: ACC
:
:
:
>>
0.1
9.51 s
9.67 s
0.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
Quick
71

1.2.8 Description of the HMI
Functions of the display and keys
1 The ESC key can be used in the menu
navigation (to go back) and in parameter configuration (to cancel).
2 The jog dial is used in the menu navigation (up or down) and in parameter
configuration (increase/reduce a value
or item selection). The jog dial can be
used as virtual logic input 1 for the drive
frequency reference.
3 The ENT key (press on the jog dial) is used in the menu navigation (to
proceed) and in parameter configuration (to confirm).
REF mode selected (rEF-)
Point for displaying the parameter value (Unit 1/10)
MON mode selected (MOn-)
The current parameter value is displayed.
CONF mode selected (COnF)
The current parameter unit is displayed.
Point for displaying the parameter value (Unit 1/100)
Normal display (no fault-code display and no startup)

Displays the selected parameters in the [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) menu (Standard selection:
[Frequency ref.] (FrH)).
Init: Initialization sequence (only from an external display terminal)

tUN: Self configuration
dCb: DC injection braking
rdY: Drive ready
nSt: Freewheel stop control
CLI: Current limitation
FSt: Fast stop.
FLU: Vector regulation active
nLP: Control is switched on, but DC bus is not charged
CtL: Controlled stop
Obr: Adapted deceleration
SOC: Standby output cut
USA: Undervoltage alarm
SS1: Safety level SS1
SLS: Safety level SLS
StO: Safety level STO
Detected faults cause the display to flash. If a graphic terminal display is attached, the name of the detected fault
is displayed.
72

1.2.9 Menu structure
Power-up
Parameter selection
This parameter is only shown when first powering up the drive.
The setting can then be changed in the
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu for
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr)
.
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-)

[1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-)
[1.3 CONFIGURATION] (COnF)
On the 7-segment display, the menu and submenu codes are separated from the parameter codes by a
line that appears behind them.
Example: Menu [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-), Parameter [Acceleration] (ACC)
Selection of multiple assignments for one parameter
Example: List with Group 1 alarms in the menu: [INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-)
Multiple alarms can be selected. This must be "marked" as follows. The figure on the right indicates the following:
selected
not selected
The same principle is used for all multiple selections.
73
1.3 Operation with SDC

1.3.1 Timing behavior
There is a delay between the control system and the ACOPOSinverter P74 (approx. 30 ms 100 ms), which
depends on various parameters.
The ACP10SDC library is automatically entered into the 1# task class. This is set to the X2X cycle time of the X2X
configuration (default 2 ms).
Because of the delay time of the ACOPOSinverter P74, refresh of the input values (every 2 ms) is not guaranteed.
1.3.2 PLC - Open components
The following motion functions are for use with the ACOPOSinverter P74:
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_BR_EventMoveVelocity
MC_BR_MoveCyclicVelocity
1.3.3 Quick stop/ Emergency stop
When the ACOPOSinverter P74 is operating with the ACP10SDC library, the QSTD parameter (quick stop option
code) is set to 2 automatically.
Note:
This value should not be changed if the ACOPOSinverter P74 is integrated with the ACP10SDC.
If the parameter is changed, the motor of the ACOPOSinverter P74 will stop in the event of an active
Quick stop or Emergency stop, but the ACP10SDC library will continue running.
1.3.4 Acceleration and deceleration ramps
When an ACOPOSserver P74 is integrated with SDC, the ACC and DEC ramp parameters are set to 0.1 ms
automatically. This corresponds to the fastest acceleration/deceleration.
Note:
These values should not be modivied if the ACOPOSinverter P74 is integrated with the ACP10SDC
library.
1.3.5 Total delay (t_total) and Predict time (t_predict)
These two axial parameters are automatically set to 5x X2X cycle time when the ACOPOSinverter P74 is integrated
with the ACP10SDC library.
For improved performance, these values should be set to 1x X2X cycle time.
74

1.3.6 Operation of the ACOPOSinverter P74 in rpm or Hertz
The standard entry for speed is read in revolutions per minute (rpm).
1.3.6.1 Conversion formula of the ACP10SDC parameter, SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT, for units/sec in rpm:
max Speed RPM = 32767 [rpm]
U
Min
SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT = max Speed RPM
SCALE_LOAD_UNITS [E]
SCALE_LOAD_MOTOR_REV [U]
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
max Output = 32767
1
60 [S]
Example
SCALE_LOAD_UNIT = 1000
SCAL_LOAD_MOTOR_REV = 1
1
1
SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT = ( 32767 *
* 60 ) [E/s]
1000
.
SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT = 546116.6 [E/s] ~
= 546116,67 [E/s]
SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT = 546116.6875 [E/s]
due to quantization float
1.3.6.2 Conversion formula of the ACP10SDC parameter, SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT, for units/sec in Hertz
(Resolution 0.1 Hz)
max Output = 32767
max Speed RPM = 3276.7 [rpm]

max electrSpeedHz
max mechSpeed = Number_Polepairs [U/s]
SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT = max mechSpeed
U
s
SCALE_LOAD_UNITS [E]
SCALE_LOAD_MOTOR_REV [U]
Example
SCALE_LOAD_UNITS = 1000
SCALE_LOAD_MOTOR_REV = 1
Number_Polepairs = 2
3276.7
= 1638.35 [U/s]
2
1000
SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT = (1638.35 *
) [E/s]
1
max mech Speed =
SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT = 1638350 [E/s]
75

1.3.6.3 Conversion formula of the ACP10SDC parameter, SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT, for units/sec in Hertz
(Resolution 0-TFR)
In this configuration, the default value is specified in hertz [Hz].
The resolution is not predefined in this case; however, it can be influenced by the user. This is done by setting
the "TFR Max frequency [0.1 Hz]" configuration parameter in the ACPi's I/O under "ACOPOSinverter DRC Motor control".
The default value is a data point of type "INT" for this configuration as well; however, it corresponds to a frequency
of 0 up to the value of the TFR parameter.
Note:
In order for the default value to be scaled from 0 to TFR, it is necessary for the user to set the bit
"CMI_Output_09 Definition of the frequency reference (LFr) and output frequency (rFr) unit (0 = 0.1
Hz; 1 = Standardized value 16 signed bits based on the maximum frequency)" to "TRUE".
max Output = 32767
max elektrSpeedHz =
TFR
[Hz]
10
The remainder of the calculation is identical to the configuration described above with the default value in Hertz.
Example
SCALE_LOAD_UNITS = 1000
SCALE_LOAD_MOTOR_REV = 1
Number_Polepairs = 2
TFR = 600
maxelectrSpeed = 60 [Hz]
maxmechanicalSpeed =
60
= 30 [U/s]
2
SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT = (30 *
1000
) [E/s]
1
SERVO_V_MAX_OUTPUT = 3000 [E/s]
76

1.3.7 TUN parameter
To improve ACOPOSinverter P74 precision, a tuning must be performed.
TUN = YES
This setting can only be applied via asynchronous writing of the TUN parameter. The tuning will only occur once
in connection with the "Operation enabled" point of the machine status, and is suitable as a tuning configuration
in the ACP10SDC library.
As another option, the tuning can be run via a logic input or the command word. The TUL parameter is used for this.
77
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Operating the motor on an ACOPOSinverter P74 without tuning is not recommended.
Programming Manual Programming
2 Programming
2.1 Reference Mode (rEF)
2.1.1 Introduction
The reference mode serves to monitor and, when the reference channel is analog input 1 ([Ref.1 channel] (Fr1)
(see "Control parameters" on page 158 set to [AI virtual 1] (AIU1) , set the feedback value by changing the voltage
value at the analog input.
If local control is enabled ([Ref.1 channel] (Fr1), see "Control parameters" on page 158 set to [HMI] (LCC) , the
jog dial or the up/down navigation keys on the external display terminal function as a potentiometer for increasing/reducing the feedback value within the tolerances prescribed by other parameters ([Low speed] (LSP) or [High
speed] (HSP)).
There is no need to press the ENT key to confirm the change of the reference.
2.1.2 Organization tree
(1) Depending on the active reference channel.
Possible values:
(AIU1)
(LFr)
(MFr)
(rPI)
(FrH)
(rPC)
(2) 2 s or ESC
The parameter value and parameter unit displayed in the diagram are given as
examples.
Value - Unit
78
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > REF
rEF[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
The parameters displayed vary according to drive configuration.
AIU1
[AIV1 input image]
0 to 100% of HSP-LSP
0%
*
Value of the first virtual analog input.
This parameter allows you to modify the frequency reference with the integrated jog dial.
(1)
LFr
[HMI Frequency ref.]
-599 to +599 Hz
0 Hz
*
HMI frequency reference (signed value).
This parameter allows you to modify the frequency reference with the external HMI.
(1)
MFr
[Multiplying coeff.]
0 to 100 %
100%
*
Multiplication of the frequency variables
Access to these coefficients is possible if [Multiplier ref. -] (MA2,MA3), see "Reference configurations (OAI-)" on page 167 is assigned to the
(1)
graphic display terminal.
rPI
[Internal PID ref.]
0 to 32,767
150
*
PID: Internal reference PI.
This parameter allows to modify the PID internal reference with the jog dial.
(1)
The internal PID reference is visible when [PID feedback] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO) .
FrH
[Frequency ref.]
-599 to +599 Hz
*
Frequency reference before ramps (signed value).
The frequency reference actually applied to the motor, regardless of which reference channel is selected. This parameter is read-only.
The frequency reference is visible unless the command channel is set to HMI or virtual AI.
rPC
[PID speed ref.]
0 to 65,535
*
PID: Reference The PID reference is visible when [PID feedback] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO) .
(1)
*
(1) It is not necessary to press the ENT key to confirm the modification of the reference.
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted
from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
79
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
2.1.3 Menu
2.2 Monitoring mode (MOn)

2.2.1 Introduction
Access to this parameter is possible when the drive is running and when it is stopped.
Some functions have a great number of parameters. To simplify the programming process and to avoid paging
through countless parameters, these functions are organized in submenus. Submenus, like menus, are indicated
by a hyphen after the code.
When the drive is running, the value of one of the monitoring parameters is displayed. The default value displayed
is the input frequency reference (parameter [Frequency ref.] (FrH), see "Menu" on page 82).
When the value of the desired new monitoring parameter is displayed, you can press the jog dial again to see the
units, or press the jog dial (ENT key) and hold it (for 2 seconds) to confirm and save the change to the monitoring parameter. From this point on, the value of this parameter will be displayed during operation (including after
shutdown).
If the new selection is not confirmed by pressing and holding the ENT key, the display returns to the previous
parameters after shutdown.
Note:
After switching off the drive or after a power failure, the drive status parameter is displayed (Example:
[Ready] (rdY)). The selected parameter will be displayed following a RUN command.
80

Chapter 2
Programming Manual
The parameters shown in the diagram

serve as examples.
(1) Display only possible on graphic display terminal
81

2.2.3 Menu
Code
Name / Description
Unit
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MONMOn[1.2 MONITORING]
AIU1
[AIV1 input image]
%
First virtual AI value

This parameter is read-only. It enables display of the frequency reference for the motor.
FrH
[Frequency ref.]
Hz
Frequency reference before ramps (signed value).
This parameter is read-only. It enables display of the frequency reference for the motor, regardless of which reference channel is selected.
LFr
[HMI Frequency ref.]
Hz
HMI frequency reference (signed value).
This parameter is only displayed if the function has been activated. It is used to modify the frequency reference via the peripheral control. ENT
does not have to be pressed to modify the reference.
MFr
%
*
Multiplication factor
Multiplying coefficient can be used if [Multiplier ref. -] (MA2,MA3), see "Reference configurations (OAI-)" on page 167 has been assigned.
rFr
[Output frequency]
Hz
Calculated motor frequency (signed value).
FqS
[Pulse in. work. freq.]
Hz
*
Measured frequency of the "Pulse Input" input (see "Frequency meter (FqF-)" on page 248).
ULn
[Mains voltage]
V
Line voltage (from the DC bus).
Line voltage based on DC bus measurements, motor running or stopped.
tHr
[Motor thermal state]
%
Thermal state of the motor.
100% = Thermal nominal state, 118% = "Threshold OLF" (motor overload).
tHd
[Drv. thermal state]
%
Thermal state of the drive. 100% = Thermal nominal state, 118% = "Threshold OLF" (drive overload).
2.2.3.1 Motor monitoring (MMO-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MON- > MMOMMO[MONIT. MOTOR]
Spd
[Motor speed]
Motor speed in rpm.
UOP
[Motor voltage]
Motor voltage.
Opr
[Motor power]
Output power monitoring (100% = nominal motor power)
Otr
[Motor torque]
Starting torque (100% = nominal torque of the motor)
LCr
[I motor]
Calculated motor current
82
Unit
rpm
V
%
%
A

2.2.3.2 Figure I/O (IOM-)
Code
Name / Description
Unit
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > IOM- > LIALIA
[LOGIC INPUT CONF.]
Logic input functions.
L1A
[Logic input 1 assignment]
Read-only paramater, not configurable.
All functions assigned to logic input are displayed, to check whether various assignments are present. If no functions have been assigned, [No]
(nO) is displayed. Use the jog dial to scroll through the functions.
The delay is displayed on the graphic terminal display. [LI1 On Delay] (L1d). Possible values correspond to those in the configuration menu. see
"Configuration LI1 (L1-)" on page 133.
L2A
[L-- assignment]
to
All available logic inputs on the drive are configured as in the previous example for LI1.
L6A
LA1A
LA2A
LIS1
[State of logic inputs LI1 to LI6]
Can be used to display the state of logic inputs LI1 to LI6 (segment display: high = 1, low = 0).
State 1
State 0
LIS2
LI1
LI2 LI3
LI4 LI5
LI6
Example above: LI1 and LI6 are set at 1; LI2 and LI5 are set at 0.
[State of Safe Torque Off]
Can be used to display the state of LA1, LA2 and STO (safe torque off) (segment display: high = 1, low = 0).
State 1
State 0
LA1 LA2 STO
Example above: LA1 and LA2 are set to 0; STO (safe torque off) is set to 1.
2.2.3.2.2 Status analog inp. (AI1C)

Code
Name / Description
Unit
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > IOM- > AIAAIA[ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE]
Analog input functions
AI1C
[AI1]
V
Customer-specific image AI1: Value of analog input 1.
AI1A
[AI1 assignment]
AI1 function assignment If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed. The following parameters are displayed on the graphic display
terminal when you press the ENT key for that parameter.
nO [No] (nO): Not mapped
Fr1 [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1): Reference source 1
SA2 [Summing ref. 2] (SA2): Reference sum 2
PIF [PID feedback] (PIF): PI feedback (PI control)
tAA [TORQUE LIMITATION] (tAA): Torque limiter: Activation via an analog value
dA2 [Subtract ref. 2] (dA2): Subtraction of reference 2
PIM [Manual PID ref.] (PIM): Manually configured frequency reference of the PI(D) regulator (automatic/manual operation)
FPI [PID speed ref.] (FPI): Frequency reference of the PI(D) regulator (predefined reference)
Fr1b [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b): Reference source 1B
dA3 [Subtract. ref. 3] (dA3): Subtraction of reference 3
FLOC [Forced local] (FLOC): Reference source "Forced local"
MA2 [Multi ref. 2] (MA2): Multiplying factor for reference 2
MA3 [Multi ref. 3] (MA3): Multiplying factor for reference 3
PES [Weight input] (PES): External function for measuring weight
UIL1
[AI1 min value]
V
Minimum voltage value (0%)
UIH1
[AI1 max value]
V
Maximum voltage value (100%)
AI1F
[AI1 filter]
s
Filter time of the low-pass filter to filter disruptions.
83
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
2.2.3.2.1 Logic input conf. (LIA)

Code
Name / Description
Unit
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > IOM- > AIAAIA[ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE] (continued)
AI2C
[AI2]
V
AI2A
[AI2 assignment]
AI2 function assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed. The following parameters are displayed on the graphic display
terminal when you press the ENT key for that parameter.
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (AI1A) see "Menu" on page 82.
UIL2
[AI2 min value]
V
Minimum voltage value (0%)
UIH2
[AI2 max. value]
V
Maximum voltage value (100%)
AI2F
[AI2 filter]
s

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > IOM- > AIAAIA[ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE] (continued)
AI3C
[Phys. Value AI3]
AI3A
[AI3 assignment]
AI3 function assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed.
The following parameters are displayed on the graphic display terminal when you press the ENT key for that parameter.
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (AI1A)see "Menu" on page 82.
CrL3
[AI3 min value]
Minimum current value (0%)
CrH3
[AI3 max value]
Maximum current value (100%)
AI3F
[AI2 filter]
Unit
mA
mA
s
2.2.3.2.5 Status analog outputs (AO1C)

Code
Name / Description
Unit
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > IOM- > AOAAOA[ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE]
Analog output functions The following parameters are displayed on the graphic display terminal when you press the ENT key for that parameter.
AO1C
[AO1C]
Customer-specific image AO1: Value of analog output 1.

AO1
[AO1 assignment]
AO1 function assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed.
Identical to [AO1 assignment] (AO1), see "Configuration AO1 parameter overview" on page 148.
UOL1
[AO1 min Output]
V
*
Minimum voltage value (0%) Access possible when [Type AO1] (AO1t) is set to [Voltage] (10U) .
UOH1
[AO1 max Output]
V
*
Maximum voltage value (100%) Access possible when [Type AO1] (AO1t) is set to [Voltage] (10U) .
AOL1
[AO1 min Output]
mA
*
Minimum current value (0%) Access possible when [Type AO1] (AO1t) is set to [Current] (0A) .
AOH1
[AO1 max Output]
mA
*
Maximum current value (100%) Access possible when [Type AO1] (AO1t) is set to [Current] (0A) .
ASL1
[AO1 max scal]
%
Minimum scaling value for AO1.
ASH1
[AO1 min scal]
%
Maximum scaling value for AO1.
AO1F
[AO1 Filter]
s
Filter time for the low-pass filter.
84
Code
Name / Description
Unit
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > IOM- > FSIFSI[STATUS FREQ SIGNAL]
Status of the frequency signal.
This menu is only displayed on the graphic display terminal.
PFrC
[RP input]
Hz
Filtered, customer-specific impulse input frequency reference. The following parameters are displayed on the graphic display terminal when you
press the ENT key for that parameter.
PIA
[RP assignment]
Assignment of the impulse input. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed.
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (AI1A)see "Menu" on page 82.
PIL
[RP min value]
kHz
RP minimum value. Minimum impulse input (0%)
PFr
[RP max value]
kHz
Maximum impulse input value at maximum rotational speed (100%).
PFI
[RP filter]
ms
Filter time of the low-pass filter to filter disruptions (impulse input).
2.2.3.3 Monitor Safety (SAF-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > MNO- > SAFSAF[MONIT. SAFETY]
Additional information on the integrated safety functions can be found in the special safety manual.
StOS
[STO status]
Status of the STO safety function (safe torque off)
IdLE [Idle] (IdLE): STO is not executed.
Sto [Safe stop] (StO): STO is executed.
FLt [Fault] (FLt): STO fault detected
SLSS
[SLS status]
Status of the SLS safety function (safe limit speed).
nO [Not config.] (nO): SLS not configured
IdLE [Idle] (IdLE): SLS is not executed.
SS1 [Safe ramp] (SS1): SLS ramp is executed
SLS [Speed limited] (SLS): SLS rotational limitation is executed
StO [Safe stop] (StO): SLS Safe Torque Off request is executed
FLt [Fault] (FLt): SLS fault detected
SS1S
[SS1 Status]
Status of the "Safe Stop 1" safety function
nO [Not config.] (nO): SS1 not configured
IdLE [Idle] (IdLE): SS1 is not executed.
SS1 [Safe ramp] (SS1): SS1 ramp is executed
StO [Safe stop] (StO): SS1 Safe Torque Off request is executed
FLt [Fault] (FLt): SS1 fault detected
SFFE
[Safety fault reg.]
The safety function has detected a fault.
Bit 0 = 1: Timeout during debouncing of logic input
Bit: 1 Reserved
Bit 2 = 1: Motor speed sign changed during SS1 stop
Bit 3 = 1: Rotational speed reaches SS1 trigger range
Bit 4: Reserved
Bit 5: Reserved
Bit 6 = 1: Motor speed sign changed during SLS safety limitation
Bit 7 = 1: Rotational speed reaches SLS trigger range
Bit 8: Reserved
Bit 9: Reserved
Bit 10: Reserved
Bit 11: Reserved
Bit 12: Reserved
Bit 13 = 1: Motor speed measurement not possible
Bit 14 = 1: Motor ground fault detected
Bit 15 = 1: Motor short circuit detected
Unit
85
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
2.2.3.2.6 Status Freq Signal (PFrC)

2.2.3.4 Communication Map (CMM-)
Code
Name / Description
Unit
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > MNO- > CMMCMM[COMMUNICATION MAP]
This menu is only displayed on the graphic display terminal, with the exception of the [COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP].(ISA) and [COM SCAN
OUTPUT MAP] menus.(OSA).
CMdC
[Command Channel]
Active command channel.
tErM [Terminals] (tErM): Terminals
HMI [HMI] (HMI): Graphic display terminal or external display terminal
Mdb [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated modbus
CAn [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
tUd [+/- Speed] (tUd): +/- speed
nEt [COMMUNICATION CARD] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
P S [PC Tool] (P S): PC Software
CMd
[Cmd value]
DRIVECOM command register
[Profile] (CHCF) is not set to [I/O profile] (IO) , see "Control parameters" on page 158.
Possible values in the CiA402 profile, separate or common mode.
Bit 0: "Switch on" command/safety command
Bit 1: "Disable voltage"/permission to access main power supply
Bit 2: "Quick stop"/emergency stop
Bit 3: "Enable operation"/run command
Bit 4 to Bit 6: Reserved (set to 0)
Bit 7: "Fault reset"/fault confirmation active due to 0 to 1 rising edge
Bit 8: Stop according to the parameter [Type of stop] (Stt) without leaving the "running operation" state.
Bit 9: Reserved (set to 0)
Bit 10: Reserved (set to 0)
Bit 11 to Bit 15: Can be assigned to a command
Possible values in I/O profile.
Via the status-controlled command [2 wire] (2C).
Bit 0: "Run forward" Command (switch on)
= 0: "Run reverse" command
= 1: "Run forward" Command
Assignment of Bit 0 cannot be altered. It corresponds to the connection terminal assignment. It can be switched. Bit 0 (Cd00) is only active when
the channel for this command word is active.
Bit 1 to Bit 15: Can be assigned to commands.
Edge control command [3 wire] (3C).
Bit 0: Stop (startup permission).
= 0: Stop
= 1: Run mode only authorized with "Run forward" or "Run reverse" command
rFCC
tErM
LOC
HMI
Mdb
CAn
tUd
nEt
PS
FrH
86
Bit 1: "Run forward" command (on 0 to 1 rising edge)

Assignment of Bit 0 and Bit 1 cannot be altered. It corresponds to the connection terminal assignment. It can be switched. Bit 0 (Cd00) and Bit
1 (Cd01) are only active when the channel for this command word is active.
Bit 2 to Bit 15: Can be assigned to commands
[Channel ref. active]
HMI reference channel
[Terminals] (tErM): Terminals
[Local] (LOC): Jog dial
[HMI] (HMI): Graphic display terminal or display terminal
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
[tUd] (tUd): +/- speed
[COMMUNICATION CARD] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
[PC Tool] (P S): PC Software
[Frequency ref.]
Hz
Frequency reference before ramps.

EtA
[ETA state word]

DRIVECOM Status word.
= 0: No error
= 1: Error
Bit 4: "Voltage enabled", line voltage present in the power component
= 0: No line voltage present in the power component
= 1: Line voltage present in the power component. If the drive is supplied with current only by this power component, then this Bit is
always set to 1.
Bit 5: Quick stop/emergency stop
Bit 6: "Power-on locked", power component line voltage is locked.
Bit 7: Alarm
= 0: No alarm
= 1: Alarm
Bit 8: Reserved (= 0) Bit
9: Remote: Command or reference via the network
= 0: Command or reference via the graphic display terminal or the external display terminal
= 1: Command or reference via the network
Bit 10: Target reference reached
= 0: Reference was not reached
= 1: The reference was reached. If the drive is in speed mode, this is the speed reference.
Bit 11: "Internal limit active", reference outside the limits
= 0: The reference is within the limits.
= 1: The reference is not within the limits.
If the drive is in speed mode, the limits are defined by the [Low speed] (LSP) and [High speed] (HSP) parameters.
Bit 12 and Bit 13: Reserved (=0)
Bit 14: "Stop key", STOP over the Stop key
= 0: Stop key has not been pressed
= 1: Stop triggered by pressing the STOP key on the graphic display terminal or on the external display terminal.
Bit 15: "Direction", direction of rotation
= 0: Run forward output
= 1: Run reverse output
Status is defined as the Bit combination 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 in the status overview of the DSP 402 Drivecom standard.
Possible values in I/O profile.
Note:
This value is identical in the CiA402 and I/O profiles. The description of the values is simplified in the I/O profile, and does not
refer to the CiA402 (Drivecom) status overview. Bit 0: Reserved (= 0 or 1)
Bit 1: Ready
= 0: Not ready
= 1: Ready
Bit 2: In operation
= 0: The drive will not start if one of the references equals zero.
= 1: In operation. The drive can start when one reference does not equal zero.
Bit 3: Error
= 0: No error
= 1: Error
Bit 4: Line voltage present in the power component
= 0: No line voltage present in the power component
= 1: Line voltage present in the power component
Bit 5: Reserved (=1)
Bit 6: Reserved (= 0 or 1)
Bit 7: Alarm
= 0: No alarm
= 1: Alarm
Bit 8: Reserved (=0)
Bit 9: Command via a network
= 0: Command via the connection terminals or the graphic display terminal
= 1: Command via a network
Bit 10: Reference reached
= 0: Reference was not reached
= 1: Reference was reached
Bit 11: Reference outside limits
87
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Possible values in the CiA402 profile, separate or common mode.

Bit 0: "Ready", waiting for power supply to be switched on
Bit 1: "On", ready
Bit 2: "Operation enabled", operation running
Bit 3: "Error"

= 0: The reference is within the limits.
= 1: The reference is not within the limits.
If the drive is in speed mode, the limits are defined by the LSP and HSP parameters.
Bit 12 and Bit 13: Reserved (=0)
Bit 14: Stop via STOP key
= 0: Stop key has not been pressed
= 1: Stop triggered by pressing the STOP key on the graphic display terminal or on the external display terminal.
Bit 15: Direction of operation
= 0: Run forward output
= 1: Run reverse output
2.2.3.4.1 Modbus Netw. Diag. (Mnd-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > CMM- > MndMnd[MODBUS NETWORK DIAG]
Modbus network diagnostic.
Mdb1
[COM LED]
Displays the modbus communication.
M1Ct
[Mb NET frames nb.]
Counter for modbus network frames: Number of processed frames.
M1EC
[Mb Netw. CRC errors]
Error counter for the CRC modbus network: Number of CRC errors.
Unit
2.2.3.4.2 Bluetooth dialog (dbt-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > CMM- > dbtdbt[DIALOG BLUETOOTH]
Bluetooth network, diagnostic.
Unit
Note:
This function is not currently available.
2.2.3.4.3 Scanner Input (ISA-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > CMM- > ISAISA[COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP]
Used for CANopen and modbus network
nM1
[Com Scan In1 val.]
Value of the first input word.
nM2
[Com Scan In2 val.]
Value of the second input word.
nM3
[Com Scan In3 val.]
Value of the third input word.
nM4
[Com Scan In4 val.]
Value of the fourth input word.
nM5
[Com Scan In5 val.]
Value of the fifth input word.
nM6
[Com Scan In6 val.]
Value of the sixth input word.
nM7
[Com Scan In7 val.]
Value of the seventh input word.
nM8
[Com Scan In8 val.]
Value of the eighth input word.
88
Unit

2.2.3.4.4 Scanner output (OSA-)
Unit
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > CMM- > OSAOSA[COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP]
nC1
[Com Scan Out1 val.]
Value of the first output word.
nC2
Value of the second output word.
nC3
Value of the third output word.
nC4
Value of the fourth output word.
nC5
Value of the fifth output word.
nC6
Value of the sixth output word.
nC7
[Com Scan Out7 val]
Value of the seventh output word.
nC8
Value of the eighth output word.
2.2.3.4.5 Image control reg CMD (Cl-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > CMM- > CIC I[CMD. WORD IMAGE]
Command word image: Only accessible via graphic display terminal
CMd1
[Modbus cmd.]
Modbus command word image.
CMd2
[CANopen cmd.]
CANopen command word image.
CMd3
[COM. card cmd.]
Gives the command word for the communication card.
Unit
2.2.3.4.6 Image ref. Drive (RWI-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > CMM- > RWIRWI[FREQ. REF. WORD MAP]
Frequency reference image: Only accessible via graphic display terminal
LFr1
[Modbus ref.]
Hz image of the modbus frequency reference.
LFr2
[CANopen ref.]
CANopen frequency reference image.
LFr3
[Com. card ref.]
Gives the frequency reference of the communication card.
Unit
Hz
Hz
Hz
89

2.2.3.4.7 CANopen (CnM-) image
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > CMM- > CNM
CnM[CANopen MAP]
CANopen image: Only accessible via graphic display terminal
COn
[RUN LED]
Displays the state of the CANopen RUN LED.
CAnE
[ERR LED]
Displays the state of the CANopen ERROR LED.
PO1[PDO1 IMAGE]
Displays RPDO1 and TPDO1.
rp11
[Received PDO1-1]
*
First frame of the received PDO1.
rp12
[Received PDO1-2]
*
Second frame of the received PDO1.
rp13
[Received PDO1-3]
*
Third frame of the received PDO1.
rp14
[Received PDO1-4]
*
Fourth frame of the received PDO1.
tp11
[Transmit PDO1-1]
*
First frame of the sent PDO1.
tp12
[Transmit PDO1-2]
*
Second frame of the sent PDO1.
tp13
[Transmit PDO1-3]
*
Third frame of the sent PDO1.
tp14
[Transmit PDO1-4]
*
Fourth frame of the sent PDO1.
PO2[PDO2 IMAGE]
Displays RPDO2 and TPDO2. Same structure as [PDO1 IMAGE] (PO1-).
rp21
[Received PDO2-1]
*
rp22
[Received PDO2-2]
*
rp23
[Received PDO2-3]
*
rp24
[Received PDO2-4]
*
tp21
[Transmit PDO2-1]
*
tp22
[Transmit PDO2-2]
*
tp23
[Transmit PDO2-3]
*
tp24
[Transmit PDO2-4]
*
PO3[PDO3 IMAGE]
Displays RPDO3 and TPDO3. Same structure as [PDO1 IMAGE] (PO1-).
rp31
[Received PDO3-1]
*
rp32
[Received PDO3-2]
*
rp33
[Received PDO3-3]
*
*
[Received PDO3-4]
rp34
tp31
[Transmit PDO3-1]
*
tp32
[Transmit PDO3-2]
*
tp33
[Transmit PDO3-3]
*
tp34
[Transmit PDO3-4]
*
nMtS
[CANopen NMT state]
Drive NMT state of the CANopen slave.
bOOt [Boot] (bOOt): Power-up
StOP [Stopped] (StOP): Stopped
OPE [Operational] (OPE): In operation
POPE [Pre-Op] (POPE): Ready for operation
nbtp
[Number of TX PDO]
Number of sent PDO.
nbrp
[Number of TX PDO]
Number of received PDO.
ErCO
[Error code]
CANopen error register (from 1 to 5).
rEC1
[RX Error Counter]
Rx control, error counter (not saved when shutting down).
tEC1
[TX Error Counter]
Tx control, error counter (not saved when shutting down).
90
Unit

2.2.3.5 Status PI (MpI-)
Unit
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > MpIMpI[MONIT. PI]
*
PID management. Only visible when [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO) .
rPI
[Internal PID ref.]
Internal PID reference: As a process value.

*
rpE
[PID error]
*
PID error value.
rpF
[PID feedback]
*
PID feedback.
rpC
[PID speed ref.]
*
PID reference via graphic display terminal.
rpO
[PID Output]
PID output value with limitation.
Hz
2.2.3.6 Monitor Consumption (pEt-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > pEtpEt[MONIT. POWER TIME]
ApH
[Consumption]
rtH
ptH
rpr
nO
APH
rtH
PtH
CnFS
nO
CnF0
CnF1
CnF2
CFpS
*
nO
CFP1
CFP2
CFP3
ALGr
--1--212--3
1-3
-23
123
Unit
Wh, kWh,
MWh
Energy consumption in Wh, kWh or MWh (accumulated consumption).

[Run time]
s, min, h
Displays operating hours (configurable) in seconds, minutes, or hours (time the motor has been in operation).
[Elapsed time]
s, min, h
Displays operating hours (configurable) in seconds, minutes, or hours (time the motor has been in operation).
[Operating t. reset]
Resets the operating time.
[No] (nO): Reset process is not executed.
[Reset KWh] (APH): [Reset KWh](APH) Delete
[rst. runtime] (rtH): [rst. runtime](rtH) Delete
[rst. P On t.] (PtH): [rst. P On t.](PtH) Delete
[Config. active]
Displays the current configuration.
[Active](nO): Transition state (configuration is changed)
[Config. n0](CnF0): Configuration 0 active
[Utilised param. set]
State of the configuration parameters (Access possible when the parameter switch is activated see "Parameter switching (MLP-)" on page 216).
[Set N1] (CFP1): Parameter set 1 active
[Alarm groups]
Currently affected alarm group numbers. Alarm groups can be defined by the user under [INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG](I_O-)see "Inputs/ outputs
(I_O-)" on page 132.
[---] (---): No alarm groups affected
[1--] (1--): Alarm group 1
[-2-] (-2-): Alarm group 2
[12-] (12-): Alarm groups 1 and 2
[--3] (--3): Alarm group 3
[1-3] (1-3): Alarm groups 1 and 3
[-23] (-23): Alarm groups 2 and 3
[123] (123): Alarm groups 1, 2, and 3
91

2.2.3.7 Alarms (ALr-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > ALrALr[ALARMS]
List of currently configured alarms. When an alarm is activated, a
nOAL [No alarm] (nOAL)
PtCL [PTC Alarm] (PtCL)
EtF [External fault] (EtF)
USA [Undervoltage al.] (USA)
CtA [I attained] (CtA)
FtA [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA)
F2A [Freq. Th. 2 attain.] (F2A)
SrA [Freq.ref.att] (SrA)
tSA [Th.mot. att.] (tSA)
tS2 [Th. mot2. att.] (tS2)
tS3 [Th. mot3. att.] (tS3)
UPA [Undervoltage Pre-alarm] (UPA)
FLA [HSP attain.] (FLA)
tHA [Al. C drv] (tHA)
AG1 [Alarm group 1] (AG1)
PEE [PID error al] (PEE)
PFA [PID fdbk al] (PFA)
AP3 [AI2 Al. 4-20mA] (AP3)
SSA [Torque/current lim att.] (SSA)
tAd [Th.drv.att.] (tAd)
tJA [IGBT al.] (tJA)
bOA [Brake R. al.] (bOA)
ULA [Underload. Proc. Al.] (ULA)
OLA [Overload. Proc. Al.] (OLA)
rSdA [Rope slack alarm] (rSdA)
ttHA [High torque alarm] (ttHA)
ttLA [Low torque alarm] (ttLA)
dLdA [Dynamic load alarm] (dLdA)
FqLA [Freq. meter Alarm] (FqLA)
Unit
is displayed on the graphic display terminal.
2.2.3.8 [Other state] (SSt-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > SStSSt[OTHER STATE]
List of secondary states.
This menu is only displayed on the graphic display terminal.
FL [In motor fluxing] (FL )
PtCL [PTC Alarm] (PtCL)
FSt [Fast stop] (FSt)
CtA [I attained] (CtA)
FtA [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA)
F2A [Freq. Th. 2 attain] (F2A)
SrA [Freq.ref.att] (SrA)
tSA [Motor th. state att.] (tSA)
EtF [External fault alarm] (EtF)
AUtO [Automatic restart] (AUtO)
FtL [Remote] (FtL)
tUn [Auto tuning] (tUn)
USA [Undervoltage] (USA)
CnF1 [Config. 1 act.] (CnF1)
CnF2 [Config. 2 act.] (CnF2)
FLA [HSP attain.] (FLA)
AnA [Load calculated] (AnA)
CFP1 [Set 1 active](CFP1)
CFP2 [Set 2 active] (CFP2)
CFP3 [Set 3 active] (CFP3)
brS [In braking] (brS)
dbL [DC charged] (dbL)
ttHA [High torque alarm] (ttHA)
ttLA [Low torque alarm] (ttLA)
MFrd [Forward] (MFrd)
MrrS [Reverse assign.] (MrrS)
FqLA [Freq. meter Alarm] (FqLA)
92
Unit

2.2.3.9 Diagnostics
2.2.3.9.1 Fault History (pFH-)
Unit
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > dGt- > pFHpFH[FAULT HISTORY]
Displays the last 8 faults detected.
dP1
[Past fault 1]
Fault record 1 (1 last).
nOF [No fault] (nOF): No fault saved
ASF [Angle error hist.] (ASF): Magnetic wheel fault detected
bLF [Brake control] (bLF): 3-phase loss of the brake motor
brF [Brake contact] (brF): Brake protection fault detected
CFF [Incorrect config.] (CFF): Invalid configuration on power-up
CFI2 [Bad conf] (CFI2): Error in configuration transmission
CnF [Com. network] (CnF): Network Communication Interruptions
COF [CANopen com.] (COF): CANopen Communication Interruptions
CrF [Precharge] (CrF): Load relay fault
CSF [Ch. Sw. fault] (CSF): Error during channel switch
dCF [Diff. I fault] (dCF): Residual current fault
dLF [Dynamic load fault] (dLF): Dynamic load fault
EEF1 [Control Eeprom] (EEF1): EEprom control fault
EEF2 [Power Eeprom] (EEF2): EEprom supply fault
EPF1 [External fault LI/Bit] (EPF1): External fault at LI or local connection
EPF2 [External fault com.] (EPF2): External Communication Card Interruptions
FbE [FB fault] (FbE): Function Block Errors
FbES [FB stop fly.] (FbES): Function block stop fault
FCF1 [Out. contact. stuck] (FCF1): Output contactor: Contactor closed
FCF2 [Out. contact. open.] (FCF2): Output contactor: Contactor open
HCF [Cards pairing] (HCF): Error in hardware configuration
HdF [IGBT desaturation] (HdF): Hardware errors
ILF [Option int link] (ILF): Internal Communication Options Interruptions
InF1 [Rating error] (InF1): Unknown drive rating
InF2 [PWR Calib.] (InF2): Unknown or incompatible power board
InF3 [Internal com. link] (InF3): Interruption of internal serial communication
InF4 [Int.Mfg area] (InF4): Invalid industrialization zone
InF6 [Internal-option] (InF6): Unknown or incompatible option card
InF9 [Internal- I measure] (InF9): Volt metering fault
InFA [Internal-mains circuit] (InFA): Line phase loss fault
InFb [Internal- th. sensor] (InFb): Temperature sensor fault (OC or SC)
InFE [internal- CPU ] (InFE): CPU error (RAM, Flash, Task...)
LCF [Input cont.] (LCF): Input contactor fault
LFF3 [AI3 4-20mA loss] (LFF3): AI3 4-20mA loss
ObF [Overbraking] (ObF): Overbraking
OCF [Overcurrent] (OCF): Overcurrent
OHF [Drive overheat] (OHF): Drive overheat
OLC [Proc. overload flt] (OLC): Torque overload
OLF [Motor overload] (OLF): Motor overload
OPF1 [1 output phase loss] (OPF1): Motor phase 1 loss
OPF2 [3out ph loss] (OPF2): Motor phase 3 loss
OSF [Mains overvoltage] (OSF): Oversupply fault
OtFL [PTC fault] (OtFL): Motor overheat detected by PTCL: Standard product
PHF [Input phase loss] (PHF): Line supply input phase 1 loss
PtFL [LI6=PTC overheat] (PtFL): PTCL fault (OC or SC)
SAFF [Safety fault] (SAFF): Triggering of the safety function
SCF1 [Motor short circuit] (SCF1): Motor short circuit (hard detection)
SCF3 [Ground short circuit] (SCF3): Direct ground short (hardware detection)
SCF4 [IGBT short circuit] (SCF4): IGBT short circuit (hardware detection)
SCF5 [Motor short circuit] (SCF5): Load short circuit during Igon load sequence (hardware detection)
SLF1 [Modbus com.] (SLF1): Interruption of local, serial modbus communication
SLF2 [PC com.] (SLF2): Interruption of PC software communication
SLF3 [HMI com.] (SLF3): Interruption of external display terminal communication
SOF [Overspeed] (SOF): Overspeed
SPF [Speed fdback loss] (SPF): Encoder feedback signal missing
SrF [Torque time-out] (SrF): Timeout during speed regulation
SSF [Torque/current lim] (SSF): Speed current limiter fault
tJF [IGBT overheat] (tJF): IGBT overheat
tnF [Auto tuning] (tnF): Motor tuning fault
ULF [Proc. underload Flt] (ULF): Speed underload
USF [Undervoltage] (USF) Undervoltage
HS1
[Drive Status]
HMI status of fault record 1.
93

tUn
dCb
rdY
nSt
rUn
ACC
dEC
CLI
FSt
FLU
nLP
CtL
Obr
SOC
USA
tC
St
FA
YES
EP
FLt
SS1
SLS
StO
Ep1
IP1
CMP1
LCP1
rFp1
rtp1
ULp1
tHP1
dCC1
drC1
pFHdP2
dP3
dP4
dP5
dP6
dP7
dP8
94
[Auto tuning] (tUn): Auto-tuning

[DC Injection] (dCb): DC injection braking
[Ready] (rdY): Drive ready for operation
[Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop control
[Drv running] (rUn): Motor is in steady state, or run command and reference are zero
[In accel.] (ACC): Startup time
[In decel.] (dEC): Deceleration
[I Limit] (CLI): Current limit
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop.
[Motor fluxing] (FLU): Vector regulation is enabled
[no mains V.] (nLP): Control is switched on, but DC bus is not charged
[control.stop] (CtL): Controlled stop
[Dec. adapt.] (Obr): Adapted deceleration
[Output cut] (SOC): Standby output cut
[Undervoltage al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
[In mfg. test] (tC): TC indust. mode activated
[in autotest] (St): Self test is executed
[autotest err] (FA): Fault detected during self test
[Autotest ok] (YES): Self test OK
[eeprom test] (EP): Self test EEprom fault detected
[In fault] (FLt): The product has detected a fault.
[SS1 active] (SS1): SS1 safety function active
[SLS active] (SLS): SLS safety function active
[STO active] (StO): STO safety level active
[ETA state word]
DRIVECOM status register for Fault record 1 (identical to [ETA state word] (EtA) in see "Communication Map (CMM-)" on page 86).
[ETI state word]
Expanded status record for fault record 1 (see communications parameter file).
[Cmd word] Command register for Fault record 1 (identical to [Cmd word])
[I motor]
A
Calculated motor current for Fault record 1 (identical to [I motor](LCr))
[Output frequency]
Hz
Calculated motor frequency for Fault record 1 (identical to [Output frequency] (rFr))
[Elapsed time]
h
Operating time for Fault record 1 (identical to [Elapsed time] (rtH))
[Mains voltage]
V
Mains line supply voltage for Fault record 1 (identical to [Mains voltage](ULn))
%
Motor thermal state for Fault record 1 (identical to [Motor thermal state] (tHr))
[Command Channel]
Command channel for Fault record 1 (identical to [Command Channel] (CMdC))
[Channel ref. active]
Reference channel for Fault record 1 (identical to [Command Channel] (CMdC))
[FAULT HISTORY] (continued)
(continued) Displays the last 8 faults detected.
[Past fault 2]
Identical to [Past fault 1] (dP1)
[Past fault 3]
Identical to [Past fault 1](dP1)
[Past fault 4]
[Past fault 5]
[Past fault 6]
[Past fault 7]
[Past fault 8]

2.2.3.9.2 Current fault (PFL-)
Unit
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > dGt- > PFLPFL[CURRENT FAULT LIST]
nOF [No fault] (nOF): No fault saved
ASF [Angle error hist.] (ASF): Magnetic wheel fault detected
bLF [Brake control] (bLF): 3-phase loss of the brake motor
brF [Brake contact] (brF): Brake protection fault detected
CFF [Incorrect config.] (CFF): Invalid configuration on power-up
CFI2 [Bad conf] (CFI2): Error in configuration transmission
CnF [Com. network] (CnF): Network Communication Interruptions
COF [CANopen com.] (COF): CANopen Communication Interruptions
CrF [Precharge] (CrF): Load relay fault
CSF [Ch. Sw. fault] (CSF): Error during channel switch
dCF [Diff. I fault] (dCF): Residual current fault
dLF [Dynamic load fault] (dLF): Dynamic load fault
EEF1 [Control Eeprom] (EEF1): EEprom control fault
EEF2 [Power Eeprom] (EEF2): EEprom supply fault
EPF1 [External fault LI/Bit] (EPF1): External fault at LI or local connection
EPF2 [External fault com.] (EPF2): External Communication Card Interruptions
FbE [FB fault] (FbE): Function Block Errors
FbES [FB stop fly.] (FbES): Function block stop fault
FCF1 [Out. contact. stuck] (FCF1): Output contactor: Contactor closed
FCF2 [Out. contact. open.] (FCF2): Output contactor: Contactor open
HCF [Cards pairing] (HCF): Error in hardware configuration
HdF [IGBT desaturation] (HdF): Hardware errors
ILF [Option int link] (ILF): Internal Communication Options Interruptions
InF1 [Rating error] (InF1): Unknown drive rating
InF2 [PWR Calib.] (InF2): Unknown or incompatible power board
InF3 [Internal com. link] (InF3): Interruption of internal serial communication
InF4 [Int.Mfg area] (InF4): Invalid industrialization zone
InF6 [Internal-option] (InF6): Unknown or incompatible option card
InF9 [Internal- I measure] (InF9): Volt metering fault
InFA [Internal-mains circuit] (InFA): Line phase loss fault
InFb [Internal- th. sensor] (InFb): Temperature sensor fault (OC or SC)
InFE [internal- CPU ] (InFE): CPU error (RAM, Flash, Task...)
LCF [Input cont.] (LCF): Input contactor fault
LFF3 [AI3 4-20mA loss] (LFF3): AI3 4-20mA loss
ObF [Overbraking] (ObF): Overbraking
OCF [Overcurrent] (OCF): Overcurrent
OHF [Drive overheat] (OHF): Drive overheat
OLC [Proc. overload flt] (OLC): Torque overload
OLF [Motor overload] (OLF): Motor overload
OPF1 [1 output phase loss] (OPF1): Motor phase 1 loss
OPF2 [3out ph loss] (OPF2): Motor phase 3 loss
OSF [Mains overvoltage] (OSF): Oversupply fault
OtFL [PTC fault] (OtFL): Motor overheat detected by PTCL: Standard product
PHF [Input phase loss] (PHF): Line supply input phase 1 loss
PtFL [LI6=PTC overheat] (PtFL): PTCL fault (OC or SC)
SAFF [Safety fault] (SAFF): Triggering of the safety function
SCF1 [Motor short circuit] (SCF1): Motor short circuit (hardware detection)
SCF3 [Ground short circuit] (SCF3): Direct ground short (hardware detection)
SCF4 [IGBT short circuit] (SCF4): IGBT short circuit (hardware detection)
SCF5 [Motor short circuit] (SCF5): Load short circuit during Igon load sequence (hardware detection)
SLF1 [Modbus com.] (SLF1): Interruption of local, serial modbus communication
SLF2 [PC com.] (SLF2): Interruption of PC software communication
SLF3 [HMI com.] (SLF3): Interruption of external display terminal communication
SOF [Overspeed] (SOF): Overspeed
SPF [Speed fdback loss] (SPF): Encoder feedback signal missing
SrF [Torque time-out] (SrF): Timeout during speed regulation
SSF [Torque/current lim] (SSF): Speed current limiter fault
tJF [IGBT overheat] (tJF): IGBT overheat
tnF [Auto tuning] (tnF): Motor tuning fault
ULF [Proc. underload Flt] (ULF): Speed underload
USF [Undervoltage] (USF): Undervoltage
2.2.3.9.3 Additional fault info (AFI-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > dGt- > AFIAFI[ADDIT. FAULT INFO]
Additional fault information
CnF
[Com. network]
Fault code for the communication option card.
This parameter is read-only. The fault code stays saved in the parameter, even after the issue has been resolved.
Separating the drive from the power supply and reconnecting it will reset the parameter.
The values of these parameters depend on the network card. Read the service manual for the corresponding card.
see "Bluetooth (btH-)" on page 256
ILF1
[Internal link fault 1]
Interruption of communication between option card 1 and the drive.
This parameter is read-only. The fault code stays saved in the parameter, even after the issue has been resolved.
Separating the drive from the power supply and reconnecting it will reset the parameter.
Unit
95

2.2.3.9.4 Service message (dGt-)
Code
Name / Description
Unit
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > dGt
dGt[DIAGNOSTICS] (continued)
tAC
[IGBT alarm counter]
Transistor alarm time-counter (Length of time the "IGBT temperature" alarm has been active)
SEr[SERVICE MESSAGE]
see "User parameters (CUP-)" on page 267
tAC2
[Min. freq time]
Transistor alarm time-counter for minimum switching frequency (Length of time the "IGBT temperature" alarm has been active, after the drive
automatically reduced the switching frequency to the minimum value).
rFLt
[Reset past faults]
Resets all previously detected resettable faults
nO [No] (nO): Reset disabled
YES [YES] (YES): RESET is executed
96
Code
Name / Description
Unit
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > MOn- > COdCOd[PASSWORD]
HMI access code
If you have lost or forgotten your password, contact B&R.
CSt
[State]
Drive state (locked/unlocked) Information parameter, cannot be modified.
LC [Locked] (LC): The drive is locked by a password.
ULC [Unlocked] (ULC): The drive is not locked by a password.
COd
[PIN code 1]
Confidential access code.
Enables protection of the drive configuration with an access code.
When access is protected by a code, only the parameters in the [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) and [1.1 SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-) menus can
be called up.
The MODE key can be used to switch between menus.
Note:
Make a note of the code before entering it.
OFF [Off] (OFF): No access code.
Enter a code (2 to 9,999) to lock access. The displayed number can be raised via the jog dial. Then press ENT. [On] (On) is shown on
the screen and indicates that access has been locked.
On [On] (On): Access is locked by a code (2 to 9,999).
To remove the access lock, enter the code (raise the displayed number via the jog dial) and then press the ENT key. The code remains
hidden, and access is granted until the next time the drive is switched off. The next time the drive is switched on, access is once again
locked.
When an invalid code is entered, the display switches to [On] (On). Access remains locked.
Access is granted (the code is displayed on the screen).
To reactivate the lock with the same code after access has been granted, restore the [On] (On) setting via the jog dial, and then press the
ENT key. [On] (On) stays hidden and indicates that access has been locked.
To lock access with a new code after access has been granted, enter the new code (raise the displayed number via the jog dial), and then
press the ENT key. [On] (On) is shown on the screen and indicates that access has been locked.
To clear the lock after access has been granted, restore the [Off] (OFF) setting via the jog dial, and then press the ENT key. [Off] (OFF)
is shown once again. Access is unlocked and remains so even after the next restart.
COd2
[PIN code 2]
*
Access code 2 Displayed when [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (Epr) .
OFF The [Off] (OFF) value indicates that no password was set for [Unlocked] (ULC) .
On The [On] (On) value indicates that the drive configuration is protected, and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it.
As soon as the correct code is entered, it remains on the screen, and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is switched off.
8888
PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to B&R Product Support.
ULr
[Upload rights]
ULr0 [Permitted] (ULr0): This means that the graphic display terminal can save the entire configuration (password, protection functions, configuration).
When editing the configuration, only unprotected parameters are accessible.
dLr
ULr1 [Not allowed] (ULr1): Means that the graphic display terminal cannot save the configuration.
[Download rights]
dLr0 [Locked drv] (dLr0): Drive locked: means that the configuration can be downloaded only to a locked drive whose configuration has the same
password. If the passwords are different, the download is not permitted.
dLr1 [Unlock. drv] (dLr1): Unlocked drive: means that the configuration can be downloaded only to a drive that is not protected by an active password.
[Not allowed] (dLr2): Not allowed: the configuration cannot be downloaded.
dLr2 [Lock/unlock] (dLr3): Locked and unlocked: Download is permissible in case 0 or case 1.
dLr3
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu.When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted
97
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
2.2.3.10 Access code (COd-)
2.3 Configuration Mode (ConF)

2.3.1 Introduction
Configuration mode includes 4 parts:
1. The "Main menu" contains up to 25 parameters for user-specific configuration via the graphic display terminal.
2. store/recall parameter set: these 2 functions are used to store and recall customer settings.
3. [Macro configuration] (CFG) This parameter allows loading of preset values for applications (see page 70).
4. ALL PARAMETERS: This menu provides access to all other parameters. It includes 10 sub-menus:
98
[SIMPLY START MENU] (SIM-), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104
[SETTINGS] (SEt-), see "Configuration parameters" on page 106
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117
[INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-), see "Inputs/ outputs (I_O-)" on page 132
[COMMAND] (CtL-), see "Control parameters" on page 158
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-), see "Ref. switch (rEF-)" on page 166
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-), see "Fault management" on page 233
[COMMUNICATION] (COM-), see "With integrated display terminal" on page 255
[ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC), see "Access level (LAC)" on page 259

The parameters displayed are offered as examples only.
COnF
ENT
ESC
ESC = ESC
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
= ENT
MYMn
FCSCFG
FULL
ENT
ESC
SIMSEtdrCI_OCtLFbMFUnFLtCOMLAC
99

2.3.3 Menu
2.3.3.1 My Menu (MYMn-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > MYMN
MYMn
[MY MENU]
This menu contains the parameters selected in the [3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] (dCF-), see "Display config. (dCF)" on page 266menu.
2.3.3.2 Factory setting (FCS-)

Code
Name / Description
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FCS
FCS[FACTORY SETTINGS]
FCSI
[Config. Source]
*
(InI)
Choice of source configuration. When the configuration switching function is enabled, [Config. n1] (CFG1) and [Config. n2] (CFG2) can be
accessed.
Note:
To load previously saved drive presets ([Config. n1] (Str1) or [Config. n2] (Str2), select the source configuration [Config. Source]
(FCSI) = [Config. n1] (CFG1) or [Config. n2] (CFG2) , followed by a factory setting [Goto FACTORY SETTINGS] (GFS) = [YES]
(YES).
InI
CFG1
CFG2
FrY-
[Macro configuration] (InI): Factory configuration; return to the selected macro configuration
[Config. n1] (CFG1): Configuration 1
[Config. n2] (CFG2): Configuration 2
[PARAMETER GROUP LIST]
List of menus to be loaded Additional information on multiple selection for the integrated display terminal see "Description of the HMI" on page
72 and for the graphic display terminal see "Optional graphic display terminal" on page 64.
Note:
In factory configuration and after a return to "factory settings", [PARAMETER GROUP LIST] will be empty.
ALL [ALL] (ALL): All parameters (the function block program is also deleted)
drM [Drive Configuration] (drM): The [1 DRIVE MENU] (drI-) menu without [COMMUNICATION] (COM-). in the [2.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu returns
[Return std name] (GSP)see "User parameters (CUP-)" on page 267 to [No] (nO).
MOt [Motor param] (MOt): Motor parameters see "Load/ Save as (trA)" on page 272.
The following selections can only be accessed if [Config. Source] (FCSI) = [Macro configuration] (InI).
COM [Comm. menu] (COM): The [COMMUNICATION] (COM-) menu without [Scan. IN1 address] (nMA1) to [Scan. IN8 address] (nMA8) or [Scan.Out1
address] (nCA1) to [Scan.Out4 address] (nCA8).
dIS [Display config.] (dIS): The [3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.] (MCF-).
GFS
[Goto FACTORY SETTINGS]
*
2s
Danger!

Check that the modification of the current configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used.
It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has previously been selected.
nO [No] (nO): No
YES [Yes] (YES): The parameter changes back to [No] (nO) as soon as the operation is complete.
SCSI
[Save config]
[No](nO)
*
The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection. If the configuration in question is, for example, [Config. n0] (Str0), then only
[Config. n1] (Str1) and [Config. n2] (Str2) are displayed. The parameter switches back to [No] (nO) as soon as the operation is completed.
nO [No] (nO): No
Str0 [Config. n0] (Str0): The ENT key must be pressed and held for two seconds.
*
2s
100
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu.When the parameters can also be accessed and
adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in these menus, on the pages indicated,
to aid programming.

2.3.3.3 Macro configuration (CFG)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > CFG
CFG
*
2s
Factory setting
[Start/Stop] (StS)

Check that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used.
Note:
When using the ACOPOSinverter P74 with POWERLINK and the B&R Automation Studio, the standard [Start/Stop] (StS) setting
cannot be changed
StS
HdG
HSt
GEn
PId
nEt
*
2s
[Start/Stop] (StS): Start/Stop

[M. handling] (HdG): Handling
[Hoisting] (HSt): Hoisting
[Gen. Use] (GEn): General use
[PID regulator] (PId): PID controller
[Network C.] (nEt): Communication bus
to aid programming.
Example of total return to factory settings

[Config. Source] (FCSI) = [Macro configuration] (InI)
[PARAMETER GROUP LIST] (FrY-) = [ALL] (ALL)
[Goto FACTORY SETTINGS] (GFS) = [Yes] (YES)
101
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Danger!

2.3.3.3.1 Assignment of the inputs - outputs
Input/output
[AI1]
[Start/Stop]
[Ref.1 channel]
[M. handling]
[Ref.1 channel]
[AI2]
[AI3]
[AO1]
[R1]
[R2]
LI1 (2-wire)
LI2 (2-wire)
LI3 (2-wire)
LI4 (2-wire)
LI5 (2-wire)
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No fault]
[No]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[Summing ref. 2]
[No]
[No]
[No fault]
[No]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[2 preset speeds]
[4 preset speeds]
[8 preset speeds]
LI6 (2-wire)
LI1 (3-wire)
LI2 (3-wire)
LI3 (3-wire)
LI4 (3-wire)
LI5 (3-wire)
LI6 (3-wire)
[No]
[Run]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[Fault reset]
[Run]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[2 preset speeds]
[4 preset speeds]
[8 preset speeds]
[LO1]
[No]
[No]
F1 key
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
F2, F3, F4 keys
[Gen. Use]
[Ref.1 channel]
[Hoisting]
[Ref.1 channel]
[Summing ref. 2]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No fault]
[No fault]
[No]
[Brake control]
[Forward]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[Reverse assign.]
[Jog]
[Fault reset]
[Fault reset]
[External fault]
[TORQUE
LIMI- [No]
TATION]
[No]
[No]
[Run]
[Run]
[Forward]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[Reverse assign.]
[Jog]
[Fault reset]
[Fault reset]
[External fault]
[TORQUE
LIMI- [No]
TATION]
[No]
[No]
Graphic display terminal keys
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[PID regulator]
[Ref.1 channel]
[PID speed ref.]
[PID feedback]
[No]
[No]
[No fault]
[No]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[PID integral reset]
[2 preset PID ref.]
[4 preset PID ref.]
[Network C.]
[Ref.2 channel] ([Ref.1
channel] = Integrated
modbus) (1)
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No fault]
[No]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[Ref. 2 switching]
[Fault reset]
[No]
[No]
[Run]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[2 preset PID ref.]
[4 preset PID ref.]
[No]
[Run]
[Forward]
[Reverse assign.]
[Ref. 2 switching]
[Fault reset]
[No]
[No]
[No]
[No]
Control via graphic display terminal

[No]
[No]
In 3-wire control, the assignment of inputs LI1 to LI6 shifts.
(1) When starting up with the integrated modbus, [Modbus Address] (Add), see "With integrated display terminal"
on page 255 must first be configured.
Note:
These assignments are reinitialized every time the macro configuration changes.
102

2.3.3.3.2 Other configurations and settings
Parameters in addition to I/O configuration are assigned only in the "Hoisting" macro configuration.
[Movement type] (bSt) = [Hoisting] (UEr), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183
[Brake contact] (bCI) = [No] (nO), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183
[Brake impulse] (bIP) = [Yes] (YES), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183
[Brake release I FW] (Ibr) = [Rated mot. current] (nCr), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183
[Brake Release time] (brt) = 0.5 s, see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183
[Brake release freq.] (bIr) = [Auto] (AUtO), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183
[Brake release freq] (bEn) = [Auto] (AUtO), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183
[Brake Release time] (bEt) = 0.5 s, see "Parameter for the braking logic" on page 186
[Engage at reversal] (bEd) = [No] (nO), see "Parameter for the braking logic" on page 186
[Jump at reversal] (JdC) = [Auto] (AUtO), see "Parameter for the braking logic" on page 186
[Time to restart] (ttr) = 0 s, see "Parameter for the braking logic" on page 186
[Current ramp time] (brr) = 0 s, see "Brake control logic expert parameters" on page 187
[Low speed] (LSP) = Motor slip calculated by the drive, see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104
[Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [Yes] (YES), see "Motor thermal protection (tHt-)" on page 239. This parameter can no longer be changed.
[Catch on the fly] (FLr) = [No] (nO), see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237. This parameter can no
longer be changed.
Return to factory setting:
Returning to the factory configuration via [Config. Source] (FCSI) = [Macro configuration] (InI), see "Factory setting
(FCS-)" on page 100, results in a return to the selected macro configuration. The [Macro configuration] (CFG)
parameter remains unchanged; however [Customized macro] (CCFG) disappears.
Note:
The factory settings correspond to [Macro configuration] (CFG) = [Start/Stop] (StS), meaning the macro
configuration set in the factory.
2.3.3.3.3 Example diagrams for use with the macro configurations
Circuit diagram
[Hoisting] (HSt)
Run forward
(Ascend)
Run reverse
(Descend)
Electromagnetic brake
(1) When no safety function is present, a contact to the safety module must be integrated into the brake control
circuit, so that the brakes will be safely engaged when the "Safe Torque Off" safety function is activated (see wiring
diagram in the installation manual).
103
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Hoisting:

2.3.3.4 All parameters
2.3.3.4.1 Simply start menu (SIM-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > SIM
SIM[SIMPLY START MENU]
tCC
[2/3 wire control]
2s
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[2 wire] (2C)
Danger!

If these parameters are changed, the [Reverse assign.] (rrS) and [2 wire type] (tCt) parameters and all logic input assignments
return to their standard configuration.
Check that this change is compatible with the switch diagram used.
[2/3 wire control] (tCC), see "Inputs/ outputs (I_O-)" on page 132.
2C [2 wire] (2C)
2-wire control (level controlled): This is the input state (0 or 1) or edge (0 to 1 or 1 to 0), which controls running or stopping.
Example of a "Sink" circuit:
+24 LI1 LIx
LI1: Run forward

LIx: Run reverse
3C
[3 wire] (3C)
3-wire control (pulse commands): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to command starting, a "stop" pulse is sufficient to command
stopping.
+24 LI1 LI2 LIx
LI1: Stop
LI2: Run forward
LIx: Run reverse
CFG
* 2s
[Start/Stop] (StS)
Danger!
Check that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used.
StS
HdG
HSt
GEn
PId
nEt
CCFG
*
nO
YES
bFr
50
60
IPL
*
nO
YES
nPr
*
104
[Macro configuration] (CFG), see "Macro configuration (CFG)" on page 101.

[Start/Stop] (StS): Start/Stop
[M. handling] (HdG): Handling
[Hoisting] (HSt): Hoisting
[Gen. Use] (GEn): General use
[PID regulator] (PId): PID controller
[Network C.] (nEt): Communication bus
[Customized macro]
Read-only parameter, only visible if at least one macro configuration parameter has been modified.
[No] (nO): No
[Yes] (YES): Yes
[50Hz IEC] (50)
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters:
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS)See below. [High speed] (HSP), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104, [Freq. threshold] (Ftd), see "DRI-CONFFULL-SET - rPG to rP4" on page 112, [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Max frequency] (tFr), [Rated mot. current] (nCr), [Rated motor speed] (nSP),
[Motor 1 Cosinus phi] (COS), see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118 and [Brake release I FW] (Ibr).
[50Hz IEC] (50): 50 Hz drive
[60Hz NEMA] (60): 60 Hz drive
[Input phase loss]
according to drive
power
This parameter is only accessible in this menu when using 3-phase drives.
If one phase fails, the drive switches to the [Input phase loss] (PHF) fault mode. If two or three phases fail, the drive continues operating until an
undervoltage fault is triggered (the drive triggers [Input phase loss] (PHF) when one line supply phase fails and results in a power drop). [Input
phase loss] (IPL), see "Motor thermal protection (tHt-)" on page 239.
[Ignore] (nO): Ignore fault; to be used when the drive is supplied via a single phase supply or by the DC bus.
[Freewheel] (YES): Fault with freewheel stop.
[Rated motor power]
according to drive
power
Nominal motor power according to the nameplate; in kW when [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [50Hz IEC] (50); in HP when [Standard mot. freq]
(bFr) = [60Hz NEMA] (60).
[Rated motor power] (nPr), see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118.
nCr
*
FrS
*
nSP
*
[Rated motor volt.]
100 to 480 V
according to drive
power
Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate. 8I74S200xxx.01P-1: 100 to 240 V 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1: 200 to 480 V [Rated motor volt.] (UnS),
see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118 .
[Rated mot. current]
0.25 to 1.5 In (1)
according to drive
power [Standard mot.
freq] (bFr)
Rated motor current given on the nameplate. [Rated mot. current] (nCr), see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118.
[Rated motor freq.]
10 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate.
The factory setting is 50 Hz, but is replaced with a preset of 60 Hz when [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
This parameter is not available when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117 is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn). [Rated motor
freq.] (FrS), see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118.
[Rated motor speed]
0 to 65,535 RPM
according to drive
power
Rated motor speed given on the nameplate
This parameter is not available when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) .
[Rated motor speed] (nSP), see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118.
0 to 9999 rpm then 10.00 to 60.00 krpm on the integrated display terminal.
If, rather than the rated speed, the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, calculate the rated speed as follows:
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x100 - slip in %

100
or
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x 50 - slip in Hz
50
(50 Hz motors)
or
tFr
tUn
tUS
tAb
PEnd
PrOG
FAIL
dOnE
StUn
tAb
MEAS
CUS
ItH
ACC
dEC
LSP
HSP
(1)
(2)

60
(60 Hz motors)
[Max frequency]
10 to 599 Hz
60 Hz
The factory setting is 60 Hz, but is replaced with a preset of 72 Hz when [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
The maximum value is limited by the following conditions:
It should not exceed the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) by 10-fold. [Max frequency] (tFr), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117.
[Auto tuning]
[No] (nO)
For asynchronous motors see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118 .
For synchronous motors see "Synchronous motor parameters (SYN-)" on page 122.
[Auto tuning status]
[Not done] (tAb)
This parameter is not saved when the drive is switched off. It shows the auto-tuning state since the last operation. [Auto tuning status] (tUS),
see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118.
[Not done] (tAb): The auto-tuning was not executed.
[Pending] (PEnd): Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet executed.
[active] (PrOG): The auto-tuning is executed.
[Failed] (FAIL): The auto-tuning has failed.
[done] (dOnE): The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor.
[Tune selection]
[Default] (tAb)
[Tune selection] (StUn), see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118.
[Default] (tAb): The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
[Measure] (MEAS): The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor.
[Customized] (CUS): The manually set stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
0.2 to 1.5 In (1)
according to drive
power
Motor thermal protection current, to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate. [Mot. therm. current] (ItH), see "Configuration parameters" on page 106.
[Acceleration]
0.00 to 6000 s (2)
3.0 s
Time required to accelerate from 0 up to [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104). To achieve ramp repeatability,
the value of this parameter must be set according to the application options. [Acceleration] (ACC), see "Configuration parameters" on page 106.
[Deceleration]
0.00 to 6000 s (2)
3.0 s
Time required to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (page 74) down to 0. To achieve ramp repeatability, the value of this parameter
must be set according to the application options. [Deceleration] (dEC), see "Configuration parameters" on page 106.
[Low speed]
0 to 599 Hz
0
Motor frequency at minimum reference, can be set between 0 and [High speed] (HSP). [Low speed] (LSP), see "Configuration parameters" on
page 106.
[High speed]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low speed] (LSP) and [Max frequency] (tFr). The factory setting changes to 60 Hz
when [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [60Hz NEMA] (60). [High speed] (HSP), see "Configuration parameters" on page 106.
In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 s according to [Ramp increment](Inr), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168.
*
2s
to aid programming.
105
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
UnS
*

2.3.3.4.2 Settings (Set-)
With integrated display terminal
Danger!
Check that the changes in the behavior of the motor do not present any danger. We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes.
Via the menu COnF
= ENT
ESC
= ESC
FULL
ENT
ESC
ESC
SIM-
Set-
ENT
ESC
SETTINGS
drC-
ESC
LAC-
The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
106

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > SET
Inr
[Ramp increment]
0.1
This parameter applies to [Acceleration] (ACC), [Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2) and [Deceleration 2] (dE2).
[Ramp increment] (Inr), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168 .
0.01 [0.01]: Ramp 99.99 seconds
0.1 [0.1]: Ramp 999.9 seconds
1 [1]: Ramp 6,000 seconds
ACC
[Acceleration]
0.00 to 6000 s (1)
3.0 s
Time required to accelerate from 0 up to [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104. To achieve ramp repeatability,
the value of this parameter must be set according to the application options.
[Acceleration] (ACC), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168 .
dEC
[Deceleration]
0.00 to 6000 s (1)
3.0 s
Time required to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104 down to 0. Make sure that this value
is compatible with the drive's moment of inertia.
[Deceleration] (dEC), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168 .
AC2
[Acceleration 2]
0.00 to 6000 s (1)
5s
*
the value of this parameter is set according to the application options.
[Acceleration 2] (AC2), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168.
dE2
[Deceleration 2]
0.00 to 6000 s (1)
5s
*
Time required to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104 down to 0. Make sure that this value
is compatible with the drive's moment of inertia. [Deceleration 2] (dE2), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168.
tA1
[Begin Acc round]
0 to 100%
10%
*
Rounding of the start of the acceleration ramp in % of ramp time [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2). Available when [Ramp switching]
(rPt) = [Customized] (CUS). [Begin Acc round] (tA1), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168.
tA2
[End Acc round]
0 to 100%
10%
*
Rounding of the end of the acceleration ramp in % of ramp time [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2).
adjustable from 0 to 100% - [Begin Acc round] (tA1).
Available when [Ramp switching] (rPt) = [Customized] (CUS). [End Acc round] (tA2), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168 .
tA3
[Begin Dec round]
0 to 100%
10%
*
Rounding of the start of the deceleration ramp in % of ramp time [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2). Available when [Ramp switching]
(rPt) = [Customized] (CUS). [Begin Dec round] (tA3), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168 .
tA4
[End Dec round]
0 to 100%
10%
*
Rounding of the start of the deceleration ramp in % of ramp time [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2).
Available when [Ramp switching] (rPt) = [Customized] (CUS). [Begin Dec round] (tA3), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168.
LSP
[Low speed]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
Motor frequency at minimum reference, can be set between 0 and [High speed] (HSP), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104. [Low speed]
(LSP), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104.
HSP
[High speed]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low speed] (LSP) and [Max frequency] (tFr). The factory setting changes to 60 Hz
when [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [60Hz NEMA] (60). [High speed] (HSP), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104.
HSP2
[High speed 2]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
*
Available when [2 High speed] (SH2) is not set to [No] (nO) .
[High speed 2] (HSP2), see "HSP switching (CHS-)" on page 230.
HSP3
[High speed 3]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
*
Available when [4 High speed] (SH4) is not set to [No] (nO) . [High speed 3] (HSP3), see "HSP switching (CHS-)" on page 230.
HSP4
[High speed 4]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
*
Available when [4 High speed] (SH4) is not set to [No] (nO) . [High speed 4] (HSP4), see "HSP switching (CHS-)" on page 230.
ItH
0.2 to 1.5 In (2)
according to drive
*
power
Motor thermal protection current, to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate. [Mot. therm. current] (ItH), see "Simply start menu
(SIM-)" on page 104.
UFr
[IR compensation]
0 to 200%
100%
*
IR compensation [IR compensation] (UFr), see "Motor control (continued)" on page 126 .
SLP
[Slip compensation]
0 to 300%
100%
*
Slip compensation [Slip compensation] (SLP), see "Motor control (continued)" on page 126.
SFC
[K speed loop filter]
0 to 100
65
*
Speed loop filter coefficient. [K speed loop filter] (SFC), see "Motor control (continued)" on page 126.
SIt
[Speed time integral]
1 to 65,535 ms
63 ms
*
Speed loop integral time constant. [Speed time integral] (SIt), see "Motor control (continued)" on page 126.
SPG
[Speed prop. gain]
0 to 1,000%
40%
*
Speed loop proportional gain [Speed prop. gain] (SPG), see "Motor control (continued)" on page 126.
SPGU
[UF inertia comp.]
0 to 1,000%
40%
*
Inertial factor [UF inertia comp.] (SPGU), see "Motor control (continued)" on page 126.
(1)
(2)
Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168.
In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.
107
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Configuration parameters

Parameter settings for [K speed loop filter] (SFC), [Speed prop. gain] (SPG) and [Speed time integral] (SIt)
Warning!
Control failure
In high-inertial applications, choosing the wrong speed parameters can cause ramps that are inappropriate for the application.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage!
The following parameters are inaccessible when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page
117is set to [SVC V] (UUC), [Sync. mot.] (SYn) or [Energy Sav.] (nLd) .
General case: Configuration with [K speed loop filter] (SFC)= 0
The regulator is an "IP" type with filtering of the speed reference, for applications requiring flexibility and stability
(hoisting or high inertia, for example).
[Speed prop. gain] (SPG) affects the speed overshoot.
[Speed time integral] (SIt) affects bandwidth and response time.
Initial response
Reduction in SIT
Reference division
Reduction in SIT
Reference division
Reference division
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.2
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
0.8
500
0.6
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Time in ms
Initial response
500
Increase in SPG
Reference division
Time in ms
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.2
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Time in ms
108
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Reference division
Reference division
100
150
Time in ms
50
100
Increase in SPG
50
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Time in ms
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Time in ms

Special case: Parameter [K speed loop filter] (SFC) not equal to 0
When set to 100 as described above the regulator is a PI type, without filtering of the speed reference.
Settings between 0 and 100 will obtain an intermediate function between the settings below and those on
the previous page.
Example: Configuration with [K speed loop filter] (SFC) = 100
[Speed prop. gain] (SPG) affects bandwidth and response time.
[Speed time integral] (SIt) affects the speed overshoot.
Initial response
Reduction in SIT
Reference division
Reduction in SIT
Reference division
Reference division
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.2
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Time in ms
Initial response
500
Increase in SPG
Reference division
Time in ms
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.2
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Time in ms
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Reference division
Reference division
100
150
Time in ms
50
100
Increase in SPG
50
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Time in ms
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Time in ms
109
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
This parameter must be reserved for specific applications that require a short response time (trajectory positioning
or servo control).

Configuration parameters (continued)
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
dCF
[Ramp divider]
0 to 10
4
*
Shortened deceleration ramp time [Ramp divider] (dCF), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170.
IdC
[DC inject. level 1]
0.1 to 1.41 In (1)
0.64 In (1)
*
Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode. [DC inject. level 1] (IdC), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on
page 170.
tdI
[DC injection time 1]
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
*
Maximum duration of current injection [DC inject. level 1] (IdC). After this time interval has elapsed, the DC injection changes to [DC inject. level
2] (IdC2). See [DC injection time 1](td1), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170.
IdC2
0.1 In to 1.41 In (1)
0.5 In (1)
*
Current injection, which, after [DC injection time 1] (tdI) has elapsed, is activated or chosen as a stop mode via the logic input. [DC inject. level
2] (IdC2), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170 .
tdC
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
*
Maximum duration of injection [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2), when the injection is chosen as a stop mode. [DC injection time 2] (tdC), see "Stop
mode (Stt-)" on page 170.
SdC1
0 to 1.2 In (1)
0.7 In (1)
*
Caution!

Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
tdC1
*
Level of standstill DC injection current. [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO) . see "Auto DC injection (continued from the parameter
overview)" on page 172.
[Auto DC inj. time 1]
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
Caution!
Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor.
Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking.
SdC2
*
Standstill injection time. The parameter can be used if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO) .
If [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) , this time corresponds to the zero speed
maintenance time. see "Auto DC injection (continued from the parameter overview)" on page 172.
0 to 1.2 In (1)
0.5 In (1)
Caution!
tdC2
*
2. Level of standstill DC injection current. This parameter can be used if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO) . see "Auto DC injection
(continued from the parameter overview)" on page 172.
0 to 30 s
0s
Caution!
SFr
110
2. Standstill injection time. This parameter can be used if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is set to [Yes] (YES) . see "Auto DC injection (continued from
the parameter overview)" on page 172 .
[Switching freq.]
2 to 16 kHz
4.0 kHz
Caution!
On model 8I74S200xxx.01P-1 drives using nominal values, if the EMC filters are disconnected (operation on an IT system), the
drive's switching frequency must not exceed 4 kHz.
Switching frequency setting. see "Motor control (continued)" on page 126.

Adjustment range: The maximum value is limited to 4 kHz when the [Motor surge limit] (SUL), see "Motor control (continued)" on page 126
parameter has been configured.
Note:
In the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once the
temperature returns to normal.
CLI
*
[Current Limitation]
0 to 1.5 In (1)
1.5 In (1)
Caution!
Risk of damage to the motor and the drive
Make sure that the motor will withstand this current, especially when using a synchronous motor with permanent magnets, due to the risk of demagnetization.
Ensure that the profile action corresponds to the derating curves in the user manual.

Used to limit the motor current. see "Current limit (CLI-)" on page 206.
Note:
If the setting is lower than 0.25 In, the drive can lock in the [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) fault mode, if it has been activated see
"Motor thermal protection (tHt-)" on page 239. If it is beneath the motor's no-load current, the motor is unable to run.
CL2
*
[I Limit. 2 value]
0 to 1.5 In (1)
1.5 In (1)
Caution!

see "Current limit (CLI-)" on page 206.
Note:
FLU
*
2s
[Motor fluxing]
[No] (FnO)
Danger!
If [Motor fluxing] (FLU) = [continuous] (FCt), the drive automatically builds up magnetic flux.
Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.
Caution!
This parameter is available when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117is not set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) .
In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup, magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor.
In [continuous] (FCt) mode, the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up.
In [Non cont.] (FnC) mode, fluxing occurs when the motor starts up.
The flux current value is greater than [Rated mot. current] (nCr) during build-up of the magnetic flux, after which it is regulated to the flux current
value of the motor. see "Fluxing by LI (FLI-)" on page 182.
111
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

FnC [Not cont.] (FnC): Non-continuous mode
FCt [continuous] (FCt): Continuous mode. This option is not possible when [Auto DC injection] (AdC), see "Auto DC injection (continued from the
parameter overview)" on page 172is set to [Yes] (YES) or when [Type of stop] (Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170is set to [Freewheel]
FnO (nSt) .
[No] (FnO): Function inactive. This option is not possible when [Brake assignment] (bLC), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183 is not
set to [No] (nO) .
tLS
[Low speed time out]
0 to 999.9 s
0s
Maximum operation time with [Low speed] (LSP), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104.
Following operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor restarts when the speed reference is greater
than LSP and if a run command is still present. see "PID controller parameters" on page 199.
Note:
A value of 0 indicates an unlimited period of time.
Note:
If [Low speed time out] (tLS) is not equal to 0, the [Type of stop] (Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170 parameter is forced
to [Ramp stop] (rMP) (only if "Stop via ramp" can be configured).
JGF
*
JGt
*
SP2
*
SP3
*
SP4
*
SP5
*
SP6
*
SP7
*
SP8
*
SP9
*
SP10
*
SP11
*
SP12
*
SP13
*
SP14
*
SP15
*
SP16
*
MFr
*
SrP
*
112
[Jog]
0 to 10 Hz
10 Hz
Reference in jog operation see "Jog (JOG-)" on page 174.
[Jog delay]
0 to 2.0 s
0.5 s
Anti-repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations. see "Jog (JOG-)" on page 174 .
[Preset speed 2]
0 to 599 Hz
10 Hz
Preset speed 2. [Preset speed 2] (SP2), see "Preset speeds (PSS-)" on page 175 .
[Preset speed 3]
0 to 599 Hz
15 Hz
Preset speed 3. [Preset speed 3] (SP3), see "Preset speeds (PSS-)" on page 175.
[Preset speed 4]
0 to 599 Hz
20 Hz
[Preset speed 5]
0 to 599 Hz
25 Hz
[Preset speed 6]
0 to 599 Hz
30 Hz
[Preset speed 7]
0 to 599 Hz
35 Hz
[Preset speed 8]
0 to 599 Hz
40 Hz
[Preset speed 9]
0 to 599 Hz
45 Hz
[Preset speed 10]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
[Preset speed 11]
0 to 599 Hz
55 Hz
[Preset speed 12]
0 to 599 Hz
60 Hz
[Preset speed 13]
0 to 599 Hz
70 Hz
[Preset speed 14]
0 to 599 Hz
80 Hz
[Preset speed 15]
0 to 599 Hz
90 Hz
[Preset speed 16]
0 to 599 Hz
100 Hz
0 to 100%
100%
Multiplication factor that can be accessed when [Multiplier ref.] (MA2, MA3), see "Reference configurations (OAI-)" on page 167 is assigned to
the graphic display terminal. see "Menu" on page 79.
[+/-Speed limitation]
0 to 50%
10%
Limitation of +/- speed variation. see "+/- speed (UPd-)" on page 177.
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
rPG
[PID prop. gain]
0.01 to 100
1
*
Proportional gain. see "PID controller parameters" on page 199.
rIG
[PID integral gain]
0.01 to 100
1
*
Integral gain. see "PID controller parameters" on page 199.
rdG
[PID derivative gain]
0.00 to 100
0
*
PID derivative gain. see "PID controller parameters" on page 199.
PrP
[PID ramp]
0 to 99.9 s
0s
*
PID acceleration/deceleration ramp, which is set for a range of [Min PID reference] (PIP1) to [Max PID reference] (PIP2) or vice versa. see "PID
controller parameters" on page 199.
POL
[Min PID output]
-599 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
*
Minimum value of regulator output in Hz. see "PID controller parameters" on page 199.
POH
[Max PID output]
0 to 599 Hz
60 Hz
*
Maximum value of regulator output in Hz.see "PID controller parameters" on page 199 .
PAL
[Min fbk alarm]
(2)
100
*
Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback. see "PID controller parameters" on page 199.
PAH
[Max fbk alarm]
(2)
1.000
*
Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback. see "PID controller parameters" on page 199.
PEr
[PID error al]
0 to 65535 (2)
100
*
Regulator error monitoring threshold. see "PID controller parameters" on page 199.
PSr
[Speed input %]
1 to 100%
100%
*
Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input. see "PID controller parameters" on page 199.
rP2
[Preset ref. PID 2]
(2)
300
*
Preset PID reference. see "Default/preset PID references (PrI-)" on page 203.
rP3
[Preset ref. PID 3]
(2)
600
*
Preset PID reference. see "Default/preset PID references (PrI-)" on page 203.
rP4
[Preset ref. PID 4]
(2)
900
*
Preset PID reference.see "Default/preset PID references (PrI-)" on page 203 .
113
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Ibr
[Brake release I FW]
0 to 1.36 In (1)
*
Brake release current threshold for ascending or forward movement. see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183.
Ird
[Brake release I Rev]
0 to 1.36 In (1)
*
Brake release current threshold for descending or reverse movement. see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183.
brt
[Brake Release time]
0 to 5.00 s
*
Brake release time delay. see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183.
bIr
[Brake release freq.]
[Auto] (AUtO)
*
0 to 10 Hz
see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183.
AUtO [Auto] (AUtO): Rating
bEn
[Brake release freq]
[Auto] (AUtO)
*
0 to 10 Hz
Brake engage frequency threshold.see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183 .
tbE
[Brake engage delay]
0 to 5.00 s
*
Factory setting
0.0 A
0.0 A
0s
[Auto] (AUtO)
[Auto] (AUtO)
0s
Warning!
Control failure
Changes to the brake release delay should only be made for horizontal movements; otherwise, load control can be lost.
bIr
*
Time delay before request to engage brake. see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183.
0 to 5.00 s
0s
Warning!
Control failure
bEt
*
JdC
*
Time delay before request to engage brake. see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183 .
Brake engage time (brake response time) see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183.
[Jump at reversal]
0 to 5.00 s
0s
[Auto] (AUtO)
0 to 10 Hz
[Auto] (AUtO)
see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183.

AUtO [Auto] (AUtO): Rating
ttr
[Time to restart]
0.00 to 15.00 s
0.00 s
*
Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183.
tLIM
[Motoring torque lim]
0 to 300%
100%
*
Torque limitation in motor operation, as a % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with the parameter, [Torque increment]
(IntP), see "Torque limitation (tOL-)" on page 204.
tLIG
[Gen. torque lim]
0 to 300%
100%
*
Torque limitation in generator operation, as a % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with the parameter, [Torque increment]
(IntP), see "Torque limitation (tOL-)" on page 204.
trH
[Traverse freq. high]
0 to 10 Hz
4 Hz
*
Traverse frequency high. see "Traverse control (trO-)" on page 224.
trL
[Traverse freq. low]
0 to 10 Hz
4 Hz
*
Traverse frequency low.see "Traverse control (trO-)" on page 224 .
qSH
[Quick step High]
0 up [Traverse freq. 0 Hz
*
high] (trH)
Quick step high. see "Traverse control (trO-)" on page 224.
qSL
[Quick step Low]
*
high] (trH)
Quick step low. see "Traverse control (trO-)" on page 224.
Ctd
[Current threshold]
0 to 1.5 In (1)
In (1)
Current threshold of the [I attained] (CtA) function, which is assigned to a relay or a logic output, see "Configuration R1 (r1-)" on page 141 .
see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237.
ttH
[High torque thd.]
-300% to +300%
100%
High torque threshold of the [High tq. att.] (ttHA)function, which is assigned to a relay or a logic output (see "Configuration R1 (r1-)" on page
141), as a percentage of the rated torque. see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237.
ttL
[Low torque thd.]
-300% to +300%
50%
Low torque threshold of the [Low tq. att.](ttLA)function, which is assigned to a relay or a logic output (see "Configuration R1 (r1-)" on page 141),
as a percentage of the rated torque. see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237.
FqL
[Pulse warning thd.]
0 Hz to 20,000 kHz
0 Hz
*
Frequency threshold of the [FREQUENCY METER] (FqF-), see "Frequency meter (FqF-)" on page 248function, which is assigned to a relay or
a logic output, see "Configuration R1 (r1-)" on page 141, see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237.
Ftd
F2d
114
[Freq. threshold]
0.0 to 599 Hz
HSP
Frequency threshold of the [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA)function, which is assigned to a relay or a logic output (see "Configuration R1 (r1-)" on page
141), or which is used by the SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) function, see "Parameter switching (MLP-)" on page 216. see "Automatic restart
(Atr-)" on page 237.
[Freq. threshold 2]
0.0 to 599 Hz
HSP
FFt
*
ttd
JPF
JF2
JF3
JFH
*
LUn
*
LUL
*
rMUd
*
Srb
*
FtU
*
LOC
*
Frequency threshold of the [Freq. Th. 2 attain.](F2A)function, which is assigned to a relay or a logic output (see "Parameter switching (MLP-)"
on page 216), or which is used by the SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) function, see "Parameter switching (MLP-)" on page 216. see "Automatic
restart (Atr-)" on page 237.
[Freewheel stop Thd.]
0.2 to 599 Hz
0.2 Hz
Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop. This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a
freewheel stop below a low speed threshold.
This parameter is accessible when [Type of stop] (Stt) is set to [Fast stop] (FSt) or [Ramp stop] (rMP) , and when [Brake assignment] (bLC) or
[Auto DC injection] (AdC) is configured. see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170.
[Motor therm. level]
0 to 118%
0 Hz
Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm (logic output or relay) see "Configuration DO1 (dO1-)" on page 143.
[Skip Frequency]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
Skip frequency. This parameter prevents prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency. This function can be
used to prevent a critical speed, which would cause resonance, being reached. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive. see "Preset speeds
(PSS-)" on page 175.
[Skip Frequency 2]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
Skip frequency 2. This parameter prevents prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency. This function can be
[3rd Skip Frequency]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
Skip frequency 3. This parameter prevents prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency. This function can be
[Skip Frequency Hyst.]
0.1 to 10 Hz
1 Hz
This parameter is visible when at least one skip frequency, [Skip Frequency] (JPF), [Skip Frequency 2] (JF2) or [3rd Skip Frequency](JF3) , is
not equal to 0.
Skip frequency range: from (JPF JFH) to (JPF + JFH) , for example.
This setting applies to all 3 frequencies, (JPF, JF2, JF3) , together. see "Preset speeds (PSS-)" on page 175.
[Unld. Thr. Nom. Speed.]
20 to 100% of
60%
(nCr)
Underload threshold for the motor at rated speed ([Rated motor freq.] (FrS), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104), as a percentage of
the rated torque.
Only visible when [Unld T. Del. Detect.] (ULt) is not set to 0, see "Process underload (ULd-)" on page 252 .
[Unld. Thr. 0. Speed.]
0 up
0%
[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed]
(LUn)
Threshold for underload at zero speed, as a percentage of rated torque. Only visible when [Unld T. Del. Detect.] (ULt) is not set to 0. see "Process
underload (ULd-)" on page 252.
[Unld. Freq. Thr. Det.]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
Underload detection frequency threshold. see "Process underload (ULd-)" on page 252.
[Hysteresis Freq. Att.]
0.3 to 599 Hz
0.3 Hz
Maximum difference between speed reference and motor speed, defines steady state operation, see "Process underload (ULd-)" on page 252.
[Underload T.B. Rest.]
0 to 6 min
0 min
Minimum allowable time interval between underload detection and automatic restart.
For an automatic restart to take place, the [Max. restart time](tAr), see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237 value must exceed the value of
this parameter for at least one minute. see "Process underload (ULd-)" on page 252.
[Ovld Detection Thr.]
70% to 150% of
110%
(nCr)
Overload threshold, as a percentage of rated motor current [Rated mot. current] (nCr). For this function to be executed, the value must be lower
than the limiting current. see "Process overload (OLd-)" on page 253.
Only visible when [Ovld Time Detect.] (tOL) is not set to 0.
This parameter is used to detect an "application overload". This is not a thermal overload of the motor or drive.
115
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
FtO
[Overload T.B.Rest.]
0 to 6 min
0 min
*
Minimum allowable time interval between overload detection and automatic restart. For an automatic restart to take place, the [Max. restart time]
(tAr), see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237value must exceed the value of this parameter for at least one minute. see "Process overload
(OLd-)" on page 253.
LbC
[Load sharing correction]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
*
Rated correction in Hz. See [Load sharing correction] (LbC), see "Motor control (continued)" on page 126.
FFM
[Fan Mode]
[Standard] (Std)
Caution!
Danger of equipment damage.

If [Fan Mode] (FFN) is set to [Never] (StP) , the drive fan is not activated.
This shortens the operational life of the electronic components.
Make sure that the ambient temperature does not exceed 40C.
Std [Standard] (Std): The fan starts and stops automatically depending on the thermal state of the drive.
rUn [Always] (rUn): The fan is started.
StP [Never] (Stp): The fan is stopped.
(1)
(2)
In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.
If a graphic display terminal is not in use, values greater than 9,999 will be displayed on the 4-digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit, e.g.,
15.65 for 15,650.
2s
116
to aid programming.

2.3.3.4.3 Motor control (drC-)
[Auto tuning] (tUn), see "Synchronous motor parameters (continued from the parameter overview)" on page
123 can cause a motor start-up.
A parameter whose code contains the sign, can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > DRC
bFr
[50Hz IEC] (50)
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters:
[High speed] (HSP), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104, [Freq. threshold] (Ftd), see "DRI-CONF-FULL-SET - lbr to LOC" on page 113,
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Max frequency](tFr), [Rated mot. current] (nCr), [Rated motor speed](nSP), [Motor 1 Cosinus
phi] (COS), see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118 and [Brake release I FW] (Ibr).
50 [50 Hz IEC] (50): IEC
60 [60 Hz NEMA] (60): NEMA
tFr
[Max frequency]
10 to 599 Hz
60 Hz
The factory configuration is set to 60 Hz or preset to 72 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
The maximum value is limited by the following conditions:
It should not exceed the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS).
Ctt
[Motor control type]
[Standard] (Std)
Note:
Choose a process before entering parameter values.
UUC [SVC V] (UUC): Sensorless vector control with internal speed loop based on voltage feedback calculation. For applications needing high performance during starting or operation.
Std [Standard] (Std): U/F 2 points (Volts/Hz) without internal speed loop For simple applications that do not require high performance. Simple motor
control law keeping a constant Voltage Frequency ratio, with a possible adjustment of the curve bottom. This law is generally used for motors
connected in parallel. Some specific applications with motors in parallel and high performance levels may require [SVC V] (UUC).
Voltage
UnS
U0
FrS
Frequency
Note:
U0 is the result of an internal calculation based on motor parameters and multiplied by UFr (%). U0 can be adapted by changing
the UFr value.
[V/F 5pts] (UF5): 5-segment V/F profile: As: [Standard] (Std) profile, but it also supports resonance avoidance (saturation).
UF5
Voltage
UnS
U5
The profile is defined by
Parameter values UnS, FrS, U1
to U5 and F1 to F5
U4
U3
U1
FrS > F5 > F4 > F3 > F2 > F1
U2
U0
F1
F2 F3
F4 F5
FrS
Frequency
Note:
U0 is the result of an internal calculation based on motor parameters and multiplied by UFr (%). U0 can be adapted by changing
the UFr value.
[Sync. mot.] (SYn): Only for synchronous motors with a permanent magnet and sinusoidal electromotive force (EMF). If this is selected, the
SYn asynchronous motor parameters will be inaccessible, but the synchronous motor parameters will be accessible.
UFq
nLd
[V/F Quad.] (UFq): Variable torque. For pump and fan applications.
[Energy Sav.] (nLd): Energy savings. For simple applications that do not require a high dynamic range.
117
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
The parameters in the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no
run command is present, with the following exceptions:

Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > ASY
ASY[ASYNC. MOTOR]
Only visible when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117is not set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) .
nPr
[Rated motor power]
according to drive according to drive
*
power
power
These parameters are inaccessible when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117 is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) .
The rated motor power on the nameplate in kW when [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [50Hz IEC] (50); and in HP when [Standard mot. freq] (bFr)
= [60Hz NEMA] (60).
COS
[Motor 1 Cosinus phi]
0.5 to 1
according to drive
*
power
Rated motor cosine phi
These parameters are accessible if [Motor param choice] (MPC) = [Mot Cos] (COS).
UnS
[Rated motor volt.]
100 to 500 V
according to drive
*
freq] (bFr)
These parameters are inaccessible when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) .
Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate.
nCr
0.25 to 1.5 In (1)
according to drive
*
freq] (bFr)
These parameters are inaccessible when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn). Rated
motor current given on the nameplate.
FrS
[Rated motor freq.]
10 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
*
Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate.
The factory configuration is set to 50 Hz or preset to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
nSP
[Rated motor speed]
0 to 65,535 RPM
according to drive
*
power
0 to 9999 rpm then 10.00 to 65.53 krpm on the integrated display terminal.
If, rather than the rated speed, the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, calculate the rated speed as follows:
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x100 - slip in %

100
or
50
(50 Hz motors)
or
60
118
(60 Hz motors)

Code
Name / Description
tUn
[Auto tuning]
2s
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
Danger!
During auto-tuning, the motor is supplied with rated current.

Do not service the motor during the auto-tuning.
Warning!
Control failure
It is extremely important to configure the following parameters correctly before the auto-tuning begins: [Rated motor
volt.] (UnS), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Rated mot. current] (nCr), [Rated motor speed] (nSP) and [Rated motor power]
(nPr) or [Motor 1 Cosinus phi] (COS) .
If one or more of these parameters is changed after the auto-tuning has completed, the [Auto tuning] (tUn) returns to
[No action] (nO) , and the process must be repeated.
Note:
When using the ACOPOSinverter P74 with POWERLINK and the B&R Automation Studio, the standard [No] (nO) setting can only
be changed in the application via asynchronous writing of the parameter.
Auto-tuning is only executed if no stop command (CMD Bit8 = 1) has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop" function has been
assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
Auto-tuning has priority over any RUN or Preflux command. These will be observed only after the auto-tuning.
If the auto-tuning detects a fault, the drive displays [No action] (nO) and switches according to configuration from [Autotune fault mgt]
(tnL), see "Frequency meter (FqF-)" on page 248 to [Auto tuning] (tnF)fault mode.
Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait until the display changes to [No action] (nO) .
Process:
CMD Bit 8 = 1 (Stop command active)
CMD Bit 1 = 1 (Switch on regulator)
TUN = 1 (Tuning is executed)
CMD Bit 8 = 0 (Stop command inactive)
Note:
The thermal state of the motor greatly influences the tuning result. Execute the auto-tuning with the motor stopped and cold.Before
executing another auto-tuning, wait until the motor is completely stopped and cold. First, set [Auto tuning] (tUn) to [Erase
tune](CLr) , and then repeat the auto-tuning.
Executing an auto-tuning without first activating [Erase tune] (CLr) is done to compute the thermal state of the motor.
In any case, the motor must be stopped before the tuning process is started. Cable length also greatly influences the tuning result.
If changes are made to the cable topology, the tuning process must be repeated.
nO [No action] (nO): Auto-tuning is not running
YES [Do tune] (YES): The auto-tuning is executed immediately, if possible, which then causes the parameter to change automatically to [No action]
(nO) . If the drive status does not allow an immediate tuning, the parameter changes to [No] (nO) , and the process must be repeated.
CLr [Erase tune] (CLr): The motor parameters obtained by the auto-tuning are reset. The standard motor parameter values are used to control the
motor. [Auto tuning status] (tUS) = [Not done] (tAb).
tUS
[Not done] (tAb)
(for information only, cannot be modified)
This parameter is not saved when the drive is switched off. It shows the auto-tuning state since the last operation.
tAb [Not done] (tAb): The auto-tuning was not executed.
PEnd [Pending] (PEnd): Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet executed.
PrOG [active] (PrOG): The auto-tuning is executed.
FAIL [Failed] (FAIL): The auto-tuning has failed.
dOnE [done] (dOnE): The motor parameters ascertained by the auto-tuning are used to control the motor.
StUn
[Tune selection]
[Default] (tAb)
tAb [Default] (tAb): The standard motor parameter values are used to control the motor.
MEAS [Measure] (MEAS): The values ascertained by the auto-tuning are used to control the motor.
CUS [Customized] (CUS): The manually set values are used to control the motor.
Note:
Auto-tuning can significantly improve motor performance.
tUnU
[Auto tuning usage]

[Therm Mot] (tM)
This parameter displays the method used to change the motor parameters according to the calculated thermal state of the motor.
119
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Danger of electric shock or explosion
AUt
2s
nO [No] (nO): No calculation of the thermal state

tM [Therm Mot] (tM): Calculation of the thermal state of the stator based on the rated current and the motor's consumption of current
Ct [Cold tun] (Ct): Calculation of the thermal state of the stator based on the stator resistance ascertained in the first cold-motor tuning and in the
auto-tuning at each start-up
[Automatic autotune]
[No] (nO)
Danger!
If [Automatic autotune] (AUt) is not [No] (nO) , then auto-tuning will be executed at each power-on.
The motor must be switched off when switching on the drive.

[Automatic autotune] (AUt) = [Yes] (YES) when [Auto tuning usage] (tUnU) = [Cold tun] (Ct).
The motor-stator resistance value ascertained in the tuning process is used to calculate the thermal state of the motor at power-on.
Auto-tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop" function has been assigned to a logic
input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
nO [No] (nO): Function deactivated
YES [Yes] (YES): Auto-tuning is executed automatically at each start-up.
FLU
[Motor fluxing]
[No](FnO)
*
(1)
2s
Danger!

Caution!
FnC
FCt
FnO
MPC
nPr
COS
(1)
*
2s
120
If [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117, = [Sync. mot.] (SYn), the factory setting is replaced by [Not cont.] (FnC) .
In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup, magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor. In [continuous] (FCt) mode,
the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up. In [Not cont.] (FnC) mode, fluxing occurs when the motor starts up.
The flux current is higher than the [Rated mot. current] (nCr) (configured rated motor current), when the flux is building. After this, the flux current
will be adjusted to the motor's magnetizing current.
[Not cont.] (FnC): Non-continuous mode
[continuous] (FCt): Continuous mode. This option is not possible when [Auto DC injection] (AdC), see "Auto DC injection (continued from the
parameter overview)" on page 172is set to [Yes] (YES) or when [Type of stop] (Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170is set to [Freewheel]
(nSt) .
[No] (FnO): Function inactive. This option is not possible when [Brake assignment] (bLC), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183is not set
to [No] (nO) . If [Motor control type] (Ctt) see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117 is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) , the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter
determines the rotor assignment and not the magnetization.
If [Brake assignment] (bLC), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183is not set to [No] (nO), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter is disabled.
[Motor param choice]
[Motor power] (nPr)
[Motor power] (nPr)
[Mot Cos] (COS)
to aid programming.

Asynchronous motor parameters: Expert mode
(1)
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
ASY[ASYNC. MOTOR]
rSA
[Cust stator resist.]
0 to 65,535 mOhm
0 mOhm
*
Cold state stator resistance (per winding), modifiable value. The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning, if executed.
(1)
LFA
[Lfw]
0 to 655.35 mH
0 mH
*
Cold-state leakage inductance, changeable value. The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning, if executed.
IdA
[Idw]
0 to 6,553.5 A
0A
*
Customer-specific adjustable magnetization current.
trA
[Cust. rotor t const.]
0 to 65,535 ms
0 ms
*
Customer-specific adjustable rotor time constant.
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10,000 to 65,535).
to aid programming.
121

Synchronous motor parameters (SYN-)
These parameters are accessible if [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117, = [Sync.
mot.] (SYn) . In this case, the asynchronous motor parameters cannot be accessed.
Note:
The drive must be selected so as to have sufficient current to meet performance requirements, but not
too much, in order that the current can be precisely measured, especially during signal injection; see
[HF inj. activation] (HFI)see "Synchronous motor parameters (SYN-)" on page 122.
When the drive is selected:
Enter the data from the motor nameplate.
Execute the auto-tuning function.
Adjust [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS) to achieve optimal performance (low current in the motor if
no load).
Note:
Activating signal injection can improve the performance values of motors with high cogging torque;
see [HF inj. activation] (HFI) see "Synchronous motor parameters (SYN-)" on page 122.
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > SYN
SYN[SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR]
nCrS
[Nominal I sync.]
*
Rated synchronous motor current given on the nameplate.
PPnS
[Pole pairs]
*
Number of pairs of poles on the synchronous motor.
nSPS
[Nom motor spdsync]
* (2)
Rated motor speed given on the nameplate.
tqS
[Motor torque]
*
Rated motor torque given on the nameplate.
122
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0.25 to 1.5 In (1)
according
power
to
drive
1 to 50
according
power
to
drive
0 to 48,000 RPM
according
power
to
drive
0.1 to 6,553.5 Nm
according
power
to
drive

Code
Name / Description
tUn
[Auto tuning]
2s
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
Danger!

Warning!
Control failure
It is extremely important to configure the following parameters correctly before the auto-tuning begins: [Nominal I sync.]
(nCrS), [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS), [Pole pairs] (PPnS), [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS), [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) and
[Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) .
If one or more of these parameters is changed after the auto-tuning has completed, the [Auto tuning] (tUn) for [No
action] (nO) , and the process must be repeated.
Note:
When using the ACOPOSinverter P74 with POWERLINK and the B&R Automation Studio, the standard [No] (nO) setting can only
be changed in the application via asynchronous writing of the parameter.
Auto-tuning is only executed if no stop command (CMD Bit8 = 1) has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop" function has been
assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
Auto-tuning has priority over any RUN or Preflux command. These will be observed only after the auto-tuning.
If the auto-tuning detects a fault, the drive displays [No action] (nO) and switches according to configuration from [Autotune fault mgt]
(tnL), see "Frequency meter (FqF-)" on page 248to [Auto tuning] (tnF) fault mode.
Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait until the display changes to [No action] (nO) .
Process:
CMD Bit 8 = 1 (Stop command active)
TUN = 1 (Tuning is executed)
CMD Bit 8 = 0 (Stop command inactive)
Note:
The thermal state of the motor greatly influences the tuning result. Execute the auto-tuning with the motor stopped and cold.
nO
YES
CLr
tUS
tAb
PEnd
PrOG
FAIL
dOnE
StUn
Before executing another auto-tuning, wait until the motor is completely stopped and cold. First, set [Auto tuning] (tUn) are set to [Erase tune]
(CLr) , and then repeat the auto-tuning. Executing an auto-tuning without first activating [Erase tune] (CLr) is done to compute the thermal state
of the motor.
In any case, the motor must be stopped before the tuning process is started. Cable length also greatly influences the tuning result. If changes
are made to the cable topology, the tuning process must be repeated.
[No action] (nO): Auto-tuning is not running
[Do tune] (YES): The auto-tuning is executed immediately, if possible, which then causes the parameter to change automatically to [No action]
(nO) . If the drive status does not allow an immediate tuning, the parameter changes to [No] (nO) , and the process must be repeated.
[Erase tune] (CLr): The motor parameters obtained by the auto-tuning are reset. The standard motor parameter values are used to control the
motor. [Auto tuning status] (tUS) = [Not done] (tAb).
[Not done] (tAb)
This parameter is not saved when the drive is switched off. It shows the auto-tuning state since the last operation.
[Not done] (tAb): The auto-tuning was not executed.
[Pending] (PEnd): Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet executed.
[active] (PrOG): The auto-tuning is executed.
[Failed] (FAIL): The auto-tuning has failed.
[done] (dOnE): The motor parameters ascertained by the auto-tuning are used to control the motor.
[Tune selection]
[Default] (tAb):
Note:
Auto-tuning can significantly improve motor performance.
tAb [Default] (tAb): The standard motor parameter values are used to control the motor.
MEAS [Measure] (MEAS): The values ascertained by the auto-tuning are used to control the motor.
CUS [Customized] (CUS): The manually set values are used to control the motor.
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
tUnU
[Auto tuning usage]
[Therm Mot] (tM)
This parameter displays the method used to change the motor parameters according to the calculated thermal state of the motor.
123
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

nO [No] (nO): No calculation of the thermal state
tM [Therm Mot] (tM): Calculation of the thermal state of the stator based on the rated current and the motor's consumption of current
Ct [Cold tun] (Ct): Calculation of the thermal state of the stator based on the stator resistance ascertained in the first cold-motor tuning and in the
auto-tuning at each start-up
AUt
[Automatic autotune]
[No] (nO)
The motor must be switched off when switching on the drive.

2s
[Automatic autotune] (AUt) = [Yes] (YES)when [Auto tuning usage] (tUnU) = [Cold tun] (Ct). The motor-stator resistance value ascertained in the
tuning process is used to calculate the thermal state of the motor at power-on.
nO [No] (nO): Function deactivated
YES [Yes] (YES): Auto-tuning is executed automatically at each start-up.
SMOt
[Saliency mot. state]
*
Information on magnetic reluctance of synchronous motors. These parameters are accessible if [Tune selection] (StUN) = [Measure] (MEAS).
Note:
When using a motor with low magnetic reluctance, the standard control law is recommended.
nO [No] (nO): Measurement not executed
LLS [Low salient] (LLS): Low magnetic reluctance (recommended configuration: [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [PSI align] (PSI) or [PSIO align] (PSIO)
and [HF inj. activation] (HFI) = [No] (nO)).
MLS [Med salient] (MLS): Medium magnetic reluctance ([Angle setting type] (ASt) = [SPM align] (SPMA) is possible. [HF inj. activation] (HFI) = [Yes]
(YES) could work).
HLS [High salient] (HLS): High magnetic reluctance ( [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [IPM align] (IPMA) is possible. [HF inj. activation] (HFI) = [Yes] (YES)
is possible).
ASt
[Angle setting type]
[PSIO align] (PSIO)
*
Mode for measuring the phase shift angle. Only visible when [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) .
[PSI align] (PSI) and [PSIO align] (PSIO) work for all types of synchronous motors. [SPM align] (SPMA) and [IPM align] (IPMA) improve synchronous motor performance according to motor type.
IPMA [IPM align] (IPMA): Allocation for IPM motors (interior-buried permanent magnet motors). Allocation mode for interior-buried permanent magnet
motors (this motor normally has high magnetic reluctance). It uses high-speed charging, which is quieter than the standard allocation mode.
[SPM align] (SPMA): Allocation for SPM motors (surface-mounted permanent magnet motors). Allocation mode for surface-mounted permanent
SPMA magnet motors (this motor normally has medium-to-low magnetic reluctance). It uses high-speed charging, which produces less noise than the
standard allocation mode.
[PSI align] (PSI): Impulse signal charging. Standard allocation mode according to impulse signal injection.
PSI [PSIO align] (PSI0): Impulse signal charging, optimized. Optimized standard allocation mode according to impulse signal charging. The measuring
PSIO time of the phase shift angle is reduced after the first RUN command or measurement process, even if the drive has been switched off.
[No align] (nO): No allocation.
nO
HFI
*
[HF inj. activation]

[No] (nO)
Activation of high-frequency signal injection in RUN. This function allows the motor speed to be calculated in such a way that the required torque
can be achieved at low frequencies without speed feedback.
Note:
The higher the cogging torque is, the more efficient the [HF inj. activation] (HFI)function is. To preserve performance, adjustment
of the speed control parameters ([K speed loop filter] (SFC), [Speed time integral] (SIt) and [Speed prop. gain] (SPG), see "Motor
control (continued)" on page 126 may be necessary, as well as adjustment of the speed-calculation phase-control circuit (expert
parameters: [HF PLL bandwidth] (SPb) and [HF PLL red. factor] (SPF), see "Synchronous motor parameters: Expert mode" on
page 124).
High-frequency injection is not efficient for motors with low cogging torque ([Saliency mot. state] (SMOt), see "Synchronous motor parameters
(SYN-)" on page 122).
A PWM frequency of 4 kHz is used ([Switching freq.] (SFr)).
When there is instability and no load, we recommend reducing [Speed prop. gain] (SPG) and [HF PLL bandwidth] (SPb) . Adjust the speed control
loop parameters for dynamic performance, and adjust the PLL gain for good speed calculation at low frequency.
When there is instability under load, it can help to increase the [Angle error Comp.] (PEC) parameter (mainly with SPM motors).
nO [No] (nO): Function deactivated.
YES [Yes] (YES): High-frequency injection is used for speed calculation.
(1)
(2)
2s
124
to aid programming.

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
SYN[SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR]
rSAS
[Cust. stator R syn]
0 to 65,535 mOhm
0 mOhm
*
Cold state stator resistance (per winding). The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning, if executed.
The user can enter this value if known.
LdS
[Autotune L d-axis]
0 to 655.35 mH
0 mH
*
d-axis inductance of the stator in mH (per phase).
For motors with smooth poles: [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) = [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) = stator inductance L. The factory setting is replaced by
the result of the auto-tuning, if executed.
LqS
[Autotune L q-axis]
0 to 655.35 mH
0 mH
*
q-axis inductance of the stator in mH (per phase).
For motors with smooth poles: [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) = [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) = stator inductance L. The factory setting is replaced by
the result of the auto-tuning, if executed.
PHS
[Syn. EMF constant]
0 to 6553.5 mV/rpm
0 mV/rpm
* (1)
Synchronous motor EMC constant, in mV per rpm (peak voltage per phase). PHS allocation enables a reduction of current under no-load operation.
FrSS
[Nominal freq sync.]
10 to 800 Hz
nSPS * PPnS / 60
*
Rated motor frequency for synchronous motors in Hz. Automatically refreshed according to data from [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS) and [Pole
pairs] (PPnS).
SPb
[HF PLL bandwidth]
0 to 100 Hz
25 Hz
*
Stator frequency PLL bandwidth.
SPF
[HF PLL red. factor]
0 to 200%
100%
*
Stator frequency PLL reduction factor.
PEC
[Angle error Comp.]
0 to 500%
0%
*
Phase error compensation in high-frequency mode.
This improves performance at low frequencies in generator mode and motor mode, especially for SPM motors.
AUtO [Auto] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor, calculated using the drive parameters.
FrI
[HF injection freq]
250 to 1,000 Hz
500 Hz
*
High-frequency injection frequency. This has an effect on the noise level during phase shift measurement, and on the precision of the speed
calculation.
HIr
[HF current level]
0 to 200%
25%
*
Characteristic current level of the high-frequency injection. This has an effect on the noise level during phase shift measurement, and on the
precision of the speed calculation.
MCr
[PSI allign curr. max]
[Auto] (AUtO) Up to [Auto] (AUtO)
*
300%
Current level as a % of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) for the phase shift measurement modes [PSI align] (PSI) and [PSIO align] (PSIO). This parameter
affects the inductance measurement. [PSI allign curr. max] (MCr) is used for the measurement.
This current must be equal to or greater than the maximum current level of the application. Otherwise there may be instability.
If [PSI allign curr. max] (MCr) = [Auto] (AUtO), then [PSI allign curr. max] (MCr) = 150% of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) during the measurement and
100% of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) during the phase shift measurement under standard allocation ([PSI align] (PSI) or [PSIO align] (PSIO)).
ILr
[Injection level align]
0 to 200%
25%
*
Current level as a % of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) for IPMA type high-frequency phase shift measurement.
SIr
[Boost level align.]
0 to 200%
100%
*
Current level as a % of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) for SPMA type high-frequency phase shift measurement.
(1)
to aid programming.
125
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Synchronous motor parameters: Expert mode

Motor control (continued)
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC
SPG
[Speed prop. gain]
0 to 1,000%
40%
*
Speed loop proportional gain visible when [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not set to [Standard] (Std), [V/F 5pts] (UFS) or [V/F Quad.] (UFq).
SPGU
[UF inertia comp.]
0 to 1,000%
40%
*
Inertial factor for the following motor control processes. Visible when [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [Standard] (Std), [V/F 5pts] (UFS) or [V/F Quad.]
(UFq).
SIt
[Speed time integral]
1 to 65,535 ms
63 ms
*
Speed loop integral time constant. Visible when [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not set to [Standard] (Std), [V/F 5pts] (UFS) or [V/F Quad.] (UFq).
SFC
[K speed loop filter]
0 to 100
65
*
Speed coefficient (0(IP) to 100 (PI)).
FFH
[Spd est. filter time]
0 to 100 ms
6.4 ms
*
Only available in expert mode.
Frequency with which the calculated speed is filtered.
CrtF
[Cur. ref. filter time]
0 to 100 ms
3.2 ms
*
Only available in expert mode.
Filter time of the current rating filter [of the control process (when [No] (nO): characteristic frequency of the stator)].
UFr
[IR compensation]
0 to 100 ms
100%
Used to optimize torque at very low speed, or to adapt to special cases (for example: with motors in parallel, to reduce [IR compensation] (UFr)).
If there is insufficient torque at low speed, increase [IR compensation] (UFr) . A too high value can cause the motor not to start (locking) or a
change to current limiting mode.
SLP
[Slip compensation]
0 to 300%
100%
*
These parameters are inaccessible when [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [Sync. mot.](SYn). This parameter is written at 0% if [Motor control type]
(Ctt) = [V/F Quad.] (UFq).
Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the rated motor speed.
The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact.
If the slip setting is lower than the actual slip: The motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state, but at a speed lower than the reference.
If the slip setting is higher than the actual slip: The motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
U1
[U1]
0 to 800 V, according to 0 V
*
size
V/F profile setting.
These parameters are accessible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
F1
[F1]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
*
U2
[U2]
*
size
F2
[F2]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
*
U3
[U3]
*
size
F3
[F3]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
*
U4
[U4]
*
size
V/F profile setting. These parameters are accessible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
F4
[F4]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
*
U5
[U5]
*
size
F5
[F5]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
*
126

Code
Name / Description
CLI
*
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0 to 1.5 In (1)
1.5 In (1)
Caution!

First current limitation.
Note:
SFt
[Switch. freq type]

[SFR type 1] (HF1)
The motor switching frequency will always be modified (reduced) when the internal temperature of the drive is too high.
HF1 [SFR type 1] (HF1): Heating optimization
Allows the system to adapt the switching frequency to the motor frequency.
HF2 [SFR type 2] (HF2): Optimization of motor noise (for high switching frequency)
Allows the system to hold a selected [Switching freq.] (SFr) switching frequency constant, regardless of the [Output frequency] (rFr)motor frequency.
When overheating, the drive automatically reduces the switching frequency.
When the temperature returns to its normal value, the frequency is also increased back to its original value.
SFr
[Switching freq.]
2 to 16 kHz
4 kHz
Caution!

On model 8I74S200xxx.01P-1 drives using nominal values, if the EMC filters are disconnected (operation on an IT system), the
drive's switching frequency must not exceed 4 kHz.
Switching frequency setting.
Adjustment range: The maximum value is limited to 4 kHz when the [Motor surge limit] (SUL), see "Motor control (continued)" on page 126parameter has been configured.
Note:
In the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once the
temperature returns to normal.
nrd
nO
YES
bOA
nO
dYnA
StAt
bOO
*
When the motor is operating at high speeds, it is advisable to increase the [Switching freq.] (SFr) PWM frequency to 8, 12, or 16 kHz.
[Noise reduction]
[No] (nO)
Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance, which may occur at a fixed frequency.
[No] (nO): Fixed frequency
[Yes] (YES): Frequency with random modulation
[Boost activation]
[Dynamic] (dYnA)
[Inactive]: (nO): No Boost
[Dynamic] (dYnA): Dynamic Boost
[Static] (StAt): Static Boost
[Boost]
-100 to 100%
0%
These parameters are accessible if [Boost activation] (bOA) is not set to [No](nO) . Adjusting the motor magnetization current at low speeds as
a percentage of the rated magnetization current. This parameter is used to increase or reduce the amount of time required to build up torque. It
allows incremental adjustment up to the frequency defined by [Active Boost] (FAb) . Negative values are seen especially with conical rotor motors.
Magnetization current
Positive [Boost] (bOO)
Rated magnetization current
Negative [Boost] (bOO)
FAb
*
SUL
[Active Boost](FAb)
Frequency
[Active Boost]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
These parameters are accessible if [Boost activation] (bOA) is not set to [No] (nO) . A frequency beyond which the magnetization current will
no longer be affected by [Boost] (bOO) .
[Motor surge limit]
[No] (nO)
127
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

This function limits motor overvoltages and is useful in the following applications:
NEMA motors
Japanese motors
Spindle motors
Rewound motors
For 230/400 V motors operated at 230 V, this parameter can stay set to [No](nO) ; it can also keep that setting if the cable connecting the drive
to the motor is not longer than:
4 m with unshielded cables

10 m with shielded cables
Note:
If [Motor surge limit] (SUL) = [Yes] (YES), the maximum switching frequency, [Switching freq.](SFr) is changed, see "Motor control
(continued)" on page 126.
nO [No] (nO): Function inactive
YES [Yes] (YES): Function active
SOP
[Volt surge limit. opt]
10 s
*
Optimization parameter for transient overvoltages at the motor terminals. These parameters are accessible if [Motor surge limit] (SUL) = [Yes]
(YES).
6 Set to 6, 8, or 10 s according to the following table.
8
10
Note:
This parameter applies to 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1 drives.

*
128

Overview table
The following table provides examples of the relationship between the [Volt surge limit. opt] (SOP) parameter and
the length of the cable between the drive and the motor. For longer cable lengths, an output filter or a dV/dt filter
must be used.
For motors in parallel, the sum of all the cable lengths must be taken into consideration. Compare the length given
in the table row corresponding to the power for one motor with that corresponding to the total power, and select
the shorter length.
Example: Two 7.5 kW (10 HP) motors
Take the lengths from the 15 kW (20 HP) column that are shorter than those in the 7.5 kW (10 HP) column, and
divide by the number of motors to obtain the length per motor (with unshielded "GORSE" cable and SOP = 6, the
result is 40 m/ 2 motors = 20 m per motor maximum for each 7.5 kW (10 HP) motor).
In special cases (for example, different types of cable, different motor powers in parallel, different cable lengths
in parallel, etc.), we recommend using an oscilloscope to check the overvoltage values obtained at the motor
terminals.
To retain the overall drive performance, do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily.
Tables giving the correspondence between the SOP parameter and the cable length, for 400 V line supply
P74
Reference
8I74T400037.01P-1
8I74T400055.01P-1
8I74T400075.01P-1
8I74T400110.01P-1
8I74T400150.01P-1
8I74T400220.01P-1
8I74T400300.01P-1
8I74T400400.01P-1
8I74T400550.01P-1
8I74T400750.01P-1
8I74T401100.01P-1
8I74T401500.01P-1
Motor
Cable gauge/
cross sectional area (min)
Power
kW
HP
in mm2
AWG
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
0.50
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
4
6
10
16
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
12
10
8
8
6
Maximum cable length in meters

Unshielded "GORSE" H07
RNRN-F 4Gxx cable
SOP = SOP = 8 SOP = 6
10
100 m 70 m
45 m
100 m 70 m
45 m
100 m 70 m
45 m
100 m 70 m
45 m
100 m 70 m
45 m
110 m
65 m
45 m
110 m
65 m
45 m
110 m
65 m
45 m
120 m 65 m
45 m
120 m 65 m
45 m
115 m
60 m
45 m
105 m 60 m
40 m
Shielded "GORSE"
GVCSTV-LS/LH cable
10
105 m 85 m
65 m
105 m 85 m
65 m
105 m 85 m
65 m
105 m 85 m
65 m
105 m 85 m
65 m
105 m 85 m
65 m
105 m 85 m
65 m
105 m 85 m
65 m
105 m 85 m
65 m
105 m 85 m
65 m
110 m
75 m
55 m
100 m 70 m
50 m
Shielded "BELDEN" 2950x

cable
10
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
50 m
40 m
30 m
For 230/400 V motors operated at 230 V, the parameter [Motor surge limit] (SUL) = [No] (nO).
129
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Parameter value [Volt surge limit. opt] (SOP) corresponds to the attenuation time of the cable used. It is used to
prevent the superimposition of voltage wave reflections resulting from long cable lengths. It limits overvoltages to
twice the DC bus rated voltage.

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Ubr
[Braking level]
335 to 820 V
According to drive
voltage rating
Braking transistor power-on voltage.
LbA
[Load sharing]
[No] (nO)
*
When 2 motors are connected mechanically and therefore at the same speed, and each is controlled by a drive, this function can be used to
improve torque distribution between the two motors. To do this, it varies the speed based on the torque.
These parameters are only accessible when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117, = [SVC V] (UUC).
LbC
[Load sharing correction]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
*
Rated correction in Hz. These parameters are accessible if [Load sharing] (LbA) = [Yes] (YES).
Torque
LbC
Rated
Torque
Rated
Torque
130
Frequency
LbC

Load sharing, parameters that can be accessed at expert level
Principle:
Speed
Torque reference
Ramp
Speed loop
-
Compensation
K
LBC
LBC1
LBC2
LBC3
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Reference
Filter
LBF
The load sharing factor K is determined by the torque and speed, with two factors K1 and K2 (K = K1 x K2).
K1
Speed
LBC2
LBC1
K2
LBC
LBC3
LBC3
Torque
Rated
torque x (1 + LBC3)
LBC
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
LbC1
[Correction min spd]
0 to 598.9 Hz
0 Hz
*
These parameters are accessible if [Load sharing] (LbA) = [Yes] (YES).
Minimum speed for load correction in Hz. Below this threshold, no corrections are made. Used to cancel correction at very low speed if correction
would hamper rotation of the motor.
LbC2
[Correction max spd]
[Correction min spd]
0.1 Hz
*
(LbC1) + 0.1 at 599
Hz
These parameters are accessible if [Load sharing] (LbA) = [Yes] (YES). Speed threshold in Hz above which maximum load correction is applied.
LbC3
[Torque offset]
0 to 300%
0%
*
These parameters are accessible if [Load sharing] (LbA) = [Yes] (YES).
Minimum torque for load correction as a % of the rated torque. Below this threshold, no corrections are made. Used to avoid torque instabilities
when the torque direction is not constant.
LbF
[Sharing filter]
0 to 20 s
100 ms
*
These parameters are accessible if [Load sharing] (LbA) = [Yes] (YES). The (filter) time constant for the correction in ms. Used with flexible
mechanical clutches to avoid instability.
*
131

2.3.3.4.4 Inputs/ outputs (I_O-)
The parameters in the [INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu can only be modified when the drive has been
stopped and no run command is present.
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O
I_O[INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG]
tCC
[2/3 wire control]
2s
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[2 wire] (2C)
Danger!

If these parameters are changed, the [Reverse assign.] (rrS) and [2 wire type] (tCt) parameters and all logic input assignments
return to their standard configuration.
Check that this change is compatible with the switch diagram used.
2C [2 wire] (2C)
2-wire control (level controlled): This is the state (0 or 1) or edge (0 to 1 or 1 to 0) of the input that controls operational starts or stops.
+24 LI1 LIx
LI1: Run forward

LIx: Run reverse
3C [3 wire] (3C)
3-wire control (pulse commands): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to command starting, a "stop" pulse is sufficient to command stopping.
+24 LI1 LI2 LIx
tCt
*
2s
LI1: Stop
LI2: Run forward
LIx: Run reverse
[2 wire type]
Danger!
Check that the modification of the 2 wire type control is compatible with the wiring diagram used.
LEL [Level] (LEL): State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run (1) or stop (0).
trn [Transition] (trn): A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation, in order to prevent accidental restarts after a break
in the power supply.
PFO [Fwd priority] (PFO): State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the "run forward" input takes priority over the "run reverse" input
[Run]
[No] (nO)
Assignment of the stop command. Only visible when [2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [3 wire] (3C).
LI1 [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1, unless in [I/O profile] (IO)
Cd00 [CD00] (Cd00): In [I/O profile] (IO) , switching is possible with logic inputs
Frd
[Forward]
[LI1] (LI1)
Assignment of the run forward command.
LI1 [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1, unless in [I/O profile] (IO)
Cd00 [CD00] (Cd00): In [I/O profile] (IO) , switching is possible with logic inputs
rrS
[Reverse assign.]
[LI2] (LI2)
Assignment of the reverse direction command.
LI1 [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1
... [...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150.
rUn
*
132
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > L1L1[LI1 CONFIGURATION]
L1A
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions that are assigned to input LI1 in order to check for multiple assignments.
rUn [Run] (rUn): Release to start
Frd [Forward] (Frd): Forward operation
rrS [Reverse assign.] (rrS): Reverse operation
rPS [Ramp switching] (rPS): Switching the ramps
JOG [Jog] (JOG): [Step mode]
USP [+Speed] (USP): + speed
dSP [- speed] (dSP): - speed
PS2 [2 preset speeds] (PS2): 2 preset speeds
rFC [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC): Reference switching
nSt [Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop
dCI [DC Injection] (dCI): Stop DC injection braking
FSt [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop.
FLO [Forced local] (FLO): "Forced local" mode
rSF [Fault reset] (rSF): Reset errors
tUL [Auto tuning] (tUL): Auto-tuning
SPM [Ref. memo.] (SPM): Save reference
FLI [Pre Fluxing] (FLI): Motor magnetization
PAU [Auto / manual] (PAU): PI(D) automatic/manual
PIS [PID integral reset] (PIS): Integral PI(D) shunt
Pr2 [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2): 2 PI(D) preset references
Pr4 [4 preset PID ref.] (Pr4): 4 PI(D) preset references
tLA [TORQUE LIMITATION] (tLA): Continuous torque control
EtF [External fault] (EtF): External fault
rCA [Out. contact. feedb] (rCA): Feedback message from the downstream contactor
CnF1 [2 config. switching] (CnF1): Configuration switching 1
CnF2 [3 config. switching] (CnF2): Configuration switching 2
CHA1 [2 parameter sets] (CHA1): Parameter switching 1
CHA2 [3 parameter sets] (CHA2): Parameter switching 2
tLC [Activ. Analog torque limitation] (tLC): Torque limiter: Activation (analog input) via a logic input
CCS [Cmd switching] (CCS): Command channel switching
InH [Fault inhibition] (InH): Fault Inhibition
LC2 [Current limit 2] (LC2): Current limit switching
LAF [Stop FW limit sw.] (LAF): Forward limit attained
LAr [Stop RV limit sw.] (LAr): Reverse limit attained
rCb [Ref 1B switching] (rCb): Reference channel switching (1 to 1B)
trC [Traverse control] (trC): Traverse control
bCI [Brake contact] (bCI): Feedback message from the braking logic input
SAF [Stop FW limit sw.] (SAF): Forward stop switch
SAr [Stop RV limit sw.] (SAr): Reverse stop switch
dAF [Slowdown forward] (dAF): Forward slowdown achieved
dAr [Slowdown reverse] (dAr): Reverse slowdown achieved
CLS [Disable limit sw.] (CLS): Clear limit switches
LES [Lock-out] (LES): Emergency stop
rtr [Init. traverse ctrl] (rtr): Reload traverse control
SnC [Counter wobble] (SnC): Counter wobble synchronization
rPA [Prod. reset] (rPA): Reset the product
SH2 [2 HSP] (SH2): High speed 2
SH4 [4 HSP] (SH4): High speed 4
LO1 [LO1] (LO1): Logic output LO1
r1 [R1] (r1): Relay R1
dO1 [DO1] (dO1): Analog/ logic output DO1
btUC [Bth visibilit.] (btUC): Bluetooth visible
OIr [Regen connect] (OIr): Operation with power regeneration
FJOG [Jog] (FJOG): Function key for assignment of jog operation
FPS1 [Preset spd2] (FPS1): Function key for assignment of preset speed 1
FPS2 [Preset spd3] (FPS2): Function key for assignment of preset speed 2
FPr1 [PID ref. 2] (FPr1): Function key for assignment of preset PI 1
FPr2 [PID ref. 3] (FPr2): Function key for assignment of preset PI 2
FUSP [+Speed] (FUSP): Function key to increase speed
FdSP [- speed] (FdSP): Function key to reduce speed
Ft [T/K] (Ft): Function key for bumpless assignment
USI [+Speed around ref.] (USI): Increase speed reference
dSI [-Speed around ref.] (dSI): Reduce speed reference
IL01 [IL01] (IL01): Function blocks: Logic input 1
... ...
IL10 [IL10] (IL10): Function blocks: Logic input 10
FbrM [FB Start] (FbrM): Function blocks: Start operation
L1d
[LI1 On Delay]
0 to 200 ms
0 ms
This parameter is used to enable delayed consideration of the logic input's transition to state 1. This delay can be set to a value from 0 to 200 ms,
and it serves to filter possible interference. The change to state 0 is taken into account without delay.
133
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Configuration LI1 (L1-)

Configuration LIx (L2) to (L6)
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_OL2[LIx CONFIGURATION]
to
All available logic inputs of the drive are processed as in the LI1 example above (up to LI6).
L6L5[LI5 CONFIGURATION]
Certain parameters for LI5 are used as impulse inputs.
PIA
[RP assignment]
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. This parameter displays all functions assigned to the impulse input. This allows compatibility problems
to be checked, for example.
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (AI1A), see "Configuration AI1 (AI1-)" on page 139.
PIL
[RP min value]
0 to 20.00 kHz
0 kHz
Scaling parameter for impulse input 0% in Hz * 10 unit.
PFr
[RP max value]
0 to 20.00 kHz
20.00 kHz
Scaling parameter for impulse input 100% in Hz * 10 unit.
PFI
[RP filter]
0 to 1000 ms
0 ms
I/O ext. Impulse input switch-off time of the low-pass filter.
LA1[LIx CONFIGURATION]
LA2The two analog inputs of the drive, AI1 and AI2, can be used as LI inputs and are processed as in the LI1 example above.
*
2s
134
to aid programming.

Configuration of analog inputs and Pulse input
The minimum and maximum input values (in volts, mA, etc.) are converted to % in order to adapt the references
to the application.
The minimum value corresponds to a reference of 0% and the maximum value to a reference of 100%. The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value.
100%
Current-, Voltor pulse input

0%
[Min value]
(CrLx, Ulx
or PIL)
[Max value]
(CrHx, UHx
or PFr)
20 mA, 10 V
or 20.00 kHz
100%
Current-, Voltor pulse input

0%
[Max value]
(CrHx, UHx
or PFr)
[Min value]
(CrLx, Ulx
or PIL)
20 mA, 10 V
or 20.00 kHz
For +/- bidirectional inputs, the min. and max. are relative to the absolute value, for example, +/- 2 to 8 V.
135
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Minimum and maximum input values:

Range (output values): For analog inputs only
With this parameter, the reference range is set to [0% 100%] or [-100% +100%]. This will result in bidirectional
output from unidirectional input.
Reference
100%
Current- or
Voltage input
0%
[Max value]
[Min value]
Range 0
100%
20 mA
or 10 V
Reference
100%
Current- or
Voltage input
0%
[Min value]
[Max value]
20 mA
or 10 V
-100%
Range -100%
136
+100%

Configuration LA1 (LA1-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows:: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > LA1
LA1[LA1 CONFIGURATION]
bSP
[Reference template]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[Standard] (bSd)
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
bSd [Standard] (bSd)

Frequency
HSP
At zero reference the frequency = LSP
LSP
-100%
0%
Reference
+100%
LSP
HSP
[Pedestal] (bLS)
bLS
Frequency
HSP
-100%
At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = LSP
LSP
LSP
+100%
Reference
HSP
[LSP inhibition] (bnS)

Frequency
bnS
HSP
At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = 0

-100%
LSP
0
LSP
+100%
Reference
HSP
[Deadband 0] (bnS0)
Frequency
HSP
bnS0
LSP
-100%
0%
LSP
Reference
+100%
HSP
This process is identical to: [Standard] (bSd); however, in the following examples, the frequency at reference = 0 likewise = 0: The signal
is less than [Min value], which is greater than 0 (example: 1 V on a
2-10 V input). The signal is greater than [Min value], which is greater
than the [Max value] (example: 11 V on a 10-0 V input). If the input
range is configured as "bidirectional", operation remains identical to
[Standard](bSd). This parameter defines how the speed reference is
taken into account, for analog inputs and Pulse input only. In the case
of the PID regulator, this is the PID output reference. The limits are defined by the [Low speed](LSP) and [High speed](HSP), see "Simply start
menu (SIM-)" on page 104parameters.
137

Delinearization: For analog inputs only
The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input/output curve of this input:
Range 0
100%
Reference
100%
Current- or
Voltage input
[Interm.
point Y]
0%
[Min value]
(0%)
[Max value]
(100%)
[Interm. point X]
20 mA
or 10 V
Note:
For [Interm. point X], 0% corresponds to [Min value] and 100% to [Max value].
Range -100
+100%
Reference
100%
[Interm.
point X]
0%
-[Interm.
point X]
[Min value]
(-100%)
Current- or
Voltage
Input
-[Interm. point X]
0%
[Interm.
point Y]
[Max value]
(100%)
20 mA
or 10 V
-100%
138
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > AI1AI1[AI1 CONFIGURATION]
AI1A
[AI1 assignment]
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. This parameter displays all functions assigned to the AI1 input. This allows compatibility problems
to be checked, for example.
AO1 [AO1 assignment] (AO1): Analog output AO1:
PIF [PID feedback] (PIF): PI feedback (PI control)
tAA [TORQUE LIMITATION] (tAA): Torque limiter: Activation via analog value
dA2 [Subtract. ref. 2] (dA2): Reference 2 subtraction
PIM [Manual PID ref.] (PIM): Manually configured frequency reference of the PI(D) regulator (auto/manual)
FPI [PID speed ref.] (FPI): Frequency reference of the PI(D) regulator (predictive reference)
Fr1b [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b): Reference source 1B
dA3 [Subtract. ref. 3] (dA3): Reference 3 subtraction
FLOC [Forced local] (FLOC): Reference source "Forced local"
MA2 [Multi ref. 2] (MA2): Reference 2 multiplication
MA3 [Multi ref. 3] (MA3): Reference 3 multiplication
PES [Weight input] (PES): Hoisting: External weight measurement function
AI1t
[Type AI1]
[Voltage] (10U)
10U [Voltage] (10U): Positive voltage input (negative values are interpreted as zero: input is unidirectional)
UIL1
[AI1 min value]
0 to 10.0 V
10.0 V
Parameter value for voltage calculation AI1 = 0%.
UIH1
[AI1 max value]
0 to 10.0 V
10.0 V
AI1F
[AI1 filter]
0 to 10.00 s
0s
Interference filtering.
AI1L
[AI1 range]
[0 - 100%] (POS)
POS [0 - 100%] (POS): Positive logic
nEG [+/- 100%] (nEG): Positive and negative logic
AI1E
[AI1 Interm. point X]
0 to 100%
0%
Input delinearization point coordinate. Signal at physical input as a percentage.
0% corresponds to [AI1 min value] (UIL1).
100% corresponds to [AI1 max value] (UIH1).
AI1S
[AI1 Interm. point Y]
0 to 100%
0%
Output delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).
Percentage value of the internal frequency reference that corresponds to the [AI1 Interm. point X] (A11E) percentage value of the signal at the
physical input.
Configuration AI2 (AI2-)

Code
Name / Description
AI2A
[AI2 assignment]
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (A11A), see "Configuration AI1 (AI1-)" on page 139.
AI2t
[Type AI2]
10U [Voltage] (10U): 0 - 10 V
UIL2
[AI2 min value]
UIH2
[AI2 max. value]
AI2F
[AI2 filter]
Fault filtering.
AI2E
0% corresponds to [Min value], when the range = 0 100%.
[Max value] + [Min value]
0% corresponds to
2
AI2S
when the range = -100%
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] (n10U)

0 to 10.0 V
0V
0 to 10.0 V
10.0 V
0 to 10.00 s
0s
0 to 100%
0%
+100%
100% corresponds to [Max value].

0 to 100%
0%
physical input.
139
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
AI3A
[AI3 assignment]
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (A11A), see "Configuration AI1 (AI1-)" on page 139.
AI3t
[AI3 Type]
[Voltage +/-] (n10U)
0A [Current] (0A): 0 - 20 mA
CrL3
[AI3 min value]
0 to 20.0 mA
0 mA
CrH3
[AI3 max value]
0 to 20.0 mA
20.0 mA
AI3F
[AI2 filter]
0 to 10.00 s
0s
Fault filtering.
AI3L
[AI3 range]
[0 - 100%] (POS)
POS [0 - 100%] (POS): Unidirectional input
nEG [+/- 100%] (nEG): bidirectional input example: On a 4 - 20 mA input
4 mA corresponds to reference -100%
12 mA corresponds to reference 0%
20 mA corresponds to reference +100%
Since AI3 is physically a bidirectional input, the configuration [+/- 100%] (nEG) can be used only when the applied signal is unidirectional. A
bidirectional signal is not compatible with a bidirectional configuration.
AI3E
0 to 100%
0%
0% corresponds to [Min value] (CrL3), when the range = 0 100%.
[AI3 max value] (CrH3) - [min. Wert AI3]
0% corresponds to
(CrL3)
AI3S
when the range = -100%
+100%
100% corresponds to [AI3 max value] (CrH3).

0 to 100%
0%
physical input.
Virtual AI1 (AU1-)

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > AU1AU1[VIRTUAL AI1]
AU1A
[AIV1 assignment]
Virtual analog input 1 via jog dial on the front side of the product. Identical to [AI1 assignment] (A11A), see "Configuration AI1 (AI1-)" on page 139.
Virtual AI2 (AU2-)

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > AU2AU2[VIRTUAL AI2]
AU2A
[AIV2 assignment]
Possible assignments for [AI virtual 2] (AIU2): Virtual analog input 2 via communications channel, configuration via [AI2 net. Channel] (AIC2).
Identical to [AIV1 assignment] (AU1A), see "Configuration AI1 (AI1-)" on page 139.
AIC2
[AI2 net. Channel]
[No] (nO)
*
Source channel [VIRTUAL AI2] (AU2A).
This parameter is accessible via the [PID REGULATOR] (PId-) submenu, see "PID controller (Pld-)" on page 196. Scale: the value 8192
transmitted by this input is equivalent to 10 V on a 10 V input.
nEt [COMMUNICATION CARD] (nEt): Communication card (POWERLINK)
*
140

Configuration R1 (r1-)
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > R1r1[R1 CONFIGURATION]
r1
[R1 Assignment]
[No fault] (FLt)
FLt [No fault] (FLt): Status of drive fault detection (relay normally energized, and de-energized if there is a fault)
rUn [Drv running] (rUn): The drive is running.
FtA [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): Frequency threshold reached ([Freq. threshold] (Ftd), see "DRI-CONF-FULL-SET - lbr to LOC" on page 113)
FLA [HSP attain.] (FLA): High speed attained
CtA [I attained] (CtA): Current threshold attained ([Current threshold] (Ctd), see "DRI-CONF-FULL-SET - lbr to LOC" on page 113)
SrA [Freq.ref.att] (SrA): Frequency reference attained
tSA [Th.mot. att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state attained
PEE [PID error al] (PEE): PID error alarm
PFA [PID fdbk al] (PFA): PID feedback alarm
F2A [Freq. Th 2 attain.] (F2A): Frequency threshold 2 attained ([Freq. threshold 2] (F2d), see "DRI-CONF-FULL-SET - lbr to LOC" on page 113)
tAd [Th. drv. att.] (tAd): Drive thermal state attained
ULA [Pro.Undload] (ULA): Underload alarm
OLA [Ovld.P.Alrm] (OLA): Overload alarm
rSdA [Rope slack ] (rSdA): Slack rope (see parameter [Rope slack config.] (rSd), see "High-speed hoisting (HSH-)" on page 195)
ttHA [High tq. att.] (ttHA): Motor torque exceeds upper threshold [High torque thd.] (ttH),
ttLA [Low tq. att.] (ttLA): Motor torque is beneath lower threshold [Low torque thd.] (ttL),
MFrd [Forward] (MFrd): Motor in forward rotation
MrrS [Reverse assign.] (MrrS): Motor in reverse rotation
tS2 [Th. mot2. att.] (tS2): Motor 2 thermal threshold (TTD2) attained
tS3 [Th. mot3. att.] (tS3): Motor 3 thermal threshold (TTD3) attained
AtS [Neg Torque] (AtS): Negative torque (braking)
CnF0 [CONFIGURATION 0] (CnF0): Configuration 0 active
CFP1 [Set 1 active] (CFP1): Parameter set 1 active
dbL [DC charged] (dbL): DC bus charging
brS [In braking] (brS): Drive braking
PrM [P. removed] (PrM): Drive locked via "safe torque off" input
FqLA [Fr.met. alar.] (FqLA): Measured speed threshold attained [Pulse warning thd.] (FqL),
MCP [I present] (MCP): Motor current present
LSA [Limit sw. att] (LSA): Limit switch attained
dLdA [Load alarm] (dLdA): Load variance detection (see "Frequency meter (FqF-)" on page 248)
AG1 [Alarm Grp 1] (AGI): Alarm group 1
AG2 [Alarm Grp 2] (AG2): Alarm group 2
AG3 [Alarm Grp 3] (AG3): Alarm group 3
PLA [LI6=PTC al.] (PLA): LI6 = PTCL alarm
EFA [Ext. fault al.] (EFA): External fault alarm
USA [Undervoltage al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
UPA [Undervoltage Pre-alarm] (UPA): Undervoltage threshold
tHA [Al. C drv] (tHA): Drive overheat
SSA [Torque/current lim att.] (SSA): Torque limit alarm
tJA [IGBT al.] (tJA): Thermal overshoot alarm
bOA [Brake R. al.] (bOA): Torque control timeout alarm
AP3 [AI3 Al. 4-20] (AP3): AI3 power drop 4-20 mA alarm
rdY [Brake R. al.] (rdY): Torque control timeout alarm
r1d
[R1 Delay time]
0 to 60,000 ms
0 ms
(1)
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes true.
For the assignment [No fault] (FLt) , the delay cannot be defined and so remains 0.
r1S
[R1 Active at]
[1] (POS)
Configuration of the operating logic:
POS [1] (POS): State 1 when the information is true
nEG [0] (nEG): State 0 when the information is true
The configuration [1](POS) , cannot be changed when [No fault] (FLt) is assigned.
r1H
[R1 holding time]
0 to 9,999 ms
0 ms
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes false.
For the assignment [No fault] (FLt) , the switch-off delay cannot be defined and so remains 0.
141

Configuration R2 (r2-)
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > R2r2[R2 CONFIGURATION]
r2
[R2 assignment]
[No] (nO)
Identical to [R1 Assignment] (r1), see "Configuration R1 (r1-)" on page 141, with the following additions:
bLC [Brake control] (bLC): Brake contactor control
LLC [Input cont.] (LLC): Input contactor control
OCC [Out. contact.] (OCC): Output contactor control
EbO [End reel] (EbO): End of reel (traverse control function)
tSY [Sync. wobble] (tSY): "Counter wobble" synchronization
dCO [DC charging] (dCO): DC bus precharging contactor control.
r2d
[R2 Delay time]
0 to 60,000 ms
0 ms
(1)
For the assignments [No fault] (FLt), [Brake control] (bLC), [Out. contact.] (OCC) and [Input cont.] (LLC) , the delay cannot be defined and so
remains 0.
r2S
[R2 Active at]
[1] (POS)
The configuration [1] (POS) cannot be changed for assignments [No fault] (FLt), [Brake control] (bLC), [DC charging] (dCO), and [Input cont.] (LLC) .
r2H
[R2 holding time]
0 to 9,999 ms
0 ms
For the assignments [Brake control] (FLt), [Brake control] (bLC) and [Input cont.] (LLC) , the switch-off delay cannot be defined and so remains 0.
Configuration LO1 (LO1-)

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > LO1LO1[LO1 CONFIGURATION]
LO1
[No] (nO)
Identical to [R1 Assignment] (r1), see "Configuration R1 (r1-)" on page 141, with the following additions (displayed for informational purposes only;
these selections can only be made in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu):
LO1d
[LO1 delay time]
0 to 60,000 ms (1)
0 ms
remains 0.
LO1S
[LO1 active at]
[1] (POS)
The configuration [1] (POS) cannot be changed for assignments [No fault] (FLt), [Brake control] (bLC) and [Input cont.] (LLC) .
LO1H
[LO1 holding time]
0 to 9,999 ms
0 to 9,999 ms
For the assignments [No fault] (FLt), [Brake control] (bLC) and [Input cont.] (LLC) , the switch-off delay cannot be defined and so remains 0.
(1)
142
0 to 9,999 ms then 10.00 to 60.00 s on the integrated display terminal.

Configuration DO1 (dO1-)
Use of analog output AO1 as a logic output
The electrical characteristics of this analog output remain unchanged. As these differ from logic output characteristics, it is important to ensure that they are compatible with the intended application.
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > DO1dO1[DO1 CONFIGURATION]
dO1
[DO1 assignment]
[No] (nO)
Identical to [R1 Assignment] (r1), see "Configuration R1 (r1-)" on page 141, with the following additions (displayed for informational purposes only;
these selections can only be made in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu):
dO1d
[DO1 delay time]
0 to 60,000 ms (1)
0 ms
remains 0.
dO1S
[DO1 active at]
[1] (POS)
The configuration [1] (POS) cannot be changed for assignments [No fault] (FLt), [Brake control] (bLC) and [Input cont.] (LLC) .
dO1H
[DO1 holding time]
0 to 9,999 ms
0 ms
For the assignments [No fault] (FLt), [Brake control] (bLC) and [Input cont.] (LLC) , the switch-off delay cannot be defined and so remains 0.
(1)
0 to 9,999 ms then 10.00 to 60.00 s on the integrated display terminal.
143
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Analog output AO1 can be used as a logic output, by assigning DO1. In this case, when set to 0 this output
corresponds to the AO1 min. value (0 V or 0 mA, for example), and when set to 1 to the AO1 max. value (10 V
or 20 mA, for example).

Configuration of analog output
Minimum and maximum values (output values):
The minimum output value, in volts, corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the maximum
value corresponds to its upper limit. The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value.
Parameter assigned
Upper
Limit value
Lower
Limit value
[Min Output]
[Max Output]
(AOLx or
UOLx)
(AOHx or
UOHx)
20 mA
or
10 V
Current- or
Voltage output
Parameter assigned
Upper
Limit value
Lower
Limit value
144
[Max Output]
[Min Output]
(AOHx or
UOHx)
(AOLx or
UOLx)
20 mA
or
10 V
Current- or
Voltage output

Scaling of the assigned parameter
The assigned parameter's scale can be adapted according to requirements. In doing so, each analog input's upper
and lower limits will be changed via the corresponding parameter.
With the parameter [Scaling AOx min] (ASLx) , the lower limit is changed: new value = lower limit + (Range
x ASLx). The value 0% (factory setting) does not modify the lower limit.
With the parameter [Scaling AOx max] (ASHx) , the upper limit is changed: new value = upper limit + (Range
x ASHx). The value 100% (factory setting) does not modify the upper limit.
Parameter value [Scaling AOx min] (ASLx) must always be lower than the [Scaling AOx max] (ASHx)
parameter value.
Upper limit of the assigned parameter
100%
ASHx
New scale
ASLx
Lower limit of the assigned parameter
Application example 2:
The motor current value at output AO1 should be transmitted with 0-20 mA (In motor range 2). The In motor then
corresponds to 0.8 times the In drive.
The Parameter [I motor] (OCr) varies between 0 and 2 times the rated drive current, or a range of 2.5 times the
rated drive current.
The parameter [AO1 min scal] (ASL1) does not modify the lower limit. The limit remains at the factory setting of 0%.
The parameter [AO1 max scal] (ASH1) modifies the upper limit by 0.5 times the motor rated torque or to 100 100/5 = 80% (new value = upper limit + (range x ASH1).
145
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Parameter values are given as %. 100% corresponds to the total variance range of the configured parameter. In
that regard: 100% = upper limit - lower limit. For example: In parameter [Sign torque] (Stq) (varied between -3 and
+3 times the rated torque) the setting 100% corresponds to 6 times the rated torque.

Configuration AO1 (AO1-)
Configuration of analog output
Minimum and maximum values (output values):
The minimum output value, in volts, corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the maximum
value corresponds to its upper limit. The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value.
Parameter assigned
Upper
Limit value
Lower
Limit value
[Min Output]
[Max Output]
(AOLx or
UOLx)
(AOHx or
UOHx)
20 mA
or
10 V
Current- or
Voltage output
Parameter assigned
Upper
Limit value
Lower
Limit value
146
[Max Output]
[Min Output]
(AOHx or
UOHx)
(AOLx or
UOLx)
20 mA
or
10 V
Current- or
Voltage output

Scaling of the assigned parameter
The assigned parameter's scale can be adapted according to requirements. In doing so, each analog input's upper
and lower limits will be changed via the corresponding parameter.
With the parameter [Scaling AOx min] (ASLx) , the lower limit is changed: new value = lower limit + (Range
x ASLx). The value 0% (factory setting) does not modify the lower limit.
With the parameter [Scaling AOx max] (ASHx) , the upper limit is changed: new value = upper limit + (Range
x ASHx). The value 100% (factory setting) does not modify the upper limit.
Parameter value [Scaling AOx min] (ASLx) must always be lower than the [Scaling AOx max] (ASHx)
parameter value.
Upper limit of the assigned parameter
100%
ASHx
New scale
ASLx
Lower limit of the assigned parameter
Application example 2:
The motor current value at output AO1 should be transmitted with 0-20 mA (In motor range 2). The In motor then
corresponds to 0.8 times the In drive.
The Parameter [I motor] (OCr) varies between 0 and 2 times the rated drive current, or a range of 2.5 times the
rated drive current.
The parameter [AO1 min scal] (ASL1) does not modify the lower limit. The limit remains at the factory setting of 0%.
The parameter [AO1 max scal] (ASH1) modifies the upper limit by 0.5 times the motor rated torque or to 100 100/5 = 80% (new value = upper limit + (range x ASH1).
147
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Parameter values are given as %. 100% corresponds to the total variance range of the configured parameter. In
that regard: 100% = upper limit - lower limit. For example: In parameter [Sign torque] (Stq) (varied between -3 and
+3 times the rated torque) the setting 100% corresponds to 6 times the rated torque.

Configuration AO1 parameter overview
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > AO1AO1[AO1 CONFIGURATION]
AO1
[AO1 assignment]
[No] (nO)
OCr [I motor] (OCr): Current in the motor, between 0 and 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate).
[Motor freq] (OFr): Motor frequency, from 0 to [Max frequency] (tFr)
OFr [Motor freq +/-] (OFS): Signed motor frequency, between - [Max frequency] (tFr) and + [Max frequency] (tFr)
OFS [Output ramp] (OrP): From 0 to [Max frequency] (tFr)
OrP [Motor torq.] (trq): Motor torque, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque.
trq [Sign torque] (Stq): Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the motor torque. The + sign refers to motor mode and the - sign to generator
Stq mode (braking).
[Sign ramp] (OrS): Signed ramp outputs, between - [Max frequency](tFr) and + [Max frequency] (tFr).
OrS [PID ref.] (OPS): The PID regulator reference, between [Min PID reference] (PIP1) and [Max PID reference] (PIP2).
OPS [PID feedback] (OPF): The PID regulator feedback, between [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) and [Max PID feedback] (PIF2)
OPF [PID error] (OPE): PID regulator fault, between -5% and +5% of ([Max PID feedback] (PIF2) - [Min PID feedback](PIF1))
OPE [PID Output] (OPI): PID regulator output, between [Low speed] (LSP) and [High speed] (HSP)
OPI [Motor power] (OPr): Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Rated motor power] (nPr)
OPr [Motor voltage] (UOP): Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Rated motor volt.] (UnS)
UOP [Mot thermal] (tHr): Motor thermal state, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
tHr [Mot therm2] (tHr2): Motor thermal state 2, between 0 and 200 % of the rated thermal state
tHr2 [Mot therm3] (tHr3): Motor thermal state 3, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
tHr3 [Drv thermal] (tHd): Drive thermal state, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
tHd [Torque lim.] (tqL): Torque limit, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque
tqL [DO1] (dO1): Assignment to a logic output. The assignment can only take place if the
d01 [DO1 assignment] (dO1) parameter was assigned. This is the only possible selection in this instance. It is displayed for informational purposes only.
[Torque 4Q] (tqMS): Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the motor torque. The + and - signs refer to the physical direction of rotation,
tqMS regardless of the operating mode (motor or generator).
AO1t
[Type AO1]
[Current] (0A)
10U [Voltage] (10U): Voltage output
0A [Current] (0A): Current output
AOL1
[AO1 min Output]
0 to 20.0 mA
0 mA
*
In order to access this parameter, [Type AO1] (AO1t) must be set to [Current] (0A) .
AOH1
[AO1 max Output]
0 to 20.0 mA
20.0 mA
*
In order to access this parameter, [Type AO1] (AO1t) must be set to [Current] (0A) .
UOL1
[AO1 min Output]
0 to 10.0 V
0V
*
In order to access this parameter, [Type AO1] (AO1t) must be set to [Voltage] (10U) .
UOH1
[AO1 max Output]
0 to 10.0 V
10.0 V
*
In order to access this parameter, [Type AO1] (AO1t) must be set to [Voltage] (10U) .
ASL1
[AO1 min scal]
0 to 100.0%
0%
Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maxiumum possible variation.
ASH1
[AO1 max scal]
0 to 100.0%
100.0%
Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maxiumum possible variation.
AO1F
[AO1 Filter]
0 to 10.00 s
0s
Interference filtering. This parameter is forced to 0 if [AO1 assignment] (AO1) is set to [DO1] (dO1) .
*
148

Fault alarm groups (A1C-), (A2C-), (A3C-)
When one or a number of alarms selected in a group occurs, this alarm group is activated.
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > A1C, A2C, A3C
A1C[ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION]
Selection to be made from the following list:
PLA [LI6=PTC al.] (PLA): LI6 = PTCL alarm
EFA [Ext. fault al.] (EFA): External fault alarm
USA [Undervoltage al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
CtA [I attained] (CtA): Current threshold attained ([Current threshold] (Ctd), see "DRI-CONF-FULL-SET - lbr to LOC" on page 113)
FtA [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): Frequency threshold reached ([Freq. threshold] (Ftd), see "DRI-CONF-FULL-SET - lbr to LOC" on page 113)
F2A [Freq. Th. 2 attain.] (F2A): Frequency threshold 2 attained ([Freq. Th. 2 attain] (F2d), see "DRI-CONF-FULL-SET - lbr to LOC" on page 113)
SrA [Freq.ref.att] (SrA): Frequency reference attained
tSA [Th.mot. att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state attained
tS2 [Th. mot2. att.] (tS2): Motor 2 thermal state attained
tS3 [Th. mot3. att.] (tS3): Motor 3 thermal state attained
UPA [Undervoltage Pre-alarm] (UPA): Undervoltage threshold
FLA [HSP attain.] (FLA): High speed attained
tHA [Al. C drv] (tHA): Drive overheat
PEE [PID error al] (PEE): PID error alarm
PFA [PID fdbk al] (PFA): PID feedback alarm
AP3 [AI3 Al. 4-20] (AP3): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI3
SSA [Torque/current lim att.] (SSA): Torque limit alarm
tAd [Th. drv. att.] (tAd): Drive thermal state attained
tJA [IGBT al.] (tJA): IGBT alarm
ULA [Underload. Proc. Al.] (ULA): Underload alarm
OLA [Overload. Proc. Al.] (OLA): Overload alarm
rSdA [Rope slack alarm] (rSdA): Rope slack (parameter [Rope slack config.] (rSd), see "High-speed hoisting (HSH-)" on page 195)
ttHA [High torque alarm] (ttHA): Motor torque exceeds upper threshold [High torque thd.] (ttH).
ttLA [Low torque alarm] (ttLA): Motor torque is beneath lower threshold [Low torque thd.] (ttL).
FqLA [Freq. meter Alarm] (FqLA): Measured speed threshold attained [Pulse warning thd.] (FqL).
dLdA [Dynamic load alarm] (dLdA): Load variance detection ([DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT.] (dLd-), see "Frequency meter (FqF-)" on page 248). Multiple
selection process see "Description of the HMI" on page 72 (integrated display terminal) or see "Optional graphic display terminal" on page 64
(graphic display terminal).
Identical to [ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION] (A1C-).
Identical to [ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION] (A1C-).
149
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
In the following submenus, alarms are gathered into one to three groups. The individual groups can be assigned
to a relay's peripheral signaling or to a logic output. The groups can be displayed on the graphic display terminal
(menu [3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.] (MCF-), see "Monitor configuration (MCF)" on page 262) and via menu [1.2
MONITORING] (MOn-), see "Introduction" on page 80.

2.3.3.4.5 Control (CtL-)
The parameters in the [COMMAND] (CtL-) menu can only be modified when the drive has been stopped and no
run command is present.
Command and reference channels
Run commands (forward, reverse, stop, etc.) and references can be sent using the following channels:
Command
Terminals: Logic inputs (LI) or analog inputs used as
Logic inputs (LA)
Remote display
Integrated modbus
Integrated CANopen
Communication card (POWERLINK)
Reference
Terminals: Analog inputs (AI), impulse input
Function blocks
Remote display
Integrated modbus
Integrated CANopen
Communication card
+/- speed via the terminals
+/- speed via the graphic display terminal
Danger!
If analog inputs [AI1] (AI1) or [AI2] (AI2) are used as logic inputs in a configuration ([LAI1] (LAI1) or
[LAI2] (LAI2)), their behavior in analog input mode remains active
(example: [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is set to [AI1] (AI1).
Delete the configuration of [AI1] (AI1) or [AI2] (AI2) in analog input mode or
make sure that this behavior will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.
Note:
[LA1] (LA1) and [LA2] (LA2) can be used as two logic inputs only in sink mode.
+24 V power supply (max. 30 V)
State 0 if < 7.5 V, state 1 if > 8.5 V
Note:
The stop keys on the graphic display terminal or the external display terminal can be programmed as
lower priority keys. In that case, a stop key only has priority if the parameter, [Stop Key priority] (PSt)
, in the [COMMAND] (CtL-), see "Control parameters" on page 158menu is set to [Yes] (YES) .
The behavior of the ACOPOSinverter P74 can be adapted according to requirements:
[Not separ.] (SIM) configuration: Command and reference are sent via the same channel.
[Separate] (SEP): Command and reference may be sent via different channels.
In these configurations, control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the DRIVECOM standard with only 5 freely-assignable bits, see "Control parameters" on page 158). The application functions cannot
be accessed via the communication interface. see "Communication Map (CMM-)" on page 86.
[I/O profile] (IO): The command and the reference can come from different channels. This configuration
both simplifies and extends use via the communication interface. Commands can be transmitted via the
logic inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus. When transmitting via the bus, the commands
are available as a word that functions as a virtual terminal with only logic inputs. Application functions can
be assigned to the bits in this word. More than one function can be assigned to the same bit.
Note:
Stop commands sent via the graphic display terminal or the external display terminal remain active,
even if the terminals no longer constitute the active command channel.
Reference channel for configurations [Ref channel] (SIM), [Separate] (SEP) and [I/O profile] (IO), PID not
configured
150

[Ref 1B switching]
FLOC
rCb
0V
[Summing ref. 3]
Sa3
[SubParam2]
dA2
[SubParam3]
dA3
[Multiplier ref. 2]
Ma2
[Multiplier ref. 3]
Ma3
AI1
Preset
frequencies
Note: Forced local is in

[I/O profile] not active
AI2
nO
(Sp1)
AI3
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
[Ref.1B channel]
[Summing ref. 2]
Sa2
nO
LCC
SP2
LI
SP16
Step-/Jogoperation
+/- speed on the

Reference
[PID REGULATOR]
PID not assigned
nO
P1F
Channel 1
Fr1b
(FRA + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3
[Ref.1 channel]
Fr1
LI
HSP
nO
Channel 2
Fr2
rFC
[Ref. 2 switching]
Legend:
[High
Ramps
Frequency]
nO
FrH
LSP
[Low speed]
ACC DEC
rFr
AC2 DE2
Fl0
Forced local
Parameters:
The black square represents
factory assignment
Fr1, SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3, MA2, MA3:

Terminals, Graphic display terminal, integrated modbus, integrated CANopen, (POWERLINK) communication card
Fr1b, for SEP and IO:
terminals only available if Fr1 = Terminals
Fr2:
Terminals, Graphic display terminal, integrated modbus, integrated CANopen, (POWERLINK) communication card, and +/- speed
Note:
[Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) and [Ref 1B switching] (rCb) must be configured in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(Fun-) menu.
151

Reference channel for configurations [Ref channel] (SIM) configuration, [Separate] (SEP) and [I/O profile]
(IO), PID configured with PID references at the terminals
[Ref 1B switching]
[Ref.1B channel]
[Summing ref. 2]
SA2
[Summing ref. 3]
SA3
[SubParam2]
dA2
[SubParam3]
dA3
FLOC
0V
FRA + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3
rCb
[Ref.1 channel]
Fr1
Fr1b
nO
AI1
Note: Forced local is in

[I/O profile] not active
AI2
A
PID
LFr
AI3
LCC
Channel 1
[Ref.2 channel]
Fr2
Channel 2
Legend:
nO
[High
LI Frequency]Ramps (1)
ACC DEC
HSP
FrH
rFr
AC2 DE2
LSP
[Low speed]
FL0
Forced local
rFC
[Ref. 2 switching]
Parameters:
factory assignment
(1) Ramps not active if the PID function is active in automatic mode.
Fr1:
Fr1b, for SEP and IO:
Fr1b, for SIM:
terminals only available if Fr1 = Terminals
SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3:
Terminals only
Fr2:
Terminals, Graphic display terminal, integrated modbus, integrated CANopen, (POWERLINK) communication card, and +/- speed
Note:
[Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) and [Ref 1B switching] (rCb) must be configured in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(Fun-) menu.
152

Command channel for configuration [Not separ.] (SIM)
Reference and command, not separate
Example: For a reference configuration Fr1 = AI1 (analog input at the terminals), the control takes place via LI
(logic input at the terminals).
FLOC
LI
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
[Ref.1 channel]
Fr1
LCC
(RUN/STOP
FWD/REV)
LI
[Profile]
CHCF
[Ref. 2 switching]
FL0 Forced local
rFC
nO
SIM
CMD
nO
STOP
Fr2
[Ref.2 channel]
Run forward
Run reverse
STOP
YES
PSt
(Stop Key priority)
Legend:
Parameters:
the factory setting assignment
153
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
The command channel is determined by the reference channel. Parameters Fr1, Fr2, rFC, FLO and FLOC are
valid for references and commands.

Command channel for configuration [Separate] (SEP)
Separate reference and command
Parameters FLO and FLOC are valid for references and commands.
Example: For a reference in the "Forced local" mode via AI1 (analog input at the terminals), the command in forced
local mode is given via LI (logic input at the terminals).
Command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of reference channels Fr1, Fr1b and Fr2.
FLOC
LI
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
[Cmd channel 1]
Cd1
(RUN/STOP
FWD/REV)
LCC

LI
CCS
[Cmd switching]
[Profile]
CHCF
SEP
Fl0
Forced local
nO

STOP
nO
YES
CMD Run forward

Run reverse
STOP
PSt
Cd2
[Cmd channel 2]
(Stop Key priority)
Legend:
Parameters:
The black square represents the factory setting assignment for the
, with the exception of [Profile]
Cd1, Cd2:
154

Command channel for configuration [I/O profile] (IO)
Separate reference and command, as in configuration [Separate] (SEP)
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of reference channels Fr1, Fr1b and Fr2.
[Cmd channel 1]
Cd1
LI
CCS
[Cmd switching]
[Profile]
FL0
CHCF
SEP
Forced local
nO
CMD
Run forward
Run reverse
STOP
nO
Graphic display terminal STOP
YES
Pst
Cd2
(Stop Key priority)
[Cmd channel 2]
Legend:
Parameters:
the factory setting assignment
Cd1, Cd2:
A command or an action can be assigned to the following elements:
Fixed channel by selection of an LIinput or a Cxxx-Bit:
For instance, by selecting LI3 , this action will be triggered by LI3 , regardless of the switched
command channel.
For instance, by selecting C214 , this action will be triggered by the integrated CANopen with Bit
14, regardless of the switched command channel.
Switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit:
For instance, by selecting Cd11 , this action will be triggered by the following elements:
LI06, if the terminal channel is active

C105, if the channel for the integrated modbus is active
C205, if the channel for the integrated CANopen is active
C305, if the communication-card channel is active
155

If the active channel is the graphic display terminal, the functions and commands assigned to CDxx switchable
internal bits are inactive.
Note:
Cd06 to Cd13 can only be used to switch between two networks. There are no equivalent logic inputs.
Terminals
Integrated modbus
Integrated CANopen
Communication card
LI2 (1)
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
LAI1
LAI2
-
C101 (1)
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
C109
C110
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C201 (1)
C202
C203
C204
C205
C206
C207
C208
C209
C210
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215
C301(1)
C302
C303
C304
C305
C306
C307
C308
C309
C310
C311
C312
C313
C314
C315
(1)
156
Internal bit, switchable

CD00
CD01
CD02
CD03
CD04
CD05
CD06
CD07
CD08
CD09
CD10
CD11
CD12
CD13
CD14
CD15
If [2/3 wire control] (tCC), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104is set to [3 wire] (3C) , access to LI2, C101, C201 and C301 is not possible.

Assignment conditions for logic inputs and control bits
The following elements are available for every command or function that can be assigned to a logic input or a
control bit:
Drive with or without option
Logic inputs
With integrated modbus in configuration [I/O profile] (IO)
With integrated modbus regardless of configuration
With integrated CANopen in configuration [I/O profile] (IO)
With integrated CANopen regardless of configuration
With a communication card in configuration [I/O profile] (IO)
With a communication card regardless of configuration
In configuration [I/O profile] (IO)
Regardless of configuration
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
[LI1] (LI1) - [LI6] (LI6)

[LAI1] (LAI1) - [LAI2] (LAI2)
[C101] (C101) - [C110] (C110)
[C111] (C111) - [C115] (C115)
[C201] (C201) - [C210] (C210)
[C211] (C211) - [C215] (C215)
[C301] (C301) - [C310] (C310)
[C311] (C311) - [C315] (C315)
[CD00] (Cd00) - [CD10] (Cd10)
[CD11] (Cd11) - [CD15] (Cd15)
Note:
In configuration [I/O profile] (IO) access to LI1 is not possible; if [2/3 wire control] (tCC), see "Simply
start menu (SIM-)" on page 104is set to [3 wire] (3C) , access to LI2, C101, C201 and C301 is likewise
not possible.
Warning!
Control failure
Inactive command channels are not monitored (no fault solution due to an interruption of the communication bus).
Make sure that the commands and functions assigned to bits C101 to C315 will not pose a risk in the
event of an interruption of the associated communication bus.
157

Control parameters
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > CTL
Fr1
[Ref.1 channel]
[Al1](A11)
AI1 [Al1] (AI1): Analog input AI1
LCC [HMI] (LCC): Source graphic display terminal
PI [RP] (PI): Motor voltage
AIU1 [AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial (only available if [Profile] (CHCF) is not set to [Not separ.] (SIM) configuration .
Note:
When using the ACOPOSinverter P74 with POWERLINK and the B&R Automation Studio, the standard
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) setting is automatically changed to [COMMUNICATION CARD] (net) .
rIn
nO
YES
PSt
2s
nO
YES
CHCF
2s
[RV Inhibition]
[No] (nO)
Inhibition of movement in reverse direction, does not apply to direction requests sent by logic inputs.
Reverse direction requests sent by logic inputs are taken into account.
Reverse direction requests sent by the graphic display terminal are not taken into account.
Reverse direction requests sent by the line are not taken into account.
Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID, summing input, etc., is interpreted as a zero reference (0 Hz).
[No] (nO)
[Yes] (YES)
[Stop Key priority]
[Yes] (YES)
This will be a freewheel stop. If the active command channel is the graphic display terminal, the stop occurs according to [Type of stop] (Stt), see
"Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170, regardless of the configuration of [Stop Key priority] (PSt).
[No] (nO)
[Yes] (YES): Gives priority to the STOP key on the graphic display terminal when the graphic display terminal is not enabled as the command
channel.
[Profile]
[Not separ.] (SIM)
SIM [Not separ.] (SIM): Reference and command not separated.

SEP [Separate] (SEP): Reference and command are separated. Access to this assignment in mode [I/O profile] (IO) is not possible.
IO [I/O profile] (IO): I/O Profile
CCS
[Cmd switching]
[ch1 active] (Cd1)
*
In order to access this parameter, [Profile] (CHCF) must be set to [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO) . If the assigned input or bit is in state 0,
the channel [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) is active. If the assigned input or bit is in state 1, the channel [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) is active.
Cd1 [ch1 active] (Cd1): [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) active (no switching)
Cd2 [ch2 active] (Cd2): [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) active (no switching)
... [...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150 (not Cd00 to Cd15)
Cd1
[Cmd channel 1]
[Terminals] (tEr)
*
In order to access this parameter, [Profile] (CHCF) must be set to [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO) .
Note:
When using the ACOPOSinverter P74 with POWERLINK and the B&R Automation Studio, the standard [Cmd channel 1](Cd1)
setting is automatically changed to [COMMUNICATION CARD](net) changed.
tEr
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
Cd2
*

[HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
[COMMUNICATION CARD] (nEt): Communication card (POWERLINK)
[Cmd channel 2]
[Modbus] (Mdb)
Note:
When using the ACOPOSinverter P74 with POWERLINK and the B&R Automation Studio, the standard [Cmd channel 2](Cd2)
setting is automatically changed to [Terminals] (tEr) changed.
tEr
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
rFC
Fr1
Fr2
LI1
...
Fr2
158

[HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
[Ref. 2 switching]
If the assigned input or bit is in state 0, the channel [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) active
If the assigned input or bit is in state 1, the channel [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) is active.
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1): [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) active (no switching)
[Ref.2 channel] (Fr2): [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) active (no switching)
[...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150 (not Cd00 to Cd15)
[Ref.2 channel]
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1)
[No] (nO)
nO [No] (nO): Not assigned. If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not separ.] (SIM) , the command occurs via the terminals with a zero reference. If [Profile]
(CHCF) is set to [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO) , the reference is zero.
Updt [+/- Speed] (UPdt): +/- Speed command
LCC [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
AIU1 [AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial
COP
[Copy channel 1 --> 2]
[No] (nO)
2s
Danger!

Copying the command and/or reference can change the direction of rotation.
Check that this is safe.
nO
SP
Cd
ALL
*
2s
Can be used to copy the current reference and/or the command by means of switching, in order to avoid speed surges, for example.
If [Profile] (CHCF), see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150is set to [Not separ.] (SIM) configuration or [Separate] (SEP) , copying is only possible from
channel 1 to channel 2.
If [Profile] (CHCF) are set to [I/O profile] (IO) , copying is possible in both directions. A reference or a command cannot be copied to a channel
on the terminals. The copied reference is [Frequency ref.] (FrH) (before ramp), except when the target channel reference is entered via the +/speed function. In that case, the [Output frequency] (rFr) reference (after ramp) is copied.
[No] (nO): No copy
[Reference] (SP): Copy reference
[Command] (Cd): Copy command
[Cmd + ref.] (ALL): Copy command and reference
to aid programming.
To change the assignment of this parameter press and hold the ENT key for two seconds.
159
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

As the graphic display terminal may be selected as the command and/or reference channel, its action modes can
be configured.
The parameters on this page can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal, and not on the integrated
display terminal.
Comments:
The command and/or the reference value of the display terminal is only active if the command and/or
reference channels via the terminal are active, with the exception of [T/K] (Ft) (command via the display
terminal), which has priority over these channels. By pressing the [T/K] (Ft) key again (command via the
display terminal), control is transferred back to the selected channel.
Command and reference via the display terminal are impossible if the latter is connected to more than
one drive.
The JOG, Preselect frequencies, and +/- speed functions are only accessible when [Profile] (CHCF) is set
to [Not separ.] (SIM) .
The functions for the default PID reference are only accessible when [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not separ.]
(SIM) or [Separate] (SEP) .
The function, [T/K] (Ft) (command via the display terminal), regardless of the setting in [Profile] (CHCF)
, is accessible.
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > CTL
Fn1
[F1 key assignment]
[No] (nO)
FJOG [Jog] (FJOG): JOG operation
FPS1 [Preset spd2] (FPS1): By pressing the key, the drive will be controlled with [Preset speed 2] (SP2), see "Configuration parameters (continued from
the parameter overview)" on page 109preset speed 2. Press STOP to stop the drive.
FPS2 [Preset spd3] (FPS2): By pressing the key, the drive will be controlled with [Preset speed 3] (SP3), see "Configuration parameters (continued from
the parameter overview)" on page 109preset speed 3. Press STOP to stop the drive.
FPr1 [PID ref. 2] (FPr1): Fixes a PID reference that is equal to [Preset ref. PID 2] (rP2), see "Configuration parameters (continued from the parameter
overview)" on page 109preset PID reference 2. A fault command will not be sent. Only executable if [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is set to [HMI] (LCC)
FPr2 . Not compatible with function [T/K] (Ft).
[PID ref. 3] (FPr2): Fixes a PID reference that is equal to [Preset ref. PID 3] (rP3), see "DRI-CONF-FULL-SET - rPG to rP4" on page 112preset
FuSP PID reference 3. A fault command will not be sent. Only executable if [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) are set to [HMI] (LCC) . Not compatible with function
[T/K] (Ft).
FdSP [+Speed] (FUSP): + speed, only executable if [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) is set to [HMI] (LCC) . Press the key to control the drive and increase the
speed. Press STOP to stop the drive.
Ft [- speed] (FdSP): - speed, only executable if [Ref.2 channel](Fr2) is set to [HMI](LCC) and [+Speed] is assigned to another key. Press the key
to control the drive and decrease the speed. Press STOP to stop the drive.
[T/K] (Ft): Command via the display terminal: Priority over [Cmd switching] (CCS)[Ref. 2 switching] (rFC).
Fn2
[F2 key assignment]
[No] (nO)
Identical to [F1 key assignment] (Fn1), see "Control parameters" on page 158.
Fn3
[F3 key assignment]
[No] (nO)
Fn4
[F4 key assignment]
[No] (nO)
bMp
[HMI cmd.]
[Stop] (StOP)
*
If function [T/K] (Ft) is assigned to a key and that function is active, this parameter defines the behavior at the moment when control returns to
the graphic display terminal.
StOP [Stop] (StOP): Stops the drive (although the controlled direction of operation and reference of the previous channel are copied (to be taken into
account on the next RUN command)).
bUMF [Bumpless] (bUMF): Does not stop the drive (the controlled direction of operation and the reference of the previous channel are copied).
*
160

2.3.3.4.6 Application funct. (FUn-)
Function overview
Name
[REF. SWITCHING]
[REF. OPERATIONS]
[RAMP]
[STOP CONFIGURATION]
[AUTO DC INJECTION]
[JOG]
[PRESET SPEEDS]
[+/- SPEED]
[+- SPEED AROUND REF]
[SAVE REF]
[FLUXING BY LI]
[BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL]
[EXTERNAL LOAD MEAS.]
[HIGH SPEED HOISTING]
[PID REGULATOR]
[PRESET PID REF]
[TORQUE LIMITATION]
[CURRENT LIMIT.]
[INPUT CONTACTOR CNTL]
[OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD]
[POSITIONING BY SENSORS]
[PARAM. SET SWITCHING]
[MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.]
[AUTO-TUNING BY LI]
[TRAVERSE CONTROL]
[HPS SWITCHING]
[DC bus]
Page
see "Ref. switch (rEF-)" on page 166
see "Reference configurations (OAI-)" on page 167
see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168
see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170
see "Auto DC injection (continued from the parameter overview)" on page 172
see "Jog (JOG-)" on page 174
see "Preset speeds (PSS-)" on page 175
see "+/- speed (UPd-)" on page 177
see "Fluxing by LI (FLI-)" on page 182
see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183
see "External load measurement (ELM-)" on page 189
see "High-speed hoisting (HSH-)" on page 195
see "PID controller parameters" on page 199
see "Default/preset PID references (PrI-)" on page 203
see "Torque limitation (tOL-)" on page 204
see "Current limit (CLI-)" on page 206
see "Input contactor control" on page 207
see "Output contactor control (OCC-)" on page 209
see "Positioning via sensor or limit switch (LPO-)" on page 211
see "Parameter switching (MLP-)" on page 216
see "Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.](MMC-)" on page 218
see "Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.](MMC-)" on page 218
see "Traverse control (trO-)" on page 224
see "HSP switching (CHS-)" on page 230
see "DC bus (dCC-)" on page 231
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
(rEF-)
(OAI-)
(rPt-)
(Stt-)
(AdC-)
(JOG-)
(PSS-)
(UPd)
(SrE-)
(SPM-)
(FLI-)
(bLC-)
(ELM-)
(HSH-)
(PId-)
(Pr1-)
(tOL-)
(CLI-)
(LLC-)
(OCC-)
(LPO-)
(MLP-)
(MMC-)
(tnL-)
(trO-)
(CHS-)
(dCC-)
The parameters in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu can only be modified when the drive has been stopped
and no run command is present. Parameters with a symbol in the "Code" column are exceptions. These parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
161
Note:
Compatibility of functions
The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some
functions are incompatible with one another. Functions that are not listed in the table below are fully
compatible.
If functions are not compatible with one another, the first configured function blocks the configuration
of the second.
Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs or outputs.
Danger!
An input can trigger multiple functions at once (Run reverse and Second ramp, for instance).
Therefore, it is important to be sure that these functions can be used at the same time.
Assigning an input to multiple functions is only possible on [Advanced] (AdU) and [Expert] (EPr) levels.
Before assigning a command, reference or function to an input or output, the user must make sure that this input or
output has not already been assigned and that another input or output has not been assigned to an incompatible
function.
The factory configuration of the drive or the macro configurations automatically configure the functions which, in
turn, can disallow the assignment of other functions.
It may be necessary to remove one or more functions from the configuration in order to be able to enable
another. Check the compatibility table below.
Stop functions have priority over run commands.
Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references.
Note:
This compatibility table does not affect commands that can be assigned to the keys of the graphic
display terminal (see "Optional graphic display terminal" on page 64).
162
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
Priority is given to the first of these two stop modes to be activated.

Only the multiplier reference is incompatible with the PID regulator.
Incompatible functions
Compatible functions
Not applicable
Priority functions (functions, which cannot be active at the
same time):
The function indicated by the arrow has priority over the
other functions.
163
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Positioning via limit switch
Load distribution
High-speed hoisting
+/- speed on reference
Freewheel stop
Fast stop.
DC injection stop
Output contactor command
[Auto DC injection]
Skip frequency
Brake logic control
Reference switching
(2)
JOG operation
PID controller
Traverse control
Preset speeds
Reference configurations
see "Reference configurations
(OAI-)" on page 167
+/- speed (3)
see "+/- speed (UPd-)" on page
177
Preset speeds
see "Preset speeds (PSS-)" on page
175
PID controller
see "PID controller parameters" on
page 199
Traverse control
see "Traverse control (trO-)" on page
224
JOG operation
see "Jog (JOG-)" on page 174
Reference switching
see "Ref. switch (rEF-)" on page
166
Skip frequency
see "Preset speeds (PSS-)" on page
175
Brake logic control
see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on
page 183
[Auto DC injection]
see "Auto DC injection (continued
from the parameter overview)" on
page 172
see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on
page 237
Output contactor command
see "Input contactor control" on page
207
Stop via DC
injection
see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page
170
Fast stop.
170
Freewheel stop
170
+/- speed around a reference
see "+/- speed (UPd-)" on page
177
High-speed hoisting
see "High-speed hoisting" on page
191
Load distribution
see "Motor control (continued)" on
page 126
Positioning by sensors
see "Positioning via sensor or limit
switch (LPO-)" on page 211
+/- speed (3)
Reference configurations
Compatibility table

Incompatible functions
The following functions are inaccessible or disabled after an automatic restart: This function is only possible for
the following control types: [2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd
priority] (PFO). [2/3 wire control] (tCC), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104.
Via the menu [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-), see "Organization tree" on page 81, you can check the compatibility of
the functions assigned to each input.
When a function is assigned, a appears on the graphic display terminal, as illustrated in the example below:
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
0A
APPLICATION FUNCT.
English
REF. SWITCH
CONFIG. REFERENCES
RAMP
STOP CONFIGURATION
AUTO DC INJECTION
<<
Code
9.51 s
Quick
>>
If you attempt to assign a function that is incompatible with another function that has already been assigned, an
alarm message will appear:
With the graphic display terminal:
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
INCOMPATIBILITY
English
The function cannot be assigned
because an incompatible
function is already selected. See
programming manual.
ENT or ESC to continue
9.51 s
With integrated display terminal and external display terminal:

COMP flashes until ENT or ESC is pressed.
When you assign a logic input, an analog input, a reference channel or a bit to a function, pressing the HELP button
will display the functions that may already have been activated by this input, bit or channel.
When a logic input, an analog input, a reference channel or a bit that has already been assigned is assigned to
another function, the following screens appear:
With the graphic display terminal:
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
WARNING - ASSIGNED TO
English
Run forward
951 s
ENT-confirm
ESC-exit
If the access level permits this new assignment, pressing ENT confirms the assignment.
If the access level does not permit this new assignment, pressing ENT results in the following display:
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
ASSIGNMENT FORBIDDEN
English
Remove the present
functions from the configuration or
choose access level "Advanced".
951 s
With the integrated display terminal:

The code for the first function, which is already assigned, is displayed flashing.
If the access level permits this new assignment, pressing ENT confirms the assignment.
164
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
If the access level does not permit this new assignment, pressing ENT has no effect, and the message continues
to flash. It is only possible to exit by pressing ESC.
165

Ref. switch (rEF-)
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > REF
rEF[REF. SWITCHING]
rCb
[Ref 1B switching]
[ch1 active] (Fr1)
Diagrams see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150.
If the assigned input or bit is at state 0: [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) active (see [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1), see "Control parameters" on page 158). If the
assigned input or bit is at state 1: [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) active
[Ref 1B switching] (rCb) is forced to [ch1 active] (Fr1) when [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not separ.] (SIM) and [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is assigned via
the terminals (analog inputs, impulse input). See [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1), see "Control parameters" on page 158.
Fr1 [ch1 active] (Fr1): No switching, [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) Active
Fr1b [ch1B active] (Fr1b): No switching, [Ref.1B channel](Fr1b) Active
... [...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150 (not [Cd00] (CdOO) to [Cd15] (Cd15)).
Fr1b
[Ref.1B channel]
[No] (nO)
LCC [HMI] (LCC): Source: Graphic display terminal or external display terminal
nEt [COMMUNICATION CARD] (nEt): Source: optional communication card (POWERLINK)
AIU1 [AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial (only available if [Profile] (CHCF) is not set to [Not separ.] (SIM)).
166

Reference configurations (OAI-)
Summing input/Subtracting input/Multiplier
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Fr1 or Fr1b
SA2
SA3
dA2
dA3
MA2
Ma3
A = (Fr1 or Fr1b + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3
If SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3 are not busy, they are set to 0.
If MA2, MA3 are not busy, they are set to 1.
A is limited by the low frequency parameter LSP and the high frequency parameter HSP .
In multiplication, the signal is ascertained at MA2 or MA3 as a %. 100% corresponds to the maximum value
of the corresponding input. If MA2 or MA3 is sent by the communication bus or the graphic display terminal,
a multiplication variable MFr (see "Monitor configuration (MCF)" on page 262) must be sent via the bus
or the graphic display terminal.
Reversal of the direction of operation in the event of a negative result can be inhibited (see [RV Inhibition]
(SIn), see "Control parameters" on page 158).
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > OAI
OAI[REF. OPERATIONS]
Reference = (Fr1 or Fr1b + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3. Diagrams see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150.
Factory setting
Note:
This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions see "Application funct. (FUn-)" on page 161.
SA2
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
PI
AIU1
AIU2
SA3
dA2
dA3
MA2
MA3
[Summing ref. 2]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be added to [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) .
[Al1] (AI1): Analog input AI1
[HMI] (LCC): Source: Graphic display terminal or external display terminal
[COMMUNICATION CARD] (nEt): Source: optional communication card (POWERLINK)
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial
[AI virtual 2] (AIU2): Virtual analog input 2 via the communication bus
[Summing ref. 3]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be added to [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) . Identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2), Reference configurations (OAI-).
[Subtract. ref. 2]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be subtracted from [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) . Identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2), see "Reference
configurations (OAI-)" on page 167.
[Subtract. ref. 3]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be subtracted from [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) . Identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2), see "Reference
[Multiplier ref. 2]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be multiplied by [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) . Identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2), see "Reference
[Multiplier ref. 3]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be multiplied by [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) . Identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2), see "Reference
167

Ramp type (rPt-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > RPT
rPt[RAMP]
rPt
[Ramp switching]
LIn [Linear] (LIn)

S [S ramp] (S)
U [U ramp] (U)
CUS [Customized] (CUS)
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[Linear] (LIn)
S-shaped ramps
f (Hz)
f (Hz)
FrS
FrS
t2
t1
t2
The rounding coefficient is fixed,

t1 = 0.6 set ramp time (linear)
t2 = 0.4 set ramp time (round)
t3 = 1.4 set ramp time
t2
t2
t1
t3
t3
U-shaped ramps
f (Hz)
f (Hz)
FrS
FrS
t1
t2
t3
f (Hz)
FrS
tA2
t12
t1
t2
t3
Customized ramps
0
tA1
The rounding coefficient is fixed,

t1 = 0.5 set ramp time (linear)
t2 = 1.0 set ramp time (round)
t3 = 1.5 set ramp time
f (Hz)
FrS
0
tA3
tA1: Can be set between 0 and 100%

tA2: adjustable from 0 to (100% - tA1)
tA3: Can be set between 0 and 100%
tA4: adjustable from 0 to (100% - tA3)
tA4
t34
t12 = ACC * (tA1(%) / 100 + tA2(%) / 100 + 1)

t34 = DEC * (tA3(%) / 100 + tA4(%) / 100 + 1)
Inr
[Ramp increment]
[0.1] (0.1)
(1)
This parameter is used for [Acceleration] (ACC), [Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2) and [Deceleration 2] (dE2) .
0.01 [0.01]: Ramp 99.99 seconds
0.1 [0.1]: Ramp 999.9 seconds
1 [1]: Ramp 6,000 seconds
ACC
[Acceleration]
0.00 to 6000 s (2)
3.0 s
(1)
Time required to accelerate from 0 up to [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104). To achieve ramp repeatability,
the value of this parameter must be set according to the application options.
dEC
[Deceleration]
0.00 to 6000 s (2)
3.0 s
(1)
Time required to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104) down to 0. To achieve ramp repeatability, the value of this parameter must be set according to the application options.
tA1
[Begin Acc round]
0 to 100%
10%
*
Rounding of the start of the acceleration ramp in % of ramp time [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2). Can be set between 0 and 100%
(1)
This parameter is accessible when [Ramp switching] (rPt) is [Customized] (CUS) .
tA2
[End Acc round]
0 to 100%
10%
*
Rounding of the end of the acceleration ramp in % of ramp time [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2). adjustable from 0 to 100% (1)
[Begin Acc round] (tA1)).
tA3
[Begin Dec round]
0 to 100%
10%
*
Rounding of the start of the deceleration ramp in % of ramp time [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2). Can be set between 0 and 100%
(1)
This parameter is accessible when [Ramp switching](rPt) is [Customized](CUS) .
tA3
[End Dec round]
0 to 100%
10%
*
Rounding of the end of the deceleration ramp in % of ramp time [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2). adjustable from 0 to 100% (1)
[Begin Dec round] (tA3)).
168

Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0 to 599 Hz, according 0 Hz

to size
Ramp switching threshold

Switching of ramp 2 when [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) does not equal 0 (the value 0 deactivates the function) and motor speed exceeds [Ramp 2
threshold] (Frt) .
Threshold ramp switching can be used in combination with [Ramp switching](rPS) as follows:
LI or bit
Frequency
Ramp
0
< Frt
ACC, dEC
0
> Frt
ACC, dEC
1
< Frt
ACC, dEC
1
> Frt
ACC, dEC
rPS
[Ramp switching]
[No] (nO)
... [...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150
AC2
[Acceleration 2]
0.00 to 6000 s (2)
5.0 s
*
Time required to accelerate from 0 up to [Rated motor freq.] (FrS). To achieve ramp repeatability, the value of this parameter must be set according
(1)
to the application options.
This parameter is accessible when [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) is greater than 0 or when [Ramp switching] (rPS) is assigned.
dE2
[Deceleration 2]
0.00 to 6000 s (2)
5.0 s
*
Time required to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) down to 0. To achieve ramp repeatability, the value of this parameter must be set
(1)
according to the application options.
This parameter is accessible when [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) is greater than 0 or when [Ramp switching] (rPS) is assigned.
brA
[Dec ramp adapt.]
[Yes] (YES)
Caution!
If [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) = [Yes] (YES) or [No] (nO) select when the motor is a synchronous motor with a permanent magnet.
Otherwise, the motor will be demagnetized.
Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at too low a value with respect to the inertia of the load,
which can cause an overvoltage fault.
[Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) is forced to [No] (nO) if the braking logic [Brake assignment] (bLC) is assigned (see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page
183).
The function is incompatible with applications requiring:
Positioning on a ramp
Use of a braking resistor (this would not preserve its function)

YES [Yes] (YES): Function active: for applications that do not require high deceleration, according to drive size and [Motor control type](Ctt), see "Motor
control (drC-)" on page 117, the following parameters are displayed, with which a higher deceleration can be attained than with the parameter
[Yes] (YES). Use comparative testing to determine your selection.
dYnA [High torq. A] (dYnA): Addition of a constant current flow component. If [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) is set to [High torq. x] (dYnx) , dynamic braking
performance is improved through the addition of a current flow component. The aim is to increase the iron loss and magnetic energy stored in
the motor.
(1)
(2)
*
This parameter is also accessible via the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168.
169
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > RPTFrt
[Ramp 2 threshold]

Stop mode (Stt-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > STT
Stt[STOP CONFIGURATION]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Note:
Some types of stop cannot be used with all other functions. Follow the instructions see "Application funct. (FUn-)" on page 161.
[Type of stop]
Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.
Stt
[Ramp stop] (rMP)
Note:
When the "Braking logic" function (see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183) is unlocked or when [Low speed time out]
(tLS), see "Configuration parameters (continued from the parameter overview)" on page 109 or see "PID controller parameters"
on page 199does not equal 0, only "Stop via ramp" can be configured.
rMP
FSt
nSt
dCI
FFt
*
(1)
nSt
FSt
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop via ramp

[Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop
[DC Injection] (dCI): DC injection braking is only available when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117is not set to
[Sync. mot.] (SYn) .
[Freewheel stop Thd.]
0.2 to 599 Hz
0.2 Hz
Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop. This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a
freewheel stop below a low speed threshold.
This parameter is accessible when [Type of stop] (Stt) are set to [Fast stop] (FSt) or [Ramp stop] (rMP) , and when [Brake assignment] (bLC) or
[Auto DC injection] (AdC) is configured.
[Freewheel]
[No] (nO)
This stop is activated when the input or bit changes to 0. If the input changes back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will
restart only if [2/3 wire control] (tCC), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104, = [2 wire] (2C) and[2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd
priority] (PFO). If not, a new run command must be sent.
[Fast stop assign.]
[No] (nO)
This stop is activated when the input changes to 0 or the bit changes to 1 (state 0 of the bit in [I/O profile] (IO)). If the input changes back to
state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will restart only if [2/3 wire control] (tCC), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104, =
[2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO). If not, a new run command must be sent.
Note:
dCF
[Ramp divider]
0 to 10
4
*
This parameter is accessible when [Type of stop] (Stt) = [Fast stop] (FSt) and [Fast stop assign.] (FSt) are not equal to [No] (nO) and [Stop type]
(1)
(PAS) does not equal [Fast stop] (FSt).
The unlocked ramp ([Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2)) is then divided by this coefficient during the stop command.
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.
dCI
[DC injection assign.]
[No] (nO)
Warning!
No holding torque
DC injection braking does not provide any holding torque at zero speed.
DC injection braking does not work when there is a loss of power or when the drive detects a fault.
Where necessary, use a separate brake to maintain torque levels.
DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1. If the input changes back to state 1 and the run command
is still active, the motor will restart only if [2/3 wire control] (tCC), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104. = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type]
(tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO). If not, a new run command must be sent.
Note:
170

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > STTIdC
*
(1) (3)
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0.1 to 1.41 In (2)
0.64 In (2)
Warning!
No holding torque
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Caution!
tdI
*
(1) (3)
Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode.
This parameter is accessible when [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC Injection] (dCI) or [DC injection assign.] (dCI) Not equal to [No] (nO).
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
Caution!
IdC2
*
(1) (3)
Maximum duration of current injection [DC inject. level 1] (IdC). After this time interval has elapsed, the injection current changes to level [DC
inject. level 2] (IdC2).
This parameter is accessible when [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC Injection] (dCI) or [DC injection assign.] (dCI)Not equal to [No] (nO).
0.1 In (2) up to [DC in- 0.5 In (2)
ject. level 1](IdC)
Caution!
tdC
*
(1) (3)
Injection current is activated by logic input or selected as stop mode, once time interval [DC injection time 1] (tdI) has elapsed.
This parameter is accessible when [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC Injection] (dCI) or [DC injection assign.] (dCI) Not equal to [No] (nO).
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
Caution!

Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for DC injection braking, only selected as stop mode.
This parameter is accessible when [Stop type] (Stt) is set to [DC Injection] (dCI) .
dOtd
[Dis. operat opt code]
Deactivation of stop mode.
nSt [Freewheel] (nSt): Deactivation of drive function
rMp [Ramp stop] (rMp): Stop ramp, then deactivation of drive function
(1)
(2)
(3)
*
[Ramp stop] (rMp)

These settings are independent of function [AUTO DC INJECTION] (AdC-).
171

Auto DC injection (AdC-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > ADC
AdC[AUTO DC INJECTION]
AdC
[Auto DC injection]
2s
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[Yes] (YES)
Danger!

If [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is set to [continuous] (Ct) , the DC injection takes place even if no execute command has been given.
Check that this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.
Warning!
No holding torque
Automatic current injection on stopping (at the end of the ramp)
Note:
This function blocks the function, [Motor fluxing](FLU), see "Configuration parameters (continued from the parameter overview)"
on page 109. If [Motor fluxing] (FLU) is set to [continuous] (FCt) , then [Auto DC injection] (AdC) must be set to [No] (nO) .
Note:
[Auto DC injection] (AdC) is set to [No] (nO) when [Motor control type] (Ctt), Motor control (drC-)is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) .
[Auto DC injection] (AdC) is forced to [No] (nO) when [Brake assignment] (bLC), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183is not set to [No]
(nO) . This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent. It can be accessed with the drive running.
nO [No] (nO): No power feed
YES [Yes] (YES): Adjustable feed duration
Ct [continuous] (Ct): Continuous feed in stop mode
SdC1
0 to 1.2 In (2)
0.7 In (2)
*
(1)
Caution!

tdC1
*
(1)
Level of standstill DC injection current. [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO) .
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
Caution!

Standstill injection time. The parameter can be used if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO) .
If [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) , this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance
time.
172

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > ADCSdC2
*
(1)
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0 to 1.2 In (2)
0.5 In (2)
0 to 30 s
0s
Caution!

tdC2
*
(1)
Level 2 of standstill DC injection current.

This parameter can be used if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO) .
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Caution!

Standstill injection time 2.
This parameter can be used if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is set to [Yes] (YES) .
AdC
SdC2
YES
Ct
Ct
=0
Run command
Function
I
SdC1
SdC2
I
SdC1
tdC1
tdC1 + tdC2 t
I
SdC1
tdC1
t
1
0
Speed
0
(1)
(2)

*
2s
to aid programming.
173

Jog (JOG-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > JOG
JOG[JOG]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Note:
JOG
[JOG]
[LI3] (LI3)
Pulse operation.
The JOG function is only active if the command channel and the reference channels are on the terminals. Function active if the assigned input
or bit is at 1.
Example: 2-wire control operation (tCC = 2C)
motor frequency
Ramp
DEC/DE2
Ramp
forced to 0.1 s
Reference
JGF reference
0
JGF reference
LI (JOG)
Run forward
JGt
Run reverse
1

... [...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150 (not [Cd00](Cd00) to [Cd15](Cd15))
JGF
[Jog]
0 to 10 Hz
10 Hz
*
Reference in jog operation
(1)
These parameters are accessible if [JOG] (JOG) is not set to [No] (nO) .
JGt
[Jog delay]
0 to 2.0 s
0.5 s
*
Anti-repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations. These parameters are accessible if [JOG] (JOG) is not set to [No] (nO) .
(1)
(1)

*
2s
174
to aid programming.

Preset speeds (PSS-)
2, 4, 8 or 16 speeds can be preset, requiring 1, 2, 3 or 4 logic inputs respectively.
Note:
You must configure 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds.
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
You must configure 2, 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds.

You must configure 2, 4, 8, and 16 speeds in order to obtain 16 speeds.
Combination table for preset speed inputs
(1)
16 frequencies
LI (PS16)
8 frequencies
LI (PS8)
4 frequencies
LI (PS4)
2 frequencies
LI (PS2)
Frequency reference
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Reference (1)
SP2
SP3
SP4
SP5
SP6
SP7
SP8
SP9
SP10
SP11
SP12
SP13
SP14
SP15
SP16
See diagram on page 124: Reference 1 = (SP1).
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > PSSPSS[PRESET SPEEDS]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Note:
[2 preset speeds]
PS4
[4 preset speeds]
Identical to [2 preset speeds] (PS2), see "Preset speeds (PSS-)" on page 175.
In order to obtain 4 speeds, 2 speeds must also be configured.
PS8
[8 preset speeds]
In order to obtain 8 speeds, 2 and 4 speeds must also be configured.
PS16
[16 preset speeds]
In order to obtain 16 speeds, 2, 4, and 8 speeds must also be configured.
PS2
[No] (nO)
[No] (nO)
[No] (nO)
[No] (nO)
175

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > PSSSP2
[Preset speed 2]
0 to 599 Hz
10 Hz
*
2. Preset speed. Combination table for preset PID references, see "PID controller (Pld-)" on page 196.
(1)
SP3
[Preset speed 3]
0 to 599 Hz
15 Hz
*
(1)
SP4
[Preset speed 4]
0 to 599 Hz
20 Hz
*
(1)
SP5
[Preset speed 5]
0 to 599 Hz
25 Hz
*
(1)
SP6
[Preset speed 6]
0 to 599 Hz
30 Hz
*
(1)
SP7
[Preset speed 7]
0 to 599 Hz
35 Hz
*
(1)
SP8
[Preset speed 8]
0 to 599 Hz
40 Hz
*
(1)
SP9
[Preset speed 9]
0 to 599 Hz
45 Hz
*
(1)
SP10
[Preset speed 10]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
*
(1)
SP11
[Preset speed 11]
0 to 599 Hz
55 Hz
*
(1)
SP12
[Preset speed 12]
0 to 599 Hz
60 Hz
*
(1)
SP13
[Preset speed 13]
0 to 599 Hz
70 Hz
*
(1)
SP14
[Preset speed 14]
0 to 599 Hz
80 Hz
*
(1)
SP15
[Preset speed 15]
0 to 599 Hz
90 Hz
*
(1)
SP16
[Preset speed 16]
0 to 599 Hz
100 Hz
*
16. Preset speed. The display of parameter [Preset speed x](SPx) conforms to the number of configured speeds. See Combination table for preset
(1)
PID references, see "PID controller (Pld-)" on page 196.
JPF
[Skip Frequency]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
Skip frequency. This parameter prevents operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency. This function can be used to avoid
a critical speed at which resonances would occur. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JF2
[Skip Frequency 2]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
2. Skip frequency. This parameter prevents operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency. This function can be used to
avoid a critical speed at which resonances would occur. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JF3
[3rd Skip Frequency]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
3. Skip frequency. This parameter prevents operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency. This function can be used to
avoid a critical speed at which resonances would occur. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JFH
[Skip Frequency Hyst.]
0.1 to 10 Hz
1 Hz
*
This parameter is visible when at least one skip frequency, [Skip frequency] (JPF), [Skip frequency 2] (JF2) or [3rd Skip Frequency] (JF3) , is
not equal to 0.
Skip frequency range: from (JPF JFH) to (JPF + JFH) , for example.
This setting applies to all 3 frequencies, (JPF, JF2, JF3).
(1)
*
176


+/- speed (UPd-)
Two types of operation are available:
+/- speed with double-press buttons:

Description: 1 button pressed twice (2 steps) for each direction of rotation. A contact closes each time the button
is pressed.
Released (- speed)
-
Forward button
Reverse button
1st press (speed maintained)

a
c
2nd press (+ speed)

a and b
c and b
Connection example:
Control terminal bar
LI1 LIx LIy +24
b
a
LI1: Run forward

LIx: Run reverse
LIy: + speed
Motor frequency
LSP
0
LSP
Run forward
2nd press
1st press
0
Run reverse
b
a
b
a
2nd press
1st press
0
d
c
Do not use this "+/-speed" type with 3-wire control.

In both instances, the maximum speed is given by [High speed] (HSP) (see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104.
Note:
When switching references with [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC) (see "Control parameters" on page 158), from
a preferred reference channel to another reference channel via "+/- speed", the reference value [Output
frequency] (rFr) (after ramp) can be copied simultaneously in accordance with the [Copy channel 1 -> 2] (COP) (see "Control parameters" on page 158parameter.
When switching references with [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC) (see "Control parameters" on page 158), from
one reference channel to another reference channel via "+/- speed", the reference value [Output frequency] (rFr) reference (after ramp) is copied.
This prevents the speed being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place.
177
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Use of single action buttons: Two logic inputs are required in addition to rotational direction(s). The input
set to "+ speed" increases the speed, and the input set to "- speed" reduces the speed.
Use of double action buttons: Only one logic input must be assigned to + speed.

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > UPD
UPd[+/- SPEED]
This function is accessible when reference channel [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) is set to [+/- Speed] (UPdt) . see "Control parameters" on page 158.
Note:
[+ speed assignment]
[No] (nO)
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.
... [...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150. (Cd00 to Cd15 applicable when [Profile] (CHCF) = [I/O profile](IO))
dSP
[-Speed assignment]
[No] (nO)
The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150.
Str
[Save ref]
[No] (nO)
*
This parameter, when assigned to the "+/- speed" function, can be used to save the reference:
USP
When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM)

When the line supply is severed or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM).
Therefore, the next time the drive starts up, the speed reference is the last reference saved.
nO [No] (nO): No saving (the next time the drive starts up, the speed reference is [Low speed](LSP), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104)
[RAM] (rAM): Saved in RAM
rAM [EEPROM] (EEP): Saved in EEPROM
EEP
*
178

+/- speed around the reference (SrE-)
The maximum total reference is limited by [High speed] (HSP) , and the minimum reference is limited by [Low
speed] (LSP) . see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104.
Example of 2-wire control:
motor frequency
[Acceleration 2] (AC2)
[Deceleration 2](dE2)
+ SrP%
Reference A +
- SrP%
LSP
LSP
- SrP%
Reference A + SrP%
+ Speed
- Speed
Direction of operation
Run forward
Run forward
Run reverse
179
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
The reference is delivered by [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) , possibly with the addition/subtraction/multiplication functions and the preset frequencies. For the sake of simplicity, this will hereinafter be called
Reference A. The action of the + speed and - speed keys can be set to a percentage of Reference A. On stopping,
the reference (A +/- speed) is not saved. The drive then runs with only one reference A+.

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > SRE
SrE[+- SPEED AROUND REF]
This function is accessible for reference channel [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) .
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Note:
This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions see "Incompatible functions" on page 164.
[+ speed assignment]
[No] (nO)
dSI
[-Speed assignment]
[No] (nO)
The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150.
SrP
[+/-Speed limitation]
0 to 50%
10%
*
This parameter limits the variation range with +/- speed as a % of the reference. The ramps used in connection with this function are [Acceleration
2] (AC2) and [Deceleration 2] (dE2).
This parameter is accessible when +/- Speed is assigned.
AC2
[Acceleration 2]
0.00 to 6000 s (2)
5.00 s
*
(1)
This parameter is accessible when [+/- Speed] (tUd) is assigned.
dE2
[Deceleration 2]
0.00 to 6000 s (2)
5.00 s
*
Time required to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) down to 0. To achieve ramp repeatability, the value of this parameter must be set
(1)
according to the application options.
This parameter is accessible when [+/- Speed] (tUd) is assigned.
USI
(1)
(2)
*
180
This parameter is also accessible via the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) .

Range 0.01 to 99.99 s, 0.1 to 999.9 s, or 1 to 6000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168.

Save reference (SPM-)
This function is used to control the speed of several drives alternately via a single analog reference and
one logic input for each drive.
It is also used to confirm a line reference (communication bus or network) on several drives via a logic
input. This allows movements to be synchronized by getting rid of variations when the reference is set.
The reference is acquired 100 ms after the rising edge of the request. A new reference is not then acquired
until a new request is made.
F: motor frequency
Reference
t
Run command
1
0
LIx (saved)
1
0
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > SPM
SPM[SAVE REF]
SPM
[Save ref. assign.]
Assignment to a logic input Function active if the assigned input is active.
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
181
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Saving a speed reference value using a logic input command lasting longer than 0.1 s.

Fluxing by LI (FLI-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > FLI
FLI[FLUXING BY LI]
FLU
[Motor fluxing]
*
(1)
2s
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (FnO)
Danger!

Caution!
FnC [Not cont.] (FnC): Non-continuous mode
FCt [continuous] (FCt): Continuous mode: This option is not possible when [Auto DC injection] (AdC), see "Auto DC injection (continued from the
parameter overview)" on page 172is set to [Yes] (YES) or when [Type of stop] (Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170is set to [Freewheel] (nSt) .
FnO [No] (FnO): Function inactive
In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup, magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor.
In [continuous] (FCt) mode, the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up.
In [Not cont.] (FnC) mode, fluxing occurs when the motor starts up.
The flux current is higher than the [Rated mot. current] (nCr) (configured rated motor current), when the flux is building. After this, the flux current
will be adjusted to the motor's magnetizing current.
If [Motor control type] (Ctt)see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117 are set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) , the [Motor fluxing](FLU) parameter determines
the rotor assignment and not the magnetization.
If [Brake assignment] (bLC), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183is not set to [No] (nO) , the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter is disabled.
[Fluxing assignment]
[No] (nO)
FLI
*
Caution!
nO
LI1
...
ASt
*
IPMA
SPMA
PSI
PSIO
nO
(1)

*
2s
182
Assignment is only possible if [Motor fluxing] (FLU) = [Not cont.] (FnC).

If an LI or a bit is assigned to the motor fluxing command, flux is built up when the assigned input or bit is at 1.
If an LI or a bit has not been assigned, or if the assigned LI or bit is at 0 when a run command is sent, fluxing occurs when the motor starts.
[...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150.
[Angle setting type]
[PSIO align] (PSIO)
Mode for measuring the phase shift angle. Only visible when [Motor control type] (Ctt) are set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) .
[PSI align] (PSI) and [PSIO align] (PSIO) work for all types of synchronous motors. [SPM align] (SPMA)and [IPM align] (IPMA) improve synchronous
motor performance according to motor type.
[IPM align] (IPMA): Allocation for IPM motors (interior-buried permanent magnet motors). Allocation mode for interior-buried permanent magnet
motors (this motor normally has high magnetic reluctance). It uses high-speed charging, which produces less noise than the standard allocation
mode.
[SPM align] (SPMA): Allocation for SPM motors (surface-mounted permanent magnet motors). Allocation mode for surface-mounted permanent
magnet motors (this motor normally has medium-to-low magnetic reluctance). It uses high-speed charging, which produces less noise than the
standard allocation mode.
[PSI align] (PSI): Impulse signal charging. Standard allocation mode according to impulse signal charging.
[PSIO align] (PSIO): Impulse signal charging, optimized. Optimized standard allocation mode according to impulse signal charging. The measuring
time of the phase shift angle is reduced after the first RUN command or measurement process, even if the drive has been switched off.
[No align] (nO): No assignment.
to aid programming.

Brake logic control (bLC-)
Used to control an electromagnetic brake by the drive, for horizontal and vertical hoisting applications, and for
unbalanced machines.
Principle:
Maintain motor torque in the driving load holding direction during brake opening and closing, in order to hold the
load, start smoothly when the brake is released and stop smoothly when the brake is engaged.
Horizontal hoisting movement:
Synchronize brake engagement with the build-up of torque during startup and with the closing of the brakes at
zero speed on stopping, to prevent jolting.
Recommended settings for brake logic control for a vertical hoisting application:
Warning!
Control failure
Check that the selected settings and configurations will not result in the dropping or loss of
control of the load being lifted.
Heed the following recommendations.
[Brake impulse] (bIP): [Yes] (YES). Make sure that the forward direction of operation corresponds to hoisting
the load. For applications where the lowered load varies dramatically from the hoisted load, set bIP = 2 Ibr
(example: Always hoisting under load but lowering in empty state).
Brake engage current ([Brake release I FW] (Ibr) and [Brake release I Rev] (Ird)when [Brake impulse] (bIP)
= 2 Ibr): Set the brake engage current to the motor's rated current as shown on the nameplate. Test and
adjust the brake engage current to achieve slip-free holding of the load.
Acceleration time: For hoisting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than 0.5
seconds. Check that the drive does not go into current limit mode. The same recommendation also applies
to deceleration. Please note: For a hoisting movement, a braking resistor must be used.
[Brake Release time] (brt): must be set according to brake type. This is the time required for the mechanical
brake to release.
[Brake release freq.] (bIr), only in the open control loop: Leave in [Auto] (AUtO) mode and adjust if necessary.
[Brake release freq] (bEn): Leave in [Auto] (AUtO) mode and adjust if necessary.
[Brake Release time] (bEt): must be set according to brake type. It is the time required for the mechanical
brake to engage.
Recommended settings for brake logic control for a horizontal hoisting application:
[Brake impulse] (bIP): No
[Brake release current] (Ibr): Set to 0.
[Brake Release time] (brt): must be set according to brake type. This is the time required for the mechanical
brake to release.
[Brake release freq] (bEn), only in the open control loop: Leave in [Auto] (AUtO) mode and adjust if necessary.
[Brake Release time] (bEt): must be set according to brake type. It is the time required for the mechanical
brake to engage.
183
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Vertical hoisting movement:

Brake logic control, horizontal movement in open-loop mode
Frequency
Reference
t
bEn
Fluxed motor
SdC1
Fluxingrated current
t
Ibr attained
Torque current
0 attained
Ibr
t
Run forward
Run reverse
t
Relay
or logicOutput
0
Brake contact
Flux
Motor typeControl
Torque
brt
Frequency
tbE bEt
ttr
Locking
Engaged
Injection
State of brake
Released
t
Legend:
184
(bEn): [Brake release freq]

(bEt): [Brake Release time]
(brt): [Brake Release time]
(Ibr): [Brake release I FW]
(SdC1): [Auto DC inj. level 1]
(tbE): [Brake engage delay]
(ttr): [Time to restart]

Brake logic control, vertical movement in open-loop mode
Frequency
bIr
JdC
JdC
bEn
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Reference
t
Fluxed motor
Fluxingrated current
t
Ibr attained
Torque current
0 attained
Ibr
t
Lifting
Lower
t
Relay
or logicOutput
0
Brake contact
t
State of brake
Released
Torque
Flux
Motor typeControl
tbE bEt
Frequency
ttr
Locking
brt
Injection
Engaged
Legend:
(bEn): [Brake release freq]

(bEt): [Brake Release time]
(bIr): [Brake release freq.]
(brt): [Brake Release time]
(Ibr): [Brake release I FW]
(JdC): [Jump at reversal]
(tbE): [Brake engage delay]
(ttr): [Time to restart]
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > BLC
bLC[BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Note:
bLC
[Brake assignment]
[No] (nO)
185

Logic output or control relay
Note:
If the brake is assigned, only a ramp stop is possible. Check the parameter [Type of stop] (Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170.
nO
r2
LO1
dO1
bSt
*
Assignment of brake logic is only possible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not equal to [Standard] (Std), [V/F 5pts] (UF5), [V/F Quad.] (UFq) or [Sync.
mot.] (SYn) . Compatibility table for compatible functions see "Compatibility table" on page 163.
[No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed).
[R2] (r2): Relay
[LO1] (LO1): Logic output
[DO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1, which can be used as a logic output. This selection is possible if
[AO1 assignment] (AO1), see "Configuration AO1 parameter overview" on page 148is set to [No] (nO) .
[Movement type]
[Hoisting] (UEr)
HOr [Traveling] (HOr): Resistive-load movement (translational motion of overhead crane, for example).
Note:
If [Motor control type](Ctt) are set to [Standard](Std) or [V/F 5pts](UF5) , then [Movement type] (bSt) is forced to [Traveling](HOr) .
UEr
[Hoisting] (UEr): Driving-load movement (hoisting winch, for example).
Note:
If [Weight sensor ass.](PES), see "External load measurement (ELM-)" on page 189is not equal to [No](nO) , then [Movement
type] (bSt) is forced to [Hoisting](UEr) .
bCI
*
nO
LI1
...
bIP
*
nO
YES
2Ibr
Ibr
*
(1)
Ird
*
(1)
brt
*
(1)
bIr
*
(1)
[Brake contact]
[No] (nO)
If the brake has a monitoring contact (closed for released brake).
[...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150
[Brake impulse]
[Yes] (YES)
[Brake impulse]
These parameters are accessible if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is set to [No] (nO) .see "External load measurement (ELM-)" on page 189). The
parameter is set to [Yes] (YES) when [Movement type] (bSt) is set to [Hoisting] (UEr) .
[No] (nO): Motor torque in the required direction is given by [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) .
[Yes] (YES): Motor torque is in forward operation (make sure that this direction corresponds to the hoisting operation), with [Brake release I FW]
(Ibr).
[2 IBR] (2Ibr): Torque is in the required direction, with current [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) for forward operation and [Brake release I Rev] (Ird) for
reverse operation, for certain specific applications.
[Brake release I FW]
0 to 1.36 In (2)
0A
Brake release current threshold for ascending or forward movement.
This parameter is accessible when [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is set to [No] (nO) . see "External load measurement (ELM-)" on page 189.
[Brake release I Rev]
0 to 1.36 In (2)
0A
Brake release current threshold for descending or reverse movement.
This parameter is accessible when [Brake impulse] (bIP) are set to [2 IBR] (2Ibr) .
0 to 5.00 s
0s
Break engage delay.
[Brake release freq.]
[Auto] (AUtO) Up to
10 Hz
[Auto] (AUtO)
Brake engage frequency threshold (initialization of acceleration ramp).

This parameter is accessible when [Movement type] (bSt), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183is set to [Hoisting] (UEr) .
AUtO [Auto] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the motor slip rating, which was calculated using the drive parameters.
0 to 10 Hz: Manual control
bEn
[Brake release freq]
[Auto] (AUtO) 0 to 10 [Auto] (AUtO)
*
Hz
(1)
Brake release frequency threshold
Note:
[Brake release freq] (bEn) cannot be higher than [Low speed] (LSP).
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > BLC
tbE
*
(1)
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0 to 5.00 s
0s
Warning!
Control failure
bEt
*
(1)
SdC1
186
Time delay before brake release command.

Brake engage time (brake response time)
0 to 5.00 s
0s
0 to 1.2 In (2)
0.7 In (2)

*
(1)
Caution!
Note:
This parameter is accessible when [Movement type] (bSt), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183is set to [Traveling] (HOr) .
[Engage at reversal]
[No] (nO)
This parameter can be used to select whether or not the brake engages on transition to zero speed when the operating direction is reversed.
nO [No] (nO): The brake does not engage.
YES [Yes] (YES): The brake engages.
JdC
[Jump at reversal]
[Auto] (AUtO) Up to
[Auto] (AUtO)
*
10 Hz
(1)
This parameter is accessible when [Movement type] (bSt), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183is set to [Hoisting] (UEr) .
When the reference direction is reversed, this parameter can be used to avoid loss of torque (and consequential release of load) on transition to
zero speed. This parameter is objectless when [Engage at reversal] (bEd) = [Yes] (YES) .
ttr
[Time to restart]
0.00 to 15.00 s
0s
*
Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence
(1)
bEd
*
(1)
(2)
*

187
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Level of standstill DC injection current.

Brake control logic expert parameters
The following brake logic sequence parameters are only accessible in expert mode.
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > BLC
brH0
[BRH b0]
0
*
Selection of the brake restart sequence if a run command is repeated while the brake is engaging.
0 [0] (0): The engage/release sequence is fully executed.
1 [1] (1): The brake is immediately reopened.
A run command may be requested during the brake release phase. Based on the configuration of [BRH b0] (brH0) , the sequence for brake
reapplication either is or is not executed.
Run command
Frequency
[BRH b0] (brH0) = 0
bEt
Frequency
Injection
Relay or
Logic input
ttr brt
bEn
[BRH b0] (brH0) = 1
Relay or
Logic input
Note:
If a run command is requested during the "ttr" phase, the complete brake control sequence is initialized.
brH1
*
0
1
brH2
*
0
1
[BRH b1]
0
Deactivation of the brake contact in steady state fault.
[0] (0): The "brake feedback" fault is active in steady state (fault if the contact is open during operation). The [Brake contact] (brF) fault is monitored
in all operational phases.
[1] (1): The "brake feedback" fault is not active in steady state. The [Brake contact] (brF) fault is monitored only during brake engage and release
phases.
[BRH b2]
0
Taking the "brake feedback" into account for the brake control sequence.
[0] (0): "Brake feedback" remains unmonitored.
[1] (1): "Brake feedback" is monitored.
If the "brake feedback" is assigned to a logic input:
[BRH b2] (brH2) = 0: During the brake release sequence, the reference is unlocked after the time interval [Brake Release time] (brt) has
elapsed. Diring the brake engage sequence, the current changes to 0 according to the ramp, [Current ramp time] (brr) after the time
interval, [Brake Release time] (bEt)has elapsed.
[BRH b2] (brH2) = 1: When the brakes are released, the reference is unlocked when the logic input changes to 1. When the brakes are
engaged, the current chages according to [Current ramp time] (brr) to 0 when the logic input changes to 0.
Run command
Relay or
Logic input
brt
bEt
Frequency
Logic input
Brake contact
Frequency
bIr
brr
*
*
188
brr
brr
[BRH b2] (brH2) = 0
[BRH b2] (brH2) = 1
[Current ramp time]

0 to 5.00 s
Torque current ramp time (increase and decrease) for a current variation corresponding to [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) .
0s

External load measurement (ELM-)
Load measurement
This function, on the basis of information received from a load sensor, adapts the [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) current
to the [BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL] (bLC-) function. The signal from the load sensor can be assigned to an analog
input (usually a 4 - 20 mA signal) or to the impulse input, according to the type of load sensor.
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Example: Measurement of the total weight of a hoisting winch and its load
The [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) current is adapted according to the following curve.
Ibr
[Load sensor
point 2Y]
(CP2)
[Point 1 X]
LP1
Zero load
Signal
[Load sensor 100% Load sensor
point 2X]
LP2
[Load sensor
point 1Y]
(CP1)
189

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > ELM
ELM[EXTERNAL LOAD MEAS.]
PES
[Weight sensor ass.]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
Warning!
Control failure
Make sure that... [Point 1 X] (LP1), [Point 2x] (LP2), [Point 1Y] (CP1) and [Point 2Y] (CP2) are configured properly, in order to
prevent loss of control of the load to be hoisted.
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
PI
AIU1
AIU2
LP1
*
CP1
*
LP2
*
CP2
*
IbrA
*
(1)
*
190
This parameter can be configured if [BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL] (bLC-), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183is not set to [No] (nO) .
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial
[Point 1 X]
0 to LP2-0.01%
0%
0 to 99.99% of signal on assigned input.
[Point 1 X] (LP1) must be lower than [Point 2x] (LP2).
This parameter is accessible when [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is assigned.
[Point 1Y]
-1.36 In to 1.36 In (1) -In (1)
Current that balances the load, [Point 1 X] (LP1) , in A.
[Point 2x]
LP1+0.01% to 100%
50%
0.01 to 100% of signal on assigned input.
[Point 2x] (LP2) must be higher than [Point 1 X] (LP1).
[Point 2Y]
-1.36 In to 1.36 In (1) 0 A
Current that balances the load, [Point 2x] (LP2) , in A.
[Ibr 4-20 mA loss]
0 to 1.36 In (1)
0
Brake release current in the event of the loss of the load sensor information.
This parameter can be accessed if the load sensor is assigned to an analog current input and the 4-20mA loss fault is deactivated.
Recommended settings: Rated motor current for a hoisting application

High-speed hoisting
This function can be used to optimize the cycle times for hoisting movements for zero or lightweight loads. It
authorizes operation at "constant power" in order to reach a speed greater than the rated speed without exceeding
the rated motor current.
The speed remains limited by the [High speed] (HSP), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104parameter.
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
The function acts on the speed reference pedestal and not on the reference itself.
Principle:
Frequency
High speed
(HSP)
Co
ns
Motor rated
frequency
FrS
ta
Lifting
nt
po
we
Torque
Max.
0
Rated torque (rated
lowered): Motor
rated torque
Motor rated
frequency
FrS
Co
ns
ta
p
nt
ow
torque
er
Lower
High speed
(HSP)
There are 2 possible operating modes:

"Speed reference" mode: The maximum permissible speed is calculated by the drive during a speed step
that is set so that the drive can measure the load.
"Current limitation" mode: The maximum permissible speed is the speed that supports current limitation in
motor mode, in the "Hoisting" direction only. For the "Lowering" direction, operation is always in "Speed
reference" mode.
191

"Speed reference" mode:
Hoist command or
Lower
t
Reference
HSP
FrS
OSP
Frequency
HSP
Calculated limit
FrS
OSP
tOS
OSP: Adjustable speed step for load measurement

tOS: Load measuring time
Two parameters are used to reduce the speed calculated by the drive, for ascending and descending.
192

"Current limitation" mode:
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Hoist command
t
Reference
HSP
FrS
SCL
0
Frequency
HSP
FrS
SCL
by the
Current limita
tion prescribed
Limit value
Current
CLO
SCL: Adjustable speed threshold, above which current limitation is active

CLO: Current limitation for high-speed function
Note:
The speed reached for a specific current will be lower in case of network undervoltage in comparison
with nominal network voltage.
193

Rope slack
The "rope slack" function can be used to prevent starting up at high speed when a load has been set down ready
for lifting but the rope is still slack (as illustrated below).
Speed
OSP
Load
tOS
rStL
To measure the load, the speed step described see "High-speed hoisting" on page 191 (Parameter OSP) is used.
As long as it has not attained the configurable threshold [Rope slack trq level] (rStL), which corresponds to the
hook weight, the effective measurement cycle is not triggered.
Via the menu [INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) , the display of the "Rope slack" state is assigned to a logic input
or relay.
194

High-speed hoisting (HSH-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > HSH
HSH[HIGH SPEED HOISTING]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[High speed hoisting]
SSO [Speed ref] (SSO): "Speed reference" mode:
CSO [I Limit] (CSO): "Current limitation" mode:
COF
[Motor speed coeff.]
*
Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Descending direction.
This parameter is accessible when [High speed hoisting] (HSO) is not set to [No] (nO) .
COr
[Gen. speed coeff]
*
Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Descending direction.
tOS
[Load measuring tm.]
*
Duration of speed step for measurement.
OSP
[Measurement spd]
*
Speed stabilized for measurement.
CLO
[High speed I Limit]
*
Current limitation at high speed.
This parameter is accessible when [High speed hoisting] (HSO) is set to [I Limit] (CSO) .
[No] (nO)
HSO
0 to 100%
100%
0 to 100%
50%
0.1 s to 65 s
0.5 s
0 up [Rated motor 40 Hz
freq.] (FrS)
0 to 1.5 In (1)
In (1)
Note:
"Motor phase loss (OPL-)" on page 241).
SCL
*
[I Limit. frequency]
0 to 599 Hz, according 40 Hz

to size
Frequency threshold, above which the high-speed limitation current is active.

This parameter is accessible when [High speed hoisting] (HSO) are set to [I Limit] (CSO) .
rSd
[Rope slack config.]
[No] (nO)
*
"Rope slack" function.
drI [Drive estim.] (drI): Measurement of the load by estimating the torque generated by the drive.
PES [Ext. Sensor] (PES): Measurement of the load using a weight sensor, can only be assigned if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES), see "External load
measurement (ELM-)" on page 189is not set to [No] (nO) .
rStL
[Rope slack trq level]
0 to 100%
0%
*
Adjustment threshold corresponding to a load weighing slightly less than the hook when off-load, as a % of the rated load.
This parameter is accessible if the [Rope slack trq level] (rSd) parameter has been assigned.
(1)
*
195
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Note:

PID controller (Pld-)
Overview
The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PID feedback (measurement).
LI
Pr2
Pr4
Internal
Reference P11
YES
rPI
A
Reference A
page 124
and 125
nO
tLS
rSL
+
-
PrP
rP2
YES
x(-1)
Ai1
.....
PAU
Ac2
(1) +
POL
(man)
PIF1 / PIF2
PIP1 / PIP2
RP
FPI
B
page 124
and 125
Settings
SpeedReference
Scaling
Feedback
PID
rlG
rPG
POH
rP4
Preset PID
Set values
nO
rdG
Auto/Manual
Gain
rP3
PIF
Network
AIU2
Return of
Deviation:
PIC
Ramp
nO
threshold of the
Deviations in
Resume (wake-up)
Ramps
ACC DEC
x PSr
Preset manual references

Reference
manually
PIM
nO
Legend:
SP2
Parameters:
The black square
characterizes the
factory assignment
SP16
Ramp AC2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID "wake-ups".
PID feedback:
The PID feedback value must be assigned to one of the analog inputs AI1 to AI3, to the impulse input, or to a
virtual input.
PID reference:
The PID reference must be assigned to the following parameters: Preset reference via logic inputs (rP2, rP3, rP4)
According to the configuration of [Act. internal PID ref.] (PII), see "PID controller parameters" on page 199:
Internal reference (rPI) or
Reference A ([Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b), see "Control parameters" on page 158).
Combination table for preset PID references:
LI (Pr4)
LI (Pr2)
Pr2 = nO
Reference
rPI or A
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
rPI or A
rP2
rP3
rP4
A predictive speed reference can be used to initialize the speed on restarting the process.
196

Scaling of feedback and references:
The maximum scaling parameter value is 32767. To simplify the start-up process, it is recommended that you use
values as close to this maximum value as possible, while still staying within a power of 10 of the real values.
Example (see curve below): Adjustment of the volume in a tank, between 6 m3 and 15 m3.
4-20 mA sensor used, 4.5 m3for 4 mA and 20 m3 for 20 mA, where PIF1 = 4500 and PIF2 = 20000.
Control range 6 to 15 m3, where PIP1 = 6000 (min. reference) and PIP2 = 15000 (max. reference).
Example references:
rP1 (internal reference) = 9500

rP2 (preset reference) = 6500
The [3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu enables user-specific adaptation of displayed unit names and their formats.
Control range
(Reference)
PIP2 (15000)
PIP1 (6000)
PIF1
(4.500)
PIF2
(20.000)
PID feedback
Other parameters:
[PID wake up thresh.] (rSL): rSL parameter:Can be used to set the PID error threshold, above which the
PID regulator will be reactivated (wake-up) after a stop due to the max. time threshold being exceeded at
low speed. [Low speed time out] (tLS) resuming (wake-up)
Inverted correction direction [PID correct. reverse] (PIC): If [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) is set to [No] (nO) ,
then motor speed increases when the deviation is positive; example: pressure control with a compressor.
If [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) are set to [Yes] (YES) , then motor speed decreases when the deviation is
positive; example: temperature control using a cooling fan.
The integral gain may be short-circuited by a logic input.
An alarm on the PID feedback may be configured and indicated by a logic output.
An alarm on the PID error may be configured and indicated by a logic output.
197
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
With the parameters [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) and [Max PID feedback] (PIF2) , the PID feedback value
can be scaled (sensor range). This scaling absolutely must be retained for all further parameters.
With the parameters [Min PID reference] (PIP1) and [Max PID reference] (PIP2) , the control range can
be scaled, i.e., the reference. The control range must be within the sensor range.

"Manual - Automatic" operation with PID
This function combines the PID regulator, the preset speeds and a manual reference. Depending on the state of the
logic input, the speed reference is given by the preset speeds or by a manual reference input via the PID function.
Manual reference [Manual reference] (PIM):
Analog inputs AI1 to AI3
Motor voltage
Predictive speed reference [Speed ref. assign.] (FPI):
[AI1] (AI1): Analog input

[HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal or external display terminal
Setting up the PID regulator

1. Configuration in PID mode
Diagram see "PID controller (Pld-)" on page 196.
2. Run a test under factory settings.
To optimize the drive, adjust [PID prop. gain] (rPG) or [PID integral gain] (rIG)incrementally and independently of
one another, and observe the effect on the PID feedback value in relation to the reference value.
3. If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect
Test the frequency range of the system under load with a reference value under manual operation (without
PID controls):
Speed must remain stable in steady state, and correspond to the reference; the PID feedback value
must remain stable.
In temporary operation, the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly; the PID feedback
value must track with the speed. Perform other tests to check drive settings and/or sensor signals
and wiring.
Switch to PID mode and set
[Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) to [No] (nO) (no self-adjustment of the ramp).
Set the [PID ramp] (PrP) to the minimum value allowable for the machine without triggering [Overbraking]
(ObF) overbraking.
Set integral gain [PID integral gain] (rIG) to the minimum value.
Leave derivative gain [PID derivative gain] (rdG) at 0.
Observe the PID feedback and the reference.
Switch the drive ON/OFF a number of times or vary the load or reference rapidly a number of times.
Set the proportional gain [PID prop. gain] (rPG) so as to obtain the best compromise between response
time and stability in transient phases (slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing).
If the reference value is not maintained in steady state, raise the integral gain [PID integral gain] (rIG)
progressively, and counter any instability (oscillation) by lowering the proportional gain [PID prop. gain]
(rPG) . Achieve a compromise between response time and precision (see diagram).
Lastly, the derivative gain may permit the overshoot to be reduced and the response time to be improved,
although this will make it more difficult to obtain a compromise in terms of stability, as it depends on 3 gains.
Perform tests across the entire reference spectrum.
198

control
size
Reference
Stabilization time
rPG high
Overshoot
Static error
Proportional
Gain
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
rPG low
Rise time
Time
rIG high
Reference
Integral
gain
rIG low
Time
Reference
rPG and rIG correct

rdG increased
Time
The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics.

Parameter
Rise time
Overshoot
Stabilization time
Static error
=
rPG
rIG
rdG
199

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > PID
PId[PID REGULATOR]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Note:
PIF
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
PI
AIU1
AIU2
AIC2
*
nO
Mdb
CAn
nEt
PIF1
*
PIF2
*
(1)
PIP1
*
(1)
PIP2
*
(1)
PII
*
nO
YES
rPI
*
rPG
*
rIG
*
rdG
*
PrP
*
PIC
*
nO
YES
200
[PID feedback ass.]

[No] (nO)
[AI2 net. Channel]
[No] (nO)
This parameter is accessible if the [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is set to [AI virtual 2] (AIU2) . This parameter is also accessible via the [INPUTS/
OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu.
[Min PID feedback]
0 up to [Max PID feed- 100
back] (PIF2) (2)
Value for minimum feedback.
[Max PID feedback]
[Min PID feedback]
1.000
(PIF1) Up to 32767 (2)
Value for maximum feedback.
[Min PID reference]
[Min PID feedback]
150
(PIF1) to [Max PID reference] (PIP2) (2)
Minimum process value.
[Max PID reference]
[Min PID reference]
900
(PIP1) to [Max PID
feedback] (PIF2) (2)
Maximum process value.
[Act. internal PID ref.]
[No] (nO)
Internal PID regulator reference
[No] (nO): The PID controller reference is delivered by [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) , possibly with addition/subtraction/multiplication functions (see "PID controller (Pld-)" on page 196).
[Yes] (YES): The PID regulator reference is defined by the [Internal PID ref.] (rPI) parameter as an internal reference.
[Internal PID ref.]
[Min PID reference]
150
(PIP1) to [Max PID
reference] (PIP2)
Internal PID regulator reference
This parameter is also accessible via the [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) menu.
[PID prop. gain]
0.01 to 100
1
Proportional gain.
[PID integral gain]
0.01 to 100
1
Integral gain.
[PID derivative gain]
0.00 to 100
0
Derivative gain
[PID ramp]
0 to 99.9 s
0s
PID acceleration/deceleration ramp, which is set for a range of [Min PID reference] (PIP1) to [Max PID reference] (PIP2) or vice versa.
[PID correct. reverse]
[No] (nO)
Inverted correction direction [PID correct. reverse] (PIC):
If [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) are set to [No] (nO) , then motor speed increases when the deviation is positive; example: pressure control with
a compressor.
If [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) are set to [Yes] (YES) , then motor speed decreases when the deviation is positive; example: temperature control
using a cooling fan.
[No] (nO): No
[Yes] (YES): Yes
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
POL
[Min PID output]
- 599 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
*
Minimum value of regulator output in Hz.
(1)
POH
[Max PID output]
0 to 599 Hz
60 Hz
*
Maximum value of regulator output in Hz.
(1)
PAL
[Min fbk alarm]
[Min PID feedback]
100
*
(PIF1) to [Max PID
(1)
Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback.
PAH
[Max fbk alarm]
[Min PID feedback]
1.000
*
(PIF1) to [Max PID
(1)
Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback.
PEr
[PID error al]
0 to 65535 (2)
100
*
Regulator error monitoring threshold.
(1)
PIS
[No] (nO)
*
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive (the PID integral is enabled).
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active (the PID integral is disabled).
FPI
[Speed ref. assign.]
[No] (nO)
*
PID regulator predictive speed input
LCC [HMI] (LCC): Source: Graphic display terminal or external display terminal
nEt [COMMUNICATION CARD] (nEt): Source: optional communication card (POWERLINK)
PSr
[Speed input %]
1 to 100%
100%
*
Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input. This parameter is not available when [Speed ref. assign.] (FPI) is set to [No] (nO) .
(1)
PAU
[Auto/Manual assign]
[No] (nO)
*
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the PID controller is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, manual operation is active.
AC2
[Acceleration 2]
0.00 to 6000 s (3)
5s
*
(1)
Ramp AC2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID "wake-ups".
201
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
PIM
[Manual reference]
[No] (nO)
*
Manual speed input. The parameter can be used if [Auto/Manual assign] (PAU) is not equal to[No] (nO) .
The preset speeds are active on the manual reference if they have been configured.
AI1 [Al1] (AI1): Analog input A1
tLS
[Low speed time out]
0 to 999.9 s
0s
(1)
Maximum operation time with [Low speed] (LSP) (see [Low speed] (LSP), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104).
After operation at [Low speed] (LSP) during the determined duration, the motor slowdown command will be sent automatically. The motor continues
to run if the speed reference is set higher than [Low speed] (LSP) , and a run command is still present.
Note:
A value of 0 indicates an unlimited period of time.
rSL
*
2s
If [Low speed time out] (tLS) is not equal to 0, the [Type of stop] (Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170is set to [Ramp stop] (rMP) (only if
"Stop via ramp" can be configured).
[PID wake up thresh.]
0.0 to 100.0
0
Danger!
Check that unexpected restarts will not present any danger.
If the "PID" and "Operation duration" functions are configured simultaneously at [Low speed time out] (tLS) low speed, there is the possibility that
the PID controller will try to set a speed lower than [Low speed] (LSP) .
This results in unsatisfactory operation, which consists of starting, operating at low speed then stopping, and so on The parameter [PID wake up
thresh.] (rSL) , (restart error threshold), can be used to set a minimum PID error threshold for restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP. [Low speed]
(LSP) . [PID wake up thresh.] (rSL) is a percentage of the PID error threshold (the value is dependent on the parameters [Min PID feedback]
(PIF1) and [Max PID feedback] (PIF2), [Min PID feedback] (PIF1)see "PID controller parameters" on page 199). The function is inactive when
[Low speed time out] (tLS) = 0 or when [PID wake up thresh.] (rSL) = 0.
(1)
(2)
(3)

15.65 for 15,650.
Range 0.01 to 99.99 s, 0.1 to 999.9 s, or 1 to 6000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on page 168.
*
2s
202
to aid programming.
Code
Name/ Designation
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > PRI
PrI[PRESET PID REF]
The function is accessible when [PID feedback ass.] (PIF), see "PID controller parameters" on page 199is assigned.
Pr2
[2 preset PID ref.]
[No] (nO)
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active.
Pr4
[4 preset PID ref.]
[No] (nO)
Make sure that... [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2) has been assigned before assigning this function. Identical to [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2), see "PID controller
parameters" on page 199.
rP2
[2 preset PID ref.]
[Min PID reference] 300
*
(PIP1) to [Max PID ref(1)
erence] (PIP2) (2)
This parameter is accessible if the [Preset ref. PID 2] (Pr2) is assigned.
rP3
[3 preset PID ref.]
*
erence] (PIP2) (2)
rP4
[4 preset PID ref.]
*
erence] (PIP2) (2)
(1)
(2)
*

15.65 for 15,650.
203
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Default/preset PID references (PrI-)

Torque limitation (tOL-)
There are two types of torque limitation:
With a value that is fixed by a parameter
With a value that is set by an analog input (AI or impulse input)
If both types are enabled, the lowest value is taken into account. The two types of limitation can be configured or
switched remotely using a logic input or via the communication bus.
204
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > TOL
tOL[TORQUE LIMITATION]
tLA
[Torque limit. activ.]
[No] (nO)
YES [Yes] (YES): Function always active
IntP
[Torque increment]
[1%] (1)
*
This parameter is not available when [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is set to [No] (nO) .
Parameter unit selection [Motoring torque lim] (tLIM) and [Gen. torque lim] (tLIG).
0.1 [0.1%] (0.1): Unit 0.1%
1 [1%] (1): Unit 1%
tLIM
[Motoring torque lim]
0 to 300%
100%
*
This parameter is not available when [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is set to [No] (nO) .
(1)
Torque limitation in motor operation, as a % or at 0.1% of the rated torque in accordance with the parameter, [Torque increment] (IntP).
tLIG
[Gen. torque lim]
0 to 300%
100%
*
This parameter is not available when [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) are set to [No] (nO) .
(1)
Torque limitation in generator operation, as a % or at 0.1% of the rated torque in accordance with the parameter, [Torque increment] (IntP).
tAA
[Torque ref. assign.]
[No] (nO)
If the function is assigned, the limitation varies between 0% and 300% of the rated torque on the basis of the 0% to 100% signal applied to the
assigned input.
Examples:
12 mA on a 4-20 mA input results in limitation to 150% of the rated torque. 2.5 V on a 10 V input results in 75% of the rated torque.
nO [No] (nO): Not assigned (function inactive)
AI1 [AI1] (AI1): Analog input AI1
AIU2 [AI virtual 2] (AIU2): Virtual input via the (POWERLINK) communication bus, which is configured via [AI2 net. Channel] (AIC2), see "Configuration
AI1 (AI1-)" on page 139.
tLC
[Analog limit. act.]
[Yes] (YES)
*
This parameter is not available when [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) are set to [No] (nO) .
Identical to [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA), see "Torque limitation (tOL-)" on page 204.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0:
The limit is delivered by the parameters, [Motoring torque lim] (tLIM) and [Gen. torque lim] (tLIG) if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is not equal to [No]
(nO) .
No limitation if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) are set to [No] (nO) .
If the assigned input or bit is at 1:
The limitation depends on the input assigned by [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA) .
Note:
If [TORQUE LIMITATION] (tLA) and [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA) are enabled at the same time, the lowest value will be taken into
account.
(1)
*

205
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

Current limit (CLI-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > CLI
CLI[CURRENT LIMIT.]
LC2
[Current limit 2]
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the first current limitation is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the second current limitation is active.
CL2
[I Limit. value 2]
*
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
0 to 1.5 In (1)
1.5 In (1)
Caution!

Second current limitation
This parameter is accessible if the [Current limit 2] (LC2) is not equal to [No] (nO) . The adjustment range is limited to 1.5 In.
Note:
If the setting is lower than 0.25 In, the drive can lock in the [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) fault mode, if it has been activated ( [Output
Phase Loss] (OPL), see "Motor phase loss (OPL-)" on page 241). If it is beneath the motor's no-load current, the motor is unable
to run.
CLI
*
0 to 1.5 In (1)
1.5 In (1)
Caution!

First current limitation.
This parameter is accessible if the [Current limit 2] (LC2) Not equal to [No] (nO) . The adjustment range is limited to 1.5 In.
Note:
If the setting is lower than 0.25 In, the drive can lock in the [Output Phase Loss] (OPL)fault mode, if it has been activated ([Output
Phase Loss] (OPL), see "Motor phase loss (OPL-)" on page 241). If it is beneath the motor's no-load current, the motor is unable
to run.
(1)
*
206

Input contactor control
The input contactor closes every time a run command (forward or reverse) is sent and opens after every stop,
as soon as the drive is locked. For example, if the stop mode is stop on ramp, the contactor will open when the
motor reaches zero speed.
Note:
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
The drive control must be supplied by an external 24 V power source.

Example circuit:
Emergency stop
Network
Operation/
restart
K11
K10
L3
P24
COM
24 = Source
K10
+24 V
0V
LO+
L1 L2
K11
LO-
KM1
LI
Forward
run
or
Reverse
run
LIn +24
K11
24 V power supply
Note:
The "Run/Reset" button must be pressed once the "Emergency stop" button has been released.
LI = Run command [Forward] (Frd) or [Reverse assign.] (rrS)
LO-/LO+ = [Input contactor assign] (LLC)
LIn = [Drive lock] (LES)
Caution!
This function can only be used for a small number of consecutive operations with a cycle time longer
than 60 s (in order to avoid premature aging of the filter capacitor charging circuit).
207

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > LCC
LLC[INPUT CONTACTOR CNTL]
LLC
[Input contactor assign]
[No] (nO)
nO [No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed).
dO1 [D01] (dO1): Analog output AO1, which can be used as a logic output. This selection is possible if [AO1 assignment] (AO1),
see "Configuration AO1 parameter overview" on page 148is set to [No] (nO) .
LES
[Drive lock]
[No] (nO)
*
These parameters are accessible if [Input contactor assign] (LLC) Not equal to [No] (nO) . The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes
to 0.
LCt
[Mains V. time out]
5 to 999 s
5s
Monitoring time for closing of the input contactor. If, once this time has elapsed, there is no voltage on the drive power circuit, the drive will lock
with an [Input cont.] (LCF) "Input contactor" fault (LCF).
*
208

Output contactor control (OCC-)
This allows the drive to control a contactor located between the drive and the motor. The request for the contactor
to close is made when a run command is sent. The request for the contactor to open is made when there is no
longer any current in the motor.

If the DC injection braking function has been configured, it should not be left operating too long in stop
mode, as the contactor only opens at the end of braking.
Output contactor feedback
The corresponding logic input should be at 1 when there is no run command and at 0 during operation.
In the event of an inconsistency, the drive trips on an FCF2 fault if the output contactor fails to close (LIx at 1) and
on an FCF1 fault if it is stuck (LIx at 0).
The parameter [Delay start out. contact.] (dbS) can delay the triggering of the fault in the event of a run command,
and the parameter [Time delay out. contact.] (dAS) delays the fault in the event of a stop command.
Note:
Fault FCF2 (contactor doesn't close) can be switched back on by changing 1 to 0 on the run command
(0 --> 1 --> 0 with 3-wire control) .
..
Control section
U
LO /R
K20
KM2
Feedback
+24
LI
KM2
K20
M
KM2
Functionality [Out. contact. assign] (OCC) and [Out. contact. feedb] (rCA) can be used separately or together.
209
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Caution!

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > OCC
OCC[OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD]
OCC
[Out. contact. assign]
[No] (nO)
nO [No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed).
dO1 [DO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1, which can be used as a logic output. This selection is possible if [AO1 assign] (AO1), see "Configuration AO1
parameter overview" on page 148is set to [No] (nO) .
rCA
[Out. contact. feedb]
[No] (nO)
The motor starts up when the assigned input or bit changes to 0.
dbS
[Delay start out. contact.]
0.05 to 60 s
0.15 s
*
Time delay for:
Motor control following the sending of a run command
Output contactor fault monitoring, if the feedback is assigned. If the contactor fails to close at the end of the set time, the drive will lock in FCF2
fault mode.
This parameter is accessible if the [Out. contact. assign] (OCC) or [Out. contact. feedb] (rCA) is assigned. The time delay must be greater than
the closing time of the output contactor.
dAS
[Time delay out. contact.]
0 to 5.00 s
0.10 s
*
Time delay for output contactor opening command following motor stop.
This parameter is accessible when [Out. contact. feedb] (rCA) is assigned. The time delay must be greater than the opening time of the output
contactor. If it is set to 0, the fault will not be monitored.
If the contactor fails to open at the end of the set time, the drive will lock in FCF1 fault mode.
*
210

Positioning via sensor or limit switch (LPO-)
This function is used for managing positioning using position sensors or limit switches linked to logic inputs or
using control word bits:
The action logic for the inputs and bits can be configured on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) or a falling edge
(change from 1 to 0). The example below has been configured on a rising edge:
Runrcommand "Run forward"
0
Reverse run command
0
[Pos LSP FW]

0
[EM Vorw. Stop]

0
Speed
[Low speed]
(LSP)
0
The slowdown mode and stop mode can be configured. The operation is identical for both directions of operation.
Slowdown and stopping operate according to the same logic, described below.
211
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Slowing down
Stop

Example: Forward slowdown, on rising edge
Forward slowdown takes place on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the input or bit assigned to forward
slowdown if this rising edge occurs in forward operation. The slowdown command is then memorized,
even in the event of a power outage. Operation in the opposite direction is authorized at high speed. The
slowdown command is deleted on a falling edge (change from 1 to 0) of the input or bit assigned to forward
slowdown if this falling edge occurs in reverse operation.
A bit or a logic input can be assigned to disable this function.
Although forward slowdown is disabled while the disable input or bit is at 1, sensor changes continue to
be monitored and saved.
Example: Positioning on a limit switch, on rising edge
Stop
Slowing down Run reverseRun forward
Run reverse Run reverse
Slowing down
Stop
Run forward Run forward
Operation with short cams:
Warning!
Control failure
When operating the drive for the first time, or after restoring the factory settings, the drive must initially
be started outside the slowdown and stop zones in order to initialize the function.
Warning!
Control failure
When switching off the drive, the most recent range is saved.
If the system position is changed manually, the drive must be in that same position the next time it runs.
In this instance, when operating for the first time or after restoring the factory settings, the drive must initially be
started outside the slowdown and stop zones in order to initialize the function.
Forward slowdown zone
Slowing down
Run forward
Forward stop zone
Forward stop
212

Operation with long cams:
In this instance, there is no restriction, which means that the function is initialized across the whole trajectory.
Forward slowdown zone
Slowing down
Run forward
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Forward stop zone
Forward stop
Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch

This function can be used to control the stopping of the moving part automatically once a preset distance has been
traveled after the slowdown limit switch.
On the basis of the rated linear speed and the speed estimated by the drive when the slowdown limit switch is
tripped, the drive will induce the stop at the configured distance.
This function is useful in applications where one manual-reset overtravel limit switch is common to both directions.
It will then only respond to ensure safety if the distance is exceeded. The stop limit switch retains priority in respect
of the function.
Depending on the [Deceleration type] (dSF) parameter, one of the two following operations is attained.
Frequency
[Deceleration type] (dsF) = [Standard] (Std)
Slowdown
frequency
Distance
B
A
Frequency
[Stop distance]
(Std)
A: Slowdown limit switch attained

B: Automatic stop at a distance
[Deceleration type] (dsF) = [Optimized](OPt)
Slowdown
frequency
A
Distance
Note:
If the deceleration ramp is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress, this distance
will not be observed.
If the direction is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress, this distance will not
be observed.
213
Warning!
Control failure
Check that the parameters configured are consistent (in particular, you should check that the
required distance is possible).
This function does not replace the stop limit switch, which remains necessary for safety reasons.
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > LPO
LPO[POSITIONING BY SENSORS]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Note:
[Stop FW limit sw.]
[No] (nO)
Forward stop switch
... [...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150 (Cd00 to Cd15 applicable when [Profile] (CHCF) = [I/O profile](IO))
SAr
[Stop RV limit sw.]
[No] (nO)
Reverse stop switch Identical to [Stop FW limit sw.] (SAF).
SAL
[Stop limit config.]
[Active low] (LO)
*
SAF
Warning!
Control failure
If [Stop limit config.] (SAL) is set to [Active high] (HIG) , the stop command is activated when there is an active signal (the stop
command is not sent if, for some reason, there is no signal).
Select: [Active high] (HIG) only if the signal is always present.
Stop switch confirmation level This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one stop sensor has been assigned. It is used to
define the positive or negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the stop.
LO [Active low] (LO): Stop controlled on a falling edge (change from 1 to 0) of the assigned bits or inputs.
HIG [Active high] (HIG): Stop controlled on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned bits or inputs.
dAF
[Slowdown forward]
[No] (nO)
Forward slowdown attained Identical to [Stop FW limit sw.] (SAF).
dAr
[Slowdown reverse]
[No] (nO)
Reverse slowdown attained Identical to [Stop FW limit sw.] (SAF).
dAL
[Slowdown limit cfg.]
[Active low] (LO)
*
Caution!
Danger of equipment damage

If [Slowdown limit cfg.] (dAL) is set to [Active high] (HIG) , the slowdown command is activated when there is an active signal (the
slowdown command is not sent if, for some reason, there is no signal).
Select: [Active high] (HIG) only if the signal is always present.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one slowdown sensor has been assigned. It is used to define the positive or negative
logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the slowdown.
LO [Active low] (LO): Slowdown controlled on a falling edge (change from 1 to 0) of the assigned bits or inputs.
HIG [Active high] (HIG): Slowdown controlled on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned bits or inputs.
214

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > LPO
CLS
[Disable limit sw.]
*
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
Warning!
Control failure
Check that this configuration will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.
nO
LI1
...
PAS
*
rMP
FSt
nSt
dSF
*
Std
OPt
Std
*
nO
nLS
*
SFd
*
*
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.
When the assigned bit or input is in state 1, the action of the limit switch is deactivated. If the drive was presently being slowed down or stopped
by the limit switch, it will now continue running until it attains its reference speed.
[Stop type]
[Ramp stop] (rMP)
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Over ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Quick stop (ramp reduced by [Ramp divider] (dCF) . [Ramp divider] (dCF), see "Configuration parameters (continued from the
parameter overview)" on page 109)
[Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop
[Deceleration type]
[Standard] (Std)
[Standard] (Std): Uses the standard ramp [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2).
[Optimized] (OPt): The ramp time is calculated on the basis of the actual speed when the slowdown contact switches, in order to limit the operating
time at low speed (optimization of the cycle time: the slowdown time is constant regardless of the initial speed).
[Stop distance]
[No] (nO)
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned. Activation and adjustment of the "Stop at distance
calculated after the slowdown limit switch" function.
[No] (nO): Function inactive (the next two parameters will, therefore, be inaccessible).
0.01 to 10.00: Stop distance range in yards.
[Rated linear speed]
0.20 to 5.00 m/s
1.00 m/s
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned and [Stop distance] (Std)is not set to [No] (nO) .
Rated linear speed in meters/second.
[Stop corrector]
50 to 200%
100%
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned and [Stop distance] (Std)is not set to [No] (nO) .
Scaling factor applied to the stop distance to compensate, for example, a non-linear ramp.
215
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
If [Disable limit sw.] (CLS) is set to an input and activated, limit switch controlling is locked.

Parameter switching (MLP-)
You have the option of choosing a set of 1 to 15 parameters in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) see "Configuration parameters" on page 106 menu. These parameters can then be assigned 2 or 3 different values. These 2 or 3 sets of
values can then be switched using 1 or 2 logic inputs or control word bits. This switching can be performed during
operation (motor running).
This switching can also be controlled by one or two frequency thresholds. Each threshold functions as a logic input
(0 = threshold not attained, 1 = threshold attained).
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
Input LI or bit or frequency threshold, 2 values
Input LI or bit or frequency threshold, 3 values
Values 1
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
0
0
Values 2
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
1
0
Values 3
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
0 or 1
1
Note:
Do not change these parameters in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-)menu, because all changes in this menu
([SETTINGS] (SEt-)) will be lost at the next power-on. The parameters can be adjusted during operation
in the [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) menu, in the active configuration.
Note:
Parameter set switching cannot be configured from the integrated display terminal.
Parameters can only be adjusted on the integrated display terminal if the function has been configured previously
via the graphic display terminal or via the bus or communication network. If the function has not been configured,
then the [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) menu and the [Set N1] (PS1-), [Set N2] (PS2-) and [Set N3] (PS3-)
submenus are not displayed.
216

Factory setting
[No] (nO)
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > MLP
MLP[PARAM. SET SWITCHING]
CHA1
[2 parameter sets]
Switching 2 parameter sets
FtA [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): Switching via [Freq. threshold] (Ftd), see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237.
F2A [Freq. Th. 2 attain.] (F2A): Switching via [Freq. threshold 2] (F2d), see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237.
CHA2
[3 parameter sets]
Identical to [2 parameter sets] (CHA1), see "Parameter switching (MLP-)" on page 216.
Switching 3 parameter sets
[No] (nO)
Note:
To obtain 3 parameter sets, [2 parameter sets] (CHA1) must also be configured.
SPS
[PARAMETER SELECTION]
This parameter is only accessible on the graphic display terminal if [2 parameter sets] (CHA1) is not set to [No] (nO) . Making an entry in this
parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment parameters that can be accessed.
Select 1 to 15 parameters with the ENT key (a check mark appears by your selections) or cancel the parameter selection with ESC.
Example:
PARAMETER SELECTION
SETTINGS
English
Ramp increment
-------------------------
PS1*
[Set N1]
This parameter is accessible if at least 1 parameter has been selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION] . Making an entry in this parameter opens
a settings window containing the selected parameters in the order in which they were selected. With the graphic display terminal:
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
SET1
Acceleration
Deceleration:
Acceleration 2:
Deceleration 2:
Begin Acc round:
Code
9.51 s ENT
9.67 s
12.58 s
13.45 s
2.3 s
Quick
RDY
English
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
Acceleration
9.51 s
Min = 0.1
Max = 999.9
<<
>>
Quick
S101 With the integrated display terminal: Proceed as in the Settings menu using the parameters that appear.
...
S115
PS2[Set N2]
*
This parameter is accessible if at least 1 parameter has been selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION] .
S201 Identical to [Set N1] (PS1-), see "Parameter switching (MLP-)" on page 216.
...
S215
PS3[Set N3]
*
This parameter is accessible if the [3 parameter sets] (CHA2) is not equal to [No] (nO) , and at least 1 parameter has been selected in [PARAMETER
SELECTION] .
S301 Identical to [Set N1] (PS1-), see "Parameter switching (MLP-)" on page 216.
...
S315
*
Note:
We recommend that a parameter set switching test is carried out while stopped and a check is made
to ensure that it has been performed correctly.
Some parameters are interdependent and in this case may be restricted at the time of switching.
Always be aware of the mutual dependency of parameters, including between different sets..
Example: The highest [Low speed] (LSP) must be lower than the lowest [High speed] (HSP).
217

Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.](MMC-)
The drive can contain up to 3 configurations, which can be saved via the [FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-), see
"Factory setting (FCS-)" on page 100menu.
Each of these configurations can be activated remotely, enabling adaptation to:
2 or 3 different motors or mechanisms (multimotor mode)
2 or 3 different configurations for a single motor (multiconfiguration mode)
The two switching modes cannot be combined.
Note:
The following conditions MUST be observed:
Switching may only take place when stopped (drive locked). If a switching request is sent during
operation, it will not be executed until the next stop.
In the event of motor switching, the following additional conditions apply:
When the motors are switched, the power and control terminals concerned must also
be switched as appropriate.
The maximum power of the drive must not be exceeded by any of the motors.
All the configurations to be switched must be set and saved in advance in the same hardware
configuration, this being the definitive configuration (option and communication cards). Failure
to follow this instruction can cause the drive to lock on an [Incorrect config.] (CFF) fault.
Menu and parameters switched in multimotor mode
[SETTINGS] (SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)
[INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-)
[COMMAND] (CtL-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) with the exception of the [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] function (only configurable once)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt)
[MY MENU]
[USER CONFIG.]: The configuration name given by the user in the [FACTORY SETTINGS](FCS-) menu.
218

Menu and parameters switched in multiconfiguration mode
As in multimotor mode, except for the motor parameters that are common to the three configurations:
Nominal current
Thermal current
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated speed
Rated power
IR compensation
Slip compensation
Synchronous motor parameters
Type of thermal protection
Thermal state
The auto-tuning parameters and motor parameters that can be accessed in expert mode
Type of motor control
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Note:
No other menus or parameters can be switched.
Transfer of a drive configuration to another one, with graphic display terminal, when the drive uses the
function, [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] (MMC-)
Example: Let A be the source and B be the target. In this example, configuration switching occurs via the logic input.
1. Link the graphic display terminal with drive A.
2. Set LI ([2 Configurations] (CnF1)) and LI ([3 Configurations] (CnF2)) to 0.
3. Download configuration 0 into a file on the graphic display terminal (example: file 1 of the graphic display terminal).
4. Set LI ([2 Configurations] (CnF1)) to 1 and leave LI ([3 Configurations] (CnF2)) at 0.
8. Link the graphic display terminal with drive B.
9. Set LI ([2 Configurations] (CnF1)) and LI ([3 Configurations] (CnF2)) to 0.
10. Set drive B to factory configuration.
11. Upload the configuration file 0 onto the drive (file 1 of graphic display terminal in this example).
Note:
Steps 6, 7, 14, and 15 are only required if the [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] (MMC-) function is used with
3 configurations or 3 motors.
219
Switching command
Depending on the number of motors or selected configuration (2 or 3), the switching command is sent using one
or two logic inputs. The table below lists the possible combinations.
LI
2 motors or configurations
0
1
0
1
LI
3 motors or configurations
0
0
1
1
Number of configurations or active motors

0
1
2
2
Schematic diagram for "multimotor" mode
Configuration 0
when the 2
Contacts
are opened
LI
Configuration 0
+24 V
Configuration 1
LI
Configuration 2
LO or R
Configuration 1
Configuration 2
M0
M1
LO or R
LO or R
M2
Auto-tuning in multimotor mode

This auto-tuning can be performed:
Manually using a logic input when the motor changes
Automatic on every 1st activation of the motor after switching on the drive, if the [Automatic autotune] (AUt),
see "Asynchronous motor parameters (ASY-)" on page 118parameter is set to [Yes] (YES) .
220

Motor thermal states in multimotor mode:
The drive protects each of the three motors separately in that it observes all thermal states and all stop times,
including the switch-off time of the drive itself.
Configuration information output
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Caution!
The thermal state of the individual motors is not saved on shutdown.
To further protect the motors, the following is required:
Perform an auto-tuning on all motors at each power-on
or
Attachment of an external overload protection device on each motor.
Via the menu [INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) , every configuration or motor (2 or 3) can be assigned to a logic
output for peripheral transfer of data.
Note:
Due to the switching of the [INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu, these outputs can be assigned in
any configuration, if the information is critical.
221

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > MMC
CHM
[Multimotors]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
Caution!
If [Multimotors] (CHN) is set to [Yes] (YES) , the thermal state of the individual motors is not saved on shutdown.
To further protect the motors, the following is required:
Perform an auto-tuning on all motors at each power-on

or
Attachment of an external overload protection device on each motor.

nO [No] (nO): Multiconfiguration possible
YES [Yes] (YES): Multimotor possible
CnF1
[2 Configurations]
[No] (nO)
Switching of 2 motors or 2 configurations
nO [No] (nO): No switching
CnF2
[3 Configurations]
[No] (nO)
Switching of 3 motors or 3 configurations
Identical to [2 Configurations] (CnF1), see "Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.](MMC-)" on page 218.
Note:
To get to 3 motors or 3 configurations, [2 Configurations] (CnF1) must also be configured.
222

Auto-tuning via logic input (tnL-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > TNL
tnL[AUTO-TUNING BY LI]
tUL
[Auto-tune assign.]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)


Auto-tuning is performed when the assigned input or bit changes to 1.
223
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Danger!

Traverse control (trO-)
Function for winding reels of yarn (in textile applications)
Drive
Traverse control
Drive for
Winders
Reel of yarn
Main shaft
Gearbox
Winding motor
Thread guide
Thread
Gearbox
Traverse control motor
Cam
The speed of rotation of the cam must follow a precise profile to ensure that the reel is steady, compact and linear:
Run command
t
LI or control bit
Traverse control
t
Motor speed
Base reference
Ramp
ACC
dEC ramp
start of function
t
end of function
Bit 15 of the LRS1 word

(Traverse control running)
t
The function starts when the drive has reached its base reference and the traverse control command has been
enabled.
When the traverse control command is disabled, the drive returns to its base reference, following the ramp determined by the traverse control function. The function then stops, as soon as it has returned to this reference.
Bit 15 of word LRS1 is at 1 while the function is active.
224

Function parameters:
These define the cycle of frequency variations around the base reference, as shown in the diagram below:
tUP
Frequency jump
qSH
Base
Reference
qSL
trH
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
tdn
Motor speed
trL
Frequency jump
trC
trH
trL
qSH
qSL
tUP
tdn
[Yarn control] (trC): Assignment of the traverse control command to a logic input or to a communication bus control word bit
[Traverse freq. high] (trH): in Hertz
[Traverse freq. low] (trL): in Hertz
[Quick step High] (qSH): in Hertz
[Quick step Low] (qSL): in Hertz
[Traverse ctrl. accel.] (tUP): in seconds
[Traverse ctrl. decel] (tdn): in seconds
Reel parameters:
tbO
dtF
[Reel time] (tbO): Time to wind a spool in minutes.

This parameter displays the end of the winding. If, by means of the [Yarn control] (trC) control command, the operation time in traverse control mode attains
the [Reel time] (tbO) value, the logic output or one of the relays changes to state 1 if the corresponding [End reel] (EbO) function has been assigned.
The EbOt operation time in traverse control mode can be monitored online via a communication bus.
[Decrease ref. speed] (dtF): Decreasing the base reference.
In certain cases, the base reference has to be reduced as the reel increases in size. The [Decrease ref. speed] (dtF) value corresponds to the [Reel time]
(tbO)time. Once this time has elapsed, the reference continues to fall, following the same ramp. If low speed [Low speed] (LSP) is at 0 and attains the
frequency 0 Hz, the drive stops and must be restarted with a new run command.
If low speed [Low speed] (LSP) does not equal 0, the traverse control function continues to be executed above [Low speed] (LSP) .
Motor speed
Base reference
dtF
With LSP = 0
t
tbO
Motor speed
Base reference
dtF
With LSP > 0
LSP
0
tbO
225

rtr
[Init. traverse ctrl] Reinitializing Traverse control. This control command can be assigned to a logic input or to a bit of a communication bus's control
word. It resets the EbO alarm and the EbOt operation time back to zero and reinitializes the reference value to the base reference. As long as rtr stays
at 1, the traverse control function remains locked and the frequency remains equal to the base reference. This control command is used especially when
changing spools.
Motor speed
Base
Reference
dtF
0
operation
b
0
tbO
trC
0
EbOt
tbO
0
Bit 15 of
LRS1
EbO
0
rtr
0
226

Counter wobble
Master
Drive
tSY
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Slave drive
SnC
Synchronization
Reel of yarn
Main shaft
Gearbox
Winding motor
Thread guide
Gearbox
Thread
Cam
Thread guide motor
The "Counter wobble" function is used in certain applications to obtain a constant yarn tension when the "Traverse
control" function is producing considerable variations in speed on the yarn guide motor ([Traverse freq. high] (trH)
and [Traverse freq. low] (trL), [Traverse freq. high] (trH), see "Traverse control (trO-)" on page 224).
Two motors must be used (one master and one slave).
The master controls the speed of the yarn guide, the slave controls the winding speed. The function assigns the
slave a speed profile, which is in antiphase to that of the master. This means that synchronization is required, using
one of the masters logic outputs and one of the slaves logic inputs.
Run command to the master
and slave
Control command
Traverse control to
Master and slave
t
trH
trL
Motor speed
Thread guide
(Master drive)
tSY/SnC synchronization
Winder motor speed

(Slave drive)
t
trH
trL
227

Connection of synchronization I/O
Slave drive
Master drive
(SnCO) LOx
COM
LIx (SnCI)
COM
The starting conditions for the function are:

Base speeds reached on both drives
Input [Yarn control](trC) Enabled
Synchronization signal present
Note:
Parameters [Quick step High] (qSH) and [Quick step Low] (qSL) should generally be left at zero.
228

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > TRO
trO[TRAVERSE CONTROL]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Note:
This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions see "Application funct. (FUn-)" on page 161
trH
*
(1)
trL
*
(1)
qSH
*
(1)
[Yarn control]
The "traverse control" cycle starts when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 and stops when it changes to 0.
nO [No] (nO): Function inactive The other parameters are then not accessible.
[Traverse freq. high]
0 to 10 Hz
High traverse frequency
tUP
*
tdn
*
tbO
*
EbO
*
nO
LO1
r2
dO1
SnC
*
nO
LI1
...
tSY
*
nO
LO1
r2
dO1
dtF
*
rtr
*
nO
LI1
...
(1)
*
4 Hz
[Traverse freq. low]

Low traverse frequency
0 to 10 Hz
[Quick step High]
high] (trH)
Quick step high.

[Quick step Low]
qSL
*
(1)
[No] (nO)
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
trC
4 Hz
low] (trL)
Quick step low.

[Traverse ctrl. accel.]
0.1 to 999.9 s
4s
Traverse control acceleration
[Traverse ctrl. decel]
0.1 to 999.9 s
4s
Traverse control deceleration
[Reel time]
0 to 9,999 min
0 min
Reel execution time
[End reel]
[No] (nO)
The assigned output or relay changes to state 1 when the traverse control operating time reaches the [Reel time] (tbO).
[LO1] (LO1): Logic output LO1
[R2] (r2): Relay R2
[DO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1, which can be used as a logic output. This selection is possible if [AO1 assign] (AO1), see "Configuration AO1
parameter overview" on page 148parameter is set to [No] (nO) .
[Counter wobble]
[No] (nO)
Synchronization input.
To be configured on the winding drive (slave) only.
[No] (nO): Function inactive The other parameters are then not accessible.
[...] (...): The assignment conditions see "Control (CtL-)" on page 150.
[Sync. wobble]
[No] (nO)
Synchronization output
To be configured on the yarn guide drive (master) only.
[No] (nO): Function not assigned.
[LO1] (LO1)
[R2] (r2)
[DO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1, which can be used as a logic output. This selection is possible if [AO1 assign] (AO1), see "Configuration AO1
parameter overview" on page 148parameter is set to [No] (nO) .
[Decrease ref. speed]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
Decrease in the base reference during the traverse control cycle.
[Init. traverse ctrl]
[No] (nO)
When the state of the assigned input or bit changes to 1, the operation time in traverse control mode as well as the [Decrease ref. speed] (dtF)
are set to zero.
[No] (nO): Function not assigned.

229

HSP switching (CHS-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > CHS
CHS[HSP SWITCHING]
SH2
[2 High speed]
HSP switching
nO [No] (nO): Function not assigned.
FtA [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): Frequency threshold reached
F2A [Freq. Th 2 attain.] (F2A): Frequency threshold 2 attained
SH4
[4 High speed]
HSP switching
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
[No] (nO)
Note:
To obtain 4 HSP assignment, [2 High speed] (SH2) must also be configured.
HSP
HSP2
*
HSP3
*
HSP4
*
*
230
Identical to [2 High speed] (SH2), see "Configuration AO1 parameter overview" on page 148.
[High speed]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low speed] (LSP) to [Max frequency] (tFr). The factory setting changes to 60 Hz
when [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [60Hz NEMA] (60).
[High speed 2]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
Identical to [High speed] (HSP), see "Configuration AO1 parameter overview" on page 148.
[High speed 3]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
[High speed 4]
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz

DC bus (dCC-)
Factory setting
[No](nO)
Danger!
LOSS OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
If the [DC bus chaining] (dCCM) parameter is set to [Bus & Main] (MAIn), the residual current device for 8I74T400550.01P-1 and
8I74T401500.01P-1 is deactivated.
Select this configuration only if an external residual current device is present.

dCCC
*
IPL
*
[DC bus compat]

Not applicable
[Input phase loss]
according
power
to
drive
This parameter is only accessible in this menu when using 3-phase drives.
If one phase fails, the drive switches to the [Input phase loss](PHF)fault mode. If two or three phases fail, the drive continues operating until an
undervoltage fault is triggered (the drive triggers [Input phase loss] (PHF) when one line supply phase fails and results in a power drop). [Input
phase loss](IPL), see "Motor thermal protection (tHt-)" on page 239.
Only visible when [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) are set to [Expert] (EPR) and [DC bus chaining] (dCCM) are set to [No](nO) .
nO [Ignore] (nO): Ignore fault; to be used when the drive is supplied via a single phase supply or by the DC bus.
YES [Freewheel] (YES): Fault with freewheel stop.
If the [DC bus chaining](dCCM) setting is set to [Only Bus] (bUS) , the [Input phase loss](IPL) is forced to [Ignore] (nO) .
[Ground short circuit]
[Freewheel] (YES)
Direct ground fault during drive fault detection.
Accessible for drives with the power of 8I74T400550.01P-1 and 8I74T401500.01P-1.
Only visible when [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) are set to [Expert] (EPr) and [DC bus chaining] (dCCM) are set to [No] (nO) .
For 8I74S200xxx.01P-1:
nO [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
YES [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop fault
For drives 8I74T400550.01P-1 and 8I74T401500.01P-1, the [Ground short circuit] (SCL3) parameter is forced to [Ignore] (nO) when [DC bus
chaining] (dCCM) is set to [Bus & Main] (MAIn) .
SCL3
*
Note:
If [Ground short circuit] (SCL3) is set to [Ignore] (nO) , the integrated safety functions for drives 8I74T400550.01P-1 and
8I74T401500.01P-1 cannot be set; otherwise, the [Safety fault] (SAFF) state is triggered.
Danger!
LOSS OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
If the [Ground short circuit] (SCL3) is set to [No] (nO) , the residual current device is deactivated.
Select this configuration only if an external residual current device is present.

UrES
*
[Mains voltage]
According to drive
voltage rating
According to drive
voltage rating
200
220
230
240
LHM
Rated voltage of the line supply in V.

Only visible when [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) are set to [Expert] (EPr) and [DC bus chaining] (dCCM) are set to [No] (nO) .
For 8I74S200xxx.01P-1:
[200V ac] (200): 200 Volts AC
[220VAC] (220): 220 Volts AC
[230V ac] (230): 230 Volts AC
[240V ac] (240): 240 Volts AC
Not applicable.
380
400
440
460
500
LHM
For 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1:
[380V ac] (380): 380 Volts AC
[400V ac] (400): 400 Volts AC
[440VAC] (440): 440 Volts AC
[460V ac] (460): 460 Volts AC
[500V ac] (500): 500 Volts AC (factory setting)
Not applicable.
231
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FUN- > DCC
dCC[DC bus]
dCCM
[DC bus chaining]
DC bus coupling configuration
MAIn [Bus & Main] (MAIn): The drive is powered by the DC bus and the main supply.
bUS [Only Bus](bUS): The drive is only powered by the DC bus and is not connected to the main supply.

USL
*
[Undervoltage level]
100 to 276 V
according to drive
power
Setting the threshold value of the undervoltage sensor in Volts.

Only visible when [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) are set to [Expert] (EPr), [DC bus chaining] (dCCM) are set to [No] (nO) and [Mains voltage]
(UrES) is not set to (LHM) .
The factory setting is dependent on the drive rated voltage.
For 8I74S200xxx.01P-1: 141 VAC

For 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1: 276 VAC
The setting range is dependent on the [Mains voltage] (UrES).

Ubr
*
[Braking level]
335 to 820 V
according
power
to
drive
Braking transistor power-on voltage.

Only visible when [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) are set to [Expert] (EPr), [DC bus chaining] (dCCM) are set to [No] (nO) and [Mains voltage]
(UrES) is not set to (LHM) .
The factory setting is dependent on the drive rated voltage.
For 8I74S200xxx.01P-1: 395 VDC

For 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1: 820 VDC
The setting range is dependent on the [Mains voltage] (UrES).

*
232
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted

2.3.3.4.7 Fault management
With integrated display terminal:
Summary of functions:
tId
FqF
dLd
tnF
PPI
ULd
OLd
LFF
FSt
dCI
Name
[PTC MANAGEMENT]
[FAULT RESET]
[AUTOMATIC RESTART]
[ALARM SETTINGS]
[CATCH ON THE FLY]
[MOTOR THERMAL PROT.]
[OUTPUT PHASE LOSS]
[INPUT PHASE LOSS]
[DRIVE OVERHEAT]
[THERMAL ALARM STOP]
[EXTERNAL FAULT]
[UNDERVOLTAGE MGT]
[IGBT TESTS]
[4-20mA LOSS]
[FAULT INHIBITION]
[COM.
FAULT
MANAGEMENT]
[TORQUE/CURRENT LIM]
[FREQUENCY METER]
[DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT.]
[AUTO TUNING FAULT]
[CARDS PAIRING]
[PROCESS UNDERLOAD]
[Proc. overload flt]
[FALLBACK SPEED]
[FAST STOP]
[DC INJECTION]
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
PtC
rSt
Atr
AlS
FLr
tHt
OPL
IPL
OHL
SAt
EtF
USb
tIt
LFL
InH
CLL
233

From the menu ConF
Fault management
Parameters in the [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu can only be changed in stop mode with no run command
present. Parameters with a symbol in the Code column are exceptions to this rule.
These parameters can be changed during operation and in stop mode.
234

PTC Management (PtC-)
The drive can manage a set of PTC probes in order to protect the motors: One PTC probe on logic input LI6.
Activation takes place via switch SW2 on the control card.
Motor overheating
Sensor break fault
Sensor short-circuit fault
Protection via PTC probes does not disable protection via I2t calculation performed by the drive. The two types
of protection can be combined.
SW1
SW2
Source R2A
Ext. Sink
Int. Sink R2C
LI6
PTC
STO
P24
LO+
LOLI6
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
R1A
R1B
R1C
COM
AO1
COM
AI3
AI2
10V
AI1
COM
+24
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > PtC
PtC[PTC MANAGEMENT]
PtCL
[LI6 = PTC probe]
[No] (nO)
Access is possible when control card switch SW2 is set to PTC.
nO [No] (nO): Not used
AS [Always] (AS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored permanently, even if the power supply is not connected (as long as the control remains connected
to the power supply).
rdS [Power ON] (rdS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected.
rS [Motor on] (rS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected.
235
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
The PTC probe is monitored continuously for the following faults:

Fault reset (rSt-)
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > rSt
rSt[FAULT RESET]
rSF
[Fault reset]
[No] (nO)
Fault reset occurs when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1, assuming that the fault has been resolved.
The STOP/RESET button on the graphic display terminal performs the same function.
The following detected faults can be manually deleted. ASF, brF, bLF, CnF, COF, dLF, EPF1, EPF2, FbES, FCF2, InF9, InFA, InFb, LCF, LFF3,
ObF, OHF, OLC, OLF, OPF1, OPF2, OSF, OtFL, PHF, PtFL, SCF4, SCF5, SLF1, SLF2, SLF3, SOF, SPF, SSF, tJF, tnF and ULF.
rPA
[Product reset assig.]
[No] (nO)
*
Danger!

This configuration enables a reset of the drive.
nO
LI1
...
LI6
LAI1
LAI2
rP
*
These parameters can only be modified if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (EPr) .
Drive reinitialization via logic input. Can be used to reset all faults without having to disconnect the drive from the power supply. The drive is
reinitialized on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned input. The drive can only be reinitialized when locked.
To assign the reinitialization, press and hold the ENT key for two seconds.
[No] (nO): function inactive
...
[LAI1] (LAI1): Logic input AI1
[Product reset]
[No] (nO)
Danger!
You are about to reset the drive.
Make sure this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.
This parameter is only accessible when [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (EPr) . Drive reinitialization. Can be used to reset all faults
without having to disconnect the drive from the power supply.
nO [No] (nO): function inactive
YES [Yes] (YES): Reinitialization. The ENT key must be pressed and held for two seconds. The parameter switches back to [No] (nO), as soon as the
process is completed. The drive can only be reinitialized when locked.
236

Automatic restart (Atr-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > ATR
Atr[AUTOMATIC RESTART]
Atr
[Automatic restart]
2s
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
The automatic restart can only be used on machines or installations which do not pose any danger to either personnel
or equipment.
If the automatic restart is activated, R1 will only indicate a fault has been detected once the time-out period for the
restart sequence has expired.
The equipment must be used in compliance with national and regional safety regulations.
nO
YES
tAr
*
5
10
30
1h
2h
3h
Ct
The drive status relay remains activated if this function is active. The frequency reference and the direction of operation must be maintained.
Use 2-wire control ([2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL), [2/3 wire control] (tCC), see "Simply start menu
(SIM-)" on page 104).
If after the configurable time interval tAr, the drive still does not restart, the process is ended and the drive remains locked until it is switched
off and back on again.
Fault messages that these functions can activate: Fault detection codes that can be reset with the automatic restart function, after the cause
has disappeared
[No] (nO): function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Automatic restart after fault-induced locking, if the fault has been resolved and the remaining operating conditions allow a restart.
The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, and then 1 minute
for all subsequent attempts.
[Max. restart time]
[5 minutes] (5)
This parameter is accessible if the [Automatic restart] (Atr) is set to [Yes] (YES) . This parameter can be used to limit the number of consecutive
restarts due to a recurring fault.
[5 min] (5): 5 minutes
[10 min] (10): 10 minutes
[30 minutes] (30): 30 minutes
[1 hour] (1h): 1 hour
[2 hours] (2h): 2 hours
[3 hours] (3h): 3 hours
[Unlimited] (Ct): Unlimited
Alarm settings (ALS-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > ALS
ALS[ALARM SETTINGS]
Ctd
[Current threshold]
(1)
Motor current threshold
Ftd
[Freq. threshold]
Motor frequency threshold

F2d
[Freq. threshold 2]
Motor frequency threshold

ttH
[High torque thd.]
High torque threshold

ttL
[Low torque thd.]
Low torque threshold

FqL
[Pulse warning thd.]
*
Frequency level
Available when [Frequency meter] (FqF) is not equal to [No] (nO) .
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0 to 1.5 In (1)
INV
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
0 to 599 Hz
50 Hz
-300 to 300%
100%
-300 to 300%
50%
0 to 20,000 Hz
0 Hz
237
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Danger!

Catch on the fly (FLr-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > FLr
FLr[CATCH ON THE FLY]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Note:
FLr
[Catch on the fly]

Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events:
[No] (nO)
Loss of line supply or disconnection

Reset of current fault or automatic restart
Freewheel stop
The frequency given by the drive resumes from the estimated frequency of the motor at the time of the restart, then follows the ramp to the
reference frequency.
This function requires 2-wire level control.
When the function is operational, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight delay of the current (0.5 s max.). [Catch on the fly] (FLr) is
forced to [No] (nO) if the braking logic [Brake assignment] (bLC) is assigned (see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183) or if [Auto DC injection]
(AdC) is set to [continuous] (Ct), see "Auto DC injection (continued from the parameter overview)" on page 172).
(1)
*
2s
238
to aid programming.

Motor thermal protection (tHt-)
Functionality
Note:
The motor thermal state is not saved when the drive is switched off.
Self-cooled motors: The tripping curves depend on the motor frequency.
Force-cooled motors: Regardless of motor frequency, only the 50 Hz tripping curve needs to
be observed.
The following curves show tripping time in seconds.

Trip time in seconds
1 Hz 3 Hz
5 Hz
20 Hz
10,000
50 Hz
1,000
100
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Motor current/ ItH
Caution!
The use of external overload protection is required under the following conditions:
Restarting the product (because the motor thermal state is not saved)
Supplying several motors
Supplying motors with a rating less than 0.2 times the drive rated current
Motor circuitry/ wiring
239
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Thermal protection of the motor through calculation of It.

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > THT
tHt[MOTOR THERMAL PROT.]
tHt
[Motor protect. type]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[Self cooled] (ACL)
Note:
A fault trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls back
below 100%.
nO [No] (nO): No protection
ACL [Self cooled] (ACL): For self-cooled motors
FCL [Force-cool] (FCL): For force-cooled motors
ttd
(1)
Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm (logic output or relay)
ttd2
[Motor2 therm. level]
Trip threshold for motor 2 thermal alarm (logic output or relay)

ttd3
Trip threshold for motor 2 thermal alarm (logic output or relay)

OLL
[Overload fault mgt]
0 to 118%
100%
0 to 118%
100%
0 to 118%
100%
[Freewheel] (YES)
Caution!
If [Overload fault mgt] (OLL) is set to [Ignore] (nO) , the drive does not provide motor thermal protection. Provide an alternative
means of thermal protection.
Type of stop in the event of a motor thermal fault.
YES [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to the configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170, without resolving the fault. In this
instance, the fault report relay does not open, and the drive is ready to run after the fault is cleared, in accordance with the restart conditions of
the active command channel (e.g., according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt), see "Inputs/ outputs (I_O-)" on page 132, if the
fault occurs at the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate
the cause of the stop.
LFF [Fallback spd.] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed (2).
[Spd maint.] (rLS) : The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred, as long as the fault is present and the run command
rLS has not been removed (2).
rMP [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop.
FSt [DC Injection] (dCI): Stop via DC injection: This function type cannot be set in combination with certain other functions. see "Compatibility table"
dCI on page 163.
MtM
[Mot THR memo]
[No] (nO)
Record of the motor thermal state.
nO [No] (nO): Motor thermal state not stored at power off
YES [Yes] (YES): Motor thermal state is stored at power off
240

Motor phase loss (OPL-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > OPL
OPL[OUTPUT PHASE LOSS]
OPL
[Output Phase Loss]
2s
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[Yes] (YES)
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Danger!

If [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) is set to [No] (nO) or [Output cut] (OAC) , a phase failure will not be detected.
Make sure this action will not endanger people or equipment in any way.
Note:
[Output Phase Loss] (OPL) is set to [No] (nO) when [Motor control type] (Ctt), see "Motor control (drC-)" on page 117is set to
[Sync. mot.] (SYn) . In other configurations of the [Motor control type] (Ctt) parameter, [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) is forced to
[Yes] (YES) when the brake logic is configured.
YES [Yes] (YES): Trip due to [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) with freewheel stop
OAC [Output cut] (OAC): No fault tripped, but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is reestablished and catch on the fly performed (even if this function has not been configured). Drive changes to state [Output cut] (SOC), when the
time interval, [OutPh time detect] (Odt) has elapsed. Catch-on-the-fly is possible, as long as the drive is in standby mode [Output cut] (SOC) .
Odt
[OutPh time detect]
0.5 to 10 s
0.5 s
Delayed consideration of the recorded fault [Output Phase Loss] (OPL).
Input phase loss (IPL-)

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > IPL
IPL[INPUT PHASE LOSS]
IPL
This parameter is not available for drives of size 8I74S200xxx.01P-1. As such, no factory-set values are present. Factory setting: [Freewheel]
*
(YES) for drives of size 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1. With a single phase loss comes reduced performance, and the drive changes to fault state. [Input
2s
phase loss] (PFH).
When two or three phases are lost, the drive trips the [Input phase loss] (PFH) fault.
YES [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop fault
241

Overtemp. Drive (OHL-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > OHL
OHL[DRIVE OVERHEAT]
OHL
[Overtemp fault mgt]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[Freewheel] (YES)
Caution!
Danger of equipment damage.
The drive is not protected due to inhibition of overtemperature fault detection. This invalidates the warranty.
Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk.
Behavior in the event of the drive overheating
Note:
A fault trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls back
below 90%.
Stt [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to the configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170, without resolving the fault. In this
the active command channel (e.g., according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and
[2 wire type] (tCt), see "Inputs/ outputs (I_O-)" on page 132, if the fault occurs at the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended
(assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred, as long as the fault is present and the run command
FSt [DC Injection] (dCI): Stop via DC injection: This function type cannot be set in combination with certain other functions. see "Application funct.
dCI (FUn-)" on page 161
tHA
[Drv therm. state al]
0 to 118%
100%
Trip threshold for drive thermal alarm (logic output or relay)

(1)
(2)

Because, in this case, the fault does not trigger a stop, it would be wise to assign a relay or a logic output to report the fault.
*
2s
to aid programming.
Stop thermal alarm (SAt-)

This function prevents the drive from stopping between process steps if the drive or motor overheats, by authorizing
operation until the next stop. At the next stop, the drive is locked until the thermal state falls back to a value, which
undershoots the set threshold by 20%. Example: A trip threshold set at 80% enables reactivation at 60%.
One thermal state threshold must be defined for the drive, and one thermal state threshold for the motor(s), which
will trip the deferred stop.
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > SAT
SAt[THERMAL ALARM STOP]
SAt
[Thermal alarm stop]
[No] (nO)
This function allows a user-specified alarm level to be defined for drive and motor thermal states. If this level is attained, the drive enters freewheel
stop mode.
nO [No] (nO): Function inactive (in this case, the following parameters cannot be accessed)
YES [Yes] (YES): Freewheel stop due to drive or motor thermal alarm
tHA
[Drv therm. state al]
0 to 118%
100%
Thermal state threshold of the drive tripping a deferred stop.

ttd
0 to 118%
100%
Thermal state threshold of the motor tripping a deferred stop.

ttd2
0 to 118%
100%
Thermal state threshold of motor 2 tripping a deferred stop.

ttd3
0 to 118%
100%
Thermal state threshold of motor 3 tripping a deferred stop.
242
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > ETF
EtF[EXTERNAL FAULT]
EtF
[External fault ass.]
[No] (nO)
If the assigned bit is at 0, there is no external fault. If the assigned bit is at 1, there is an external fault. The logic can be configured using [External
fault config] (LEt), if a logic input is assigned.
LEt
[External fault config]
[Active high] (HIG)
*
Parameter can be accessed if the external fault has been assigned to a logic input. It defines the positive or negative logic of the input assigned
to the fault.
LO [Active low] (LO): Fault on falling edge (change from 1 to 0) of the assigned input.
HIG [Active high] (HIG): Fault on rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned input.
EPL
[External fault mgt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
Type of stop in the event of an external fault
nO [Ignore] (nO): External fault ignored
Stt [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to the configuration of [Type of stop](Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170, without resolving the fault. In this
the active command channel (e.g., according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt), see "Inputs/ outputs (I_O-)" on page 132, if the
fault occurs at the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate
the cause of the stop.
FSt [DC Injection] (dCI): Stop via DC injection: This function type cannot be set in combination with certain other functions. see "Compatibility table"
dCI on page 163
243
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
External fault (EtF-)

Undervoltage mgt. (USb-)
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > USB
USb[UNDERVOLTAGE MGT]
USb
[UnderV. fault mgt]
[Std fault] (0)
Behavior of the drive in the event of an undervoltage
0 [Std fault] (0): The drive has tripped a fault, and the external fault signal is tripped (the fault relay assigned to the [No fault] (FLt) parameter is open).
[Flt wo relay] (1): The drive has tripped a fault, but the external fault signal is not tripped (the fault relay assigned to the [No fault] (FLt) parameter
1 remains closed).
[Alarm] (2): Alarm and fault relay remain closed. The alarm can be assigned to a logic output or a relay.
2
UrES
[Mains voltage]
According to drive
According to drive
voltage rating
voltage rating
Rated voltage of the line supply in V.
For 8I74S200xxx.01P-1 :
200 [200V ac] (200): 200 Volts AC
220 [220VAC] (220): 220 Volts AC
230 [230V ac] (230): 230 Volts AC
240 [240V ac] (240): 240 Volts AC
For 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1 :
380 [380V ac] (380): 380 Volts AC
400 [400V ac] (400): 400 Volts AC
440 [440VAC] (440): 440 Volts AC
460 [460V ac] (460): 460 Volts AC
500 [500V ac] (500): 500 Volts AC (factory setting)
Note:
The factory setting in B&R Automation Studio is 260. Changing this factory setting transfers the parameter to the drive.
[Undervoltage level]
according to drive
power
Setting the threshold value of the undervoltage sensor in Volts. The factory setting is dependent on the drive rated voltage.
USt
[Undervolt. time out]
0.2 s to 999.9 s
0.2 s
Time delay for taking undervoltage fault into consideration
StP
[UnderV. prevention]
[No] (nO)
Behavior when the undervoltage prevention level is attained.
nO [No] (nO): No action
MMS [DC Maintain] (MMS): This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the DC bus voltage as long as possible.
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop according to a configurable ramp [Max stop time] (StM).
rMP [Lock-out] (LnF): Lock (freewheel stop) without fault
LnF
tSM
[UnderV. restart tm]
1.0 s to 999.9 s
1.0 s
*
Time delay to allow a restart after complete stop for [UnderV. prevention] (StP) = [Ramp stop] (rMP), when the voltage has returned to the normal
value.
UPL
[Prevention level]
133 to 261 V
According to drive
*
performance
Setting of the level for undervoltage prevention in V. Access is possible if [UnderV. prevention] (StP) is not equal to [No] (nO) . The adjustment
range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the [Mains voltage] (UrES).
StM
[Max stop time]
0.01 to 60.00 s
1.00 s
*
Ramp deceleration time when [UnderV. prevention] (StP) is set to [Ramp stop] (rMP) .
tbS
[DC bus maintain tm]
1 to 9,999 s
9,999 s
*
Maintain time of the DC bus when [UnderV. prevention] (StP) is set to [DC Maintain] (MMS) .
USL
100 to 276 V
IGBT test (tIt-)

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > TIT
tIt[IGBT TESTS]
Strt
[IGBT test]
[No] (nO)
nO [No] (nO): No test
YES [Yes] (YES): The IGBTs are tested on power up and every time a run command is sent. These tests cause a slight delay (a few ms). In the event
of a fault, the drive will lock. The following faults can be detected:
244
Drive output short-circuit (terminals U-V-W): SCF display

IGBT fault: xtF, where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned
IGBT short circuit: x2F, where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > LFL
LFL[4-20mA LOSS]
LFL3
[AI3 4-20mA loss]
[Ignore] (nO)
nO [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored This is the only possible configuration when [AI3 min value] (CrL3), see "Configuration LA1 (LA1-)" on page
137is not higher than 3 mA.
Stt [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to the configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170, without fault trip. In this instance,
the fault report relay does not open, and the drive is ready to run after the fault is cleared, in accordance with the restart conditions of the active
command channel (e.g., according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt), see "Inputs/ outputs (I_O-)" on page 132, if the fault occurs at
the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
[Fallback spd.] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed (1).
LFF [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred, as long as the fault is present and the run command
has not been removed (1).
rLS [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop via ramp
rMP [DC Injection] (dCI): Stop via DC injection: This function type cannot be set in combination with certain other functions. see "Application funct.
FSt (FUn-)" on page 161
dCI
(1)
*
Fault inhibit (InH-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > INH
InH[FAULT INHIBITION]
InH
[Fault inhibit assign.]
*
2s
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
Danger!
LOSS OF PERSONAL AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

Enabling [Fault inhibit assign.] (InH) will disable the safety functions of the drive controller.
[Fault inhibit assign.] (InH) should not be enabled for typical applications of this equipment.
[Fault inhibit assign.] (InH) should only be activated in extreme cases, where it is determined by a comprehensive
risk analysis that the presence of the configurable safety functions of the drive presents a greater risk than potential
physical injury or material damage.

If the assigned input or bit is at 0, fault monitoring is active. If the assigned input or bit is at 1, fault monitoring is inactive. Active faults are reset
on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned input or bit.
Note:
The "safe torque off" function is not affected by this function, and neither are the detected faults that would lead to a complete
breakdown.
The following faults can be inhibited:
AnF, CnF, COF, CrF1, dLF, EnF, EPF1, EPF2, FCF2, InFA, InFb, LFF3, ObF, OHF, OLC, OLF, OPF1, OPF2, OSF, OtFL, PHF, PtFL, SLF1,
SLF2, SLF3, SOF, SPF, SSF, tJF, tnF and ULF.
245
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
4-20 mA loss (LFL-)

Network fault mgt. (CLL-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > CLL
CLL[COM. FAULT MANAGEMENT]
CLL
[Network fault mgt]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[Freewheel] (YES)
Warning!
Control failure
If [Network fault mgt] (CLL) = [Ignore] (nO) communication control is suppressed.
For safety reasons, communication fault detection should only be locked during the program test phase or in specific applications.
Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with a communication card
rMP [DC Injection] (dCI): Stop via DC injection: This function type cannot be set in combination with certain other functions. see "Application funct.
FSt (FUn-)" on page 161
dCI
COL
[CANopen fault mgt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
Warning!
Control failure
In CANopen fault management [CANopen fault mgt] (COL) = [Ignore] (nO) communication control is suppressed.
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
SLL
Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with integrated CANopen.
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to the configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt), see "Stop mode (Stt-)" on page 170, without resolving the fault. In this
the active command channel (e.g., according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and
[2 wire type] (tCt), see "Inputs/ outputs (I_O-)" on page 132, if the fault occurs at the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended
(assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
[DC Injection] (dCI): Stop via DC injection: This function type cannot be set in combination with certain other functions. see "Compatibility table"
on page 163
[Modbus fault mgt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
Warning!
Control failure
When modbus fault management [Modbus fault mgt] (SLL) = [Ignore] (nO) communication control is suppressed.
Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with integrated modbus.
rMP [DC Injection] (dCI): Stop via DC injection: This function type cannot be set in combination with certain other functions. see "Compatibility table"
FSt on page 163
dCI
246
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > TID
tId[TORQUE/CURRENT LIM]
SSb
[Trq/I limit. stop]
[Ignore] (nO)
Behavior in the event of switching to torque or current limitation Fault
rMP [DC Injection] (dCI): Stop via DC injection: This function type cannot be set in combination with certain other functions. see "Compatibility table"
FSt on page 163
dCI
StO
[Trq/I limit. time out]
0 to 9,999 ms
1,000 ms
(If fault has been configured)

Time delay for taking SSF "Limitation" fault into consideration
(1)
*
2s
to aid programming.
247
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Current / torque limit (tId-)

Frequency meter (FqF-)
This function uses the "impulse input" and can only be executed when the impulse input is not being used for
another function.
Application example
A gearwheel driven by a motor and connected to a proximity switch can yield a frequency signal proportional to
the motor speed.
Time in seconds
Applied to the impulse input, this signal offers the following possibilities:
Measurement and display of the motor speed: Signal frequency = 1/T. This frequency is displayed using
the [Pulse in. work. freq.] (FqS), see "Menu" on page 82parameter.
Overspeed detection: if the measured speed exceeds a predefined threshold, the drive trips a fault.
Detection of a defective brake if the brake command is configured: If speed doesn't decrease fast enough
after a "brake engage" command, the drive trips a fault. This function allows brake wear to be determined.
Detection of a speed threshold that was set above [Pulse warning thd.] (FqL), see "DRI-CONF-FULL-SET
- rPG to rP4" on page 112, and can be assigned to a relay see "Configuration R1 (r1-)" on page 141or
to a logic output.
248
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > FQF
FqF[FREQUENCY METER]
FqF
[Frequency meter]
[No] (nO)
Activation of the speed measurement function
nO [No] (nO): Function inactive. All parameters of this function are inaccessible.
YES [Yes] (YES): Function active: assignment only possible if no other function is assigned to the impulse input.
FqC
[Pulse scal. divisor]
1.0 to 100.0
1.0
Scaling factor (divisor) of the impulse input. The attained frequency is displayed using the [Pulse in. work. freq.] (FqS)parameter, p. 44.
FqA
[Overspd. pulse thd.]
[No] (nO)
Activation and configuration of overspeed monitoring: [Overspeed] (SOF).
nO [No] (nO): Overspeed is not monitored.
- 1 Hz to 20.00 kHz: Setting the trip threshold of the frequency at the impulse input divided by the [Pulse scal. divisor](FqC).
tdS
[Pulse overspd delay]
0.0 s to 10.0 s
0.0 s
Time delay for taking overspeed fault into consideration.
Fdt
[Level fr. pulse ctrl]
[No] (nO)
Activation and configuration of the input monitor for the impulse input (speed feedback): [Speed fdback loss] (SPF).
nO [No] (nO): Overspeed feedback is not monitored.
- 0.1 Hz to 599 Hz: Setting the frequency threshold of the motor for tripping the speed feedback fault (difference between the estimated frequency
and the measured speed).
Fqt
[Pulse thresh wo RUN]
[No] (nO)
Activation and configuration of monitoring of brake defects: [Brake contact] (brF). If the brake logic [Brake assignment] (bLC), see "Brake logic
control (bLC-)" on page 183is not configured, this parameter is forced to [No] (nO) .
nO [No] (nO): Brakes are not monitored.
- 1 Hz to 1,000 Hz: Setting the frequency threshold of the motor for tripping the brake defect fault (detection of speed not equal to zero).
tqb
[Pulse wo Run delay]
0.0 s to 10.0 s
0.0 s
Time delay for taking brake defect fault into consideration.
249
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

Detection of the load variance (dLd-)
This detection is only possible with the "high-speed hoisting" function. It can be used to detect if an obstacle has
been reached, triggering a sudden (upward) increase or (downward) decrease in the load.
Detection of load variance results in a fault [Dynamic load fault] (dLF). The behavior of the drive during this fault
can be configured via the [Dyn. load Mgt.] (dLb) parameter. Load variation detection can also be assigned to a
relay or a logic output.
There are two possible detection modes, depending on the configuration of high-speed hoisting:
"Speed reference" mode:
[High speed hoisting] (HSO), see "High-speed hoisting (HSH-)" on page 195, = [Speed ref] (SSO).
Detection of torque variation.
During high-speed operation, the load is compared to that measured during the frequency step.
The permissible load variation and its duration can be configured. If exceeded, the drive switches
to fault mode.
"Current limitation" mode:
[High speed hoisting] (HSO), see "High-speed hoisting (HSH-)" on page 195, = [Current Limit]
(CSO).
When hoisting at high operational speeds, a load increase results in a speed reduction. Even if
high-speed operation has been activated, if the motor frequency drops below the [I Limit. frequency]
(SCL), see "High-speed hoisting (HSH-)" on page 195threshold, the drive will switch to fault mode.
The function only detects positive variations of the load in the high speed range (up to [I Limit.
frequency] (SCL)).
With decreasing load, the operation continues according to the reference mode.
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > DLD
dLd[DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT.]
Load variation detection. This parameter is accessible if the [High speed hoisting] (HSO), see "High-speed hoisting (HSH-)" on page 195is not
equal to [No] (nO) .
tLd
[Dynamic load time]
[No] (nO)
Activation of load variation detection and adjustment of time delay for taking dynamic load fault into consideration. [Dynamic load fault] (dLF).
nO [No] (nO): No load variation detection.
- 0.00 s to 10.00 s: Adjustment of the time delay for taking detected fault into consideration.
dLd
[Dynamic load threshold]
1 to 100%
100%
Adjustment of the trip threshold for load variation detection, as a % of the load measured during the frequency step.
dLb
[Dyn. load Mgt.]
[Freewheel] (YES)
Behavior of the drive in the event of a load variation fault.
rMP
FSt
250

Auto tuning fault (tnF-)
(1)
*
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[Freewheel] (YES)
Card pairing (PPI-)

This function is only available in [Expert] (EPr) mode.
This function is used to detect whenever a card has been replaced or the software has been modified in any way.
When a pairing password is entered, the parameters of the cards currently inserted are stored. On every subsequent power-up these parameters are verified and, in the event of a discrepancy, the drive locks in HCF fault mode.
Before the drive can be restarted you must revert to the original situation or re-enter the pairing password.
The following parameters are verified:
Card type: for all cards
Software version: Control card, communication cards
Serial number: Control card
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > PPI
PPI[CARDS PAIRING]
PPI
[Pairing password]
[OFF] (OFF) up to [OFF] (OFF)
*
9,999
OFF The [OFF] (OFF) value shows that the card pairing function is inactive.
- The [ON] (On) value shows that card pairing is active and that an access code must be entered in order to start the drive in the event of a card
pairing fault.
As soon as the code has been entered the drive is unlocked and the code changes to [ON] (On). The PPI code is an unlock code known only
to B&R Product Support.
*
251
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > TNF
tnF[AUTO TUNING FAULT]
tnL
[Autotune fault mgt]

Process underload (ULd-)
A process underload is detected at the onset of the next event and remains pending for at least the configurable
[Unld Time Detect.] (ULt) time interval.
The motor is in steady state, and the torque is less than the underload limit set in the [Unld. Thr. 0. Speed.]
(LUL)parameter, [Unld Thr. Nom. Speed.] (LUn), [Unld Freq. Thr. Det.] (rMUd).
The motor goes into steady state when the difference between reference frequency and motor frequency
is under the configurable threshold, [Hysteresis Freq. Att.] (Srb) .
Torque as a % of the
rated torque
Between frequency 0 and rated frequency,

the curve is depicted by the following equation:
LUn
Torque =
LUL +
(LUn - LUL) x (frequency)2

2
(Rated frequency)
The underload function is for frequencies
under[Unterl. F-Schw.Erk.] (rMUd) Not
active
Underload range
LUL
rNUd
FrS
Frequency
in the [INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu, the signal from this fault can be assigned to a relay or a logic output.
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > ULD
ULd[PROCESS UNDERLOAD]
ULt
[Unld T. Del. Detect.]
0 to 100 s
0s
Time delay for underload detection. At value 0, the function is deactivated, and further parameters are unavailable.
LUn
[Unld. Thr. Nom. Speed.]
20 to 100%
60%
*
Underload threshold for the motor at rated speed ([Rated motor freq.] (FrS), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104), as a percentage of
the rated torque.
LUL
[Unld. Thr. 0. Speed.]
0 up
0%
*
[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed]
(LUn)
Threshold for underload at zero speed, as a percentage of rated torque.
rMUd
[Unld. Freq. Thr. Det.]
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
*
Minimum frequency threshold for underload detection.
Srb
0.3 to 599 Hz
0.3 Hz
*
Maximum variation between reference frequency and motor frequency, defined steady state.
UdL
[Underload Managmt.]
[Freewheel] (YES)
*
Behavior when switching to underload detection
rMP [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop via ramp
FtU
[Underload T.B. Rest.]
0 to 6 min
0 min
*
This parameter is not available when [Underload Managmt.] (UdL) are set to [Ignore] (nO) . Minimum allowable time interval between underload
detection and automatic restart.
For an automatic restart to be possible, the [Max. restart time] (tAr), see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237value must exceed the value of
this parameter for at least one minute.
*
252

Process overload (OLd-)
The drive is in "current limit" mode.

The motor is in steady state, and the current is above the specified overload threshold, [Ovld Detection
Thr.] (LOC).
The motor goes into steady state when the difference between reference frequency and motor frequency is under
the configurable threshold, [Hysteresis Freq. Att.] (Srb) .
The signal from this fault can be assigned to a relay or a logic output. [INPUTS/ OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-).
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > OLD
OLd[Proc. overload flt]
tOL
[Ovld Time Detect.]
0 to 100 s
0s
Time delay for overload detection.
At value 0, the function is deactivated, and further parameters are unavailable.
LOC
[Ovld Detection Thr.]
70 to 150%
110%
*
Overload threshold, as a percentage of rated motor current [Rated mot. current] (nCr), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104. For this
(1)
function to be executed, the value must be lower than the limiting current.
Srb
0 to 599 Hz
0.3 Hz
*
Maximum variation between reference frequency and motor frequency, defined steady state.
(1)
OdL
[Ovld.Proces.Mngmt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
*
Behavior when switching to overload detection
rMP [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop via ramp
FtO
[Overload T.B.Rest.]
0 to 6 min
0 min
*
This parameter is not available when [Ovld.Proces.Mngmt] (OdL) are set to [Ignore] (nO) .
(1)
Minimum allowable time interval between overload detection and automatic restart.
For an automatic restart to be possible, the [Max. restart time](tAr), see "Automatic restart (Atr-)" on page 237value must exceed the value of
this parameter for at least one minute.
Fallback speed (LFF-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > LFF
LFF[FALLBACK SPEED]
LFF
[Fallback speed]
Selection of the fallback speed
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0 to 599 Hz
0 Hz
Fast stop (FSt-)

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > FST
FSt[FAST STOP]
dCF
[Ramp divider]
0 to 10
4
*
The unlocked ramp ([Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2)) is then divided by this coefficient during the stop command.
(1)
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.
253
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
A process overload is detected at the onset of the next event and remains pending for at least the configurable
[Ovld Time Detect.] (tOL) time interval.

DC Injection (dCI-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > FLT- > DCI
dCI[DC INJECTION]
IdC
*
(1) (3)
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0.1 to 1.41 In (2)
0.64 In (2)
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
Caution!

tdI
*
(1) (3)
Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode.
Caution!
IdC2
*
(1) (3)
Maximum duration of current injection [DC inject. level 1] (IdC). After this time interval has elapsed, the DC injection changes to [DC inject. level
2] (IdC2).
0.1 In (2) up to [DC in- 0.5 In (2)
ject. level 1] (IdC)
Caution!
tdC
*
(1) (3)
Injection current is activated by logic input or selected as stop mode, once time interval [DC injection time 1] (tdI) has elapsed.
0.1 to 30 s
0.5 s
Caution!

Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for DC injection braking, only selected as stop mode.
This parameter is accessible if the [Type of stop] (Stt) are set to [DC Injection] (dCI) .
(1)
(2)
(3)
*
254
This parameter is also accessible via the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) and [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)menus.
These settings are independent of function [AUTO DC INJECTION] (AdC-).

2.3.3.4.8 Communication
With integrated display terminal
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
From the menu COnF
COMMUNICATION
Scanner Input (ICS-)

Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > COM- > ICS
ICS[COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP]
[Scan. IN1 address] (nMA1) to [Scan.Out4 address] (nMA4) can be used for a fast task on the communication scanner.
nMA1
[Scan. IN1 address]
Address of the 1st input word.
nMA2
[Scan. IN2 address]
Address of the 2nd input word.
nMA3
[Scan. IN3 address]
Address of the 3rd input word.
nMA4
[Scan.Out4 address]
Address of the 4th input word.
nMA5
[Scan. IN5 address]
nMA6
[Scan. IN6 address]
nMA7
[Scan. IN7 address]
nMA8
[Scan. IN8 address]
Factory setting
3.201
8.604
0
0
0
0
0
0
255

Scanner output (OCS-)
Code
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > COM- > OCS
OCS[COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP]
[Scan. Out1 address] (nCA1) to [Scan. Out4 address] (nCA4) can be used for a fast task on the communication scanner.
nCA1
[Scan.Out1 address]
8.501
Address of the 1st output word.
nCA2
[Scan.Out2 address]
8.602
Address of the 2nd output word.
nCA3
[Scan.Out3 address]
0
Address of the 3rd output word.
nCA4
[Scan.Out4 address]
0
Address of the 4th output word.
nCA5
[Scan.Out5 address]
0
nCA6
[Scan.Out6 address]
0
nCA7
[Scan.Out7 address]
0
nCA8
[Scan.Out8 address]
0
Modbus network (Md1-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > COM- > MD1
Md1[MODBUS NETWORK]
Not applicable.
*
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Bluetooth (btH-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > COM- > BTH
btH[BLUETOOTH]
Not applicable.
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
CANopen (CnO-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > COM- > CNO
CnO[CANopen]
AdCO
[CANopen address]
OFF [OFF] (OFF): OFF
- 1 to 127
bdCO
[CANopen bit rate]
50 [50 kbps] (50): 50,000 baud
125 [125 kbps] (125): 125,000 baud
250 [250 kbps] (250): 250,000 baud
500 [500 kbps] (500): 500,000 baud
IM [1 Mbps] (1M): 1 MBaud
ErCO
[Error code]
Read-only parameter, cannot be modified.
[OFF] (OFF) up to 127 [OFF] (OFF)
[250 kbps] (250)
0 to 5
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
Com. Card (Cbd-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > COM- > CBD
Cbd[COMMUNICATION CARD]
See the specific documentation for the card used.
256

Forced local (LCF-)
Name
RS3_ERROR_GENERAL
EPL_ERROR_AP_STATE_ERROR_EVENT
NVS_STORAGE_FAILURE
RS3_ERROR_IOC_WATCHDOG_TIMEOUT
RS3_ERROR_SCANNER_UPDATE_FAILURE
Description
Unspecified error
Error when changing current state
NVS storage failure
IOC watchdog timeout
Scanner update failure
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0 to 239
0
8.501
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > COM- > LCF
LCF[FORCED LOCAL]
ADRC [Address] (ADRC): POWERLINK station number
MAC [MAC@] (MAC): MAC address of the POWERLINK card
OCA1 [OCA1] (OCA1)
[Scan.Out1 address]: Address of the 1st output word.
OCA2 [OCA2] (OCA2)
[Scan.Out2 address]: Address of the 2nd output word.
OCA3 [OCA3] (OCA3)
[Scan.Out3 address]: Address of the 3rd output word.
OCA4 [OCA4] (OCA4)
[Scan.Out4 address]: Address of the 4th output word.
OMA1 [OMA1] (OMA1)
[Scan. IN1 address]: Address of the 1st input word.
OMA2 [OMA2] (OMA2)
[Scan. IN2 address]: Address of the 2nd input word.
OMA3 [OMA3] (OMA3)
[Scan. IN3 address]: Address of the 3rd input word.
OMA4 [OMA4] (OMA4)
[Scan.Out4 address]: Address of the 4th input word.
ILF1 [Internal link fault 1] (ILF1)
Interruption of communication between POWERLINK interface and drive.
8.602
0
0
3.201
8.604
0
0
Error code
0x0001
0x0002
0x0013
0x0015
0x0016
CNF [Network fault] (CNF)

POWERLINK interface error code
Name
EPL_ERROR_MISSING_SYNC_SIGNAL
EPL_ERROR_PDO_MAPPING_FAILED
EPL_ERROR_RECEIVE_LINK_PDO_MSG_FAILED
EPL_ERROR_TO_MANY_INPUTS_MAPPED
EPL_ERROR_TO_MANY_OUTPUTS_MAPPED
EPL_ERROR_DRIVE_INVALID_STATE_CHANGE
EPL_ERROR_LINK_LOSS
RS3_ERROR_INVALID_INPUT_MAPPING
RS3_ERROR_INVALID_OUTPUT_MAPPING
RS3_ERROR_REGISTER_SCANNER
RS3_ERROR_UNABLE_TO_READ_DMN
RS3_ERROR_OBJECT_ACCESS
Description
Missing PCP signal for synchronization
PDO mapping error
Error in receipt of LinkPdosReq request
Too many TPDO objects in the PCP mapping
Too many RPDO objects in the PCP mapping
Fallback into Pre-Op1 or Pre-Op2 during drive activity
Connection loss between Phy and MN
Drive reports invalid TPDO mapping
Drive reports invalid RPDO mapping
Error during scanner configuration
Unable to read DMN parameter
Read/write not possible for a drive parameter
Error code
0x001B
0x0022
0x0023
0x0024
0x0025
0x0060
0x0011
0x0026
0x0027
0x0028
0x0029
0x0030
257

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: DRI- > CONF- > FULL- > COM- > LCF
FLO
[Forced local assign]
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
Warning!
Control failure
If the equipment is switched to forced local mode, the virtual input used in the current configuration remains fixed at the last
value transmitted.
Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration.
nO
LI1
...
LI6
LAI1
LAI2
FLOC
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
LCC
PI
FLOt
*
Forced local assignment.

Forced local mode is active when the input is at state 1. [Forced local assign] (FLO) is forced to [No] (nO) when [Profile] (CHCF) = [I/O profile]
(IO)Page 139.
...
[Forced local Ref.]
[No] (nO)
Forced local reference source assignment
[No] (nO): Not assigned (control via the terminals with zero reference).
[HMI] (LCC): Assignment of the reference and control for the graphic display terminal or the external display terminal. Set value: [HMI Frequency
ref.] (LFr)Page 44. Control: RUN/STOP/FWD/REV buttons.
[Time-out forc. local]
0.1 to 30 s
10.0 s
0.1 to 30 s
This parameter is accessible if the [Forced local assign] (FLO) Not equal to [No](nO) . Time delay before communication monitoring is resumed
on leaving forced local mode.
2.3.3.5 Access level (LAC-)

See [Access level] (LAC), see "Access level (LAC)" on page 259.
258
2.4 Interface (ItF)

2.4.1 Access level (LAC)
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
From menu ItF
ACCESS LEVEL
Code
Name / Description
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF
ItF[3 INTERFACE]
LAC
[3.1 ACCESS LEVEL]
[Standard] (Std)
bAS [Basic] (bAS): Limited access to menus [SIMPLY START] (SIM-), [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-), [SETTINGS] (SEt-),
[FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-), [5 PASSWORD] (COd) and [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC-). Only one function can be assigned to each input.
[Standard] (Std): Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal. Only one function can be assigned to each input.
Std [Advanced] (AdU): Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal. Several functions can be assigned to each input.
AdU [Expert] (EPr): Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal and access to additional parameters. Several functions can be assigned
Epr to each input.
259

2.4.2 Menu overview
Menus that can be accessed on the graphic display terminal/ integrated display terminal
Access level
Expert EPr
[3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC)

[3.2 LANGUAGE] (LnG)
AdvancedAdU
[2 IDENTIFICATION] (OId-) (1)

[3 INTERFACE] (ItF-) (1)
Standard Std
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-)

MMO- (Motor monitoring)
IOM- (I/O MAP)
SAF- (Safety monitoring)
CMM- (Communications map)
MPI- (PI monitoring)
PEt- (Energy consumption monitoring)
ALr- (Alarms) (1)
SSt- (Other status) (1)
COd- (Access code)
[1.3 CONFIGURATION] (COnF)
MYMn- (My menu)
FCS- (factory setting)
FULL (All parameters)
SIM- (Simply start)
SEt- (Settings)
Basic bAS
[1 DRIVE MENU] (drI-)
[4 OPEN / SAVE AS] (trA-) (1)

[5 PASSWORD] (COd-) (1)
[1 DRIVE MENU](drI-)
A single function can be assigned to each input.

dGt- (Diagnostics)
[1.3
CONFIGURATION] FULL (All parameters)
(COnF)
drC- (Motor control)
I_O- (Configuration inputs/ outputs)
CtL- (open-loop control)
FUn- (Application function)
FLt- (Fault management)
COM- (Communication)
[3 INTERFACE] (ItF-) (1)
[3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.] (MCF-)

A single function can be assigned to each input.
[3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] (dCF-) (1)
Several functions can be assigned to each input.
Expert parameters
Several functions can be assigned to each input.
(1)
260
Access only possible with graphic display terminal.

2.4.3 Language (LnG)
English
Franais
German
Italiano
Espaol
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
3.2 Language
<<
>>
When only one selection is possible, the selected item is indicated by the
given.
Example: Only one language can be chosen.
Quick
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Term
RDY
Chinese
Trke
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF
LnG
[3.2 LANGUAGE]
Currently available languages.

LnG0 [Language 0] (LnG0)
... ...
LnG9 [Language 9] (LnG9)
Factory setting
[Language 0] (LnG0)
261

2.4.4 Monitor configuration (MCF)
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal.
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
3 INTERFACE
3.1 ACCESS LEVEL
3.2 LANGUAGE
3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.
Code
<<
>>
START
ENT
Quick
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
PARAM. BAR SELECT

MONITOR SCREEN TYPE
CONFIG. MAP CONFIG.
Code
<<
>>
Quick
This can be used to configure the information displayed on the graphic display screen during operation.
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A

PARAM. BAR SELECT
MONITOR SCREEN TYPE
[COM. MAP CONFIG.]
Code
<<
>>
Quick
[PARAM. BAR SELECT] : Selection of 1 to 2 parameters in the top row (the first two
Parameters cannot be changed).
[Display value type]
: Selection of the parameters in the middle of the screen and the
Display mode (numerical values or bar chart)
[COM SCANNER STATUS]: Number of displayed words of their format.
262

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF- > MCF- > PbS
PbS[PARAM. BAR SELECT]
[AI1]
in V
[AI2]
in V
[AI3]
in mA
[AO1]
in V
[ETA state word]
[Alarm groups]
[Frequency ref.]
in Hz: in the parameters displayed in the factory configuration
[Output frequency]
in Hz
[I motor]
in A: in the parameters displayed in the factory configuration
[Motor speed]
in rpm
[Motor voltage]
in V
[Motor power]
in W
[Motor torque]
as a %
[Mains voltage]
in V
as a %
as a %
[Consumption]
in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating
[Run time]
in hours (length of time the drive has been switched on)
[Elapsed time]
in seconds (total time of IGBT overheating alarms)
[Min. freq time]
in seconds
[PID speed ref.]
as a %
[PID feedback]
as a %
[PID error]
as a %
[PID Output]
in Hz
[Config. active]
CNF0, 1 oder 2 (see "Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.](MMC-)" on
[Utilised param. set]
page 218)
SET1, 2 oder 3 (see "Parameter switching (MLP-)" on page 216)
Select the parameter using ENT (a then appears next to the parameter).
Parameter(s) can also be deselected using ENT.
1 or 2 parameters can be selected.
Example:
PARAM. BAR SELECT
English
---------------------------------
MONITORING
Monitor screen type (MSC-)

Code
Name / Description
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF- > MCF- > MSC
MSC[Display value type]
Mdt
[Display value type]
[Digital] (dEC)
[Digital] (dEC)
[Bar graph] (bAr)
[List] (LISt)
263
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Header selection (PbS-)

Select. Parameter
Code
Name / Description
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF- > MCF- > MSC- > MPC
MPC
*
[AI1]
in V
[AI2]
in V
[AI3]
in mA
[AO1]
in V
[ETA state word]
[Alarm groups]
[Frequency ref.]
in Hz: in the parameters displayed in the factory configuration
[Output frequency]
in Hz
[Pulse in. work. freq.]
in A: in the parameters displayed in the factory configuration
[I motor]
in Hz
[Motor speed]
in rpm
[Motor voltage]
in V
[Motor power]
in W
[Motor torque]
as a %
[Mains voltage]
in V
as a %
as a %
[Consumption]
in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating
[Run time]
[Elapsed time]
in seconds (total time of IGBT overheating alarms)
[Min. freq time]
in seconds
[PID speed ref.]
as a %
[PID feedback]
as a %
[PID error]
as a %
[PID Output]
in Hz
Parameters are selected using ENT (a then appears next to the parameter) or unselected.
SELECTED PARAMETERS
English
---------------------------------
MONITORING
Examples:
RUN
Term
+35.0 Hz
Motor speed
1250 rpm
Motor current
80 A
264
Display of a list of 5
Values
Display of 2
Bar charts
Display of 2 digital values

Values
80.0 A
RUN
Min
0
Min.
0
Term
+35.0 Hz
Motor speed
1250 rpm
Motor current
80 A
80.0 A
Max.
1500
Max.
150
Quick
RUN
Term
+35.0 Hz
80.0 A
1.2 MONITORING
English
Frequency reference:
Motor current:
Motor speed:
Motor thermal state:
Drive thermal state:
50.1 Hz
80 A
1250 rpm
80%
80%
Quick

2.4.4.1 Scanner status (ADL-)
RUN
----------------W3141
Term
0.0 A
COMMUNICATION MAP
F230 Hex
<<
+35.0 Hz
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
Factory setting
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF- > MCF- > ADL
AdL[COM SCANNER STATUS]
IAd1
[Word 1 add. select.]
0
Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the << and >> (F2 and F3) keys and rotating the jog dial.
FAd1
[Format word 1]
[Hex] (HE )
Format of word 1.
HE [Hex] (HE )
SIG [Signed] (SIG)
nSG [Unsigned] (nSG)
IAd2
0
FAd2
[Format word 2]
[Hex] (HE )
Format of word 2.
HE [Hex] (HE )
SIG [Signed] (SIG)
IAd3
0
FAd3
[Format word 3]
[Hex] (HE )
Format of word 3.
HE [Hex] (HE )
SIG [Signed] (SIG)
FAd4
[Format word 4]
[Hex] (HE )
Format of word 4.
HE [Hex] (HE )
SIG [Signed] (SIG)
The selected words can then be displayed in the [COMMUNICATION MAP] submenu of the [1.2 MONITORING] menu.
Example:
>>
Quick
265

2.4.5 Display config. (dCF)
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal. It can be used to customize parameters or a
menu and to access parameters.
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
MAIN MENU
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
2 IDENTIFICATION
3 INTERFACE
4 OPEN / SAVE AS
5 PASSWORD
Code
Quick
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
3 INTERFACE
3.1 ACCESS LEVEL
3.2 LANGUAGE
3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.
Code
<<
>>
RDY
ENT
Quick
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.

USER PARAMETERS
MY MENU CONFIG.
PARAMETER ACCESS
KEYPAD PARAMETERS
Code
<<
>>
Quick
USER PARAMETERS: Customization of 1 to 15 parameters.

MY MENU: Creation of a customized menu.
PARAMETER ACCESS: Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms of menus and parameters.
KEYPAD PARAMETERS: Adjustment of the contrast and stand-by mode of the graphic display terminal
(parameters stored in the terminal rather than in the drive). Choice of the menu displayed on power up.
Code
dCF-
266
Name / Description
[3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.]

2.4.5.1 User parameters (CUP-)
If [Return std name] is set to [Yes] , the standard display is restored; however, the adjustments remain saved.
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
USER PARAMETERS
:
No
ALL PARAMETERS:
PARAMETER SELECTION
CUSTOMER-SPEC SELECTION
MY MENU:
DEVICE NAME
Code
<<
PARAMETER SELECTION
ENT
SIMPLY START
SETTINGS
MOTOR CONTROL
INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
CONTROLLER
Quick
>>
SERVICE MESSAGE
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Displ. Stand.
Param.
PARAMETER SELECTION
ENT
SETTINGS
List
CONFIG. 0
CONFIG. 1
CONFIG. 2
SERIAL NUMBER
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
Selection of 1 to 15 free
definable parameters
List
ENT
Term
RDY
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
CUSTOMER-SPEC SELECTION
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration 2
Note: The 1st line is

or
[RDY Term +0.00 Hz 0 A] according to path (ENT or list).
List of defined parameters
Delete
ENT
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
Ramp increment
ENT
Username
Unit
Multiplier
Divisor
Offset
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
FLOW REFERENCE
NBC - max number of digits

ABC
Term
+0.0 Hz
Standard
customer specific
%
mA
Quick
RDY
ENT
Term
+0.0 Hz
13
>>
RDY
0.0 A
Unit
Standard: Use of the
Factory set unit
Customer specific
User-defined unit
%, mA, etc.: Selection from
of a scroll bar
<<
Use F1 to change to ABC, abc, 123, *[-.

By turning the jog dial, the character will be raised (alphabetical
order) increased, << and >> (F2 and F3) effect the change
to the next or previous character
offset and coefficients are

numerical values. None to
high multipliers
must be used
(max display 99999).
ENT RDY
0.0 A
Username
0.0 A
SERVICE MESSAGE
After entering the unit,

by pressing ENT
Ramp resolution screen
called up new in order to
to display designation The
Pressing ESC results in
Return to "Unit" screen
ENT
Term
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
CUSTOMER-SP MENU

<<
%
mA
Quick
RDY
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
LINE 2
FOR SERVICE DIAL

As long as the "view" key is pressed
remains, the entered
Report displayed.
ABC
<<
>>
23
Quick
Names (CUSTOMER-SPEC. MENU, DEVICE NAME, configuration , serial number, message lines
names of the units etc.) can be adjusted for the parameter names as in the example alongside
.
If no custom settings have been made, the standard value appears
(designations, units, etc.).
FLOW VOLUME
ABC
Quick
0.0 A
Standard
customer specific
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
LINE 4
LINE 5
View
+0.0 Hz
Unit
>>
18
Quick
Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters.

Use F1 to change to ABC, abc, 123, *[-.
By turning the jog dial, the character will be raised (alphabetical order).
<< and >> (F2 and F3) effect the change to the next or previous character.
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF- > DCF- > CUP
CUP[USER PARAMETERS]
GSP
[Return std name]
Factory setting
[No] (nO)
267
nO
YES
MYMN
PAn
Display of standard parameters instead of user-defined parameters.

[No] (nO)
[Yes] (YES)
[MY MENU]
[DEVICE NAME]
2.4.5.1.1 Service message (SEr-)

Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF- > DCF- > SER
SEr[SERVICE MESSAGE]
SML01
[LINE 1]
SML02
[LINE 2]
SML03
[LINE 3]
SML04
[LINE 4]
SML05
[LINE 5]
CFN01
[CONFIGURATION 0]
CFN02
[CONFIGURATION 1]
CFN03
[CONFIGURATION 2]
PSn
[SERIAL NUMBER]
268
Factory setting

2.4.5.2 My menu config. (MYC-)
Term
+0.0 Hz
0.0 A
MY MENU CONFIG.
ENT
PARAMETER SELECTION
SELECTED LIST
Code
<<
>>
List in the user menu

contained parameters.
PARAMETER SELECTION
ALL PARAMETERS:
Quick
ENT
SIMPLY START
SETTING
SETTINGS
MOTOR CONTROL
INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
CONTROLLER
List
PARAMETER SELECTION
ALL PARAMETERS:
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
List
List
ENT
RDY
0.0 Hz
Term
Note: The 1st line is

or
[RDY Term +0.00 Hz 0 A]
according to path (ENT or list).
0.0 A
List of parameters, from

to whom the
My menu
puts together
SELECTED LIST
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration 2
Del
Up
Down
Using the F2 key and

F3, the parameters in
the list (below
Example with F3) ordered
.
RDY
0.0 Hz
Term
0.0 A
SELECTED LIST
Acceleration
Ramp increment
Speed prop. gain
Del
Code
MYC-
Up
Down
Name / Description
MY MENU CONFIG.
269
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
RDY

2.4.5.3 Parameter access
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
PARAMETER ACCESS
ENT
PROTECTION
Indicators
Code
RDY
0.0 Hz
Term
0.0 A
Indicators
<<
>>
ENT
PARAMETERS
MENU
RDY
0.0 Hz
Term
0.0 A
PARAMETERS
Quick
Active
All
Quick
Code
View selection
of all parameters or only
the active parameter
press ESC to
this screen
Quit
Quick
ENT
ENT
MENUS
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 FREQUENCY
Ramp
increment REFERENCE
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 CONFIGURATION
Del
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
Down
0.0 A
PROTECTION
ENT
PROTECTED CHANNELS
PROTECTED PARAMETERS
Code
Up
The next steps

occur exclusively
im DRIVE 1
MENU . By default:
All menus are marked
by pressing ENT
is the marking
cleared up
by pressing again
of ENT, a menu will
selected again
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
PROTECTED CHANNELS
Quick
ENT
HMI
PC Tool
MODBUS
CANopen
COM CARD
Code
Note: The protected channels must be chosen

are, since a parameter that [ ] on a chosen channel
is protected, on the unchosen accessible channels
stays.
Quick
1 DRIVE MENU
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 CONFIGURATION
All
On these screens
all parameters can
of the menu
[1 DRIVE MENU]
protects and to the
Selection shown
are, with the exception of
the parameter of the
Expert mode
ENT
1.3 CONFIGURATION
MY MENU:
FACTORY SETTINGS
Macro configuration
ALL PARAMETERS:
None
All
None
By pressing the key

all become "All"
parameter chosen The
press again
"All" key lifts the
marking of all
Open parameter
If no parameters are shown, then

Screen no parameter selection possible
APPLICATION FUNCT.
CONFIG. REFERENCES
RAMP
STOP CONFIGURATION
AUTO DC INJECTION
JOG
ENT
JOG
JOG
Ref. step mode
Jog delay
Note: The protected parameters are no longer accessible and are not, therefore,
submenus are not displayed.
270

Protection (prO-)
Factory setting
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF- > DCF- > PAC- > PRO
prO[PROTECTION]
pCd[PROTECTED CHANNELS]
COn [HMI] (COn): Graphic display terminal or display terminal
P S [PC Tool] (P S): PC Software
Display (UIS-)
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF- > DCF- > PAC- > PRO- > UIS
UIS[VISIBILITY]
PUIS
[PARAMETERS]
ACt [Active] (ACt)

ALL [ALL] (ALL)
Factory setting
[Active] (ACt)
Parameter Terminal (CnL-)

RDY
Term
0.0 A
0.0 Hz
KEYPAD PARAMETERS
Contrast:
Keypad stand-by
Code
<<
50 %
>>
5 Min.:
Quick
Code
Name / Description
The parameters described here are called up as follows: ITF- > DCF- > CNL
CnL[KEYPAD PARAMETERS]
CrSt
[Keypad contrast]
Contrast setting of the keypad

CSbY
[Keypad stand-by]
Setting of the time delay for the keypad standby

nO [No] (nO): No
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
0 to 100%
50%
[No] (nO) to 10 min
5 min
271
2.5 Load/ Save as (trA)

This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal.
Term
RDY
0.0 A
0.0 Hz
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 IDENTIFICATION
3 INTERFACE
4 LOAD / SAVE AS
5 PASSWORD
ENT
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
4 LOAD / SAVE AS
4.1 OPEN
4.2 SAVE AS
Quick
Code
Term
RDY
Code
Quick
>>
<<
[4.1 OPEN]: To download one of the 4 files from the graphic display terminal to the drive.
4.2 SAVE AS: To download the current drive configuration to the graphic display terminal.
Term
RDY
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
4. LOAD/ SAVE AS
ENT
4.1 OPEN
4.2 SAVE AS
Code
<<
>>
Quick
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
4.1 OPEN
File 1
File 2
File 3
File 4
Code
Used
Blank
Blank
Blank
<<
>>
ENT
RDY
Term
0.0 A
See details on the next page
>>
Quick
ENT
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
0.0 Hz
DOWNLOAD GROUP
No
All
Drive Configuration
Motor parameters
Communication
Quick
Code
<<
RDY
Term
Note: Loading a
empty file is ineffectual
DOWNLOAD
PLEASE CHECK THAT
THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK
ESC = Cancel
ENT = Confirm
ENT
Quick
Code
RDY
File 1
File 2
File 3
File 4
Term
0.0 Hz
4.1 OPEN
Code
Saving in a
used file deleted and
replaces the ? in this file
configurations within
0.0 A
Used
Free
Free
Free
ENT
ENT
RDY
Term
0.0 A
0.0 Hz
DOWNLOAD
Downloading
Quick
...
RDY
Term
0.0 Hz
0.0 A
DOWNLOAD
DOWNLOAD COMPLETE
ENT or ESC to continue
Various messages may appear when the download is requested:
272
[TRANSFER IN PROGRESS]
[DONE]
Error messages if download not possible
[Motor parameters are NOT COMPATIBLE. Do you want to continue?]:: In this case the download is possible, but the parameters will be restricted.

Transfer Group
[No]:
[ALL]:
[Drive Configuration]:
[Communication]:
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS)

[Rated motor freq.] (FrS)
[PSI allign curr. max] (NCr)
[Rated motor speed] (nSP)
[Motor 1 Cosinus phi] (COS)
[Rated motor power] (nPr)
[Motor param choice] (MPC)
[Tune selection] (StUn)
[Mot. therm. current] (ItH)
[IR compensation] (UFr)
[Slip compensation] (SLP)
[Cust stator resist.] (rSA)
[Lfw] (LFA)
[Cust. rotor t const.] (trA)
[Nominal I sync.] (nCrS)
[Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS)
[Pole pairs] (PPnS)
[Syn. EMF constant] (PHS)
[Autotune L d-axis] (LdS)
[Autotune L q-axis] (LqS)
[Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS)
[Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS)
[Motor torque] (tqS)
[U1] (U1)
[F1] (F1)
[U2] (U2)
[F2] (F2)
[U3] (U3)
[F3] (F3)
[U4] (U4)
[F4] (F4)
[U5] (U5)
[F5] (F5)
Leave in [Expert] (EPr) callable parameters see "Network fault mgt. (CLL-)" on page 246.
[Mot. therm. current] (ItH)
of the menu [SETTINGS] (SEt-)
All parameters in the menu [COMMUNICATION]
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
[Motor param]:
No parameters
All parameters in all menus
The entire menu [1 DRIVE MENU] without [COMMUNICATION]
In the ? menu [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)
273
2.6 Access code (Cod-)

With graphic display terminal:
RDY
Term
0.0 A
0.0 Hz
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 IDENTIFICATION
3 INTERFACE
4 OPEN / SAVE AS
5 PASSWORD
Code
ENT
RUN
Term
0.0 A
+50.0 Hz
5 PASSWORD
:
State unlocked
Access code PIN 1 Out :
Access code PIN 2 Off :
:
Upload rights allowed
:
Download rights Drive locked
Quick
<<
Code
Quick
>>
= ENT
= ESC
PASSWORD
Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered in order to access a
protected configuration.
Example with graphic display terminal:
RDY
Term
+50.0 Hz
0.0 A
5 PASSWORD
State
PIN code 1
Upload rights
Download rights
Code
<<
:
:
:
:
Unlocked
Off
Permitted
Unlock. drv
>>
ENT
Term
RDY
+50.0 Hz
0.0 A
PIN code 1
Quick
9520
00
Min = OFF
Max. = 9999
<<
>>
Quick
The drive is unlocked, when the access code is set to [Unlocked] (OFF) (no access code) or when the right
code is entered. All menus are visible.
Before protecting the configuration with an access code, you must:
Define the [Upload rights] (ULr) and [Download rights] (dLr).
Make a careful note of the code and keep it in a safe place where you will always be able to find it.
The drive has 2 access codes, enabling 2 access levels to be set up.
PIN code 1 is a public unlock code: 6969.
PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to B&R Product Support. It is only callable in [Expert]
(EPr) mode.
There is only one usable access code, PIN1 or PIN2; the second must be in [Off] (OFF) position.
Note:
When the unlock code is entered, the user access code appears.
274

The following items are access-protected:
Code
COdCSt
LC
ULC
COd
COd2
ULr
ULr0
ULr1
dLr
dLr0
dLr1
dLr2
dLr3
Name / Description
Adjustment Range
Factory setting
[5 PASSWORD]
[State]
[Unlocked] (ULC)
Information parameter, cannot be modified.
[Locked] (LC): The drive is locked by a password.
[Unlocked] (ULC): The drive is locked by a password.
[PIN code 1]
[Off] (OFF) up to 9,999 [Off] (OFF)
1. Access code The [Off] (OFF) value shows that no access code has been set to [Unlocked] (ULC) . The [On] (On) value indicates that the drive
is protected, and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it. Once the correct code has been entered, it remains on the display and
the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected.
PIN code 1 is a public unlock code: 6969.
[PIN code 2]
[Off] (OFF) up to 9,999 [Off] (OFF)
This parameter is only callable in [Expert] (EPr) mode.
2. Access code The [Off] (OFF) value shows that no access code has been set to [Unlocked] (ULC) . The [On] (On) value indicates that the drive
is protected, and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it. Once the correct code has been entered, it remains on the display and
the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected.
PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to B&R Product Support.
If [PIN code 2] (COd2) is not set to [Off] (OFF) , only the [1.2 MONITORING](MOn-) menu is displayed. If [PIN code 2] (COd2) are set to [Off](OFF)
, all menus are shown.
If the display settings in the [3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] (dCF-) menu are altered and [PIN code 2] (COd2) is not set to [Off](OFF) , the configured
display will be maintained. If then [PIN code 2](COd2) is set to ff" (unlock drive), the configured display in the [3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] (dCF-)
menu is maintained.
[Upload rights]
[Permitted] (ULr0)
Read or copy the current configuration to the drive.
[Permitted] (ULr0): The current drive configuration can always be uploaded to the graphic display terminal or PC software.
[Not allowed] (ULr1): The current drive configuration can only be uploaded to the graphic display terminal or PC software, if the drive is not
protected by an access code or if the correct code has been entered.
[Download rights]
[Unlock. drv] (dLr1)
Writes the current configuration to the drive or downloads a configuration to the drive
[Locked drv] (dLr0): A configuration file can only be downloaded to the drive if the drive is protected by an access code, which is the same as
the access code for the configuration to be downloaded.
[Unlock. drv] (dLr1): A configuration file can be downloaded to the drive or a configuration in the drive can be modified if the drive is unlocked
(access code entered) or is not protected by an access code.
[Not allowed] (dLr2): Download not authorized.
[Lock/unlock] (dLr3): Combination of [Locked drv] (dLr0) and [Unlock. drv] (dLr1).
275
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Return to the factory settings (Menu [FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-)).

Via the [MY MENU] (MYMn-) you'll find the protected parameters and channels as well as the menu itself.
User-specific adjustment of the display (Menu ([3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] Menu (dCF-)).
Programming Manual Maintenance and diagnostics
3 Maintenance and diagnostics

3.1 Maintenance
Warranty limitation
The warranty is voided if anyone other than a B&R service employee opens the product.
Service
Caution!
Heed the following recommendations relating to environmental conditions (temperature, chemical substances, dust).
To optimize the drive's operation, the following measures are recommended.
Environment
Open the
product
Corrosion
Dust
Temperature
Cooling
Vibration
Affected components
Housing - control block (LED - displays)
Measures taken
Check over the drive visually.
Terminals - plugs - screws - EMC plate

Terminals - fans - ventilation holes
In the area of the product
Fan
Inspect and clean as necessary
Terminal connections
Interval
At least once per year
Inspect and correct as necessary

Check fan operation
Change fan
Every three to five years according to

operating conditions.
Check that the terminal screws are tightened to At least once per year
the
recommended torque.
Note:
Fan operation is dependent on the thermal state of the drive. It is possible for the drive to run without
the fan running.
Spares and repairs
Serviceable product: Please contact your local B&R branch office.
Longer storage.
Lengthy storage periods (over 2 years) can result in capacitor power loss.
Fan replacement.
A new fan can be ordered for purposes of maintaining the P74. See www.br-automation.com The installation
manual has information on fan replacement.
276
3.2 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Danger!
Read the safety notes in the chapter entitled "About this book" completely and carefully before performing the procedure explained in this section.
Error code
If the display does not light up, check the power supply to the drive.
The assignment of the "Fast stop" or "Freewheel" functions will prevent the drive starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not powered up. The ACOPOSinverter P74 then displays [Freewheel] (nSt) in free spindown and [Fast stop] (FSt) for fast stops. This is normal since these functions are active at zero so that
the drive will be stopped safely if there is a wire break.
Make sure that the input for run commands is activated according to the chosen control mode (parameter
[2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt), see "Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104.
If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at zero, the drive can only be started
up by sending a command for the opposite direction.see "Positioning via sensor or limit switch (LPO-)"
on page 211).
If the reference value or command channel is assigned to a communication bus, the drive displays the
message [Freewheel] (nSt) when it is first powered on, and it remains in stop mode until the communication
bus sends a command.
Code
dGt-
Name / Description
[DIAGNOSTICS]
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal. It displays faults and their cause in plain text and can be used to carry out
tests. see "[Other state] (SSt-)" on page 92.
Clearing the fault

In case of a permanent fault.
Disconnect all power supplies, including the power supply to the control section if applicable.
Lock all power disconnects in the open position.
Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge. (The LEDs on the drive can no longer display
that there is no DC bus voltage.)
Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA/+ and PC/ terminals to ensure that the voltage is
less than 42 V.
If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely, contact your local B&R representative. Do not repair
or operate the drive.
Determine the cause of the fault and remove it.
Restore power to the drive to confirm the detected fault has been rectified.
If the fault detected is known and resettable, the drive can be put back into service once the cause of the
fault has been removed.
By switching off the drive until the display disappears completely, then switching on again
Automatic in cases where the function [AUTOMATIC RESTART] Atr- see "Automatic restart (Atr-)"
on page 237.
Via a logic input or a control bit with assignment to the function [FAULT RESET] (rSt-) see "Fault
reset (rSt-)" on page 236.
By pressing the STOP/RESET key on the graphic display terminal's keyboard, when the active
channel command is HMI ([Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) see "Control parameters" on page 158).
277
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

Faults that require reconnection of the power supply after removal of the cause of the fault
The cause of the fault must be removed before resetting by turning off and then back on.
The faults ASF, brF, SOF, SPF and tnF can be removed peripherally via a logic input or a control bit (parameter
[Fault reset] (rSF), see "Fault reset (rSt-)" on page 236.
Fault
ASF
brF
Name
[Angle Error]
[Brake contact]
Probable cause
Remedy
Incorrect speed control setting for the
Check over the speed control parameters.
Check the motor phase and maximum allowable current for the
configuration [Sync mot.] (SYn), when
the reference approaches 0.
drive.
Check the feedback circuit and the brake logic control circuit
Check the mechanical state of the brake.
Check the condition of the brake liners.
CrF1
[Precharge]
Charging relay control fault or charging

resistor damaged
Switch drive off and then on again.

Check internal connections.
Contact Bernecker and Rainer product support
EEF1
[Control Eeprom]
Internal memory fault, power card
Check environment (electromagnetic compatibility).

Power off, power on, restore the factory settings.
EEF2
[Power Eeprom]
Internal memory fault, power card
Check the contactor and wiring

Check over the feedback current path.
FCF1
[Out. contact. stuck]
The output contactor remains closed

although the opening conditions have
been met
Check connecting cable between the drive and the motor and
check the motor's insulation.
HdF
[IGBT desaturation]
Short-circuit or grounding at the drive

output

Check connections.
Replace option card.
ILF
[Internal com. link]
Interruption of communication between

option card 1 and the drive.
InF1
[Rating error]
The power card is different from the

card stored
InF2
[Incompatible PB]
InF3
[Internal serial link]
InF4

Check connections.
Check the reference type of the power card.
The power card is incompatible with the

control block.
Check the reference of the power card and its compatibility.
Communication fault between the internal cards
Check internal connections.

[Internal-mftg zone]
Internal data inconsistent
Recalibrate the drive (through Bernecker and Rainer customer

service)
InF6
[Internal - fault option]
The option installed in the drive is not

recognized
Check the option type and compatibility.
InF9
[Internal-I measure]
The current measurements are incorrect
Replace the current sensor or the power card.

InFA
[Internal-mains circuit]
The input stage is not operating correctly
InFb
[Internal- th. sensor]
The drive temperature sensor is not operating correctly
Replace the drive's temperature sensor.

InFE
[internal- CPU ]
Internal microprocessor fault
Power off and reset.

OCF
[Overcurrent]
Parameters of menus [SETTINGS]

(SEt-) and [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)
are not correct.
Inertia or load too high
Mechanical locking
Check parameters.
Check dimensioning of motor/drive/load.
Check the state of the mechanism.
Reduce [Overcurrent] (CLI) value.
Raise clock frequency.
Anti-repeat time exceeded.

SS1 trigger threshold exceeded
Incorrect Configuration
Check safety function configuration.

Please contact the Support department at B&R.
SAFF
278
The brake feedback contact does not

match the brake logic control.
The brake does not stop the motor
quickly enough (detected by measuring
the speed on the "Impulse input").
[Safety fault]

[Motor short circuit]
Short-circuit or grounding at the drive

output
SCF3
[Ground short circuit]
Significant earth leakage current at the

drive output if several motors are connected in parallel
Reduce clock frequency.
Connect the motor chokes in series.
Check over speed control and brake configuration.
[Time to restart] (ttr) Increase time to restart. see "DRI-CONFFULL-SET - lbr to LOC" on page 113.
Check over parameters of motor, boosters, and stability.

Add brake resistance
Check dimensioning of motor/drive/load.
Check parameter settings for the function: [FREQUENCY METER] (FqF-), see "Frequency meter (FqF-)" on page 248Check
it over, insofar as it is configured.
Signal not present on impulse input,

when this input is used to measure rotational speed.
Check cabling at input and sensors.
Special motor or motor whose power is

not suitable for the drive
Motor not connected to the drive
Motor not stopped
Check that the motor/drive are compatible

Check that the motor is present during auto-tuning
If using an output contactor, make sure it is closed during the
measuring.
Check that the motor is stopped during auto-tuning.
SOF
[Overspeed]
Instability or to strongly moving load.
SPF
[Speed fdback loss]
tnF
[Auto tuning]
Connect the motor chokes in series.
Check over speed control and brake configuration.
[Time to restart] (ttr) Increase time to restart. see "DRI-CONFFULL-SET - lbr to LOC" on page 113.
Raise clock frequency.
279
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
SCF1

Fault detection codes that can be reset with the automatic restart function, after the cause has disappeared
These faults can also be removed by turning the unit off and then on again, or via a logic input or a control bit.
(parameters [Fault reset] (rSF) see "Fault reset (rSt-)" on page 236).
Fault
bLF
Name
[Brake control]
Probable cause
Remedy
Brake stroke current not attained
Check over the drive/motor connection.
Brake engage frequency threshold
Check motor windings.
Check these settings: [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) and [Brake re[Brake engage frequency] (bEn) only
controlled if the brake logic is assigned.
lease I Rev] (Ird), see "Brake logic control (bLC-)" on page 183.:
Use the recommended settings for: [Brake release freq.] (bEn) .
CnF
[Com. network]
Communication fault on communication

card
COF
[CANopen com.]
Communications interruption on the

CANopen bus.
EPF1
[External fault LI/Bit]
EPF2
[External fault com.]
FbES
FCF2

Check the wiring.
Check timeout.
Please contact the Support department at B&R.
Check the communication bus.

Check timeout.
See CANopen user manual
Fault triggered by an external device,

depending on user
Check the device that caused the fault and turn it back on.
Fault triggered by a communication network
Check the device that caused the fault and turn it back on.
[FB stop fly.]
Function blocks were stopped with the

motor running.
Check configuration of [FB Stop mode] (FbSM) ..:
[Out. contact. open]
The output contactor remains open

although the closing conditions have
been met

Check over the feedback current path.
LCF
[Input cont.]
The drive is not on, although the [Mains

V. time out] (LCt) has elapsed.

Check timeout.
Check the connection to power supply/contactor/drive
LFF3
[AI3 4-20mA loss]
Loss of the 4-20 mA reference on analog input AI2
Check the connection on the analog inputs.
ObF
[Overbraking]
Braking too strong or load line voltage

is too high
Raise deceleration time

Poss. build in a brake resistor
Functionality [Dec ramp adapt] (brA), see "Ramp type (rPt-)" on
page 168Activate it if it is compatible with the application
Check the line voltage
OHF
[Drive overheat]
Drive temperature too high
OLC
[Proc. overload flt]
OLF
[Motor overload]
OPF1
[1 output phase loss]
OPF2
[3 motor phase loss]
Check the motor load, the drive ventilation and the ambient temperature. Let the drive cool off before restarting.
Process overload
Check for the cause of the overload and remove it.

Check the parameters of the function: [Proc. overload flt] (OLd-),
see "Process overload (OLd-)" on page 253.
Triggered by excessive motor current
Check the setting of the motor thermal protection, check the motor load. Let the drive cool off before restarting.
Loss of one phase at drive output
Check connections between drive and motor.
Motor not connected or motor power too

low
Output contactor open
Instantaneous instability in the motor
current
OSF
280
[Mains overvoltage]
Line voltage too high

Disturbed mains supply
Check connections between drive and motor.

If using an output contactor, set these parameters: [Output
Phase Loss] (OPL) are set to [Output cut] (OAC), see "Motor
thermal protection (tHt-)" on page 239..
Test on a low power motor or without a motor: In the factory
settings, motor phase failure detection is active. [Output Phase
Loss] (OPL) = [Yes] (YES). To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment, without having to use a motor with the same
rating as the drive (in particular for high power drives), deactivate
motor phase loss detection: [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [No]
(nO), see "Motor thermal protection (tHt-)" on page 239.
Check and optimize the following parameters: [IR compensation]
(UFr) see "Configuration parameters" on page 106, [Rated motor volt.] (UnS) and [Rated mot. current] (nCr), see "Simply start
menu (SIM-)" on page 104, and [Auto tuning] (tUn), see "Simply
start menu (SIM-)" on page 104.
Check line voltage
OtFL
[LI6=PTC overheat]
Overheating of PTC probes detected on

input LI6
Check load and rating of motor

Inspect the motor's ventilation system.
Let the drive cool off before restarting.
Inspect the type and state of the PTC probes.
PtFL
[LI6=PTC overheat]
PTC probes on input LI6 open or shortcircuited
Check PTC probes and their motor/drive/wiring
SCF4
[IGBT short circuit]
Power component fault
SCF5
[Motor short circuit]
Short-circuit at drive output
SLF1
[Modbus com.]
Communication disruption on Modbus

bus
Check the communication bus.

Check timeout.
See modbus user manual.
SLF2
[PC com.]
Communication interruption with PC

software
Check over the PC, software, and connection cables.

Check timeout.
SLF3
[PC com.]
Communication with the graphic display

terminal
Check terminal connections

Check timeout.
SSF
[Torque/current lim]
Switch to torque limitation
Look for signs of an eventual mechanical problem

Check the parameters of [TORQUE LIMITATION] (tOL-), see
"Torque limitation (tOL-)" on page 204and the parameters from
[TORQUE LIM. DETECT.] (tId-), see "Network fault mgt. (CLL-)"
on page 246.:
tJF
[IGBT overheat]
Drive overheat
Check dimensioning of load/ motor/ drive.

Let the drive cool off before restarting.
ULF
[Proc. underload Flt]
Process underload
Check for the cause of the overload and remove it.

Check the parameters of the function: [PROCESS UNDERLOAD] ULd-, see "Process underload (ULd-)" on page 252.
281
Chapter 2
Programming Manual

Fault that disappears as soon as the cause is removed.
Fault
CFF
Name
[Incorrect config.]
Probable cause
Remedy
Option card changed or removed
Check that there are no card errors.
Control card replaced by a control card
In the event of the option card being changed/removed deliberconfigured on a drive with a different ratately, see the remarks below
Check that there are no card errors.
ing
The current configuration is inconsis In the event of the option card being changed/removed delibertent
ately, see the remarks below
Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup configuration, if
it is valid (see "Factory setting (FCS-)" on page 100).
CFI
CFI2
[Invalid config.]
Invalid configuration The configuration

loaded in the drive via the bus or communication network is inconsistent.
Check the last loaded configuration

Load a compatible configuration
CSF
[Ch. Sw. fault]
Switch to invalid channels
Check the function parameters.
dLF
[Dynamic load fault]
Abnormal load variation
Check that the load is not blocked by an obstacle

Removal of a run command causes a reset
FbE
[FB fault]
Function block fault
See [FB fault] (FbFt).
HCF
[Cards pairing]
Functionality [CARDS PAIRING] PPI-,

see "Card pairing (PPI-)" on page
251was configured and a drive card
was changed.
In the event of a card error, reinsert the original card

Confirm the configuration by entering [Pairing password] PPI if
the card was purposely altered.
PHF
[Input phase loss]
Drive incorrectly supplied or a fuse

blown
Failure of one phase
3-phase ACOPOSinverter P74 used on
a single-phase line supply
Unbalanced load. This safety function
works only under load.
Check the power connection and the fuses.

Use a 3-phase line supply.
Deactivate the fault by [Input phase loss] (IPL) = [No] (nO), see
"Simply start menu (SIM-)" on page 104 .
Line supply too low

Transient voltage dip
Check line voltage and the parameters in [UNDERVOLTAGE

MGT] (USb-), see "Stop thermal alarm (SAt-) " on page 242.:
USF
[Undervoltage]
Option card changed or removed

When an option card is removed or replaced by another, the drive locks in [Incorrect config.] (CFF) at power-on.
If the card was purposely exchanged or removed, this fault can be deleted by double-tapping the ENT key. This
effects the restoring of all factory settings (see "Factory setting (FCS-)" on page 100) for the card-specific parameter
groups. These are as follows:
Card replaced by a card of the same type
Communication cards: only the parameters that are specific to communication cards
Change of the control part
If one control block is replaced by another that was configured for a different type of drive, the drive locks in fault
mode [Incorrect config.] (CFF) at power-on. If the control block was purposely exchanged, the fault can be deleted
by double-tapping the ENT key, which restores the settings to their factory pre-sets..
282

Faults, which are shown on the external display terminal.
InIt
COM.E
(1)
A-17
(1)
CLr
(1)
dEU.E
(1)
rOM.E
(1)
rAM.E
(1)
CPU.E
(1)
(1)
Name
[Initialization in progress]
Description
Micro control is initialized
Searching for communications configuration.
[Communication error]
Timeout fault (50 ms)
This message is displayed after 20 communication attempts.
[Alarm button]
A key was pressed for longer than f10 seconds.
The connection to the simulation tool was lost.
The simulation tool can be reactivated by pressing any key.
[Confirmation of detected fault This fault is displayed after the STOP key is pressed when the external display terminal is the active command
reset]
channel.
[Drive disparity]
The drive brand is not the same as the external display terminal.
[ROM anomaly]
The checksum calculation revealed a ROM abnormality in the external display terminal.
[RAM anomaly]
A RAM abnormality was detected in the external display terminal.
[Other detected faults]
Additional faults.
Blinking
283
Chapter 2
Programming Manual
Code
Common DC bus Introduction
Chapter 3 Common DC bus

1 Introduction
Whether to produce accelerated or constant motion, a drive system requires energy that must be supplied to the
system. By retarding a motion, a motor can function as a generator. A large part of the kinetic energy is resupplied
to the system as electrical energy.
Since electrical energy can only be stored in limited quantities in drive amplifiers, the extra energy in a single drive
amplifier is converted to thermal energy by a brake resistor.
Usefulness of the electrical energy
When an application requires several drive systems, the resupplied energy can be used to power other motors. In
countercyclical operations, where one motor slows while another simultaneously accelerates, resupplied energy
is used very efficiently. The energy exchange can succeed if the DC bus is connected to the drive amplifier.
284
Common DC bus Before you begin - Safety information
2 Before you begin - Safety information

The information in this document is a supplement to the manuals. First, read and understand the manuals for the
products in your application.
2.1 Basic information
Danger!
Only specialists who have thoroughly read and understood the content of this and all other applicable manuals should undertake any work on this product. Installation, adjustment, repairs,
and maintenance must by performed by qualified personnel only.
The builder is responsible for obtaining all necessary permits and complying with all national
and local codes and regulations with respect to grounding the drive system.
Many components of the product, including circuit boards, work with line power. DO NOT
TOUCH. Use only electrically insulated tools.
Do not touch uninsulated parts or contacts while under voltage.
The motor produces voltage when the shaft is turned. Secure the motor shaft against accidental
drive before working on any part of the system.
AC volts in the motor cable can over-couple to unused conductors. Insulate unused wires at
both ends of the motor cable.
Do not short circuit DC bus and DC bus capacitors.
Before working on the drive system:
Make all connections while disconnected from the power supply; including possible
external control signals.
Mark all switches "DO NOT TURN ON".
Secure all switches against accidental power-on.
Wait 15 minutes (to give DC bus capacitors time to discharge). Measure the voltage on
the DC bus according to the chapter titled "Voltage measurements on the DC bus", and
verify that it is < 42 VDC. The DC bus LED by itself does not constitute verification of
discharge of the DC bus voltage.
Install and close all covers before restoring power.
Warning!
Loss of controller function.
When designing the control system, the builder must take into account potential control path
failures , and make adequate provisions to protect critical functions in such a way that both
during and after a control path failure, conditions remain safe. Examples of critical control functions: EMERGENCY STOP, limit of travel, power loss, and restarts
Separate or redundant control paths must be present for critical functions.
Plant controls can include communication links. The builder must anticipate and take into consideration the potential consequences of network lag-time or outages in the context of taking
the control system "on-line".
Observe all accident prevention rules as well as all relevant safety specifications. 2)
Every facility that uses the product described in this manual must be thoroughly examined on
the correct function of the system, before bringing it into operation.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in death or serious injury.
2)
For USA: see NEMA ICS 1.1 (newest edition), Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control and NEMA ICS 7.1
(newest edition), Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems.
285
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
Danger of electric shock, explosion, or arc flash.
Common DC bus Before you begin - Safety information
2.2 Voltage measurement at the DC bus

Before working on the product, all connections to the power supply must be switched off.
Danger!
Danger of electric shock, explosion, or arc flash.
This measurement should only be performed by specialists who have read and understand the
chapter titled "Before you begin - Safety information".
Voltage at the DC bus can exceed 800 VDC. Use an appropriately rated voltmeter for the measurement.
Procedure:
Switch off all connections to the power supply.

Wait 15 minutes (to allow the DC bus capacitors time to discharge).
Measure the DC bus voltage between the DC bus terminals and verify that it is < 42 VDC.
If the DC bus capacitors do not properly discharge, contact your local B&R representative. Do not attempt
to repair the product yourself, and do not put it into operation.
The DC bus LED by itself does not constitute verification of discharge of the DC bus voltage.
2.3 Standards and terminology

Technical concepts, terminology, and descriptions in this manual should be representative of the terms and definitions used in the respective standards and norms.
In the domain of drive technology, these include terms such as "safety function", "secure state", "fault", "fault reset",
"outage", "error", "error message", "warning", "warning message", etc.
Among the relevant standards are:
IEC 61800 Series: "Electrical drive systems with adjustable speed"
IEC 61158 Series: "Digital data communication in control technology - Field bus for industrial control systems"
IEC 61784 Series: "Industrial communications networks - Profile"
IEC 61508 Series: "Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety related systems"
286
Common DC bus Technical data
3 Technical data
3.1 Drive amplifier data
3.1.1 Permissible device types for a shared/common DC bus
The DC bus of the following single-phase driver amplifiers can be connected:
8I74S200018.01P-1
8I74S200037.01P-1
8I74S200055.01P-1
8I74S200075.01P-1
8I74S200110.01P-1
8I74S200150.01P-1
8I74S200220.01P-1
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
The DC bus of the following three-phase driver amplifiers can be connected:
8I74T400037.01P-1
8I74T400055.01P-1
8I74T400075.01P-1
8I74T400110.01P-1
8I74T400150.01P-1
8I74T400220.01P-1
8I74T400300.01P-1
8I74T400400.01P-1
8I74T400550.01P-1
8I74T400750.01P-1
8I74T401100.01P-1
8I74T401500.01P-1
287

3.1.2 ACOPOSinverter P74 Data DC Bus
ACOPOSinverter P74 - 1-phase 200-240V
8I74...(1 )
Nominal voltage (1 )
Nominal voltage DC bus
Undervoltage limit
Overvoltage limit
Maximum continuous power output (DC
bus)
Maximum continuous current (DC bus)
8I74...(1)
Capacity of internal capacitors
External braking resistance minimum
Parameter dCCC [DC Bus compat.] = NO
(Default value) 1)
Power-on voltage braking resistance
Energy absorption of internal capacitors
Evar at nominal 200 V
Energy absorption of internal capacitors
Evar at nominal 240 V
[VAC]
[V]
[V]
[V]
[kW]
S200018.01P-1
200
240
283
339
200
200
415
415
0.3
0.3
S200037.01P-1
200
240
283
339
200
200
415
415
0.58
0.58
S200055.01P-1
200
240
283
339
200
200
415
415
0.84
0.84
S200075.01P-1
200
240
283
339
200
200
415
415
1.1
1.1
[A]
3.4
6.0
7.9
10.1
[F]
[]
S200018.01P-1
220
40
S200037.01P-1
440
40
S200055.01P-1
880
40
S200075.01P-1
880
[V]
[Ws]
395
8
395
17
395
33
395
33
[Ws]
18
18
2.8
6.7
8.5
Table 6: Data for single-phase drive amplifier 8I74S2000xx.01P-1

1)
Parameter dCCC [DC bus compat.] has no effect on single-phase drive amplifiers
8I74...(1)
Undervoltage limit
Overvoltage limit
Maximum continuous power output (DC bus)
[VAC]
[V]
[V]
[V]
[kW]
[A]
S200110.01P-1
200
240
283
339
200
200
415
415
1.56
1.56
13.6
11.5
S200150.01P-1
200
240
283
339
200
200
415
415
2.08
2.08
17.6
14.8
S200220.01P-1
200
240
283
339
200
200
415
415
2.9
2.9
23.9
20.1
8I74...(1 )
[F]
[]
S200110.01P-1
1680
27
S200150.01P-1
1680
27
S200220.01P-1
2240
25
Parameter dCCC [DC Bus compat.] = NO (Default value) 1)

Energy absorption of internal capacitors Evar at nominal 200 V
[V]
[Ws]
[Ws]
395
64
35
395
64
35
395
85
46
Table 7: Data for single-phase drive amplifiers 8I74T400xx0.01P-1

1)
288
Parameter dCCC [DC bus compat.] has no effect on single-phase drive amplifiers

ACOPOSinverter P74 - 3-phase 380-500V
8I743)
Parameter dCCC [DC Bus compat.] = NO (Default value)
820var at nominal 380 V
[VAC]
[V]
[V]
[V]
[kW]
T400037.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
0.6
0.6
T400055.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
0.84
0.84
T400075.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
1.1
1.1
T400110.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
1.6
1.6
T400150.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
2.1
2.1
[A]
2.5
3.4
4.4
6.1
8.0
[F]
[]
T400037.01P-1
110
80
T400055.01P-1
220
80
T400075.01P-1
220
80
T400110.01P-1
220
54
T400150.01P-1
220
54
[V]
820
820
820
820
820
[Ws]
[Ws]
21
9
42
19
42
19
42
19
42
19
780
780
780
780
780
18
35
35
35
35
12
12
12
12
Parameter
dCCC [DC Bus compat.] = Main or
dCCC [DC Bus compat.] = bus
(Reduced power-on voltage)
Power-on voltage braking resis[V]
tance
Energy absorption of internal ca[Ws]
pacitors Evar at nominal 380 V
Energy absorption of internal ca[Ws]
pacitors Evar at nominal 500 V
2.0
2.6
3.4
4.6
6.0
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
8I743)
Undervoltage limit
Overvoltage limit
Maximum continuous power output
(DC bus)
Maximum continuous current (DC
bus)
Table 8: Data for three-phase drive amplifiers 8I74T4000xx.01P-1/ 8I74S200xx0.01P-1
289

8I743)
Undervoltage limit
Overvoltage limit
Maximum continuous power output
(DC bus)
Maximum continuous current (DC
bus)
8I743)
Parameter
dCCC [DC Bus compat.] = bus (reduced power-on voltage)
[VAC]
[V]
[V]
[V]
[kW]
T400220.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
2.9
2.9
T400300.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
3.9
3.9
T400400.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
5.07
5.07
T400550.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
6.8
6.8
8I74T400750.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
9.1
9.1
[A]
10.6
13.6
16.8
25.2
32.2
[F]
[]
T400220.01P-1
280
54
T400300.01P-1
390
54
T400400.01P-1
550
36
T400550.01P-1
780
27
8I74T400750.01P-1
1110
27
[V]
820
820
820
820
820
[Ws]
54
75
106
150
213
[Ws]
24
34
47
67
96
[V]
780
780
780
780
780
[Ws]
45
62
88
125
178
[Ws]
15
21
30
42
60
8.1
10.3
12.9
19.4
24.8
Table 9: Data for three-phase drive amplifiers 8I74T400xxx.01P-1
290
8I743)
Undervoltage limit
Overvoltage limit
Maximum continuous power output (DC bus)
[VAC]
[V]
[V]
[V]
[kW]
[A]
T401100.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
12.9
12.9
43.8
33.6
T401500.01P-1
380
500
537
707
390
390
820
820
17.2
17.2
56.7
43.5
8I743)
[F]
[]
T401100.01P-1
1410
16
T401500.01P-1
1660
16

[V]
[Ws]
[Ws]
820
271
122
820
319
143
Parameter
dCCC [DC Bus compat.] = bus (reduced power-on voltage)
[V]
[Ws]
[Ws]
780
226
77
780
266
90
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
Table 10: Data for three-phase drive amplifiers 8I74T401xxx.01P-1
291
3.2 Fuses
The common DC busing of several drive amplifiers can be realized in many different ways; see see "Project development" on page 295.
Depending on the application, you will need a mains fuse and a fuse for the DC bus.
3.2.1 Mains fuse
Choose your fuse size based on the power of the drive amplifier and the gauge/cross-sectional area of the conductor. Observe the guidelines in the chapter titled "Installation instructions".
The maximum allowable fuse values must be used.
3.2.1.1 Maximum allowable values of the mains fuses
Maximum fuse value for single-phase drive amplifiers1):
25 [A]
Maximum fuse value for three-phase drive amplifiers1):
32 [A]
1)
Use only the drive amplifiers listed in chapter 3.31 "Data for drive amplifiers"
3.2.2 Fuse for DC Bus

Use appropriate fuses for the common DC bus. Information on DC bus voltage and maximum DC bus continuous
current see "Drive amplifier data" on page 287.
Fuses for the DC bus see "DC fuses" on page 317.
Choose your fuse size as small as possible based on the power of the drive amplifier and the gauge/cross-sectional
area of the conductor.
The maximum permissible fuse sizes must be maintained.
Example
One drive amplifier has a maximum continuous current via the DC bus of 6 A. For the DC bus fuses for this drive
amplifier, 10 A fuses are chosen.
3.2.2.1 Maximum allowable values for fuses for the DC bus
Maximum value of fuses for the DC bus for single phase drive amplifiers 1:
25 [A]
Maximum value of fuses for the DC bus for three-phase drive amplifiers 1:
32 [A]
1)
292
Values only for the types listed in chapter 3.31 "Data for drive amplifiers"
3.3 Cable for DC bus

Minimum requirement for a cable for the common/shared DC-bus
A cable for the common DC bus must possess the following characteristics.
Shielding:
Twisted pair:
Cables:
maximum cable length of a connection
cable for DC bus
Special features:
Shielded for cable lengths > 0.2 m

Twisted pair for cable lengths > 0.2 m
two-wire, shielded
3m
Insulation must be designed for DC

bus voltage.
Conductor cross-sectional area corresponding to the calculated current, but
at least 2*6 mm2 (2* AWG 10).
Note:
The connection of fuses for the DC bus must be designed for the entire DC bus current of all drive
amplifiers. Consider the worst case scenario (e.g., Emerg stop), and choose an appropriate gauge/
cross-sectional area.
Cable properties for DCBus 8I0XC003.415-1
Shielding:
Twisted pair:
Cables:
Shielded
Twisted pair
2* 6 mm2 (2* AWG 10)
Table 12: Cable properties for 8I0XC003.415-1
Crimpkontakt 8I0XC004.400-1
Crimpkontakt
Connection cross section
[mm2]
3 ... 6
(AWG12 ... AWG10)
Table 13: Properties of Crimpkontakt
293
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
Table 11: DC bus cable requirements
3.4 Braking resistors

The minimum values for external brake resistance given in the list of drive amplifiers must not be undershot.
ACOPOSinverter P74
The ACOPOSinverter P74 drive amplifiers have a connection for an external brake resistor. Depending on the
dynamics of the application, one or more external brake resistors might have to be attached.
3.4.1 External brake resistors (Acces.)
8I0BR...
Resistance value
continuous power PBR
Maximum power-on duration at 115 V / 230 V
Peak power at 115 V / 230 V
Max peak energy at 115 V / 230 V ECR
Maximum power-on duration at 400 V
Peak power at 400 V
Max peak energy at 400 V ECR
Protection class
UL-certified (File nr.)
[]
[W]
[s]
[kW]
[Ws]
[s]
[kW]
[Ws]
100,000-1
100
200
060,000-1
60
400
028,000-1
28
750
IP20
E221095
IP20
E221095
IP20
E221095
015,000-1
15
2500
3.5
18.5
43100
0.65
60.8
26500
IP20
E221095
010,000-1
10
2500
1.98
12.3
36500
0.37
0.37
22500
IP20
E221095
3.5 Line filter

The value of the fuse before the common external line filter must not be greater than the nominal current of the
external line filter.
Note:
Three-phase line filters have no connection for the neutral conductor, and so are only permitted for
three-phase drives.
You can find information about external line filters in the chapter titled Installation instructions.
3.6 Mains choke

If one drive amplifier requires a mains choke, then all drive amplifiers linked via the DC bus must be outfitted with
mains chokes.
The value of the fuse before the common mains choke must not be greater than the rated current of the mains
choke.
You can find information about mains chokes in the chapter titled Installation instructions.
294
Common DC bus Project development
4 Project development
In this chapter you will find information on planning a project to link the DC Bus to several drive amplifiers .
The information in the "Installation instructions" chapter must also be taken into account.
Warning!
Destruction of property and loss of the control system
Incorrect use of the parallel switches of the DC bus can destroy the drive amplifiers immediately or
over time.
Pay careful attention to the instructions for using the parallel circuit of the DC bus.
4.1 Special notes: EMC - Electromagnetic Compatibility

When drive amplifiers share a common DC bus, there are a few things to be aware of regarding EMC:
Keep the DC bus cables as short as possible.
For any cable over 0.2 m in length, shielded cable must be used. In case of screened DC-Bus fix the cable
screen over a large area on the screen mounting.
4.2 Mounting spacing

Be sure to leave enough space for the DC bus cable when determining mounting clearances.
4.3 Energy equation:

In order to estimate the effect of a planned DC-Bus assemblage of boosters, the positioning of an energy balance
of individual attributes over a movement cycle is helpful. Each movement cycle includes the phases acceleration,
similar movement and delay.
The energy discharged at the time of delay can be used with a common DC-Bus by other boosters. Excessive
energy must be accepted over brake resistance.
295
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or material damages.

4.3.1 Energy acceptance
The energy acceptance is influenced by following points:
DC-Bus capacitors Evar in Booster

Electrical loss of drive system Eel
Mechanical loss of equipment and drive system Emech
Brake resistance EB
The energy Evar depends quadratically on the difference between the DCBus voltage before the delay and reaction
point.
The energy acceptance by the DC-Bus capacitors is minimum, at highest network voltage. For the calculation use
the values of highest network voltage.
Electrical loss Eel
The electrical loss Eel of drive can be estimated from the peak output of the booster. In case of a typical degree of
efficiency of 90% the maximum loss performance is approximately 10% of peak output. If in case of delay a lower
current is flowing, the loss performance reduces accordingly.
Mechanical loss Emech
The mechanical loss results from the friction, which occurs at the time of operation of equipment. The mechanical
loss is negligible, if the equipment requires longer time for idleness than required without propulsive force, in which
the equipment should be braked. The mechanical loss can be calculated from the load moment and the speed,
from which the engine must come to idleness.
Braking resistors
Two parameters are authoritative for the energy acceptance of a brake resistance.
The continuous output PPR shows, how much energy how much energy can be conducted in the long run,
without overloading the brake resistance.
The maximum energy ECR restricts the short term expendable, higher performance.
296

Dimensioning
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
Figure 1: Movement cycle: Profile for energy consideration
This profile with the speed (v) and engine phase current (I) is also used in case of dimensioning of engine and
brake resistance. The segment to be considered, in which the movement is delayed, is identified with Di .
Calculation of energy in case of constant delay:
For this the total torque of inertia (Jt) should be known.
For Jt following is valid:
Jt = Jm + Jc
Jm: Motor torque of inertia with or without holding brake
Jc: Load inertia
Energy for every delay segment is calculated as follows:
2
Units: Ei in Ws (Watt seconds), Jt in kgm2, in wheel and ni in min-1. The energy acceptance Evar of device (without
consideration of an internal or external brake resistance) can be taken from the technical data.
In the further calculation consider only the segments Di, whose energy Ei exceeds the energy acceptance of devices
(see "Braking resistors" on page 294). This additional energy EDi should be discharged over the brake resistance
(internal or external).
Calculation of EDi takes place with the formula:
EDi = Ei - Evar (in Ws)
The continuous output Pc is calculated for each machine cycle:
Pc =
E Di
Cycle time
Units: Pc in [W], EDi in [Ws] and cycle time T in [s]

With the help of this calculation you can select the required brake resistance.
4.4 Prerequisites for the common DC-Bus

Only ACOPOS inverter P74 should be connected to each other, see "Permissible device types for a shared/common DC bus" on page 287.
297

The following conditions must be adhered to:
Only Booster with similar nominal voltage should be connected with a common DC-Bus.
Only Booster with similar phase number should be connected with a common DC-Bus. Connect only threephase Booster with three-phase Boosters or sigle-phase Booster with sigle-phase booster.
One phase Booster can be only connected to the same Phase of network supply.
Use only DC-Bus-Cable with the characteristics, see "Cable for DC bus" on page 293.
4.5 Structure of a common DC-Bus

A common DC-Bus can be structured depending upon requirement. Following concepts are described:
Common network security

Separate Network security
DC-Supply over a Booster
DC-Supply over DC-Network portion
4.5.1 Common network securities

All Boosters are connected over common network securities with the network supply.
Conditions
For the DC-Bus-connection of Boosters with common network securities following conditions must be fulfilled:
All Boosters have common network securities.
One phase Booster 8I74S200xxx.01P-1
Three phase Booster 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1
Maximum current acceptance of all connected Maximum current acceptance of all connected
Booster: 25 A.
Booster: 32 A.
The current of all booster provided over the DC-Bus should not exceed the maximum values given in the
following table even through energy recovery. If the following maximum values are exceeded, DC-security
must be used.
One phase Booster 8I74S200xxx.01P-1
Maximum DC-Bus-Current: 25 A.
Three phase Booster 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1

Maximum DC-Bus-Current: 32 A.
Only Booster with similar phase number can be connected with the common DC-Bus. Connect only threephase Booster with three-phase Boosters or sigle-phase Booster with sigle-phase booster.
Only Booster with similar nominal voltage can be connected with a common DC-Bus.
Booster 8I74S200xxx.01P-1: Connect the sigle-phase Booster exclusively to the same phase.
Activate on each Booster the Network phase monitoring.
Activate on each device the Parameter dCCC [DC-Bus compat.]
The performance of booster connected wi9th a common DC-Bus can vary maximum by one level in the
continuous output. The maximum performance of Booster see "Drive amplifier data" on page 287.
Set the type of DC-bus connection in parameter dCCM [DC-Bus chaining]. This parameter can require
further conditions, which can be taken from chapter Programming instructions.
298

Single-phase drive amplifiers
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
Joint mains fuse: 8I74S200xxx.01P-1
Figure 2: Joint mains fuse: DC-Bus for single-phase drive amplifiers
Three-phase drive amplifiers

Joint mains fuse: 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1
Figure 3: Joint mains fuse: DC-Bus for three-phase drive amplifiers
299

4.5.2 Separate mains fuse
Each drive amplifier is connected to the mains supply by own mains fuses.
Conditions
For the DC-Bus-connection of drive amplifiers with separate mains fuses, the following conditions have to be met:
Each drive amplifier requires its own mains fuses, see see "Mains fuse" on page 292.
For each drive amplifier, the fuses for the DC-Bus have to be used. Permitted safety values see "Fuse for
DC Bus" on page 292.
Only drive amplifiers with an equal number of phases may be connected to a joint DC-Bus. Connect only
three-phase drive amplifiers to three-phase drive amplifiers or single-phase drive amplifiers to single-phase
drive amplifiers.
Only drive amplifiers with an equal nominal voltage may be connected to a joint DC-Bus.
Drive amplifier 8I74S200xxx.01P-1 : Connect single-phase drive amplifier only to an equal phase.
Activate the mains phase monitoring at each drive amplifier.
The output of drive amplifiers connected to one joint DC-Bus may only differ in maximally one level regarding the continuous output The maximum output of the drive amplifiers see "Drive amplifier data" on page
287.
Set the type of DC-Bus-connection in the parameter dCCM [DC-Bus chaining]. This parameter can require
further conditions, which can be taken from chapter Programming instructions.
Note:
The connection of the fuses for the DC-Bus must be construed for the complete power of the DC-Bus
of all drive amplifiers. Consider the critical case of application (for example EMERGENCY STOP) and
select a corresponding wire cross section.
300

Single-phase drive amplifier
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
Separate mains fuse: 8I74S200xxx.01P-1
Figure 4: Separate mains fuse: DC-Bus for single-phase drive amplifiers
Three-phase drive amplifiers

Separate mains fuse: 8I74T40xxxx.01P-1
Figure 5: Separate mains fuse: DC-Bus for three-phase drive amplifiers
301

4.5.3 DC-supply via one drive amplifier
The drive amplifiers are supplied by a correspondingly huge drive amplifier via the DC-Bus.
Conditions
For the DC-Bus-connection of drive amplifiers to a supplying drive amplifier, the following conditions have to be met:
Fuses have to be used for the DC-Bus. The permitted safety values see "Fuse for DC Bus" on page 292.
Only drive amplifiers with an equal number of phases may be connected to a joint DC-Bus. Connect only
three-phase drive amplifiers to three-phase drive amplifiers or single-phase drive amplifiers to single-phase
drive amplifiers.
Only drive amplifiers with an equal nominal voltage may be connected to a joint DC-Bus.
Set in the parameters dCCM [DC Bus chaining], which is a type of DC-bus connection. This parameter can
require further conditions, which can be taken from chapter Programming instructions.
Note:
The connection of the fuses for the DC-Bus must be construed for the complete power of the DC-Bus
of all drive amplifiers. Consider the critical case of application (for example EMERGENCY STOP) and
select a corresponding wire cross section.
302

DC-supply via one drive amplifier
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
For each drive amplifier, fuses for the DC-Bus have to be used. The permitted safety values see "Fuse for DC
Bus" on page 292.
Figure 6: One drive amplifier supplies further drive amplifiers via the DCBus. For each drive amplifier, the fuses for the DC-Bus have to be used.
Special case
If the additional condition has been met, fuses between the supplying drive amplifier and the supplied DC-Bus
are sufficient:
The power of all drive amplifiers supplied by the DC-Bus does not exceed the values listed in the following
table
Single-phase drive amplifier
8I74S200xxx.01P-1
Maximum power consumption of all connected
drive amplifiers: 25 A.
Maximum fuse value of the fuse for the DCBus: 25 A.
Maximum DC-Bus power: 25 A.
Three-phase drive amplifier

8I74T40xxxx.01P-1
Maximum power consumption of all connected
drive amplifiers: 32 A.
Maximum fuse value of the fuse for the DCBus: 32 A.
Maximum DC-Bus power: 32 A.
Figure 7: One drive amplifier supplies further drive amplifiers via the DC-Bus. In case of corresponding DC-Bus
power, fuses have only to be used between the supplying drive amplifier and the supplied DC-Bus for the DC-Bus.
303

4.5.4 DC-supply via DC power supply unit
The drive amplifiers are supplied by a DC power supply unit via the DC-Bus.
Conditions
For the DC-Bus-connection of drive amplifiers by means of a supplying DC power supply unit, the following conditions have to be met:
Fuses have to be used for the DC-Bus. The allowable fuse values. see "Fuse for DC Bus" on page 292.
Only drive amplifiers with the same number of phases may be connected to a common DC bus. Connect
only three-phase drive amplifiers with three-phase drive amplifiers or single phase drive amplifiers with
single-phase drive amplifiers.
Only drive amplifiers with the same rated voltage may be connected to a common DC bus.
The supplying DC power supply must be selected according to the supplied power amplifiers.
Set in the parameters dCCM [DC Bus chaining], which is a type of DC-bus connection. This parameter
may require additional conditions, which can be found in the "Programming Guide"
Note:
The connection of the fuses for the DC bus must be designed for the entire DC bus power of all drive
amplifiers. Consider the most critical application case (e.g. emergency stop) and select a corresponding cross section area.
304
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
For each drive amplifier, fuses for the DC bus must be used. The allowable fuse values. see "Fuse for DC Bus"
on page 292.
Figure 8: A DC power supply provides additional drive amplifiers via the

DC bus. For every drive amplifier, fuses for the DC bus must be used.
4.6 Accessories for common DC bus

4.6.1 Braking resistors
Excess energy in the common DC bus must be received by braking resistors Depending on the application, one
or more braking resistors are connected.
Note:
If drive amplifiers are connected with a different nominal power via the DC bus, you need to connect
external braking resistors to the drive amplifiers with the highest rated output. Refer to the manual
for each product
305

4.6.1.1 Sizing the braking resistor
Warning!
Unbraked motor
An insufficient braking resistor causes overvoltage on the DC bus and shuts down the amplifier. The
motor is no longer actively braked.
Make sure that the brake resistor is sufficiently dimensioned.
Check the setting of the parameters for the braking resistor
Check the l2t-value in the critical condition by trial operation. With a l2value of over 100% the
device switches off.
Consider the following when calculating and testing that at higher mains voltages less braking
energy can be stored in the capacitors of the DC bus.
Warning!
Hot surfaces
The braking resistor may heat up to over 250 C (482 F)
Avoid touching the hot braking resistor.

Do not place flammable or heat-sensitive components in the vicinity of the braking resistor.
Provide good heat dissipation.
Check the temperature of the braking resistor in critical condition by trial operation.
Braking resistors are required for dynamic applications. During the delay, kinetic energy in the motor is converted
into electrical energy. The electric power increases the voltage of the DC bus. The braking resistor is connected
at a predetermined threshold value. Electrical energy is converted into heat in the brake resistor. If high dynamic
braking is required, the braking resistor must be well adapted to the system
Dimensioning see "Energy equation:" on page 295.
306

External braking resistor
An external braking resistor is required for applications in which the brake power is greater than the energy which
can be absorbed by the driving amplifiers to the common DC bus. Remember when calculating the braking energy
the extreme applications of their uses.
Example: With an emergency stop all drive amplifiers are braked simultaneously, the braking energy must be
absorbed by the braking resistors.
Calculation of external brake resistor:
The size of an external braking resistor is determined by the required peak and continuous power, with which the
braking resistor can be used.
R = U / Pmax
U:
Pmax:
R:
Switching threshold [V]

required peak power [W]
Resistance [Ohm]
If two or more braking resistors are connected on one drive amplifier, consider the following criteria:
The braking resistors must be connected in rows or in series, so that the required resistance value is
achieved Turn on only equal resistances in rows to charge all braking resistors evenly.
The total resistance of all external braking resistors connected to a drive amplifier must not fall below a
lower limit. see "Braking resistors" on page 294.
The continuous output of the interconnected brake resistor network must be calculated. The result must
be greater than or equal to the actually required continuous power
Use only resistors, which are specified as braking resistors. Suitable braking resistors see "Braking resistors" on
page 294.
Connection of braking resistor:
With the accessories listed for the external braking resistors, there is an information sheet containing further details
on mounting.
Further measures to be taken:
Connect the braking resistors to the drive amplifier.
Test under realistic conditions when commissioning the operation of the braking resistors
Information:
Ferrules If you use wire ferrules, use for these connection terminals only ferrules with collars.
307
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
The resistance value R is obtained from the required peak power and the DC bus voltage.

4.6.1.2 Dimensioning optimisation
For dimensioning, the components are calculated which contribute to absorbing braking energy.
An external braking resistor is required if the absorbed kinetic energy exceeds the sum of the internal components
(DC bus capacitors).
The energy Evar depends quadratically on the difference between the voltage before the braking process and the
response threshold.
The voltage before the braking operation depends on the mains voltage. The energy absorption by the DC bus capacitors is, at the highest voltage, at the lowermost. Use the values for the highest supply voltage when calculating.
Energy consumption braking resistor
Two parameters are decisive for the energy consumption of the braking resistor.
The continuous power PPR indicates how much energy can be dissipated in the long run, without overloading
the braking resistor.
The maximum energy ECR limits the short dissipated, higher performance.
If the continuous power for a certain time interval is exceeded, the brake resistor for a corresponding period shall
remain unloaded.
The characteristics PPR and ECR of the external braking resistors can be found in the chapter. see "Sizing the braking
resistor" on page 306.
The estimation of electrical and mechanical losses. see "Energy acceptance " on page 296.
Example
Braking of a rotary motor with the following data:
Start speed: n = 4000 min-1
Rotar moment of inertia: JR = 4 kgcm2
Load moment of inertia: JL = 6 kgcm2
The energy absorbed results in:
EB = 1/2 * J * (2**n * 1/60)2
to 88Ws
The electrical and mechanical losses are neglected
In the DC bus capacitors, in this example 42 Ws are received (value depends on the device type see "ACOPOSinverter P74 Data DC Bus" on page 288).
The external braking resistor must absorb the remaining 46 Ws.
If the brake operation is repeated cyclically, the continuous power must be considered.
308

4.6.2 Line choke
A line choke is required if at least one of the following apply:
Output of the drive amplifier is to be increased.
Short-circuit current rating (SCCR) of the supply network is larger than required for the drive amplifier.
Current harmonics on the mains are to be reduced.
Observe when choosing a line choke for several drive amplifier with a common AC fuse that the rated current of
the line choke is greater than the sum of the input currents of all drive amplifier
You can find information about mains chokes in the chapter titled Installation instructions.
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
The fuse rating of the fuse before the line choke can not be greater than the rated current of the line choke.
Figure 9: Wiring drive amplifiers with common AC fuse and a line choke, in the example with three-phase drive amplifiers.
Figure 10: Wiring drive amplifiers with individual AC fuses and line chokes, in the example with single-phase drive amplifiers.
309

4.6.3 Cable for DC bus
The connection for the DC-bus connection is made via a plug connector or via screw terminals. The tightening
torque of the screw can be found in the "Installation Instructions".
Cable Specification
The cable specifications see "Cable for DC bus" on page 293. Connector sets and prefabricated cables see "Accessories and spare parts" on page 317.
310
Common DC bus Installation
5 Installation
Before starting the mechanical or electrical installation, a projection has to be executed. Basic information see
"Project development" on page 295.
Warning!
over time.
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
8I74S200xxx.01P-1
8I74T40xxxx.01P-1
8I74S200xxx.01P-1
8I74T40xxxx.01P-1
8I74S200xxx.01P-1
8I74T40xxxx.01P-1
Figure 11: Standards for drive amplifiers with mains supply
311
5.1 Cable for DC bus

There are pre-assembled cables for the joint DC bus. If the pre-assembled cable does not comply with the required
length, cables as reel material and crimp terminals are available see "DC bus accessories" on page 317.
Characteristics of the DC bus cable
The characteristics of the DC bus cable see "Cable for DC bus" on page 293.
Assemble DC bus cable
The following instructions are effective for ACOPOSinverter P74 with plug connection for the DC bus.
A
B
C
Section
Cable sheath
Length of shield connection
Wire stripping length crimp terminal
Diameter of ring cable shoe /
fork gable shoe
Length in mm (inch)
130 (5.2)
60 (2.5)
6 (0.25)
for screw M5
(1) Strip the cable by length A.

(2) Push the shield braiding back. Ladder the shield braiding and twist the shield to a shield connection
strand.
(3) Shorten the twisted shield connection strand up to length B and insulate the shield braiding by means
of a shrinking hose.
Crimp the crimp terminals onto the two stripped conductors.
The wire stripping length has to have the dimension C.
Information on the crimping tool see "DC bus accessories" on page 317.
(4) Crimp a fork cable shoe to the shield connection strand.
Push the crimp terminals into the connector housing. Please pay attention to the polarity: the red cable
is PA/+,
die the black cable is PC/-.
(5) Protect the shield by help of a shrinking hose.
312
5.2 Wire the DC bus.
Caution!
Damage of device by incorrect polarity
Take care of the correct polarity when connecting the bus.
In observance of these precautions may lead to material damage.
The connection of the DC bus connection is effected via a plug connection or via screw terminals.
The cable specifications see "Cable for DC bus" on page 293. Pre-assembled cables and connector sets see
"Accessories and spare parts" on page 317.
Polarizing key
The plugs are polarized If you do not implement pre-assembled cables, please take care that the crimp terminals
snap in the plug correctly. When plugging, ensure that PA/ + is connected to PA/+ and PC/- is connected to PC/-.
Incorrect wiring leads to destruction of the devices.
Connector locking mechanism

The connector has a locking device that snaps in perceptibly. In order to unlock it, you have to pull at the connector
housing.
Note:
Both cables have to move about freely inside the connector housing for being unlocked.
Information:
If you want to remove the DC bus connecting cable, you have to loosen the locking device by pulling
at the connector housing.
313
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
Cable Specification
Figure 12: Unlocking the DC bus connector, step 1: Push cable towards the plug.
Figure 13: Unlock DC bus plug, Step 2: Push cable towards the
plug, at the same time disconnect the plug with the other hand.
If the two cables cannot move about freely, the unlocking of the DC bus connecting cable will not be loosened.
Push the two cables towards the plug.
Whilst pushing the cables towards the plug, pull at the connector housing with the other hand at the same
time. The unlocking device is opened, and the DC bus connecting cable can be removed.
314
Figure 14: DC bus connection to plug contacts
Ensure that the preconditions for the joint DC bus are met.
If possible, use pre-assembled cables in order to reduce to risk of errors in wiring.
Connect the devices only to the indicated accessories. The push-on connectors are polarized. Connect
PA/+ to PA/+ and PC/- to PC/-.
5.3 Check installation
Check, if the preconditions for a joint DC bus are met. (see "Structure of a common DC-Bus" on page 298).
Check, if the IT jumper is closed (factory adjustment), see "Operation on an IT system" on page 47
Check if the wiring has been executed according to the indications, see "Project development" on page 295.
Check the applied fuses. The maximally permitted fuse values may not be exceeded The fuse values see
"Mains fuse" on page 292 and see "Fuse for DC Bus" on page 292.
Check the wiring. Check, if PA/+ is only connected to PA/+. Check, if PC/- is only connected to PC/-.
In case of a shielded DC bus cable check, if the shield is connected extensively.
Check, if the connector latching's have snapped in.
315
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
5.2.1 Connect DC bus
Common DC bus Commissioning
6 Commissioning
The commissioning is effected according to the commissioning of single devices, see instructions in chapter Installation instructions.
Warning!
over time.
6.1 Steps for the commissioning

Please take the following steps for the commissioning:
Check the complete installation of the drive amplifiers and the connections of the joint DC bus, see "Check
installation" on page 315.
Switch on the control supply at the same time for all devices, as the selection of the breaking resistors
needs the control supply.
Activate the mains monitoring at each drive amplifier with mains supply.
Check, if only drive amplifiers of an equal nominal voltage are connected.
Set the type of DC bus connection in the parameter dCCM [DC-Bus chaining]. This parameter can require
further conditions, see chapter Programming instructions.
Drives
ACOPOSinverter P74
Parameter
dCCM [DC-Bus chaining]
Execute the commissioning of the drive amplifiers, see chapter Installation instructions for description.
316
Common DC bus Accessories and spare parts
7 Accessories and spare parts

7.1 DC bus accessories
Description
DC bus connecting cable pre-assembled, 0,1 m, 5 pcs.
Cable for DC bus, 2* 6 mm2 (2* AWG 10), shielded 15 m
DC bus connector set, connector housing and contacts, 10 pcs.
Model number
8I0XC003.400-1
8I0XC003.415-1
8I0XC004.400-1
A crimping tool is needed for the crimp terminals of the connector set.
Manufacturer: Tyco Electronics, Heavy Head Hand Tool, Tool Pt. No 18025
7.2 DC fuses
Description
DC fuse, DC 700V 10A
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
The following DC fuses are offered by the company SIBA.

www.siba-fuses.com.
Order number SIBA
50 201 06.10
50 201 06.16
50 201 06.25
50 201 06.32
50 201 06.40
50 201 06.50
50 201 06.63
7.3 External braking resistors

Description
Brake resistor 100 Ohm, continuous brake power 0,05 kW
Brake resistor 15 Ohm, continuous brake power 1 kW
Brake resistor 10 Ohm, continuous brake power 1 kW
Model number
8I0BR100.000-1
8I0BR060.000-1
8I0BR028.000-1
8I0BR015.000-1
8I0BR010.000-1
317
Common DC bus Units and conversion tables
8 Units and conversion tables

Value in the unit specified (left column) is calculated by the formula (in the box) for the unit that is needed (upper
line).
Example: Conversion of 5 meters [m] to yards [yd] 5 m / 0,9144 = 5,468 yd
8.1 Length
in
* 12
* 36
/ 0,0254
/ 2,54
/ 25,4
in
ft
yd
m
cm
mm
ft
/ 12
*3
/ 0,30479
/ 30,479
/ 304,79
yd
/ 36
/3
/ 0,9144
/ 91,44
/ 914,4
m
* 0,0254
* 0,30479
* 0,9144
/ 100
/ 1000
cm
* 2,54
* 30,479
* 91,44
* 100
/ 10
mm
* 25,4
* 304,79
* 914,4
* 1000
* 10
-
8.2 Mass
lb
oz
slug
kg
g
lb
/ 16
/ 0,03108095
/ 0,453592370
/ 453,592370
oz
* 16
/ 1,942559*10-3
/ 0,02834952
/ 28,34952
slug
* 0,03108095
* 1,942559*10-3
/ 14,5939
/ 14593,9
kg
* 0,4535924
* 0,02834952
* 14,5939
/ 1000
g
* 453,5924
* 28,34952
* 14593,9
* 1000
-
lb
/ 16
/ 453,55358
/ 444822,2
/ 4,448222
oz
* 16
/ 28,349524
/ 27801
/ 0,27801
p
* 453,55358
* 28,349524
/ 980,7
/ 9,807*10-3
Dyne
* 444822,2
* 27801
* 980,7
* 100*103
N
* 4,448222
* 0,27801
* 9,807*10-3
/ 100*103
-
8.3 Force
lb
oz
p
Dyne
N
8.4 Power
HP
W
HP
/ 746
W
* 746
-
8.5 Rotation
min-1 (RPM)
rad/s
deg./s
min-1 (RPM)
* 30 /
/6
rad/s
* / 30
/ 57,295
deg./s
*6
* 57,295
-
8.6 Torque
lbin
lbft
ozin
Nm
kpm
kpcm
dynecm
lbin
/ 12
/ 16
/ 0,112985
/ 0,011521
/ 1,1521
/ 1,129*106
lbft
/ 12
/ 192
/ 1,355822
/ 0,138255
/ 13,8255
/ 13,558*106
ozin
* 16
* 192
/ 7,0616*10-3
/ 720,07*10-6
/ 72,007*10-3
/ 70615,5
Nm
* 0,112985
* 1,355822
* 7,0616*10-3
/ 0,101972
/ 10,1972
/ 10*106
kpm
* 0,011521
* 0,138255
* 720,07*10-6
* 0,101972
* 100
/ 98,066*106
kpcm
* 1,1521
* 13,8255
* 72,007*10-3
* 10,1972
/ 100
* 0,9806*106
dynecm
* 1,129*106
* 13,558*106
* 70615,5
* 10*106
* 98,066*106
* 0,9806*106
-
8.7 Moment of inertia

lbin2
lbft2
kgm2
kgcm2
kpcms2
ozin2
318
lbin2
* 144
* 3417,16
* 0,341716
* 335,109
/ 16
lbft2
/ 144
/ 0,04214
/ 421,4
/ 0,429711
/ 2304
kgm2
/ 3417,16
* 0,04214
/ 10*103
/ 10,1972
/ 54674
kgcm2
/ 0,341716
* 421,4
* 10*103
* 980,665
/ 5,46
kpcms2
/ 335,109
* 0,429711
* 10,1972
/ 980,665
/ 5361,74
ozin2
/ 16
* 2304
* 54674
* 5,46
* 5361,74
-
Common DC bus Units and conversion tables
8.8 Temperature
F
C
K
F
C * 9/5 + 32
(K - 273,15) * 9/5 + 32
C
(F - 32) * 5/9
K - 273,15
K
(F - 32) * 5/9 + 273,15
C + 273,15
-
8.9 Conductor cross section

1
42.2
2
33.6
3
26.7
4
21.2
5
16.8
6
13.3
7
10.5
8
8.4
9
6.6
10
5.3
11
4.2
12
3.3
13
2.6
AWG
mm2
14
2.1
15
1.7
16
1.3
17
1.0
18
0.82
19
0.65
20
0.52
21
0.41
22
0.33
23
0.26
24
0.20
25
0.16
26
0.13
Chapter 3
Common DC bus
AWG
mm2
319
Integrated safety functions Preparation
Chapter 4 Integrated safety functions

1 Preparation
1.1 Safety instructions
The information contained in this guide complements the specifications listed in the specific product manuals.
You must read the respective product manual before using the product.
This guide must also be read and understood before working on and with this frequency inverter.
Danger!
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Read and understand this manual before installing and operating the frequency inverter. Installation, adjustment, repair and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.
The user is responsible for compliance with all international and national electrical code requirements with respect to the grounding of equipment.
Many parts of this frequency inverter, including the printed circuit boards, are supplied by the
mains. DO NOT TOUCH! Use only electrically insulated tools.
DO NOT TOUCH unshielded components or bolted connections on terminal blocks while connected to the power supply.
DO NOT short across terminals PA/+ and PC/- or across the DC bus capacitors.
Before servicing the frequency inverter:
Disconnect the entire power supply, including any external sources of control voltage.
Place a "DO NOT TURN ON" label on all power disconnection switches.
Lock all power disconnection switches in the open position.
WAIT 15 MINUTES to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge.
Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA/+ and PC/- terminals to ensure that
the voltage is less than 42 V.
If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely, contact your local B&R representative. Do not repair or operate the frequency inverter.
Install and close all covers before turning on the supply voltage or starting/stopping the frequency inverter.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury or death!
Danger!
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Read and understand this manual before installing and operating the frequency inverter.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury or death!
320
Warning!
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not operate or install any frequency inverter or accessory that appears damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage, serious injury or death!
Warning!
EQUIPMENT FAILURE
Chapter 4
The designer of any wiring scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control channels and, for certain critical functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after
a channel failure. Examples of critical control functions include an emergency stop switch (Estop) and overshoot stop.
Separate or redundant control channels must be provided for critical control functions.
Each implementation of a control system must be checked carefully and individually to ensure
faultless operation before the device is put into operation.
System control channels may include communication links. For this reason, the effects of unexpected transmission delays and connection disruptions must be taken into account. 1)
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage, serious injury or death!
Caution!
INCOMPATIBLE MAINS VOLTAGE
Before turning on and configuring the frequency inverter, ensure that the mains voltage is compatible
with the supply voltage shown on the frequency inverter's nameplate. The drive may be damaged if
the mains voltage is not compatible.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage or injury.
Caution!
RISK OF POWER LOSS DUE TO CAPACITOR WEAR
The performance of product-specific capacitors may be reduced after long-term storage of over 2
years.
In this case, the following measures must be undertaken before using this product:
Use a variable AC power supply that is connected between L1 and L2 (also for model numbers
8I74T40xxxx.01P-1).
Increase AC supply voltage to have:
25% of the rated voltage for 30 minutes

1)
For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), "Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control"
and NEMA ICS 7.1 (latest edition), "Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems."
321
1.2 Personnel qualifications and usage

Personnel qualifications
Only trained personnel who have read this guide and are experienced with all relevant product documentation are
permitted to work with this device. In addition, personnel must have completed relevant safety training in order to
recognize and avoid potential sources of risk. This personnel must have received a technical education, collected
knowledge and experience from the field and be able to foresee and directly recognize dangerous situations that
may result from the use of this product, modifying its settings or from the mechanical, electrical and electronic
components used throughout the entire system where this product will be used.
All persons who work with or near this product must be well-versed in all standards, guidelines and accident
prevention guidelines relevant to their activities.
Intended use
The functions set forth in this guide refer only to the usage of the product listed herein. Before using another specific
product, you must have already read and understood the respective product manual.
This product is only permitted to be used in adherence with all applicable safety regulations and guidelines in
accordance with the specified requirements and technical data.
Before using this product, you must perform a risk assessment appropriate to the planned application. The results
thereof must then be used to implement all necessary safety precautions.
Since this product is used as a component in another system, the safety of personnel must be ensured across the
entire system (e.g. the machine's design).
This product may only be operated using the specified cables and accessories. Only use original accessories and
spare parts.
Using this product in any way other than expressly intended is strictly prohibited and can result in dangerous
situations.
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel. This product is NEVER permitted to be used in explosive environments (Ex environments).
322
Integrated safety functions Overview
2 Overview
2.1 Introduction
The safety functions integrated in the ACOPOSinverter P74 make it possible to develop applications designed to
protect personnel and the machine. These safety functions are configured using the ACPi Parameter Tool.
Integrated safety functions provide the following advantages:
Additional safety functions that comply with standards

No need for extra external safety equipment
Reduced wiring and space requirements
Reduced costs
ACOPOSinverter P74 inverters are compatible with standard requirements for implementing safety functions.
STO
SLS
SS1
Safe Torque Off

The purpose of this function is to bring the motor to a non-torque state. This is relevant from a safety point of view since no torque-forming energy can be
generated on the motor. Power modules are blocked and the motor either coasts to a stop or is prevented from being restarted.
Safely Limited Speed
The SLS function monitors speed to ensure it does exceed a preset speed limit value.
If the limit value is exceeded, then the drive is safely cut off.
Safe Stop 1
SS1 comprises the following elements:
Safe stopping of the motor using a predefined fast stop ramp

STO (release after reaching a standstill)
323
Chapter 4
Safety functions in accordance with IEC 61800-5-2
2.2 Standards and terminology

The technical terminology and descriptions in this guide correspond to the terminology and definitions in the relevant
standards.
In the domain of drive technology, this includes terms such as "safety function", "secure state", "fault", "fault reset",
"outage", "error", "error message", "warning", "warning message", etc.
This includes the following standards:
The IEC 61800 series: "Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems"
The IEC 61508 Ed. 2 series: "Functional safety of electrical / electronic / programmable electronic safety-related systems"
EN 954-1: "Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems"
EN ISO 13849-1/2: "Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems"
EC declaration of conformity
The EC declaration of conformity to EMC guidelines is available on the following website: www.br-automation.com.
Certification for functional safety

The integrated safety functions are compatible with and certified according to IEC 61800-5-2 Ed. 1, "Adjustable
speed electrical power drive systems" Part 5-2: "Safety requirements Functional".
As a product standard, IEC 61800-5-2 sets forth safety-related considerations for power drive systems with integrated safety functions ("PDS (SR): Power Drive Systems Safety Related") with respect to the framework laid out
in the IEC 61508 Ed. 2 series.
The compliance of the safety functions listed in this guide with the IEC 61800-5-2 standard simplifies the integration
of a PDS (SR) in a safety-related control system that conforms to the guidelines set forth in the IEC 61508 and/or
ISO 13849-1 and IEC 62061 standards for process plants and machines.
The safety functions specified here are characterized by the following features:
Fulfillment of SIL 2 and SIL 3 requirements in accordance with IEC 61800-5-2 and the IEC 61508 Ed. 2
series
Fulfillment of performance level "d" and "e" in accordance with ISO 13849-1
Compliance with category 3 and 4 of European standard ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1)
see "Safety function options" on page 349.
The safety operating mode has been tested in high demand or continuous mode in accordance with the IEC
61800-5-2 standard.
The certification for functional safety is available on the following website: www.br-automation.com.
324
2.3 General information

Functional safety
Automation and safety technology are two areas that in the past were completely isolated from one another. Recently, however, they have experienced much greater integration.
The technical planning and installation of complex automation solutions is considerably simplified through the use
of integrated safety functions.
The necessary safety requirements usually depend on the application.
The stringency of these requirements is determined by the risk and potential hazards brought about by the specific
application.
The IEC 61508 standard
SIL Safety integrity level

The IEC 61508 standard defines 4 safety integrity levels (SIL) for safety functions. SIL 1 is the lowest level, SIL 4
the highest. Conducting a hazard and risk analysis establishes the framework for determining the necessary safety
integrity level. This can then be used to determine whether the respective chain of functions can be viewed as a
safety function and which potential hazards must be covered.
PFH Probability of a dangerous hardware failure per hour
To maintain the necessary safety functionality, the IEC 61508 standard requires measures at various levels to avoid
and check for detected errors in line with the required SIL. All components of a safety functions must undergo a
probability analysis in order to assess the effectiveness of the measures used to check for detected errors. This
analysis also determines the probability of a dangerous failure per hour (PFH) for the safety system. This involves
determining the probability per hour that a dangerous failure of a safety system could occur and that the safety
function cannot be executed properly. Depending on the SIL, the PFH for the entire safety system is not permitted to
exceed certain values. The individual PFH values of a function chain are added together. The result is not permitted
to exceed the maximum value defined in the standard.
SIL Safety integrity level
4
3
2
1
Probability of a dangerous failure per hour (PFH) in high

demand or continuous mode.
10-9 <10-8
10-8 <10-7
10-7 <10-6
10-6 <10-5
PL Performance level
The IEC 13849-1 standard defines 5 performance levels (PL) for safety functions. "a" is the lowest level, "e" the
highest. The five levels (a, b, c, d, e) correspond to the various values of the average probability of a dangerous
hardware failure per hour.
Performance level
e
d
c
b
a
Probability of a dangerous failure per hour

10-8 <10-7
10-7 <10-6
10-6 <3*10-6
3*10-6 <10-5
10-5 <10-4
325
Chapter 4
The IEC 61508 standard "Functional safety of electrical / electronic / programmable electronic safety-related
systems" provides global coverage for safety-related functionality. Instead of individual components, an entire
chain of functions (e.g. from a sensor via the logical processing units to the actuator) is considered a single unit.
This chain of functions must satisfy the requirements of the specific safety integrity level as a whole. Systems and
components can then be developed on this basis and used in a wide range of safety applications with comparably
levels of risk.

HFT Hardware fault tolerance and SFF Safe failure fraction
Depending on the SIL for the safety system, the IEC 61508 standard and SFF value stipulate a special hardware
fault tolerance (HFT) in connection with a special SafeFailure Fraction (SFF).
The hardware fault tolerance is the ability of a system to execute the necessary safety function despite the presence
of one or more detected hardware faults. The SFF of a system is defined as the ratio of the rate of failures in a safe
state to the total failure rate of the system. In accordance with IEC 61508, the maximum achievable SIL of a system
is determined by the hardware fault tolerance (HFT) and partially by the safe failure fraction (SFF) of the system.
IEC 61508 differentiates between two types of subsystems (type A and type B). These types are based on criteria
set forth by the standard for safety-related components.
SFF
< 60%
60% <90%
60% <99%
99%
Type A subsystem HFT

0
1
2
SIL 1 SIL 2 SIL 3
SIL 2 SIL 3 SIL 4
SIL 3 SIL 4 SIL 4
SIL 4 SIL 4 SIL 4
Type B subsystem HFT

0
1
2
SIL 1 SIL 2
SIL 1 SIL 2 SIL 3
SIL 2 SIL 3 SIL 4
SIL 3 SIL 4 SIL 4
Measures for avoiding detected errors

System errors in the specification, hardware and software, as well as errors detected during the use and maintenance of the safety system must be avoided to the maximum degree possible. To satisfy these requirements, IEC
61508 defines various measures for avoiding detected errors that must be implemented depending on the required
SIL. These error avoidance measures must cover the entire service life of the safety system, i.e. from the planning
of the system until it is taken out of commission.
326
Integrated safety functions Description
3 Description
3.1 STO: Safe Torque Off
The purpose of this function is to put the drive in a torque-free state in which the drive either coasts to a stop or its
startup is prevented. This state is safety-relevant since no torque is available at the drive level.
This function is always assigned to the logical "STO" input.
If a pair of terminal wires is necessary to control the STO function, the function can also be activated via the safe
logic inputs.
The STO status can be retrieved via the inverter, Automation Studio or the ACPi Parameter Tool.
Frequency
Chapter 4
Frequency
actual value
Time
STO
activation
STO Normative reference

The normative definition of the STO function can be found in IEC 61800-5-2, 4.2.2.2:
Power that can cause rotation (or motion in the case of a linear motor) is not applied to the motor. The PDS(SR)
will not provide energy to the motor which can generate torque (or force in the case of a linear motor).
Note:
This safety function corresponds to an uncontrolled stop in accordance with stop category 0
of IEC 60204-1.
This safety function may be used where power removal is required to prevent an unexpected
startup.
In circumstances where external influences (for example, falling of suspended loads) are
present, additional measures (for example, mechanical brakes) may be necessary to prevent
any hazard.
Electronic means and contactors are not adequate for protection against electric shock, and
additional measures for isolation may be necessary.
327

Required safety function level (SF) for the STO function
Configuration
STO with or without safety relay
STO and LI3 with or without safety relay
LI3 and LI4
LI5 and LI6
SIL
(safety integrity level) in accordance with IEC 61508
SIL 2
SIL 3
SIL 2
SIL 2
PL
(performance level) in accordance with ISO 13849
PL "d"
PL "e"
PL "d"
PL "d"
A safety relay must be used in the action area of the machine for the following reasons:
In the area of a machine (IEC 60204-1 and machinery directive), a reset is not permitted to ever trigger a
restart. An especially mandatory case exists when the power supply is cut off when the STO function is
activated. In this case, the drive is never permitted to be restarted automatically if STO is disabled while
the power supply is interrupted. The safety relay can prevent an unintended restart in this situation. This
makes the safety relay obligatory for machine applications.
E-stop of multiple basic drive modules (BDMs) in a safety-related power drive system: The safety relay is
equipped with some safe outputs for applications that require one or more safe outputs.
The safety relay is not necessary in other action areas unless required by the application: fallback position of the
system.
328
3.2 SS1: Safe Stop 1

Description
This function uses a predefined deceleration ramp to quickly bring the drive to a stop. The drive speed is monitored
during the braking procedure. As soon as the drive speed falls below a predefined value, the STO function is
triggered.
The unit for the SS1 deceleration ramp is specified in Hz/s. The following 2 parameters must be configured to
determine the profile of the ramp:
[SL1 ramp unit] (SSrU) (Hz/s) for defining the ramp unit: 1 Hz/s, 10 Hz/s or 100 Hz/s.
[SS1 RampValue] (SSrt) (0.1) for defining the ramp value.
Calculating the deceleration ramp: Ramp = SSrU*SSrt
Example: If SSrU = 10 Hz/s and SSrt = 50, then the deceleration ramp is 50 Hz/s.
When the function is activated, the SS1 function receives setpoint priority over all other setpoint channels. If an error
is detected in the safety function, the internal STO command triggers the cutting off and stopping of the inverter.
This safety function is configured using the ACPi Parameter Tool (see "Installation" on page 364).
Behavior when the SS1 function is activated

The SS1 function monitors the drive speed and checks the [SS1 cutoff value] (SStt).
As soon as the SS1 ramp of the cutoff range is reached, the drive is switched to SAFF mode and coasts to a
complete stop.
If the drive speed reaches the [SLS/SS1 standstill level] (SSSL) , then a safe torque-free state (STO) is activated
(to prevent the unintended restart of the drive). The safety precautions depend on the stator frequency.
Frequency
Frequency
actual value
1 SS1 cutoff value

2 SS1 deceleration ramp (dV/dT)
3 Stop
3
2
Time
STO
activation
Behavior when the SS1 function is deactivated

After an SS1 stop, a new move command must be specified (even if the move command was configured as the
threshold value).
If the SS1 request is deactivated before the safety function is completed, then the safety function will remain active
until the STO state has been reached.
329
Chapter 4
The SS1 status can be retrieved via the inverter or the ACPi Parameter Tool.

SS1 Normative reference
The normative definition of the SS1 function can be found in IEC 61800-5-2, 4.2.2.2:
The PDS(SR) either
initiates and monitors the motor deceleration rate within set limits to stop the motor and initiates the STO
function when the motor speed is below a specified limit
or
initiates the motor deceleration and initiates the STO function after an application-specific time delay.
Two different SS1 functions are specified in the IEC 61800-5-2 standard
SS1 type B
Initiates and monitors the rate of motor deceleration within set limits and initiates the STO function if the motor
speed falls below a defined limit value.
The SS1 type B safety function can be implemented with the SS1 safety function of the ACPi P74.
SS1 type C
Initiates the motor deceleration and initiates the STO function after an application-specific time delay.
The SS1 type C safety function cannot be implemented with the SS1 safety function of the ACPi P74.
The safety function is initiated by an external safety relay by bypassing the move command and transmitting the
STO function to the ACOPOSinverter P74.
This allows the SS1 type C function to be configured to LI3-STO (SIL 3) since only the STO function is active from
the point of view of the inverter, and SS1 can be executed in the move command is bypassed by the external
safety relay.
In order to configure the SS1 type C function, the STO function must be configured in the ACOPOSinverter P74
using the ACPi Parameter Tool.
Note:
This safety function corresponds to an controlled stop in accordance with stop category 1 of IEC
60204-1.
In compliance with IEC 60204-1, the SS1 function triggers a stop of the power drive system in accordance with
stop category 1 after:
The drive reaches standstill (as soon as the drive speed falls below a predefined limit value)
An application-specific delay time passes.
Possible safety function level (SF) for the SS1 function

Function
SS1 type C
SS1 type B
330
Configuration
STO with safety relay
STO and LI3 with safety relay
LI3 and LI4
LI5 and LI6
SIL
SIL 2
SIL 3
SIL 2
SIL 2
PL
PL "d"
PL "e"
PL "d"
PL "d"
3.3 SLS: Safely Limited Speed

Description
This function is used to limit machine speed. The main purpose is to monitor the drive speed so that it does not
exceed a predefined setpoint.
There are 3 types of this function to choose from:
SLS type 1: Monitors the drive speed and activates the torque-free state (STO) if the speed limit value
is exceeded.
SLS type 2: Limits the drive speed to a setpoint and forces the torque-free state (STO) when it is exceeded.
SLS type 3: Same as type 2 but with special behavior when exceeding the tolerance value of the drive
speed. Triggers the torque-free state (activates the STO function) on overspeed.
When the function is activated, the SLS function receives setpoint priority over all other setpoint channels. This
safety function is configured using the ACPi Parameter Tool (see "Commissioning"). The SLS status can be retrieved via the inverter or the ACPi Parameter Tool.
Behavior when the SLS function is activated

When the function is activated:
If the current or stator frequency is above the [SLS tolerance threshold] (SLtt), then the SAFF safe error
state is triggered.
If the current or stator frequency is below the [SLS tolerance threshold] (SLtt), then the speed is limited to
the actual value. The main setpoint channel can only reduce the speed setpoint.
If the function is activated:
If the current frequency decreases and reaches the [SLS/SS1 standstill level] (SSSL), then the STO function
is activated. If the current or stator frequency increases and reaches the [SS1 cutoff level] (SLtt), then the
drive is cut off and switched to the SAFF safe error state.
Frequency
Frequency
actual value
1
1
Error and stop
Setpoint as upper limit
Stop
Time
SLS
activation
331
Chapter 4
SLS type 1

SLS type 2
If the current frequency is above the [SLS tolerance threshold] (SLtt), then the drive decelerates to [Set
point] (SLSP) using the same ramp as the SS1 function.
If the current frequency is below the [SLS tolerance threshold] (SLtt) and above the [Set point] (SLSP) ,
then the drive decelerates until the [Set point] (SLSP) using the same ramp as the SS1 function.
If the current frequency is below the [Set point] (SLSP), then the speed setpoint is defined as the upper
speed limit.
As soon as the [Set point] (SLSP) is reached, the speed setpoint can be set to either the [SLS/SS1 standstill
level] (SSSL) or the [Set point] (SLSP).
is activated.
If the current or stator frequency increases and reaches the [SS1 cutoff level] (SLtt), then the drive is cut
off and switched to the SAFF safe error state.
Frequency
Frequency
actual value
SLS
cutoff value
Setpoint
Standstill
detection
3
4
Time
SLS
activation
1 SS1 cutoff value
2
Error and stop
Stop
332

SLS type 3
If the current frequency is above the [SLS tolerance threshold] (SLtt), then the drive decelerates to [SLS/
SSI standstill level] (SSSL) using the same ramp as the SS1 function.
If the current frequency is below the [SLS tolerance threshold] (SLtt) and above the [Set point] (SLSP) ,
then the drive decelerates until the [Set point] (SLSP) using the same ramp as the SS1 function.
If the current frequency is below the [Set point] (SLSP), then the current setpoint is not changed but the
[Set point] (SLSP) is defined as the upper limit.
is activated.
If the current or stator frequency increases and reaches the [SS1 cutoff level] (SLtt), then the drive is cut
off and switched to the SAFF safe error state.
The [Set point] (SLSP) is linked to the speed frequency.
Frequency
1
2
Chapter 4
Frequency
actual value
SLS
cutoff value
Setpoint
Standstill
detection
3
4
Time
SLS
activation
1 SS1 cutoff value
2
Error and stop
Stop
333

Behavior when the SLS function is deactivated
For all SLS types
If the drive is still being operated when the function is deactivated, the main setpoint and current move
command are applied.
If the drive has already been stopped (STO or completion of SS1), a new move command must be output
to restart.
If the SLS request is deactivated before the SS1 deceleration ramp is completed, then the safety function
remains active until the [Set point] (SLSP) or [SLS/SS1 standstill level] (SSSL) is reached.
If a stop command is output, the drive is stopped even when activating a safety function (the safety function
remains active, however, and resumes monitoring the cutoff range). A stop command has priority over a
safety function.
If an error is detected when the safety function is configured, then the drive is stopped in compliance with
the configured behavior if an error occurs. A new move command must be output to restart.
SLS Normative reference
The normative definition of the SLS function can be found in IEC 61800-5-2, 4.2.3.4: "The SLS function
prevents the motor from exceeding the specified speed limit."
Required safety function level (SF) for the SLS function
Configuration
LI3 and LI4: SLS
LI5 and LI6: SLS
334
SIL
SIL 2
SIL 2
PL
PL "d"
PL "d"
Integrated safety functions Formulas for calculating safety parameters
4 Formulas for calculating safety parameters

4.1 SLS type 1
Collecting application data
The following data must be collected before configuring the SLS function:
Code
Fn
Nsp
Np
Fmax(SLS)
Description
Nominal motor frequency
Nominal motor speed
Number of motor pole pairs
Maximum motor frequency when SLS function
type 1 is activated
Unit
Hz
rpm
Hz
Comment
From motor
From motor
From motor
Maximum motor frequency when SLS function type 1
is activated
is used
First the rated slip frequency of the motor Fslip (Hz) is calculated. This value will be needed later:
Fslip = Fn -
Nsp x Np
60
Configuring the function

Chapter 4
Overview diagram
Cutoff range
Frequency
SLS tolerance threshold (SLTT)
Fmax (SLS)
Standstill level (SSSL)
SLS activation
Time
Standstill level
The following standstill level is recommended:
SSSL = Fslip
If a different standstill level is required for the application, it can be configured in line with the SSSL parameter.
Protective threshold
The SLS tolerance value is calculated as follows:
SLTT = 1.2 Fmax(SLS) + Fslip
335

Testing and adjusting the configuration
Once the configuration is completed, the SLS function must be tested to make sure that the expected behavior
results.
If a SAFF safety fault is detected during the test, search for and correct the error using the rules listed below:
Context
SLS function activated and
motor running with frozen frequency setpoint
Problem
SAFF safety fault

SFFE.7 = 1
Adjustment
Motor frequency has reached the tolerance value.
Increase the SLTT value in 1 Hz steps and continue performing the test until a SAFF fault no
longer occurs:
SLTT > 1.2 Fmax(SLS) + Fslip
If the corrected and recommended SLTT values deviate from one another, look for the cause of
the frequency instability.
Example
Code
Fn
Nsp
Np
Fmax (SLS)
Description
Nominal motor speed
Maximum motor frequency when SLS function type 1 is activated
Value
50 Hz
1350 rpm
2
50 Hz
These numeric values result in the following configuration for the SLS type 1 function:
Fslip = 50 -
1350 x 2
= 5 Hz
60
SSSL = Fslip = 5 Hz
SLTT = 1.2 x Fmax (SLS) + Fslip = 1.2 x 50 + 5 = 65 Hz
336
4.2 SLS type 2 and type 3

The following data must be collected before configuring the SLS function:
Code
Fn
Nsp
Np
Fmax (SLS)
Fsetpoint
(SLS) 1)
D 1)
1)
Description
Unit
Hz
Nominal motor speed
rpm
Maximum motor frequency when SLS function Hz

type 2/3 is activated
Motor frequency setpoint
Hz
Ramp deceleration
Hz/s
Comment
From motor
From motor
From motor
Maximum motor frequency when activating SLS function type
2/3
User-defined, the frequency setpoint to be reached by SLF function type 2/3
User-defined, ramp deceleration used when activating the SLS
function
The values for Fsetpoint(SLS) and D must be defined before configuring the SLS function.
First the rated slip frequency of the motor Fslip (Hz) is calculated. This value will be needed later:
Fslip = Fn -
Nsp x Np
60
Frequency
Fmax (SLS)
Chapter 4
Overview diagram
Cutoff range
SS1 cutoff value
(SSTT)
SLS tolerance threshold (SLTT)

SLS setpoint (SLSP)
SLS activation
Time
Standstill level
SSSL = Fslip
337

Deceleration ramp value and unit
The SSRT (ramp value) and SSRU (ramp unit) parameters must be configured in compliance with the
deceleration range according to the deceleration selected. D and the available precision must be taken
into account:
Min.
0.1 Hz/s
599 Hz/s
5990 Hz/s
Max.
599 Hz/s
5990 Hz/s
59900 Hz/s
Precision
0.1 Hz/s
1 Hz/s
10 Hz/s
SSRU
[1 Hz/s]
[10 Hz/s]
[100 Hz/s]
SSRT
D
D/10
D/100
SLS setpoint
Set the SLS setpoint parameter (SLSP) to the following value:
SLSP = Fsetpoint (SLS)
Protective thresholds
The SLS tolerance value is calculated as follows:
SLTT = 1.2 x SLSP + Fslip
The threshold value for executing the SS1 ramp is calculated as follows:
SLTT = 0.2 x Fmax (SLS) + (SLTT SLSP Fslip)

Once the configuration is completed, the SLS function must be tested to make sure that the expected behavior
results.
Context
SLS activated and deceleration ramp in progress
Problem
SLS activated and end of the

ramp at SLSP frequency
SAFF safety fault

SFFE.3 = 1 or
SFFE.7 = 1
SAFF safety fault

SFFE.3 = 1
Adjustment
Motor frequency has reached the cutoff range.
Increase the SSTT value in 1 Hz steps and continue performing the test until a SAFF fault no
longer occurs:
SLTT > 0.2 x Fmax (SLS) + (SLTT SLSP Fslip)
If the corrected and recommended SSTT values deviate from one another, look for the cause
of the frequency instability.
Stabilization of the motor frequency at SLSP takes too long and has reached the cutoff range.
Cutoff range
Frequency
SSTT
T (oscillation)
SLTT
SLSP
The deviations must be less than the SLTT before time T(oscillation) passes. If this is not the
case, then the frequency reaches the cutoff range and a SAFF safety fault occurs.
The following relationship exists between SSTT and T(oscillation):
SSTT - (SLTT - SLSP - Fslip)
T(oscillation) =
SSRT x SSRU
If more time is needed for stabilization, increase the SSTT in 1 Hz steps and continue performing
the test until a SAFF fault no longer occurs:
The SSTT can be calculated directly if the time necessary to reduce the deviations until they are
below the SLTT is known:
SSTT = T(oscillation)new SSRT SSRU + (SLTT SLSP Fslip)
SLS activated and motor running with SLSP frequency
338
SAFF safety fault

SFFE.7 = 1
Motor frequency has reached the tolerance value.
Increase the SLTT value in 1 Hz steps and continue performing the test until a SAFF fault no
longer occurs:
SLTT > 1.2 SLSP + Fslip

Example
Code
Fn
Nsp
Np
Fmax (SLS)
Fsetpoint (SLS)
D
Description
Nominal motor speed
Maximum motor frequency when SLS function type 2/3 is activated
Motor frequency setpoint
Ramp deceleration
Value
50 Hz
1350 rpm
2
50 Hz
15 Hz
20 Hz/s
These numeric values result in the following configuration for the SLS type 2/3 function:
Fslip = 50 -
1350 x 2
5 Hz
60
SSSL = Fslip = 5 Hz
D = 20 Hz/s and lies between 0.1 Hz/s and 599 Hz/s. This results in the following: SSRU = [1 Hz/s] and SSRT = 20.0
SLSP = Fsetpoint (SLS) = 15 Hz
SLTT = 1.2 SLSP + Fslip = 1.2 15 + 5 = 23 Hz
SSTT = 0.2 Fmax (SLS)+ (SLTT SLSP Fslip ) = 0.2 50 + (23 15 5 ) = 13 Hz
13 - (23 - 15 - 5)
SSTT - (SLTT - SLSP - Fslip)
=
500 ms
20 x 1
SSRT x SSRU
Chapter 4
T(oscillation) =
In the example here, frequency deviations above the SLTT are tolerated during a period of 500 ms.
339
4.3 SS1
The following data must be collected before configuring the SS1 function:
Code
Fn
Nsp
Np
Fmax (SS1)
D 1)
1)
Description
Unit
Hz
Nominal motor speed
rpm
Maximum motor frequency when SS1 function Hz

is activated
Ramp deceleration
Hz/s
Comment
From motor
From motor
From motor
Maximum motor frequency when activating the SS1 function
User-defined, ramp deceleration used when activating the SLS
function
The value D must be defined before configuring the SS1 function.

Overview diagram
Frequency
Fmax (SLS)
Cutoff range
STO stop
SS1 cutoff value

(SSTT)

Time
SLS activation
Standstill level
SSSL = Fslip
340

Deceleration ramp value and unit
The SSRT (ramp value) and SSRU (ramp unit) parameters must be configured in compliance with the
deceleration range and available precision according to the deceleration selected by the user:
Min.
0.1 Hz/s
599 Hz/s
5990 Hz/s
Max.
599 Hz/s
5990 Hz/s
59900 Hz/s
Precision
0.1 Hz/s
1 Hz/s
10 Hz/s
SSRU
[1 Hz/s]
[10 Hz/s]
[100 Hz/s]
SSRT
D
D/10
D/100
Protective threshold
The threshold value for executing the SS1 ramp is calculated as follows:
SSTT = 0.2 Fmax (SS1)

Once the configuration is completed, the SS1 function must be tested to make sure that the expected behavior
results.
Context
SS1 activated and deceleration ramp in progress
Problem
SAFF safety fault

SFFE.3 = 1
Adjustment
Motor frequency has reached the cutoff range.
Increase the SSTT value in 1 Hz steps and continue performing the test until a SAFF fault no
longer occurs:
SSTT > 0.2 Fmax (SS1)
Example
Code
Fn
Nsp
Np
Fmax (SS1)
D
Description
Nominal motor speed
Maximum motor frequency when SS1 function is activated
Ramp deceleration
Value
50 Hz
1350 rpm
2
50 Hz
20 Hz/s
These numeric values result in the following configuration for the SS1 function:
Fslip = 50 -
1350 x 2
= 5 Hz
60
SSSL = Fslip = 5 Hz
D = 20 Hz/s and lies between 0.1 Hz/s and 599 Hz/s. This results in the following: SSRU = [1 Hz/s] and SSRT = 20.0
SSTT = 0.2 Fmax (SS1)= 0.2 50 = 10 Hz
341
Chapter 4
Integrated safety functions Incompatibility with the safety functions
5 Incompatibility with the safety functions

5.1 Limitations
Motor type
The SLS and SS1 functions of the ACOPOSinverter P74 are only permitted for induction motors without an encoder.
The STO function can be used with both synchronous and induction motors.
Requirements for using these safety functions

There are a few requirements that must be satisfied in order to ensure correct operation:
The size of the motor must be sufficient for the application at hand and not approach its total capacity.
The speed capacity of the inverter must be selected in accordance with the power supply (mains supply),
operating sequence, motor and application. It must not approach the limits of its capacity.
Suitable options can be used as needed, for example dynamic braking resistor or motor reactor.
The inverter must be configured in a way suitable for the application with respect to speed and torque. The
speed profile is regulated via the inverter's control loop.
Permitted and impermissible applications for the safety function
Permitted application
Fast stop after an STO request or coasting to a stop is permitted.
f
STO
t
Impermissible application
An application with load delay after the frequency is cut off or with long/permanently regenerative brake
cycles is not permitted. Fast stop after an STO request or coasting to a stop is not permitted.
f
f
STO
STO
t
Examples: Vertical conveyor belt, vertical draw gear, lifting equipment or flushing device.
342

Limitations with respect to the logic input
The source mode is not compatible with the safety function. When using the safety function, the logic input
must be connected in sink mode.
The PTC function on LI6 is not compatible with the safety function activated on this input. When using
functional safety on LI6, do not set the PTC switch to the PTC function.
When using the pulse input, it is not possible to activate the safety function on LI5 at the same time.
Fault inhibition
For certain types of errors, [Fault inhibit assign.](InH) can be requested to prevent the inverter from stopping when
an error occurs. The function of the fault inhibition is not compatible with the behavior of the safety function.
If a safety function is activated, then the error state generated by the SAFF safety function cannot be suppressed.
Downloading the configuration
When the configuration is downloaded, all parameters are loaded to the inverter with the exception of the safety
parameters. The user can transfer the configuration in any situation. If a safety function has been activated, then
the functions that are using the same LI are no longer configured.
Note:
If the downloaded configuration functions (preset speed, etc.) comprise LI 3, 4, 5 or 6 and a safety
function has been configured on LI in the inverter, then the safety function is not cleared. Instead, the
functions accessing the same LI as the safety functions are not transferred. These same rules apply
to multiple configurations/motor as well as macro configurations.
Factory settings
If the inverter is in a safe state and the factory settings are enabled, then only non-safety-related parameters are
downloaded to the inverter. Safety parameters are not affected by the reset to factory settings.
Priority of safety functions

1 STO has the highest priority. When the STO function is triggered, the torque is cut off safely regardless
of any other active functions.
2 SS1 has middle priority when compared to the other safety functions.
3 SLS has the lowest priority.
343
Chapter 4
For safety reasons, it is not possible to download the configuration of safety parameters with a tool. This means
that the ACPi Parameter Tool package, the operating terminal or Automation Studio cannot be used to download
the configuration.

Priority of safety and inverter functions
o: Compatible functions
x: Incompatible functions
: The function indicated by an arrow has priority over the other function.
Inverter function
[BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL] bLC[HIGH SPEED HOISTING] HSH[+/- SPEED] UPd[Skip Frequency] JPF
[LSP operating hours] tLS
[MULTIMOTOR] MMC[PRESET SPEEDS] PSS[PID REGULATOR] PId[RAMP TYPE] rPt[Freewheel] nSt
[Fast stop] FSt
[TRAVERSE CONTROL] tr0-
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] FLt-
[Ext. fault] EtF-
[Aut. Restart] Atr[ERROR RESET] rSt[Frequency Jog] JOG[STOP CONFIGUATION] Stt[Stop Ramp] rMP
[Fast stop] FSt
[DC Injection] dCI
[Freewheel] nSt
[+- SPEED BY SETPOINT] SrE[POSITIONING BY SENSORS] LPO[CustSp. Filt RP Ref] PFrC
[Underload Detection] ULF
[Overload Detection] OLC
[Config. slack rope] rSd
[UnderV. prevention] StP
[Auto DC injection] AdC[DC Injection] dCI
[Load distribution] LbA
SLS
SS1
x
x
The configuration must be coherent in all 3 motors.
o: The configurations of both func

tions are not permitted to overlap. o: The motor frequency is
permitted to exceed the SLS setpoint (but not the cutoff range).
: NST, fast stop, ramp
: NST
x: DCI
x: DCI
: Fallback, keep value
: Fast stop, ramp,
fallback, keep value
: NST
: NST
x: DCI
x: DCI
: Fast stop, ramp,
: Fast stop, ramp,
: SLS ramp
: SLS stable
: SLS ramp
: SLS stable
x
: SLS ramp and position not observed

o: If LI5 not being used
by safety function
x
x
x
x
o: If the adjusted load distribution
frequency reaches the cutoff range,
a SAFF safety fault is triggered.
STO
x
: NST
: DCI
: Fast stop, ramp,
: NST
x: DCI
: Fast stop, ramp,
: Position not observed

by safety function
x
x
x
x

by safety function
x
o
x
x
x
x
x: Loss of motor output phase
detected by safety function
x
o: If the ramp adjustment
reaches the cutoff range, a
SAFF safety fault is triggered.
o: Move command at transition

: Move command at
setpoint not compatible
by safety function
o: Inactive if LI being
used by safety function
o: Except safety parameters
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
[Motor control type] Ctt

[Default] Std
[SVC U] UUC
[Quadr. V/F] UFq
[Energ.sp.fun] nLd
[Sync. mot.] SYn
[V/F 5pts] UF5
[Output Phase Loss] OPL
[Output cut] OAC
[Adj. decel ramp] brA
[CONFIG REF] OAI[2-wire control] 2C
[PTC Management] PtC[Forced local] LCF[LI CONFIGURATION]
[MULTIMOTOR CONFIG] MMC-
344
x
o
x
x
x
x
x: Loss of motor output phase
detected by safety function
x
o: If the ramp adjustment
reaches the cutoff range, a
SAFF safety fault is triggered.

: Move command at
by safety function
o
: Move command at
by safety function
o

Inverter function
[Fault inhibit assign.] InH
[Profile] CHCF
[Macro configuration] CFG
[RAMP TYPE] rPt-
SS1
x
LI being used by safety function cannot be switched.
: Possible overlap of macro
configuration if the safety function is using a logic input requested by the macro configuration
STO
x
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
Chapter 4
[Drive output short circuit] SCF1

[Ground fault] SCF3
[Overspeed] SOF
[Sync. mot.] SYn
Configuration transfer
[Energ.sp.fun] nLd
SLS
x
: SLS ramp
: SLS stable
x
x
345
Integrated safety functions Safety monitoring
6 Safety monitoring
6.1 Status of the safety functions
The HMI on the inverter can be used to monitor the safety functions, but not to configure them.
One monitoring parameter is available for each safety function. The introduction section provides additional information about the safety functions.
How to access the parameter via the operator terminal or HMI:
[2 MONITORING] (MOn-) => [MON. SAFETY] (SAF-)
[STO status] (StOS): Status of the STO (Safe Torque Off) safety function
[SLS status] (SLSS): Status of the SLS (Safely Limited Speed) safety function
[SS1 status] (SS1S): Status of the SS1 (Safe Stop 1) safety function
These status specifications do not correspond to certified safety and are provided for informational purposes only.
Additional information can be found in the programming guide.
6.2 Specific HMI

If the safety function is activated, specific messages can be displayed and certain status words set.
Integrated display terminal and LED key field: Displays the active safety function (STO, SS1, SLS), alternating with
the monitoring parameter.
LED display of SS1 function
SSI
1s
1s
Deceleration ramp
300.
StO
346
Inverter stopped
Waiting for acknowledgment of safety function
Integrated safety functions Safety monitoring
6.3 Inverter response when fault detected

If a fault is detected by the safety function, the inverter switches to the [Flt Safety] (SAFF) state. The inverter can
only be reset by switching it off and back on again.
Detailed information about the potential cause of the state transition can be found by calling the register.
The register of the error detected by the safety function (SFFE: safety function detected fault error) can be accessed
from the display terminal:
DRIVE MENU MONITORING DIAGNOSTICS ADDIT. FAULT INFO SFFE register
or
DRIVE MENU MONITORING MON. SAFETY SFFE register
The SFFE register can also be accessed from the integrated display terminal: DRI MON SAF SFFE
SFFE register
Logic input debounce timeout (make sure that the value of the "LI debounce time" LIDT parameter corresponds to the requirements of the
application).
Reserved
Motor speed sign change during SS1 ramp
Motor speed has reached the SS1 cutoff range
Chapter 4
Bit 0 =
1
Bit 1
Bit 2 =
1
Bit 3 =
1
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6 =
1
Bit 7 =
1
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit12
Bit 13
=1
Bit 14
=1
Bit 15
=1
Reserved
Reserved
Motor speed sign change during SLS limiting
Motor speed has reached the SS1 cutoff range
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Measurement of motor speed not possible (check the wires of the motor connection)
Motor ground short circuit (check the wires of the motor connection)
Motor phase short circuit: phase to phase (check the wires of the motor connection)
This parameter is reset after switching the device off and back on.
347
Integrated safety functions Technical data
7 Technical data
7.1 Logic input for safety function
General logic input can be used to trigger a safety function. The logic inputs must be connected in pairs so that
redundant requests are possible. Only 4 general logic inputs are available to which safety functions can be assigned
(LI3, LI4, LI5, LI6). The following input pairs are prescribed by default:
LI3 and LI4
LI5 and LI6
An additional combination is only allowed for the STO function: LI3 and STO.
Logical input pairs can only be assigned once if they are linked to a safety function. If a safety function is configured
on one LI, then it is not possible to configure an additional function (safety-specific or otherwise) to the same LI. If a
non-safety-related function is configured on one LI, then it is not possible to assign a safety function to the same LI.
Safety functions are only used in sink mode; source mode is not compatible with the safety functions.
348
7.2 Safety function options

The safety functions of a PDS(SR) are part of a global system.
If certain adjustments must be made to achieve the qualitative and quantitative safety goals of the final application
in order to ensure that the safety functions can be used securely, then the basic drive module (BDM) integrator is
responsible for these additional further developments (e.g. managing the mechanical motor brake).
In addition, the output data generated when using the safety functions (standard relay activation, controlling the
brake logic relay, error codes, information on the display, etc.) do not comprise safety-related features.
Machine application
Standard
IEC 61800-5-2 /
IEC 61508
IEC 62061 (1)
EN 954-1 (2)
ISO 13849-1 (3)
IEC 60204-1
(1)
(2)
(3)
STO
SS1 type C
STO
STO and LI3
STO
STO and LI3
With safety relay or With safety relay or With safety relay or with safety relay or
comparable
comparable
comparable
comparable
module
module
module
module
SIL 2
SIL 3
SIL 2
SIL 3
SIL 2 CL
Category 3
Category 3 PL "d"
Stop category 0
SIL 3 CL
Category 4
Category 4 PL "d"
Stop category 0
SIL 2 CL
Category 3
Category 3 PL "d"
Stop category 1
SIL 3 CL
Category 4
Category 4 PL "d"
Stop category 1
SLS
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
SIL 2
SIL 2 CL
Category 3
Category 3 PL "d"
Since the IEC 62061 standard is an integration standard, a distinction is made between the global safety function and the individual components of the safety
function (according to SIL 2 CL or SIL 3 CL for the ACOPOSinverter P74).
See table 6 in the IEC 62061 (2005) standard.
See table 4 in the EN 13849-1 (2008) standard.
Processor application
Function
STO
SLS
SS1 type B
STO
SS1 type C
Configuration
STO
Standard
IEC 61800-5-2 /
IEC 61508
IEC 62061 (1)
(1)
STO and LI3
STO
STO and LI3
With safety relay or With safety relay or
comparable
comparable
module
module
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
SIL 2
SIL 3
SIL 2
SIL 3
SIL 2
SIL 2 CL
SIL 3 CL
SIL 2 CL
SIL 3 CL
SIL 2 CL
Input signals of the safety functions

Input signals of the safety functions
Logic 0 (Ulow)
Logic 1 (Uhigh)
Impedance (24 V)
Debounce time
Response time of the safety function
Unit
V
V
k
ms
ms
Value for LI3 to LI6

<5
>11
3.5
<1
<10
Value for STO

<2
>17
1.5
<1
<10
349
Chapter 4
Function
Configuration

Summary of the safety study
Function
Standard
Input
STO input
IEC 61508 Ed. 2
SFF
PFD10y
PFD1y
PFHequ_1y
Type
Type
DC
SIL potential
SIL CL potential
Category
PL
Category
MTTFd in years
96.7%
7.26*10-4
7.18*10-5
8.20 FIT (1)
B
1
93.1%
2
2
3
d
3
13,900
STO
IEC 62061 (2)
EN 954-1 (3)
ISO 13849-1 (4)
SS1 type B
SLS
IEC 61508 Ed. 2
IEC 62061 (2)

EN 954-1 (3)
ISO 13849-1 (4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
SFF
PFD10y
PFHequ_10y
Type
HFT
DC
SIL potential
SIL CL potential
Category
PL
Category
MTTFd in years
STO input
and LI3
96%
4.00*10-4
3.92*10-5
4.47 FIT (1)
B
1
91.5%
3
3
4
e
4
"L1" 3,850
"L2" 29,300
LI3 and LI4 or

LI5 and LI6
94.8%
2.44*10-3
2.33*10-4
26.6 FIT (1)
B
1
90%
2
2
3
d
3
4,290
93.3%
2.72*10-3
31.1 FIT (1)
B
0
78.7%
2
2
3
d
3
3,670
FIT: Failure in time (period of operation until failure) = Failure/10-9 hours

See table 6 in the IEC 62061 (2005) standard.
See table 4 in the EN 13849-1 (2008) standard.
Maintaining the safety function annually is recommended. Without this yearly maintenance, the safety level will be
reached in shorter intervals.
With respect to the machine environment, the safety relay is required for the STO function. To prevent the safety
relay from being used, the "Restart" function parameters must be made part of the safety function. For detailed
information about the usefulness of the safety relay, see "STO: Safe Torque Off" on page 327.
Note:
The table above is insufficient for assessing the performance level of a drive system. The PL assessment must take place at the system level. The assess the system performance level, the BDM (basic
drive module) installer or integrator has to add the sensor data to the numbers in the table above.
350

Mean time to failure
The MTTF (mean time to failure) values of the ACOPOSinverter P74 are listed in the following section.
MTTF based on IEC 62380
These values are specified for operation at an ambient temperature of 30C.
The fan in the ACOPOSinverter P74 is subject to wear and tear and must be replaced in the course of maintenance.
Model number
8I74S200018.01P-1
8I74S200037.01P-1
8I74S200055.01P-1
8I74S200075.01P-1
8I74S200110.01P-1
8I74S200150.01P-1
8I74S200220.01P-1
8I74T400037.01P-1
8I74T400055.01P-1
8I74T400075.01P-1
8I74T400110.01P-1
8I74T400150.01P-1
8I74T400220.01P-1
8I74T400300.01P-1
8I74T400400.01P-1
8I74T400550.01P-1
8I74T400750.01P-1
8I74T401100.01P-1
8I74T401500.01P-1
1)
Fan
MTTF value for intermittent operation 1)
MTTF value for continuous operation
Yes
190 000 h
115 000 h
Yes
190 000 h
115 000 h
Yes
190 000 h
115 000 h
Yes
195 000 h
115 000 h
Yes
75 000 h
50 000 h
Yes
75 000 h
50 000 h
Chapter 4
For this reason, the fan is not taken into account in the MTTF evaluation.
Intermittent operation: 4020 operating hours and 335x on/off cycles per year
MTTF values from the field

MTTF values for the ACOPOSinverter are between 1,000,000 and 3,000,000 hours.
Note:
MTTF: Mean time to failure (in hours, corresponds to the average failure interval)
MTBF: Mean time between 2 failures = MTTF + MTTR
MTTR: Mean time to repair (average repair time)
351

7.2.1 Recommended circuit breaker for IEC applications
ACOPOSinverter P74
Motor power
Product ID
Model number
kW
HP
1-phase 200-240 V 50/60 Hz
0.18
1/4
8I74S200018.01P-1
GV2 L08
0.37
1/2
8I74S200037.01P-1
GV2 L10
0.55
3/4
8I74S200055.01P-1
GV2 L14
0.75
1
8I74S200075.01P-1
GV2 L16
1.1
11/2
8I74S200110.01P-1
GV2 L16
1.5
2
8I74S200150.01P-1
GV2 L20
2.2
3
8I74S200220.01P-1
GV2 L22
3-phase 380-500 V 50/60 Hz
0.37
1/2
8I74T400037.01P-1
GV2 L07
0.55
3/4
8I74T400055.01P-1
GV2 L08
0.75
1
8I74T400075.01P-1
GV2 L08
1.1
11/2
8I74T400110.01P-1
GV2 L10
1.5
2
8I74T400150.01P-1
GV2 L14
2.2
3
8I74T400220.01P-1
GV2 L14
3
8I74T400300.01P-1
GV2 L16
4
5
8I74T400400.01P-1
GV2 L16
5.5
71/2
8I74T400550.01P-1
GV2 L22
7.5
10
8I74T400750.01P-1
GV2 L32
11
15
8I74T401100.01P-1
GV3 L40
15
20
8I74T401500.01P-1
GV3 L50
(1)
352
Circuit breaker (1)

Rating
Max. short circuit Icu
A
kA
4
6.3
10
14
14
18
25
>100
>100
>100
>100
>100
>100
50
2.5
4
4
6.3
10
10
14
14
25
32
40
50
>100
>100
>100
>100
>100
>100
50
50
50
50
50
50
This product is not included in B&R's product portfolio and can be obtained from Schneider Electric. Additional information can be found online at
www.schneider-electric.com.
7.3 Debounce and response time

The ACOPOSinverter P74 makes available 2 parameters for configuring an LI for the safety function (LI3, LI4,
LI5, LI6).
The composition of each logical input pair is checked continuously.
LI debounce time (LIdt): During the debounce time, a deviation of the logical state is permitted between LI3-LI4
and LI5-LI6.
LI response time (LIrt): Managing the response time makes it possible to shift the activation of the safety function.
2
1
2
LI debounce time
LI response time
SS1 activation
SLS activation
Chapter 4
STO activation
Detected
U error
353
7.4 Multiple certified architectures
Important!
The safe inputs on the ACOPOSinverter P74 are not floating; they have a permanent GND connection.
The safe inputs can therefore only be switched with the B&R X20SO6300 safety module and relay
modules (e.g. X20SC2432).
Note:
For certification with respect to functional aspects, only the safety-related power drive system PDS(SR)
is taken into account, not the complete system in which the power drive is integrated to ensure the
functional safety of a machine, system or process.
The following architectures are certified:
Multi-drive with safety relay - Scenario 1

Multi-drive with safety relay - Scenario 2
Multi-drive without safety relay
Process control system - Scenario 1
Example A
Example B
Process control system - Scenario 2

Example A
Example B
Safety in accordance with IEC 61508 and IEC 60204-1 - Scenario 1
Safety in accordance with IEC 61508 and IEC 60204-1 - Scenario 2
The safety functions of the PDS(SR) are part of a global system.
If certain adjustments must be made to achieve the qualitative and quantitative safety goals of the final application
in order to ensure that the safety functions can be used securely, then the basic drive module (BDM) integrator is
responsible for these additional further developments (e.g. managing the mechanical motor brake).
In addition, the output data generated when using the safety functions (standard relay activation, controlling the
brake logic relay, error codes, information on the display, etc.) do not comprise safety-related features.
354

7.4.1 Multi-drive with safety relay - Scenario 1
Safety in accordance with EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1 and IEC 60204-1
The following configurations apply for the following diagram:
STO category 4, PL e / SIL 3: Machine with safety controller using a safety relay, LI3 = STO
SLS category 3, PL d / SIL 2 or SS1 type B category 3 on LI5/LI6
or
STO category 4, PL e / SIL 3: Machine with safety controller using a safety relay, LI3 = STO
LI4/LI5 not assigned to a safety function
24 V
+24 V
0V
L1
A1
S34
S33
S33
S39
23
33
33
14
24
24
34
34
K1
K1
Logic Logic
XPS AF
A2
A2
13
Chapter 4
F1
S11
S12
S12
S21
K2
K2
S22
S22
N
Sink
Ext
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
P24
LI4
LI5
LI4
+24
PA/+
LI6
STO
Int
R1B
PC/-
PB
R1C
R1A
PBe
T / L3
S / L2
W / T3
Source
W1
V / T2
U / T1
U1
V1
A1
R / L1
SW1
M
~
33~
Sink
Ext
P24
LI5
+24
PA/+
PC/-
PB
W1
LI6
STO
Int
R1B
R1C
R1A
Source
(4)
PBe
W / T3
T / L3
S / L2
V / T2
U / T1
U1
V1
A2
R / L1
SW1
M
~
33~
(4) Other safety controller switching possibility
355

7.4.2 Multi-drive with safety relay - Scenario 2
Safety in accordance with EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1 and IEC 60204-1 (machine)
STO category 3, PL d / SIL 2: Machine with safety controller using a safety relay
SLS category 3, PL d / SIL 2 or SS1 type B category 3 on LI3/LI4 or LI5/LI6
24 V
+24 V
0V
L1
F1
A1
S33
S33
S34
S39
T
Logic Logic
XPS AF
A2
A2
13
23
33
33
14
24
34
34
K1
K1
S11
S12
S12
S21
K2
K2
S22
S22
N
Sink
Ext
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
P24
LI4
LI5
LI4
+24
PA/+
LI6
STO
Int
R1B
PC/-
PB
R1C
R1A
PBe
T / L3
S / L2
W / T3
Source
W1
V / T2
U / T1
U1
V1
A1
R / L1
SW1
M
~
33~
Sink
Ext
+24
PA/+
(4)
(4)
P24
LI5
STO
Int
LI6
R1B
PC/-
PB
R1A
R1C
Source
W1
PBe
W / T3
T / L3
S / L2
V / T2
U / T1
U1
V1
A2
R / L1
SW1
M
~
33~
(4) Other safety controller switching possibility
356

7.4.3 Multi-drive without safety relay
Multi-drive without safety relay in accordance with IEC 61508
Chapter 4
STO SIL 2 on STO

SLS SIL 2 or SS1 type B SIL 2 on LI3/LI4 or LI5/LI6
or
STO SIL 2 on STO
SLS or SS1 type B an LI3/LI4
or
STO SIL 2 on STO
LI3/LI4 and LI5/LI6 not assigned to a safety function
or
STO SIL 3 on STO and LI3
SLS SIL 2 or SS1 type B SIL 2 on LI5/LI6
LI4 not assigned to a safety function
or
LI4 and LI5/LI6 not assigned to a safety function
24 V
+24 V
0V
Sink
Ext
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
P24
LI4
LI5
LI4
+24
PA/+
LI6
STO
Int
R1B
PC/-
PB
R1C
R1A
PBe
T / L3
S / L2
W / T3
Source
W1
V / T2
U / T1
U1
V1
A1
R / L1
SW1
M
~
33~
Sink
Ext
P24
LI5
+24
PA/+
LI6
STO
Int
R1B
PC/-
PB
R1C
R1A
Source
W1
PBe
W / T3
T / L3
S / L2
V / T2
U / T1
U1
V1
A2
R / L1
SW1
M
~
33~
357

7.4.4 Process control system - Scenario 1
7.4.4.1 Example A
SS1 type C category 3, PL d / SIL 2 on STO with safety relay
or
or
SS1 type C category 3, PL d / SIL 2 on STO and LI3 with safety relay
+ 24 V
A1
S13 S11 S31
S32
S12
S14
03
13
Y40
04
14
23
37
37 47
57
Y+
Y+
Y64
Y74
Y84
Output 1
S21
S3
S22
K3/K4
Output 2
Output
S34
24
38
48 58
Stop
according to
S1
22
14 13
Estop
21
S33
Error
Channel 2 logic
2
A2 Y39
Output
Output 2
Output 1
Output
K1/K2
Channel11logic
logic
Channel
1
Start
ESC
N
Sink
LI1
COM
LI2
LI3
P24
LI4
LI5
STO
+24
LI6
R1B
PC/-
PA/+
R1A
T / L3
S / L2
R1C
PB
PBe
W / T3
Ext
Source
Int
W1
V / T2
U / T1
U1
V1
A1
R / L1
SW1
M
M
3~
33~
~
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
+24
LI6
24 V
LI6
A1
+24 V
0V
+24
A1
358

7.4.4.2 Example B
STO category 3, PL d / SIL 2 on STO with safety relay
SLS category 3, PL d / SIL 2 or SS1 type B category 3 on LI3/LI4 or LI5/LI6
or
or
L1 (+)
F1
Source
Sink
S2
Ext
Start
ESC
Int
A1
A1
S34
S34
S33
S33
S39
S39
23
33
14
24
34
34
K1
K1
Logic Logic
XPS AF
A2
A2
13
13
Chapter 4
SW1
S11
S12
S12
K2
K2
S21
S22
S22
S1
LI1
COM
LI2
LI3
P24
LI4
LI5
STO
LI6
+24
PA/+
R1B
PC/-
R1C
PB
R1A
PBe
S / L2
T / L3
W / T3
W1
V / T2
U / T1
U1
V1
A1
R / L1
M
M
~~
33~
3~
LI6
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
+24 V
LI6
+24
A1
+24 V
0V
+24
A1
359

7.4.5 Process control system - Scenario 2
7.4.5.1 Example A
SS1 type C category 4, PL d / SIL 3 on STO and LI3 with safety relay
or
SLS category 3, PL d / SIL 2 or SS1 type B category 3 PL d / SIL 2 on LI5/LI6
L1
F1
A1
S13 S11 S31
S32
S12
S14
03
13
Y40
04
14
23
37
37 47
57
Y+
Y+
Y64
Y74
Y84
Output 1
S21
S3
S22
K3/K4
Output 2
Output
S34
24
38
48 58
Stop
according to
S1
22
14 13
Estop
21
S33
Error
Output 1
Output
Channel 2 logic
2
A2 Y39
Output
Output 2
K1/K2
Channel11logic
logic
Channel
1
Start
ESC
Sink
LI1
COM
LI2
LI3
P24
LI4
LI5
LI6
STO
+24
PA/+
R1B
PC/-
R1A
R1C
PB
PBe
S / L2
T / L3
W / T3
Ext
Source
Int
W1
V / T2
U / T1
U1
V1
A1
R / L1
SW1
M
M
3~
33~
~
LI6
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
+ 24 V
LI6
+24
A1
+24 V
0V
+24
A1
360

7.4.5.2 Example B
Safety in accordance with EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061 and IEC 60204-1 (machine)
STO category 4, PL e / SIL 3 on STO with safety relay, LI3 = STO
L1
F1
Sink
S2
Ext
Source
Int
Start
ESC
A1
A1
S34
S34
S33
S33
S39
S39
23
33
14
24
34
34
K1
K1
Logic Logic
XPS AF
A2
A2
13
13
S11
S12
S12
K2
K2
S21
S22
S22
Chapter 4
SW1
S1
LI1
COM
LI2
LI3
P24
LI4
LI5
STO
LI6
+24
PA/+
R1B
PC/-
R1C
PB
R1A
PBe
T / L3
S / L2
V / T2
W / T3
W1
U / T1
U1
V1
A1
R / L1
M
M
~~
33~
3~
LI6
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
+24 V
LI6
+24
A1
+24 V
0V
+24
A1
361

7.4.6 Safety in accordance with IEC 61508 and IEC 60204-1 - Scenario 1
Without protection against power supply interruption or voltage reduction and subsequent rotation
STO SIL 2 on STO
STO or SLS SIL2 or SS1 type B SIL 2 on LI3/LI4 or LI5/LI6
or
STO SIL 2 on STO
STO or SLS or SS1 type B on LI3/LI4
or
STO SIL 2 on STO
or
or
LI4 and LI5/LI6 not assigned to a safety function
Sink
COM
LI1
LI2
P24
LI3
LI4
STO
LI5
LI6
+24
PA/+
R1B
PC/-
PB
R1C
R1A
PBe
T / L3
S / L2
V / T2
W / T3
W1
U1
U / T1
A1
R / L1
Ext
Source
Int
V1
SW1
(4)
M
3~
LI6
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
LI6
LI5
LI4
LI3
LI2
LI1
COM
+24
A1
(4)
+24 V
+24 V
0V
+24
A1
(4)
362

7.4.7 Safety in accordance with IEC 61508 and IEC 60204-1 - Scenario 2
Without protection against power supply interruption or voltage reduction and subsequent rotation
STO SIL 2 on LI3 and LI4
or
STO SIL 2 on LI3 and LI4
Source
Ext
Chapter 4
LI2
LI1
COM
LI1
COM
LI3
LI2
LI3
P24
LI4
STO
LI6
LI6
LI5
+24
+24
PA/+
R1B
PC/-
PB
R1C
R1A
PBe
T / L3
W / T3
V / T2
W1
U1
U / T1
A1
S / L2
Int
R / L1
Sink
V1
SW1
+24 V
LI4
LI5
STO
A1
P24
M
3~
+24 V
0V
363
Integrated safety functions Installation
8 Installation
8.1 ACPi Parameter Tool
Note:
Safety functions are configured using the ACPi Parameter Tool.
8.1.1 Installation
Required installation files
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 or higher is required to install this software.
Note:
The installation order must be observed in order to ensure easy and safe installation.
If steps are performed out of order, installations may have to be repeated or even carried out manually!
Modbus DTM library V2.0.2

ACPiP DTM library V0.13.0
ACPi Parameter Tool
Connect the TSXCUSB485 USB adapter
SchemaFilesHotFixSetup
8.1.2 Configuring the ACPi Parameter Tool

Open the ACPi Parameter Tool.
The container usually recognizes when new DTMs have been installed but have not yet been added to the device
catalog.
This is indicated by the message box shown in figure 1.
Click on "Yes" to confirm this message.
Figure 15: Updating the device catalog
If this message doesn't appear at startup, then the update must be carried out manually.
On the right side of the program is a window entitled "Device catalog". If it is not there, it can be displayed by
selecting "View Device catalog" from the menu.
This window has a button for updating the DTMs (figure 2).
364
Figure 16: Button for updating the device catalog manually
8.1.3 Creating a project

After the ACPi Parameter Tool has been configured, a new project can be created.
To start, move the DTM "Modbus Serial Communication DTM" (figure 3) found under "Vendors Schneider Electric"
to the root node of the network view (figure 4) using drag-and-drop.
The network view is docked to the left side of the application.
Chapter 4
If it is not there, it can be displayed by selecting "View Network view" from the menu.
Figure 17: Modbus Serial Communication DTM
Figure 18: Root node in the network view
Now the DTM for the drive will be attached to the communication DTM using drag-and-drop.
The drives can be found under "Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H" (figure 5).
365
Figure 19: "Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H" drive DTMs
The network view should then appear as shown in figure 6 depending on the drive selected.
The ACOPOSinverter P74 is being used in this example.
Figure 20: Completed network view
Now double-click on the communication DTM to open up the dialog box shown in figure 7.
This is where the settings are made for the serial connection.
Choose the correct COM port for the adapter in the "Configuration" tab.
366
Chapter 4
Figure 21: Configuring the communication DTM
You can find the corresponding COM port in the Device Manager under "Ports (COM and LPT)" (figure 8).
Figure 22: List of ports in the Device Manager
You will now select your ACOPOSinverter and its option board.
To do so, double-click on the drive DTM.
The window in figure 9 opens for the ACOPOSinverter P74.
After you have selected your drive and option board, click on "OK".
367
Figure 23: Dialog box for the ACOPOSinverter P84
The configuration window for setting up and monitoring the drive opens automatically (figure 10).
Now that all of the basic settings have been made, the project can be saved.
368
Chapter 4
Figure 24: ACOPOSinverter P74 configuration window
8.1.4 Establishing drive communication

Now the online connection to the drive will be enabled.
To do so, right-click on the drive DTM.
From the shortcut menu, select "Go online" (figure 11).
Figure 25: Drive DTM shortcut menu
Whether or not the online connection has been established is indicated by the bold lettering in the network view.
To transfer data, click on the button "Parameter download to device" (figure 12).
Figure 26: Parameter download to device
369

A warning notice opens that can be closed again by pressing Alt+F (figure 13).
Figure 27: Warning notice
Click the button "Switch to synchronized mode" at the top left edge of the "ACPiP74 - Configuration" tab to switch
the program to synchronization mode (figure 14).
From this point on, the parameters on the device can be changed online.
First the warning notice (figure 13) must also be confirmed with Alt+F.
Figure 28: Switching synchronized mode
The red box in figure 15 shows where to look to see if synchronization mode has been enabled successfully.
Values are transferred to the device as soon as they are confirmed.
Figure 29: Data synchronized
The "Parameter upload from device" option allows you to load the configuration from the drive (figure 16).
370
Chapter 4
Figure 30: Parameter upload from device
371

"Safety" tab
To access the safety configuration, click on the "Safety" tab.
This window is write-protected and is used to display all current safety configurations.
The "Safety" tab allows you to access the following information:

An overview of the available safety functions of the ACOPOSinverter P74 (available online/offline)
The status of all inputs/outputs in online mode
General information about the machine (online/offline)
You can also access the following buttons:
Configure (only available in online mode)
Safety password (define/edit)
Reset password
Reset safety
372

How to configure safety functions
You must first make sure that you are in online mode, see "ACPi Parameter Tool" on page 364.
If you are in online mode, click on the "Configure" button under the "Safety" tab.
This will open a dialog box where you can enter or define your password.
Initial scenario
Second scenario
You have not yet defined a password. In this case, you must select a value between 1 and 65535. The
value 0 is not permitted for passwords.
The "Configure safety" window will now be displayed.
373
Chapter 4
You have already defined a password. Enter the password here:
8.2 "Configure safety" window

The "Configure safety" window contains the following tabs: "Information", "STO", "SLS", "SS1" and "I/O".
"Information" tab
The "Information" tab allows safety information to be defined.

This safety information is displayed under the "Information" tab of the "safe" HMI system.
The following information is provided automatically by the ACPi Parameter Tool.
Date (and time) the format depends on the PC's regional settings
Device type
Model number of the inverter
Information to be entered manually:
374
Serial number of the device

Name of the device
Company name
Name of the end user
Comments
For the STO function (Safe Torque Off), it is only necessary to select the assigned input pairs in the combo box.
The following parameters must be managed: STOA.
Code
StO
StOA
nO
L3P.
LI34
LI56
Name / Description
Adjustment range
Factory setting
[Safe stop]
[STO assignment]
No
[No]: Not assigned
[LI3 and STO]: LI 3/STO Status low
[LI3 and LI4]: LI 3/4 Status low
This parameter configures the channel that is used to activate the STO function. If STOA=No is set, the STO function is always active, but only
on the STO input.
For additional information about the STO function, see "STO: Safe Torque Off" on page 327.
375
Chapter 4
"STO" tab

"SLS" tab
For additional information about the SLS function, Safely Limited Speed see "SLS: Safely Limited Speed" on page
331
Code
SLS
SLSA
nO
LI3_4
LI5_6
SLt
tYp1
tYp2
tYp3
SLSP
SLtt
SSrt
SSrU
1H
10H
100H
SStt
SSSL
376
Name / Description
Adjustment range
Factory setting
[Speed limited]
[SLS assignment]
No
[No]: Not assigned
This parameter configures the channel that is used to activate the SLS function.
[SL1 ramp unit]
Type 1
[Type 1]: SLS type 1
This parameter is used to select the SLS type. Information about the behavior of the different types is available in the function description.
[Set point]
0 to 599 Hz
0
This parameter is only displayed if SLT = TYP2 or SLT = TYP3. SLSP is used to set the speed limit.
[SLS tolerance threshold]
0 to 599 Hz
0
The behavior of this parameter depends on the SLT value.
[SS1 RampValue]
1 to 5,990
1
The unit depends on the SSRU parameter.
Use this parameter to determine the value of the SS1 ramp.
SS1 ramp = SSRT*SSRU. Example: If SSRT=250 and SSRU=1 Hz/s, then the ramp speed = 25 Hz/s.
This parameter is specific. It is identical to the SS1 safety function configured under a different tab.
[SL1 ramp unit]
1 Hz/s
[1 Hz/s]
[10 Hz/s]
[100 Hz/s]
This parameter can be used to predefine the unit for the SSRT value.
[SS1 cutoff value]
0 to 599 Hz
0
This parameter defines the tolerance range of the deceleration ramp, inside of which the frequency can vary.
[SLS/SS1 standstill level]
0 to 599 Hz
0
This parameter specifies the frequency at which the inverter should switch to the STO state at the end of the SS1 ramp.
Code
SS1
SS1A
nO
LI3_4
LI5_6
SSrt
SSrU
1H
10H
100H
SStt
SSSL
Name / Description
Adjustment range
Factory setting
[Safe ramp]
[SS1 assignment]
No
[No]: Not assigned
This parameter configures the channel that is used to activate the SS1 function.
[SS1 RampValue]
1 to 599
1
The unit depends on the SSRU parameter.
Use this parameter to determine the value of the SS1 ramp.
SS1 ramp = SSRT*SSRU.
Example: If SSRT=250 and SSRU=1 Hz/s, then the ramp speed = 25 Hz/s.
This parameter is specific. It is identical to the SLS safety function configured under a different tab.
[SL1 ramp unit]
1 Hz/s
[1 Hz/s]
[10 Hz/s]
[100 Hz/s]
This parameter can be used to predefine the unit for the SSRT value. This parameter is specific. It is identical to the SLS safety function configured
under a different tab.
[SS1 cutoff value]
0 to 599 Hz
0
This parameter defines the tolerance range of the deceleration ramp, inside of which the frequency can vary.
[SLS/SS1 standstill level]
0 to 599 Hz
0
This parameter specifies the frequency at which the inverter should switch to the STO state at the end of the SS1 ramp.
377
Chapter 4
"SS1" tab

"I/O" tab
Code
IO
LIdt
LIrt
378
Name / Description
Adjustment range
Factory setting
[I/O parameters]
[LI debounce time]
1 to 2,000 ms
50
In most cases, the two LIs in a LI safety pair (LI3 and LI4, LI5 and LI6) are not 100% synchronized. This means that they do not change their state
at exactly the same time. A slight deviation exists when both of the LIs change their state.
LIDT is the parameter that can be used to define this deviation. If both LIs change their state within a time period that is shorter than LIDT, then
the inverter assumes that the LI transition is simultaneous.
If the deviation is longer than the LIDT, then the inverter assumes that the LIs are no longer synchronized and a safety fault is triggered.
[LI response time]
0 to 50 ms
0
This parameter is used to filter short pulses on the LI. In certain applications, the controller transmits short pulses over the wire to test the LI. This
parameter can be used to filter out these short pulses. Commands are only considered if their duration is longer than that of the LIRT value.
If the duration is shorter, the inverter assumes that it is not dealing with a command. In this case, the command is filtered out.
8.3 Safety reset

The "Reset safety" function makes it possible to remove the safety function from the device. To access this function,
click on the "Reset safety" button under the "Safety" tab (see "ACPi Parameter Tool" on page 371).
Enter your password once and then again for confirmation.
Chapter 4
All safety parameters will then be reset to their corresponding factory settings.
379
8.4 Password management

Changing the password
The "Change password" function makes it possible to change the password in the inverter.
This is done by selecting the "Change password" button under the "Safety" tab.
In order for the safety password to be changed, a session must be opened in the inverter. When a safety session
is opened, the valid safety password is passed to the inverter.
You will have to select a value between 1 and 65535. The value 0 is not permitted for this password. Only numbers
are permitted to be used when creating the password. All other characters are not accepted.
Resetting the password
It is possible that you will forget the safety password defined in the inverter.
In order to reset the inverter in this case, you will have to known the universal password.
This password can be obtained from B&R Support.
At the end of this procedure, the device reverts back to a state with an undefined safety password, and the safety
session is closed automatically.
The function configuration remains unchanged, however.
380
Chapter 4
8.5 Safety function monitoring and status
Note:
These parameters can also be read in the I/O mapping in Automation Studio.
One parameter specifies whether the inverter is in a safe or non-safe state (safety function configured):
No safety function configured: STD
Safety function configured: SFTY
Safety status
Code
SAFStOS
IdLE
StO
FLt
SLSS
nO
IdLE
SS1
SLS
StO
FLt
SSIS
nO
IdLE
SS1
StO
FLt
SAFSFtY
IStO
SAFE
Name / Description
[MONIT. SAFETY]
[STO status]
Status of the STO (Safe Torque Off) safety function
[Inactive]: STO not active
[Safe stop]: STO active
[Fault]: STO in error state
[SLS status]
Status of the SLS (Safely Limited Speed) safety function
[Not config.]: SLS not configured
[Inactive]: SLS not active
[Safe ramp]: SLS ramp active
[Speed limited]: SLS speed limit active
[Safe stop]: SLS request for safe torque cutoff active
[Fault]: SLS in error state
[SLS status]
Status of the SS1 (Safe Stop 1) safety function
[Not config.]: SS1 not configured
[Inactive]: SS1 not active
[Safe ramp]: SS1 ramp active
[Safe stop]: SS1 request for safe torque cutoff active
[Fault]: SS1 in error state
[MONIT. SAFETY]
[Drive status safe.]
Safety status of the inverter
[Standard]: Standard device without a configured safety function
[Safe]: Safe device with at least 1 configured safety function
381
Integrated safety functions Device signature
9 Device signature
9.1 Introduction
During acceptance testing for systems with integrated safety functions, the focus is primarily on the validation of
the safety-specific monitoring and stop functions configured in the inverter.
The configuration of the defined safety functions and test mechanisms are checked for adequacy, and the reaction
of specific monitoring functions is tested by explicitly entering values outside the tolerance limits. Testing covers
all of the safety-related monitoring functions as well as the globally integrated safety function configured in the
ACOPOSinverter P74.
Requirements for acceptance testing
The machine has been wired properly.
All safety features such as safety door monitoring equipment, light curtains and E-stop buttons must be
connected and ready for operation.
All motor and command parameters must be configured as needed in the inverter.
382
9.2 Acceptance testing procedure

Acceptance testing is configured using the ACPi Parameter Tool.
Select the following menu item: "Device Additional functions Safety function Machine signature". Now
perform the 5 steps listed below.
Chapter 4
Step 1: General information
The information displayed here is defined in the "Identification" folder under the "Safety" tab. It cannot be changed
here.
To include this step in the final report, select "Add to device signature".
Then click on "Next".
383

Step 2: Function summary
This step is composed of a number of sub-steps.
Each sub-step affects a safety function:
STO
SLS
SS1
A function diagram and parameter values are displayed in the sub-step of a function. A text field allows you to
enter additional text in this step.
To include a function in the final report, select "Add to device signature".
384
Chapter 4
Step 3: I/O summary
The information displayed here is defined in the "IOSummary" folder under the "Safety" tab.
The LIs assigned to a safety function are shown in red and make reference to the associated safety function.
LIs that are not assigned to a safety function show no such mapping and are displayed in green.
385

Step 4: Test
In this step, enable the checkbox when the test of the safety functions is completed to ensure that you have checked
for the correct behavior of the functions for all devices.
386
Chapter 4
Step 5: Key
The checksum of the safety parameters is displayed at the same time as editing and can be transmitted to the
connected device by clicking on "Apply".
This allows you to compare the checksum value with the one on the graphic display terminal in the "Identification"
menu.
Click on the "Finish" button to create the report.
387
9.3 Acceptance report

The ACPi Parameter Tool creates the acceptance report.
The software can generate the safety signature of the inverter. This function creates a final report for internal
informational purposes if the inverter is configured as "safe" and has been declared "operationally safe".
This report is considered a device signature and certifies the proper operation of all "safety functions".
The safety report can be sent to a printer or saved in PDF format.
Whenever changes are made to the inverter configuration (not just to the safety parameters), acceptance
testing must be performed again.
388
Integrated safety functions Service and maintenance
10 Service and maintenance

10.1 Maintenance
Additional information can be found in the installation and programming guides.
Preventive maintenance
It is recommended to check the safety functions annually.
Example: Open the safety door to ensure that the inverter stops in accordance with the configured safety function.
Replacing the power supply and motor controller
You can replace the motor controllers (APP + HMI card) and the power supply. Depending on its configuration
(safety function active or inactive), the inverter's response to switching out these modules will vary.
If the power supply module is replaced while keeping the motor controller unit, then the safety configuration is not
lost. You only have to perform acceptance testing again in order to avoid incorrect wiring or improper behavior of
the safety function.
Replacing machine components
Note:
If a machine component outside of the ACOPOSinverter P74 (motor, E-stop, etc.) has to be replaced,
then acceptance testing must be repeated.
389
Chapter 4
When replacing the motor controller unit, the safety configuration will be lost. You will then need to reconfigure the
motor controller (see "ACPi Parameter Tool" on page 371) and then perform acceptance testing again.
Accessories
Chapter 5 Accessories
ACOPOSinverter P74 - graphic display
Model number
8I0XD301.300-1 (1)
Short description
ACOPOSinverter P74 graphic display, 8 rows, 240 x 160 Pixel, background illumination, function button, navigation button,
IP54 protection
Remote mounting kit for graphic display, IP54 protection
Front cover for the remote mounting kit of the graphic display, IP65 protection
Graphic display remote cable 1 m for ACOPOSinverter P74 (RJ45 RJ45)
Graphic display remote cable 3 m for ACOPO Sinverter P74 (RJ45 RJ45)
RJ45 adapter for graphic display
8I0XD302.300-1 (2)
8I0XD303.300-1(3)
8I0XD304.301-1(4)
8I0XD304.303-1(4)
8I0XD304.305-1(4)
8I0XD304.310-1(4)
8I0XD305.300-1(5)
The optional graphic display can be used with APOCOSinverter P74.

It enables the following:
Control, adjustment and configuration of the converter

Display of current values (engine, values of input and output and so on.)
Save and download configurations (up to 4 configuration files can be saved)
The following accessories are available:
A remote mounting kit for mounting in the door of a control cabinet with IP54
protection
A transparent cover that can be fastened to the remote mounting mechanism for
IP65 protection
A cable for the connection of the graphic display tot he ACOPOSinverter P74converter.
A RJ45 adapter for the connection of the graphic display to the remote cable
ACOPOSinverter P74 smoothing coils

Model number
8I0CS004.000-1
8I0CS007.000-1
8I0CS018.000-1
8I0CT004.000-1
8I0CT010.000-1
8I0CT016.000-1
8I0CT030.000-1
Short description
Smoothing coil single-phase 4 A, 1x 200 -240 V, 0,18 -0,37 KW
Smoothing coil single-phase 7 A, 1x 200-240 V, 0,55-0,75 kW
Smoothing coil single-phase 18 A, 1x 200-240 V, 1,1-2,2 kW
Smoothing coil three-phase 4 A, 3x 380-500 V, 0,37-1,5 kW
Smoothing coil three-phase 10 A, 3x 380-500 V, 2,2-4 kW
Smoothing coil three-phase 16 A, 3x 380-500 V, 5,5-7,5 kW
Smoothing coil three-phase 30 A, 3x 380-500 V, 11-15 kW
Improved protection against over voltages in the mains supply and reduction of the distortion factor in the power produced
by the inverter.
Limitation of the mains current.
Using smoothing coils is recommended under the following conditions:
390
Connection of several parallel converters in low distances.

Mains supply with disturbances by other devices (interferences, over voltages).
Mains supply with voltage unbalance between phased >1,8 % of the nominal voltage.
Converter supplied by one cable with very low impedance (near power transformers 10 times higher than the
nominal value of the converter).
Connection of a high number of converters to one cable.
Reduction of overload of the capacitors for the cosine correction, if the plant comprises an appliance for performance factor correction.
Accessories
Model number
8I0FS009.200-1
Short description
EMC Filter single-phase 9 A, Side building assembly, 1x 200-240 V, 0,18-0,75 kW
8I0FS016.200-1
EMC Filter single-phase 16 A, Side building assembly, 1x 200-240 V, 1,1-1,5 kW
8I0FS022.200-1
EMC Filter single-phase 22 A, Side building assembly, 1x 200-240 V, 2,2 kW
8I0FT015.200-1
EMC Filter three-phase 15 A, Side building assembly, 3x 380-500 V, 0,37-1,5 kW
8I0FT025.200-1
EMC Filter three-phase 25 A, Side building assembly, 3x 380-500 V, 2,2-4 kW
8I0FT047.200-1
EMC Filter three-phase 47 A, Unter- oder Side building assembly, 3x 380-500 V, 5,5-7,5 kW
8I0FT049.200-1
EMC Filter three-phase 49 A, Unter- oder Side building assembly, 3x 380-500 V, 11-15 kW
Additional EMC filters are intended to reduce line-conducted emissions from the mains supply to a level under
the limits specified in IEC/EN 61800-3, category C1, C2 or C3 in environment 1 (public mains) or 2 (industrial
mains) depending on the inverter power.
Data for detecting permitted length of the shielded engine cable can be found in the characteristics of the
ACOPOSinverter P74-inverter, in Cable-related and radiated interference emission
Additional EMC filters can only be used for TN (neutral) and TT (neutral-ground) connection types.
ACOPOSinverter P74 Brake resistors

Model number
8I0BR028.000-1
8I0BR060.000-1
8I0BR100.000-1
Short description
Brake resistor 28 Ohm, continuous brake power 0,2 kW,3x 380-500 V, 11-15 kW
Brake resistor 60 Ohm, continuous brake power 0,1 kW, 1x 200-240 V, 2,2 kW
Brake resistor 100 Ohm, continuous brake power 0,05 kW, 1x 200-240 V, 0,18-1,5 kW and 3x 380-500 V, 0,37-4 kW
The brake resistor enables the ACOPOSinverter-inverter to run braking or slowly braking by conducting away brake
energy.
It permits a maximum short-term braking torque.
The resistors are intended for being assembled outside oft he housing, but they may not influence natural cooling. Air
inlets and outlets may not be blocked.
The air has to be free of dust, condensation, and corrosive gases.
ACOPOSinverter P74 Optional accessories

Model number
8I0XC001.003-1
Short description
ACOPOSinverter USB Modbus universal cable 3 m, PC - ACOPOSinverter connection
391
Chapter 5
Accessories
ACOPOSinverterP74 Additional EMC filters
Accessories ACOPOSinverter P74 - additional EMC filter
1 ACOPOSinverter P74 - additional EMC filter

Technical data
Product ID
Power loss
Max. nominal voltage
Nominal filter current
Max. fault current
Installation at altitudes above sea level
EN 60529 protection
Max. relative humidity in accordance with IEC
60068-2-3
Ambient temperature
Temperature
Storage
Weight
Installation
General information
Conformity to the standard
8I0FS009.200-1
8I0FS016.200-1
8I0FS022.200-1
3.7 W
6.9 W
1x 240 VAC +10%
16 A
150 mA
7.5 W
9A
100 mA
22 A
80 mA
0 to 1000 m 1)
IP21 and IP41 on the upper part
In preparation
-10 to 60C
-25 to 70C
0.6 kg
0.775 kg
Below or next to the inverter
1.13 kg
EN 133200
Table 14: 8I0FS009.200-1, 8I0FS016.200-1, 8I0FS022.200-1 - Technical data

1)
Over 1000 m, current reduced by 1% per 100 m
Product ID
Power loss
Max. nominal voltage
Nominal filter current
Max. fault current
EN 60529 protection
Max. relative humidity in accordance
with IEC 60068-2-3
Ambient temperature
Temperature
Storage
Weight
Installation
General information
8I0FT015.200-1
8I0FT025.200-1
8I0FT047.200-1
8I0FT049.200-1
9.9 W
15.8 W
19.3 W
27.4 W
3x 500 VAC + 10%

15 A
15 mA
25 A
35 mA
47 A
49 A
45 mA
0 to 1000 m 1)
IP21 and IP41 on the upper part
95%, non-condensing
No dripping water
-10 to 60C
-25 to 70C
1.0 kg
1.65 kg
3.15 kg
Below or next to the inverter
4.75 kg
EN 133200
Table 15: 8I0FT015.200-1, 8I0FT025.200-1, 8I0FT047.200-1, 8I0FT049.200-1 - Technical data

1)
392
Over 1000 m, current reduced by 1% per 100 m
1.1 Dimensions of EMC filter
18.5
134.5
72
52
38
37
8I0FS009.200-1
22.5
35
17.5
Chapter 5
Accessories
8I0FS016.200-1
85
107
93
4.5
180
8.5
7.5
38
121.5
134.5
195
22.5
393
35
17.5
8I0FS022.200-1
140
120
126
215
157
38
174.5
22.5
42
21
8I0FT015.200-1
93
85
107
180
38
394
121.5
134.5
22.5
4.5
50
25
8I0FT025.200-1
120
126
157
174.5
38
140
10
22.5
60
30
Chapter 5
Accessories
8I0FT047.200-1
180
130
140
30
5.5
285
305
10
210
224.5
26.5
395
60
30
8I0FT049.200-1
160
10
205
245
65
5.5
375
54
396
314.5
295
26.5
Accessories ACOPOSinverter P74 - Smoothing coils dimensions
2 ACOPOSinverter P74 - Smoothing coils dimensions

Product ID
Power loss
Inductance
Nominal current
Voltage drop
Protection class
Choke
Terminals
Max. relative humidity
8I0CS004.000-1
8I0CS007.000-1
8I0CS018.000-1
17 W
20 W
30 W
10 mH
5 mH
2 mH
4A
7A
18 A
From 3 to 5% of the nominal supply voltage, higher values result in torque loss
0 to 1000 m
IP00
IP20
95%, non-condensing
No dripping water
0 to 45C
Up to +55C 1)
3000 m 2)
Ambient temperature
Max. ambient temperature
Temperature
Storage
Weight
General information
-25 to 70C
0.63 kg
0.88 kg
1.99 kg
IEC 61800-5-1 (protection level 1 regarding overvoltages in the mains supply according to VDE 0160)
Table 16: 8I0CS004.000-1, 8I0CS007.000-1, 8I0CS018.000-1 - Technical data

With current reduction of 2% per C above 45C.
From 1000 to 3000 m, current reduced by 1% per 100 m
Product ID
Power loss
Inductance
Nominal current
Voltage drop
Saturation current
Protection class
Choke
Terminals
Max. relative humidity
Ambient temperature
Max. ambient temperature
Temperature
Storage
Weight
General information
8I0CT004.000-1
45 W
10 mH
4 A 1)
8I0CT010.000-1
8I0CT016.000-1
8I0CT030.000-1
65 W
75 W
4 mH
2 mH
10 A 1)
16 A 1)
From 3 to 5% of the nominal supply voltage, higher values result in torque loss
-
90 W
1 mH
30 A 1)
Chapter 5
Accessories
1)
2)
0 to 1000 m
IP00
IP20
IP10
95%, non-condensing
No dripping water
0 to 45C
Up to +55C 2)
3000 m 3)
-25 to 70C
1.5 kg
3.0 kg
3.5 kg
6.0 kg
IEC 61800-5-1 (protection level 1 regarding overvoltages in the mains supply according to VDE 0160)
Table 17: 8I0CT004.000-1, 8I0CT010.000-1, 8I0CT016.000-1, 8I0CT030.000-1 - Technical data

1)
2)
3)
Max. current = 1.65 x rated current for 60 seconds.

With current reduction of 2% per C above 45C.
From 1000 to 3000 m, current reduced by 1% per 100 m
397
2.1 Smoothing coils

8I0CS004.000-1
100
50
60
44
80
= 4x9
8I0CS007.000-1
100
50
60
60
95
= 4x9
8I0CS18.000-1
70
105
120
70
85
= 5x11
398
135
8I0CT004.000-1
8x
40
60
100
42
55
60
= 6x9
155
8I0CT010.000-1
8x
60
80.5
130
62
85
90
= 6x12
155
Chapter 5
Accessories
8I0CT016.000-1
8x
60
80.5
130
62
85
90
= 6x12
170
8I0CT030.000-1
8x
90
115
135
75
107
155
= 6x12
399
Accessories ACOPOSinverter P74 Brake resistors
3 ACOPOSinverter P74 Brake resistors

Product ID
Protection class of the housing
Ambient temperature
Temperature
Storage
Weight
Properties
Resistance value at 20C
Average available power at 50C
Thermal protection
Temperature controlled switch
Activation temperature
Max. voltage / Max. current
Min. voltage / Min. current
Max. contact resistance
Connection recommendation
8I0BR028.000-1
8I0BR060.000-1
8I0BR100.000-1
IP20
0 to 50C
-25 to 70C
3.5 kg
2.4 kg
2 kg
28
0.2 kW 1)
60
0.1 kW 1)
Using temperature-controlled switches or the inverter
100
0.05 kW 1)
120C
250 VAC / 1 A
24 VDC / 0.1 A
60 m
The switch should be connected within the sequence
(so it can be used for signaling or line contactor control)
Table 18: 8I0BR028.000-1, 8I0BR060.000-1, 8I0BR100.000-1 - Technical data

1)
400
Load factors for resistances: The value for the average power that can be transfered from the resistor to the housing at 50C is aligned to a brake load factor
that corresponds to most standard applications.
For 8I0BR100.000-1 to 8I0BR003.000-1:
- Braking for 2 s with a braking torque of 0.6 Tn for a 40 second cycle
- Braking for 0.8 s with a braking torque of 1.5 Tn for a 40 second cycle
For 8I0BR003.001-1 to 8I0BR001.004-1:
- Braking for 10 s with a braking torque of 2 Tn for a 30 second cycle
3.1 Dimensions of brake resistors

8I0BR028.000-1
140
120
375
393
4x
70
= 6x12
8I0BR060.000-1
95
70
Chapter 5
Accessories
95
375
293
4x
= 6x12
8I0BR100.000-1
95
95
275
293
4x
70
= 6x12
401
50
50
3.2 Recommendations for installation
100
100
100
50
50
100
402
Register description
Chapter 6 Register description

The complete description of register for the ACOPOSinverter P74 can be taken form the Excel file (attachment).
Chapter 6
Register description
Please follow the link to open the file "ACOPOSinverter P74 - Communication Parameters
403

B&R AUTOMATION - ACOPOS Inverter - P74 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

B&R AUTOMATION - ACOPOS Inverter - P74 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

ACOPOSinverter P74

Chapter 1 Installation Manual..................................................................................... 7

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

6.7.3 POWERLINK interface (X1 and X2).....................................................................................................55

Chapter 2 Programming Manual...............................................................................59

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Chapter 3 Common DC bus.................................................................................... 284

Chapter 4 Integrated safety functions................................................................... 320

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

1.1 Safety instructions.................................................................................................................................... 320

Chapter 5 Accessories............................................................................................ 390

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Chapter 6 Register description...............................................................................403

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Safety Information

Chapter 1 Installation Manual

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Introduction

240 V single phase

240 V single phase

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Before you begin

3 Before you begin

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Before you begin

25% of design voltage for 30 min

Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Steps for setting up

4 Steps for setting up

1. Delivery contents check

2. Line voltage compatibility check

3. Vertical installation of the drive

4. Wiring the drive

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Technical data

Weight (kg) (lb)

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Technical data

5.1.2 Size B - Dimensions and weights

Weight (kg) (lb)

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Technical data

Weight (kg) (lb)

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Technical data

5.1.4 Size C with EMC plate - Dimensions and weights

Weight (kg) (lb)

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Technical data

Weight (kg) (lb)

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Technical data

5.1.6 Size D with EMC plate - Dimensions and weights

Weight (kg) (lb)

5.2 Electrical data

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29

Installation Manual Technical data

1x 200 VAC -15% to 240 VAC +10%

No derating (up to 50C)

1%, per 100 m

Table 1: 8I74S200018.01P-1, 8I74S200037.01P-1, 8I74S200055.01P-1 - Technical data

ACOPOSinverter P74 User's Manual V 1.29